Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutPROJECT MANUAL - 04/14/2020 NOTICE FROM ISG, INC. TO ALL CONTRACTORS, SUBCONTRACTORS, AND SUPPLIERS FOR FIVE SULLIVAN BROTHERS CONVENTION CENTER EXHIBITION HALL CEILING RENOVATION FOR THE CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA TO BE PLACED ON THE PLAN HOLDERS LIST AND FOR ADDENDA NOTIFICATION YOU MUST REGISTER ON RAPIDSREPRO.COM/PLANROOM IF A CONTRACTOR, SUBCONTRACTOR, OR SUPPLIER DOES NOT HAVE COMPUTER ACCESS, PLEASE CALL RAPIDS REPRODUCTIONS, 1-800-383-1223,TO MAKE ALTERNATIVE ARRANGEMENTS TO RECEIVE ADDENDA. New Users To ISG Plan Room 1. Go to rapidsrepro.com/planroom on the Internet. 2. Click on the "ISG" logo. 3. To the left, is the login panel and within the panel is "Register for an account." 4. Find or create your company. 5. Create your user account 6. Verify you have received a confirmation email, and click the link provided to log in. 7. Any questions contact: 1-800-383-1223 or local 319-277-5538. PRE-BID CONFERENCE MONDAY, APRIL 20, 2020 AT 1:00 P.M. (LOCAL TIME) Due to the current Coronavirus situation the Pre-Bid Conference will be held by teleconference. To join teleconference, please call in using the following information: 1. Call-In #s: (507) 779-7435 (I&S Group) (608) 789-2037 (I&S Group) NOTE: Either phone number will get you into the same conference. 2. Conference ID#: 81583 At this time, contractors will have an opportunity to ask questions of the architect and engineer. Contractors will be allowed to come to the site on their own to tour it. NOTICE PRIME / GENERAL CONTRACTORS, SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS - PRIME / GENERAL CONTRACTORS: IF YOU CHOOSE NOT TO BID THIS PROJECT, YOU MUST: NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT NO LESS THAN 5 DAYS PRIOR TO THE BID LETTING THAT YOU ARE NOT BIDDING RETURN THE PLANS IMMEDIATELY OR DEPOSIT CHECKS WILL BE FORFEITED AND MBI CARDS COLLECTED ON SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS: AFTER THE BID LETTING: SUCCESSFUL BIDDERS MAY OBTAIN ADDITIONAL COPIES OF THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS FROM THE PRIME / GENERAL CONTRACTOR(S) PRIME / GENERAL CONTRACTORS, SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS: `r IF YOU ARE NOT AWARDED THE PROJECT: PLANS MUST BE RETURNED WITHIN 7 DAYS OF THE BID AWARD OR DEPOSIT CHECKS WILL BE CASHED SPECIFICATIONS FOR FIVE SULLIVAN BROTHERS CONVENTION CENTER EXHIBITION HALL CEILING RENOVATION FOR THE CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA I hereby certify that the portion of this technical submission described below was prepared by me or under my direct wootsow'n"tora supervision and responsible charge. I am a duly Licensed ..-- 0FEssioN1, S! NI Architect under the laws of the State of Iowa. wp p� s y t �- _— 04-14-2020 g Lai :`NATHANIEL ).`; COMPTON c 1 Nathaniel J. Compton, AIA Date 07016 License No.: 07016 Date Issued: 12-08-2014 /OWP My License Renewal Date is June 30, 2020 '" Sections covered by this seal: Division 00, 01, 03 - 14. I hereby certify that the portion of this technical submission described below was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and responsible charge. I am a duly Licensed , Engineer under the laws of the State of Iowa. �O' 04-14-2020 : JOHN P. u : TRICKEL rn J h P. Trickel, P.E. Date -' 17586 • License No.: 17586 License Issued: 07-13-2005 /O .. My License Renewal Date is December 31, 2020 ''�1�1lIIIIIIIIAl��A Sections covered by this seal: Division 00, 01, and 21 - 23. I hereby certify that the portion of this technical submission — described below was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and responsible charge. I am a duly Licensed Q�OF�SSIO,��l.,�' Engineer under the laws of the State of Iowa. . a 1� - ,,,W -04-14-2020 . MICHAEL D. _ Michael D. Nelson, P.E. Date W • NELSON ; z j. 20425 • r77 License No.: 20425 Date Issued: 04-21-2011 ••••••••• My License Renewal Date is December 31, 2020 I O W P `�.. Sections covered by this seal: Division 00, 01, 26 - 28. I hereby certify that the portion of this technical submission described below was prepared by me or under my direct gyp, supervision and responsible charge. I am a duly Licensed Engineer under the laws of the State of Iowa. 04-14-2020 J)ASON E„ J An E. Hoehn, P. . Date License No.: 16140 Date Issued: 03-27-2002 My License Renewal Date is December 31, 2021 Sections covered by this seal: _ Division 00, 01, 03 - 06. I TITLE SHEET 1 ALL BRANCH SPECIFICATIONS FOR: FIVE SULLIVAN BROTHERS CONVENTION CENTER EXHIBITION HALL CEILING RENOVATION FOR THE CITY OF WATERLOO,IOWA FOR: CITY OF WATERLOO,IOWA 715 MULBERRY STREET WATERLOO,IA 50703 PRE-BID CONFERENCE: MONDAY,APRIL 20,2020 AT 1:00 P.M. (LOCAL TIME) PRE-BID LOCATION DUE TO THE CURRENT CORONAVIRUS SITUATION THE PRE-BID CONFERENCE WILL BE HELD BY TELECONFERENCE. TO JOIN TELECONFERENCE,PLEASE CALL IN USING THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION: 1. CALL-IN#S: (507)779-7435(I&S GROUP) (608)789-2037(I&S GROUP) NOTE: EITHER PHONE NUMBER WILL GET YOU INTO THE SAME CONFERENCE. "1 2. CONFERENCE ID#: 81583 PRE-BID NOTE: CONTRACTORS WILL BE ALLOWED TO COME TO THE SITE ON THEIR OWN TO TOUR IT BIDS TO BE RECEIVED: THURSDAY,APRIL 30,2020 BID TIME: BEFORE 1:00:00 P.M.LOCAL TIME (IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CLOCK IN THE BID ROOM) "'1 BID LOCATION: SEE CITY OF WTERLOO MUNICIPAL BIDDING AND COVID-19 DOCUMENT WATERLOO CITY HALL HAROLD E. GETTY COUNCIL CHAMBERS-2ND FLOOR 715 MULBERRY ST. WATERLOO, IA 50703 BID OPENINGS WILL BE LIVESTREAMED ON YOUTUBE AND MADE AVAILABLE ON THE CITY WEBSITE ARCHITECT: ISG,INC. 314E4THST WATERLOO, IA 50703-4704 PHONE: (319)234-1515 PRINCIPAL ARCHITECT: NATHAN COMPTON,AIA, CDT DATE: APRIL 14, 2020 ti 1 1 INDEX FOR: FIVE SULLIVAN BROTHERS CONVENTION CENTER EXHIBITION HALL CEILING RENOVATION „11 FOR THE CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA COMMON SECTIONS SEAL TITLE SHEET INDEX NOTICE TO BIDDERS ADVERTISEMENT TO BID INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS "at SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS CITY OF WATERLOO MUNICIPAL BIDDING AND COVID-19 FORM OF PROPOSAL-GENERAL CONTRACT BIDDER STATUS FORM IOWA CONSTRUCTION SALES TAX EXEMPTION FORM—CITY OF WATERLOO GENERAL CONDITIONS SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS '11 Page No. DIVISION I-GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 011000- Summary 1/4 012100-Allowances 1/3 012500—Substitution Procedures 1/4 012600-Contract Modification Procedures 1/2 012900-Payment Procedures 1/5 013100-Project Management and Coordination 1/7 013200-Construction Progress Documentation 1/3 013300- Submittal Procedures-Paper/Electronic 1/9 014000-Quality Requirements 1/6 014200-References 1/8 015000—Temporary Facilities and Controls 1/8 016000-Product Requirements 1/6 Product Substitution Form 1/1 017300—Execution 1/9 017700-Closeout Procedures 1/6 017823 -Operation and Maintenance Data 1/7 017839-Project Record Documents 1/3 611 017900-Demonstration and Training 1/4 DIVISION VI—WOOD AND PLASTICS 061000—Rough Carpentry 1/9 DIVISION IX—FINISHES 092216—Non-structural Metal Framing 1/4 092900—Gypsum Board 1/8 095123—Acoustical Tile Ceilings 1/5 099123—Interior Painting 1/4 y1 1 MECHANICAL& ELECTRICAL DIVISION 23—HVAC 230010—Basic Mechanical HVAC Requirements 1/4 230130.51 —HVAC Air-Distribution System Cleaning 1/4 230593—Testing,Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC 1/6 230713—Duct Insulation 1/4 233100—HVAC Ducts and Casing 1/2 233300—Air Duct Accessories 1/2 237000—Air Outlets and Inlets 1/2 DIVISION 26—ELECTRICAL 260010—Basic Electrical Requirements 1/4 :. 260505—Selective Demolition for Electrical 1/2 260519—Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 1/8 260526—Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 1/4 260529—Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 1/4 260533.13—Conduit for Electrical Systems 1/8 260533.16—Boxes for Electrical Systems 1/6 260533.23—Surface Raceways for Electrical Systems 1/4 260553—Identification for Electrical Systems 1/6 260583—Wiring Connections 1/2 260923—Lighting Control Devices 1/8 260943—Lighting Control System 1/24 262200—Low-Voltage Transformers 1/6 262413—Switchboards 1/6 L 262416—Panelboards 1/4 262716—Cabinets and Enclosures 1/2 262726—Wiring Devices 1/6 262813—Fuses 1/2 r.. 262816.13—Enclosed Circuit Breakers 1/4 262816.16—Enclosed Switches 1/4 265100—Interior Lighting 1/6 DIVISION 27—COMMUNICATIONS 260010—Basic Electrical Requirements 1/4 1 I NOTICE TO BIDDERS '1, PROJECT: FIVE SULLIVAN BROTHERS CONVENTION CENTER i EXHIBITION HALL CEILING RENOVATION FOR THE CITY OF WATERLOO,IOWA 7 BID DATE/TIME: THURSDAY,APRIL 30,2020 before 1:00:00 P.M. LOCAL TIME (in accordance with the clock in bid room) LOCATION: SEE CITY OF WTERLOO MUNICIPAL BIDDING AND COVID-19 DOCUMENT 1 WATERLOO CITY HALL-HAROLD E. GETTY COUNCIL CHAMBERS—2ND FLOOR 715 MULBERRY ST. 1 WATERLOO,IA 50703 BID OPENINGS WILL BE LIVESTREAMED ON YOUTUBE AND MADE AVAILABLE .. ON THE CITY WEBSITE 1 Sealed proposals for the above project will be received, publicly opened and read aloud at the time and location stated above by the City Council of CITY OF WATERLOO,IOWA. 1 Copies of the plans and specifications and other contract documents will be on file and available for inspection at the above bidding location and sets for Contractors/Suppliers can be ordered through the office of Rapids Reproductions, by logging on to Rapidsrepro.com/planroom or calling 1-800-383-1223,upon the deposit of$150.00 1 7 which will be refunded to prime contractors who submit bids upon the return of the documents within seven(7)days i after the receipt of the bids. A single proposal will be received for the work of the General Contractor including the work of the Mechanical i Subcontractor(Plumbing,Heating,Air Conditioning and Ventilating)and the work of the Electrical Subcontractor. Subcontractors of all construction trades shall submit bids to the General Contractor covering the scope of work bid. Work of Project includes installing a new ceiling and lighting in the Exhibition Hall along with rework of the 11 existing ductwork and other Work indicated in the Contract Documents, located at the Five Sullivan Brothers Convention Center,200 West 4th Street,Waterloo,Iowa,commencing May 18,2020 and substantial completion by August 7,2020. 1 Award of the contract shall be to the lowest responsible bidder based on basis bid and selected alternates and in t conformance to the Bidding Documents prepared by ISG, Inc. A PRE-BID CONFERENCE for this project will be held on Monday, April 20,2020 at 1:00 p.m. Due to the current coronavirus situation the Pre-Bid conference will be held by Skype teleconference. Contractors will be allowed to come to the site on their own to tour it. Each proposal must be accompanied by a bid bond, cash deposit, Cashier's Check or a Certified Check on a solvent 1 Bank chartered under the laws of the United States in the amount of not less than 5%,nor more than 10%of the i proposal submitted therewith. t Bid Security shall be made payable to the Treasurer of CITY OF WATERLOO,IOWA. 7 Should the successful bidder fail or neglect to furnish a satisfactory surety bond, refuse to enter into contract on the t basis of the bid,or fail to meet the requirements of this Notice and the specifications regulating the award,the bidder's security may be retained as liquidated damages. No bidder may withdraw the proposal for a period of thirty "{ calendar(30)days after the date and hour set for opening of bids. The work under the Contract shall be commenced 6 immediately after execution of the Owner-Contractor Agreement and substantially completed by a mutually agreed upon date, all as set forth in contractual documents. I By virtue of statutory authority,the Contractor shall give preference to Iowa Domestic Labor,products and provisions grown, and coal produced within the State of Iowa, according to the provisions of Chapter 73,Code of 1 Iowa 2016. 1 7 The right to reject any or all bids and to waive any irregularities therein is reserved by CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA. DATED AT: WATERLOO,IOWA,this 13th day of April 2020. BY ORDER OF: CITY OF WATERLOO,IOWA BY: KELLEY FELCHLE, CITY CLERK ADVERTISEMENT TO BID PROJECT: FIVE SULLIVAN BROTHERS CONVENTION CENTER EXHIBITION HALL CEILING RENOVATION FOR THE CITY OF WATERLOO,IOWA BID DATE: THURSDAY,APRIL 30,2020 BEFORE 1:00:00 P.M.LOCAL TIME (IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CLOCK IN THE BID ROOM) CONTRACTS: SINGLE GENERAL CONTRACTOR (to include MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL as subcontractors) PROJECT COST ESTIMATE: LESS THAN$850,000 PLAN DEPOSIT: $150.00 BID SECURITY: 5% ARCHITECT: MECHANCIAL ENGINEER ELECT& STRUCT. ENG. ISG, INC. ISG,INC. ISG,INC. 314 EAST 4TH ST. 1300 WALNUT ST., STE 101 115 EAST HICKORY ST. WATERLOO,IA 50703 DES MOINES, IA 50309 SUITE 300 Ph: 319-234-1515 Ph: 515-243-9143 MANKATO,MN 56001 Ph: 507-387-6651 PRE-BID CONFERENCE: MONDAY, APRIL 20,2020 AT 1:00 P.M. (Local Time) DUE TO THE CURRENT CORONAVIRUS SITUATION THE PRE-BID CONFERENCE WILL BE HELD BY TELECONFERENCE. TO JOIN TELECONFERENCE,PLEASE CALL IN USING THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION: 1. CALL-IN#S: (507)779-7435(I&S GROUP) (608)789-2037(I&S GROUP) NOTE: EITHER PHONE NUMBER WILL GET YOU INTO THE SAME CONFERENCE. 2. CONFERENCE ID#: 81583 '4 NOTE CONTRACTORS WILL BE ALLOWED TO COME TO THE SITE ON THEIR OWN TO TOUR IT. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION DATE: AUGUST 7,2020 TOTAL SQUARE FEET: 18,990 SQ. FT. DESCRIPTION OF PROJECT: Work consists of installing a new ceiling renovation and lighting in the Exhibition Hall along with rework of the existing ductwork and other Work indicated in the Contract Documents. Log on to RAPIDSREPRO.COM/PLANROOM, click on the "ISG" logo or call 1-800-383-1223 (toll free) for: PLANS& SPECIFICATIONS • ADDENDA NOTIFICATION • PLAN HOLDERS LIST • PRIME BIDDERS LIST NOTE: To be placed on the PLAN HOLDERS LIST and/or PRIME BIDDER'S LIST for this project, you MUST either download a set of plans/specs off of ISG plan room on Rapidsrepro.com/planroom OR order a paper set through Rapids Reproductions, Inc. DISTRIBUTION OF DOCUMENTS Bidding documents may be obtained from Rapids Reproductions,Inc.,6201 Chancellor Dr.,Cedar Falls, IA Aux 50613; 1-800-383-1223 under the following conditions: 1. Qualified plan houses receive all-branch sets free of charge,provided they log all usage of the documents and return to us within 14 days after bidding. A list of those having plans is found in the "Supplementary Instructions to Bidders",paragraph 3.1.6. of the specifications. 2. Prime bidders may receive plans on deposit of$150.00 which is refundable only if they bid and/or return the plans within seven(7)days of contract award or if they notify the architect no less than 5 days prior to the day of the letting that they are not going to bid the project and return the plans immediately. Master Builders cards will also be honored. (Note: General Contractors(limit 2 sets each),Mechanical and Electrical contractors(limit I set each). 3. Subcontractors and suppliers may view plans and specifications on Rapidsrepro.com/planroom or at any of the listed plan holders under 3.1.6 Plans On File. You may receive"loaner sets"of plans and specifications after ... receipt of the required deposits stated above if some are available(Limit 1 set each). (Note: If applicable, plans must be returned within 14 days of bid award. Master Builders cards will also be honored. 4. No plans will be issued after one week prior to bidding date. r INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ,.� "Instructions to Bidders" shall be AIA Document A701,2018,by the American Institute of Architects is hereby made to govern and accompany the drawings, specifications and the following Supplementary Instructions to Bidders. However,the Supplementary Instructions to Bidders shall take precedence over and modify any statements of the AIA forms. Although AIA Document A701,2018 is not bound in these specifications,the document is considered inclusive by reference and as modified by the Supplementary Instructions to Bidders hereafter. A copy of the Instructions to Bidders is available for purchase at the Architects office or through AIA Iowa. i I 1 1 A7OITM .� F Document 2018 Instructions to Bidders for the following Project: (Name, location, and detailed description) ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS: The author of this document has added information needed for its completion.The author may also have revised the text of the original THE OWNER: AIA standard form.An Additions and (Name, legal status, address, and other information) Deletions Report that notes added information as well as revisions to the standard form text is available from the author and should be reviewed.A vertical line in the left margin of this document indicates where the author has added THE ARCHITECT: necessary information and where (Name, legal status, address, and other information) the author has added to or deleted from the original AIA text. This document has important legal consequences.Consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its completion or modification. FEDERAL,STATE,AND LOCAL TABLE OF ARTICLES LAWS MAY IMPOSE REQUIREMENTS ON PUBLIC PROCUREMENT CONTRACTS. 1 DEFINITIONS CONSULT LOCAL AUTHORITIES OR AN ATTORNEY TO VERIFY 2 BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO THIS PROCUREMENT BEFORE 3 BIDDING DOCUMENTS COMPLETING THIS FORM. 4 BIDDING PROCEDURES It is intended that AIA Document G612T*'-2017,Owner's Instructions 5 CONSIDERATION OF BIDS to the Architect,Parts A and B will be completed prior to using this 6 POST-BID INFORMATION document. 7 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND 8 ENUMERATION OF THE PROPOSED CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AIA Document A701 TM 2018 Copyright©1970,1974,1978,1987, 1997 and 2018 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.W? ilN x Oocuolant,_.. s.cat r. d lay.a_S,Copyrirpn Law and,r._.a 101 _.Trea_as Uoaaanorizad reproduct,on or oistTib bon °anis NA, naaan.. , j or any n.. iaan c, maa afnnai, on.tor din dna and nanraran, §a, ,�u�ono aaa an, , ..sec, ad,a an maxaanon u 0v. «.F a,Aot_This document was produced by AIA software at 11:59:14 ET on 04/24/2019 under Order No.1875935897 which expires on 07/13/2019,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA65) ARTICLE 1 DEFINITIONS §1.1 Bidding Documents include the Bidding Requirements and the Proposed Contract Documents. The Bidding Requirements consist of the advertisement or invitation to bid,Instructions to Bidders,supplementary instructions to bidders,the bid form, and any other bidding forms.The Proposed Contract Documents consist of the unexecuted form of Agreement between the Owner and Contractor and that Agreement's Exhibits,Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions),Drawings, Specifications,all Addenda,and all other documents enumerated in Article 8 of these Instructions. §1.2 Definitions set forth in the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction,or in other Proposed Contract Documents apply to the Bidding Documents. §1.3 Addenda are written or graphic instruments issued by the Architect,which,by additions,deletions, clarifications,or corrections,modify or interpret the Bidding Documents. §1.4 A Bid is a complete and properly executed proposal to do the Work for the sums stipulated therein,submitted in accordance with the Bidding Documents. §1.5 The Base Bid is the sum stated in the Bid for which the Bidder offers to perform the Work described in the Bidding Documents,to which Work may be added or deleted by sums stated in Alternate Bids. §1.6 An Alternate Bid(or Alternate)is an amount stated in the Bid to be added to or deducted from,or that does not change,the Base Bid if the corresponding change in the Work,as described in the Bidding Documents, is accepted. §1.7 A Unit Price is an amount stated in the Bid as a price per unit of measurement for materials, equipment,or services,or a portion of the Work,as described in the Bidding Documents. §1.8 A Bidder is a person or entity who submits a Bid and who meets the requirements set forth in the Bidding Documents. §1.9 A Sub-bidder is a person or entity who submits a bid to a Bidder for materials,equipment,or labor for a portion of the Work. ARTICLE 2 BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS _ §2.1 By submitting a Bid,the Bidder represents that: .1 the Bidder has read and understands the Bidding Documents; .2 the Bidder understands how the Bidding Documents relate to other portions of the Project,if any, being bid concurrently or presently under construction; .3 the Bid complies with the Bidding Documents; .4 the Bidder has visited the site,become familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed,and has correlated the Bidder's observations with the requirements of the Proposed Contract Documents; .5 the Bid is based upon the materials,equipment,and systems required by the Bidding Documents without exception; and .6 the Bidder has read and understands the provisions for liquidated damages,if any, set forth in the form of Agreement between the Owner and Contractor. ARTICLE 3 BIDDING DOCUMENTS §3.1 Distribution §3.1.1 Bidders shall obtain complete Bidding Documents,as indicated below,from the issuing office designated in the advertisement or invitation to bid, for the deposit sum,if any,stated therein. (Indicate how, such as by email, website, host site/platform,paper copy, or other method Bidders shall obtain Bidding Documents.) MA Document A701 TM 2018.Copyright©1970,1974,1978,1987,1997 and 2018 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved. to NUSG: This IPA' Dimurpont is protected y UPS'. ppeight d xa and hitsrauffiffnai Trashes,Unauthorised ep o c'ru>. Piet-Phu-tins of eiiis MAP Document, 2 pep pentien es else poem is.,pump cie: pp pi.c;ime-us penaities,end ....i be-prosecuted to t ae maximum f'eni pioseibie punier the iaw,This document was produced by AIA software at 11:59:14 ET on 04/24/2019 under Order No.1875935897 which expires on 07/13/2019,and is not for resale. User Notes: (309ADA65) §3.1.2 Any required deposit shall be refunded to Bidders who submit a bona fide Bid and return the paper Bidding Documents in good condition within ten days after receipt of Bids.The cost to replace missing or damaged paper documents will be deducted from the deposit.A Bidder receiving a Contract award may retain the paper Bidding Documents,and the Bidder's deposit will be refunded. §3.1.3 Bidding Documents will not be issued directly to Sub-bidders unless specifically offered in the advertisement or invitation to bid,or in supplementary instructions to bidders. §3.1.4 Bidders shall use complete Bidding Documents in preparing Bids.Neither the Owner nor Architect assumes responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete Bidding Documents. §3.1.5 The Bidding Documents will be available for the sole purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work.No license or grant of use is conferred by distribution of the Bidding Documents. §3.2 Modification or Interpretation of Bidding Documents §3.2.1 The Bidder shall carefully study the Bidding Documents,shall examine the site and local conditions,and shall notify the Architect of errors,inconsistencies,or ambiguities discovered and request clarification or interpretation pursuant to Section 3.2.2. §3.2.2 Requests for clarification or interpretation of the Bidding Documents shall be submitted by the Bidder in writing and shall be received by the Architect at least seven days prior to the date for receipt of Bids. (Indicate how,such as by email, website, host site/platform,paper copy, or other method Bidders shall submit requests for clarification and interpretation.) §3.2.3 Modifications and interpretations of the Bidding Documents shall be made by Addendum.Modifications and interpretations of the Bidding Documents made in any other manner shall not be binding,and Bidders shall not rely upon them. §3.3 Substitutions §3.3.1 The materials,products,and equipment described in the Bidding Documents establish a standard of required function,dimension,appearance,and quality to be met by any proposed substitution. §3.3.2 Substitution Process §3.3.2.1 Written requests for substitutions shall be received by the Architect at least ten days prior to the date for receipt of Bids.Requests shall be submitted in the same manner as that established for submitting clarifications and interpretations in Section 3.2.2. §3.3.2.2 Bidders shall submit substitution requests on a Substitution Request Form if one is provided in the Bidding Documents. §3.3.2.3 If a Substitution Request Form is not provided,requests shall include(1)the name of the material or equipment specified in the Bidding Documents;(2)the reason for the requested substitution; (3)a complete description of the proposed substitution including the name of the material or equipment proposed as the substitute, performance and test data,and relevant drawings;and(4)any other information necessary for an evaluation.The request shall include a statement setting forth changes in other materials,equipment, or other portions of the Work, including changes in the work of other contracts or the impact on any Project Certifications(such as LEED),that will result from incorporation of the proposed substitution. §3.3.3 The burden of proof of the merit of the proposed substitution is upon the proposer.The Architect's decision of approval or disapproval of a proposed substitution shall be final. §3.3.4 If the Architect approves a proposed substitution prior to receipt of Bids,such approval shall be set forth in an Addendum.Approvals made in any other manner shall not be binding,and Bidders shall not rely upon them. AIA Document A701''—2018.Copyright©1970,1974,1978,1987,1997 and 2018 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING: Document.t. a ol c ed by U.S,y apyright Law and theemeflemd Trx as a., Demetheciaen mproducleenc da utacr f this A€Aa Document, of any port on oft may rca r/t in save:_ c.r,i and criminal . ';r ,and wilt be emadiavaddaya to the maximum dem nt pnaimibia under V e lea.This document was produced by AIA software at 11:59:14 ET on 04/24/2019 under Order No 1875935897 which expires on 07/13/2019,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3(39ADA65) §3.3.5 No substitutions will be considered after the Contract award unless specifically provided for in the Contract — Documents. §3.4 Addenda §3.4.1 Addenda will be transmitted to Bidders known by the issuing office to have received complete Bidding — Documents. (Indicate how,such as by email, website, host site/platform,paper copy, or other method Addenda will be transmitted.) §3.4.2 Addenda will be available where Bidding Documents are on file. §3.4.3 Addenda will be issued no later than four days prior to the date for receipt of Bids,except an Addendum withdrawing the request for Bids or one which includes postponement of the date for receipt of Bids. §3.4.4 Prior to submitting a Bid,each Bidder shall ascertain that the Bidder has received all Addenda issued, and the Bidder shall acknowledge their receipt in the Bid. ARTICLE 4 BIDDING PROCEDURES §4.1 Preparation of Bids §4.1.1 Bids shall be submitted on the forms included with or identified in the Bidding Documents. §4.1.2 All blanks on the bid form shall be legibly executed.Paper bid forms shall be executed in a non-erasable medium. §4.1.3 Sums shall be expressed in both words and numbers, unless noted otherwise on the bid form.In case of discrepancy,the amount entered in words shall govern. §4.1.4 Edits to entries made on paper bid forms must be initialed by the signer of the Bid. — §4.1.5 All requested Alternates shall be bid.If no change in the Base Bid is required,enter"No Change"or as required by the bid form. §4.1.6 Where two or more Bids for designated portions of the Work have been requested,the Bidder may,without forfeiture of the bid security, state the Bidder's refusal to accept award of less than the combination of Bids stipulated by the Bidder. The Bidder shall neither make additional stipulations on the bid form nor qualify the Bid in any other manner. §4.1.7 Each copy of the Bid shall state the legal name and legal status of the Bidder. As part of the documentation submitted with the Bid,the Bidder shall provide evidence of its legal authority to perform the Work in the _ jurisdiction where the Project is located.Each copy of the Bid shall be signed by the person or persons legally authorized to bind the Bidder to a contract. A Bid by a corporation shall further name the state of incorporation and have the corporate seal affixed.A Bid submitted by an agent shall have a current power of attorney attached, certifying the agent's authority to bind the Bidder. §4.1.8 A Bidder shall incur all costs associated with the preparation of its Bid. §4.2 Bid Security — §4.2.1 Each Bid shall be accompanied by the following bid security: (Insert the form and amount of bid security.) §4.2.2 The Bidder pledges to enter into a Contract with the Owner on the terms stated in the Bid and shall, if required, furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the Contract and payment of all obligations arising thereunder. Should the Bidder refuse to enter into such Contract or fail to furnish such bonds if required,the amount AIA Document A701 TM—2018.Copyright©1970,1974,1978,1987,1997 and 2018 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WA r- i'/G: This Airoi g esa s.t is prows:tee ie r;obyripht Law end ater'ncticccl Treaties.Unauthorized rep redo"doa, >r diersibinich of this nib,' Document, 4 — corZic, h mew ree int ie,iniriro H, end cr€r aei horie n'as,and wiii be prosecuted to the maximum extent poreibie wirier iabi_This document was produced by AlA software at 11:59:14 ET on 04/24/2019 under Order No.1875935897 which expires on 07/13/2019,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA65) of the bid security shall be forfeited to the Owner as liquidated damages,not as a penalty.In the event the Owner fails to comply with Section 6.2,the amount of the bid security shall not be forfeited to the Owner. f §4.2.3 If a surety bond is required as bid security,it shall be written on AIA Document A310TM,Bid Bond,unless otherwise provided in the Bidding Documents.The attorney-in-fact who executes the bond on behalf of the surety shall affix to the bond a certified and current copy of an acceptable power of attorney.The Bidder shall provide surety bonds from a company or companies lawfully authorized to issue surety bonds in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. §4.2.4 The Owner will have the right to retain the bid security of Bidders to whom an award is being considered until(a)the Contract has been executed and bonds,if required,have been furnished;(b)the specified time has elapsed so that Bids may be withdrawn;or(c)all Bids have been rejected.However,if no Contract has been awarded or a Bidder has not been notified of the acceptance of its Bid,a Bidder may,beginning days after the opening of Bids,withdraw its Bid and request the return of its bid security. §4.3 Submission of Bids §4.3.1 A Bidder shall submit its Bid as indicated below: (Indicate how,such as by website, host site/platform,paper copy, or other method Bidders shall submit their Bid.) '1 §4.3.2 Paper copies of the Bid,the bid security,and any other documents required to be submitted with the Bid shall be enclosed in a sealed opaque envelope.The envelope shall be addressed to the party receiving the Bids and shall be identified with the Project name,the Bidder's name and address,and,if applicable,the designated portion of the "T Work for which the Bid is submitted.If the Bid is sent by mail,the sealed envelope shall be enclosed in a separate mailing envelope with the notation"SEALED BID ENCLOSED"on the face thereof. §4.3.3 Bids shall be submitted by the date and time and at the place indicated in the invitation to bid.Bids submitted after the date and time for receipt of Bids,or at an incorrect place,will not be accepted. §4.3.4 The Bidder shall assume full responsibility for timely delivery at the location designated for receipt of Bids. §4.3.5 A Bid submitted by any method other than as provided in this Section 4.3 will not be accepted. §4.4 Modification or Withdrawal of Bid §4.4.1 Prior to the date and time designated for receipt of Bids,a Bidder may submit a new Bid to replace a Bid previously submitted,or withdraw its Bid entirely,by notice to the party designated to receive the Bids. Such notice shall be received and duly recorded by the receiving party on or before the date and time set for receipt of Bids.The receiving party shall verify that replaced or withdrawn Bids are removed from the other submitted Bids and not considered.Notice of submission of a replacement Bid or withdrawal of a Bid shall be worded so as not to reveal the amount of the original Bid. §4.4.2 Withdrawn Bids may be resubmitted up to the date and time designated for the receipt of Bids in the same format as that established in Section 4.3,provided they fully conform with these Instructions to Bidders.Bid security shall be in an amount sufficient for the Bid as resubmitted. §4.4.3 After the date and time designated for receipt of Bids,a Bidder who discovers that it made a clerical error in its Bid shall notify the Architect of such error within two days,or pursuant to a timeframe specified by the law of the jurisdiction where the Project is located,requesting withdrawal of its Bid.Upon providing evidence of such error to the reasonable satisfaction of the Architect,the Bid shall be withdrawn and not resubmitted.If a Bid is withdrawn pursuant to this Section 4.4.3,the bid security will be attended to as follows: (State the terms and conditions,such as Bid rank,for returning or retaining the bid security.) AIA Document A701 TM—2018.Copyright©1970,1974,1978,1987,1997 and 2018 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING: Ths AIA" Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treatiies.Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, 5 or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to Ma maximum extent possible under the iaw,This document was produced by AIA software at 11:59:14 ET on 04/24/2019 under Order No.1875935897 which expires on 07/13/2019,and is not for resale, User Notes: (3B9ADA65) ARTICLE 5 CONSIDERATION OF BIDS §5.1 Opening of Bids If stipulated in an advertisement or invitation to bid, or when otherwise required by law,Bids properly identified and received within the specified time limits will be publicly opened and read aloud.A summary of the Bids may be made available to Bidders. — §5.2 Rejection of Bids Unless otherwise prohibited by law,the Owner shall have the right to reject any or all Bids. — §5.3 Acceptance of Bid(Award) §5.3.1 It is the intent of the Owner to award a Contract to the lowest responsive and responsible Bidder,provided the Bid has been submitted in accordance with the requirements of the Bidding Documents.Unless otherwise prohibited by law,the Owner shall have the right to waive informalities and irregularities in a Bid received and to accept the Bid which,in the Owner's judgment,is in the Owner's best interests. §5.3.2 Unless otherwise prohibited by law,the Owner shall have the right to accept Alternates in any order or — combination,unless otherwise specifically provided in the Bidding Documents,and to determine the lowest responsive and responsible Bidder on the basis of the sum of the Base Bid and Alternates accepted. ARTICLE 6 POST-BiD INFORMATION §6.1 Contractor's Qualification Statement Bidders to whom award of a Contract is under consideration shall submit to the Architect,upon request and within the timeframe specified by the Architect,a properly executed ALA Document A305TM,Contractor's Qualification Statement,unless such a Statement has been previously required and submitted for this Bid. §6.2 Owner's Financial Capability A Bidder to whom award of a Contract is under consideration may request in writing,fourteen days prior to the expiration of the time for withdrawal of Bids,that the Owner furnish to the Bidder reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract.The Owner shall then furnish such reasonable evidence to the Bidder no later than seven days prior to the expiration of the time for withdrawal of — Bids.Unless such reasonable evidence is furnished within the allotted time,the Bidder will not be required to execute the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor. §6.3 Submittals — §6.3.1 After notification of selection for the award of the Contract,the Bidder shall, as soon as practicable or as stipulated in the Bidding Documents, submit in writing to the Owner through the Architect: .1 a designation of the Work to be performed with the Bidder's own forces; .2 names of the principal products and systems proposed for the Work and the manufacturers and suppliers of each;and .3 names of persons or entities(including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design)proposed for the principal portions of the Work. §6,3.2 The Bidder will be required to establish to the satisfaction of the Architect and Owner the reliability and responsibility of the persons or entities proposed to furnish and perform the Work described in the Bidding Documents. — §6.3.3 Prior to the execution of the Contract,the Architect will notify the Bidder if either the Owner or Architect, after due investigation,has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Bidder.If the Owner or _ Architect has reasonable objection to a proposed person or entity,the Bidder may,at the Bidder's option,withdraw the Bid or submit an acceptable substitute person or entity.The Bidder may also submit any required adjustment in the Base Bid or Alternate Bid to account for the difference in cost occasioned by such substitution.The Owner may accept the adjusted bid price or disqualify the Bidder.In the event of either withdrawal or disqualification,bid — security will not be forfeited. §6.3.4 Persons and entities proposed by the Bidder and to whom the Owner and Architect have made no reasonable objection must be used on the Work for which they were proposed and shall not be changed except with the written consent of the Owner and Architect. AIA Document A701"'—2018.Copyright©1970,1974,1978,1987,1997 and 2018 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved. A NiNG: T hitt AiPat Document is protected by U S Gopyrittiand international Treaties Unauthorized reproditatation rastributiort of this rartst,rattrat6 — rs,:;ant,atriatarto may,esartt in waterT deli ,, ,_ , „.. _ . si ,.< < , ter,:., e, .<.. ��. law.This document was produced by AIA software at 11:59:14 ET on 04/24/2019 under Order No.1875935897 which expires on 07/13/2019,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA65) ARTICLE 7 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND §71 Bond Requirements §7.1.1 If stipulated in the Bidding Documents,the Bidder shall furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the Contract and payment of all obligations arising thereunder. §7.1.2 If the furnishing of such bonds is stipulated in the Bidding Documents,the cost shall be included in the Bid. If the furnishing of such bonds is required after receipt of bids and before execution of the Contract,the cost of such bonds shall be added to the Bid in determining the Contract Sum. §7.1.3 The Bidder shall provide surety bonds from a company or companies lawfully authorized to issue surety bonds in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. §7.1.4 Unless otherwise indicated below,the Penal Sum of the Payment and Performance Bonds shall be the amount of the Contract Sum. (If Payment or Performance Bonds are to be in an amount other than 100%of the Contract Sum, indicate the dollar amount or percentage of the Contract Sum.) §7.2 Time of Delivery and Form of Bonds §7.2.1 The Bidder shall deliver the required bonds to the Owner not later than three days following the date of execution of the Contract.If the Work is to commence sooner in response to a letter of intent,the Bidder shall,prior to commencement of the Work,submit evidence satisfactory to the Owner that such bonds will be furnished and delivered in accordance with this Section 7.2.1. §7.2.2 Unless otherwise provided,the bonds shall be written on AIA Document A312,Performance Bond and Payment Bond. §7.2.3 The bonds shall be dated on or after the date of the Contract. ..� §7.2.4 The Bidder shall require the attorney-in-fact who executes the required bonds on behalf of the surety to affix to the bond a certified and current copy of the power of attorney. ARTICLE 8 ENUMERATION OF THE PROPOSED CONTRACT DOCUMENTS §8.1 Copies of the proposed Contract Documents have been made available to the Bidder and consist of the following documents: .1 AIA Document A101TM-2017, Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor,unless otherwise stated below. (Insert the complete AIA Document number, including year, and Document title.) .2 AIA Document A101TM-2017,Exhibit A,Insurance and Bonds, unless otherwise stated below. (Insert the complete AIA Document number, including year, and Document title.) .3 AIA Document A201Tm-2017, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction,unless otherwise stated below. (Insert the complete AIA Document number, including year, and Document title.) .4 AIA Document E203TM-2013,Building Information Modeling and Digital Data Exhibit,dated as indicated below: (Insert the date of the E203-2013.) AIA Document A701 TM'—2018.Copyright©1970,1974,1978,1987,1997 and 2018 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARN€sN 7" NA" r ,a r .a andg ,, or dif,itnbminct t€, AAA', f ccm 7 €n,., : ,nfs,xr the,.:y=z,.This document was produced by AIA software at 11:59:14 ET on 04/24/2019 under Order No.1875935897 which expires on 07/13/2019,and is not for resale. "` user Notes: (3B9ADA65) .5 Drawings Number Title Date .6 Specifications Section Title Date Pages 7 Addenda: Number Date Pages .8 Other Exhibits: _ (Check all boxes that apply and include appropriate information identifying the exhibit where required.) [ [ AIA Document E204T14-2017,Sustainable Projects Exhibit,dated as indicated below: (Insert the date of the E204-2017.) [ The Sustainability Plan: Title Date Pages -- [ ] Supplementary and other Conditions of the Contract: Document Title Date Pages .9 Other documents listed below: (List here any additional documents that are intended to form part of the Proposed Contract Documents.) AIA Document A701 T"—2018.Copyright©1970,1974,1978,1987,1997 and 2018 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.W>ARh I H:;GThis : r r Documentprotecte.dCoprIght Law and e _ ti sn 'Treaties.UnesSttorized rer>rshunt€s n distrtMion of this AMM Document, or any d<,;,:.<. , it,.,may reaeit'<_,sere on/il and„r.rnmei persdfiem and wiS be prosecuted to the men/mum mdeM n. ibie under._.c la* This document was produced by AIA software at 11:59:14 ET on 04/24/2019 under Order No.1875935897 which expires on 07/13/2019,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA65) SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS SCOPE Jim The following Supplementary Instructions to Bidders shall be intended to modify and expand the referenced Instructions to Bidders and they shall take precedence over any statements of the AIA Document A701,2018 forms. The article and paragraph of the AIA Document which the supplementary statement refers to is so noted. Where any part of the AIA,A701, Instructions to Bidders is modified,the unaltered provisions of that part shall remain in effect. ARTICLE 3 BIDDING DOCUMENTS jral 3.1.5. LIST OF DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS DRAWINGS All drawings are all branch sets. GENERAL 3G1-10 TITLE SHEET, SHEET INDEX,PROJECT GENERAL NOTES ARCHITECTURAL 3A1-11 CEILING DEMOLTION PLAN 3A1-31 REFLECTIVE CEILING PLAN 3A1-32 CEILING DETAILS MECHANICAL 3M1-11 EXHIBIT HALL DIFFUSER DEMO PLAN 3M1-12 EXHIBIT HALL HVAC DEMO PLAN 3M2-11 EXHIBIT HALL HVAC PLAN 3M2-12 EXHIBIT HALL MECHANICAL CEILING PLAN 3M3-11 MECHANICAL SECTIONS AND DETAILS 3M5-11 HVAC SCHEDULES ( ELECTRICAL 3E1-01 ELECTRICAL DEMO PLAN 3E2-11 FIRST FLOOR POWER PLAN 3E2-12 SECOND FLOOR EXHIBIT HALL POWER PLAN 3E2-21 FIRST FLOOR LIGHTING PLAN EXHIBIT HALL 3E4-11 ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS AND ONE LINE ELECTRICAL RISER 3E5-21 PANELBOARD&LIGHTING SCHEDULES SPECIFICATIONS Common Sections(including Division I),plus Divisions VI and IX. Mechanical/Electrical Divisions 23,26 and 27. All bidders will receive the following specification headings in addition to the specific heading listed below. SEAL TITLE SHEET INDEX NOTICE TO BIDDERS ADVERTISEMENT TO BID INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS CITY OF WATERLOO MUNICIPAL BIDDING AND COVID-19 FORM OF PROPOSAL-GENERAL CONTRACT BIDDER STATUS FORM IOWA CONSTRUCTION SALES TAX EXEMPTION FORM—CITY OF WATERLOO 4.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS ( SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS ++� PROJECT#19-23188 S.T.B. Page 1 3.1.6. PLANS ON FILE Owner City of Waterloo,Iowa 715 Mulberry Street Waterloo,IA 50703 Ph: 319-291-4323 Architect •• ISG, Inc. 314 East 4th Street Waterloo,IA 50703-4704 Ph: 319-234-1515 ... Mechanical Engineer ISG,Inc. 1300 Walnut Street, Suite 101 Des Moines, IA 50309 Ph: 515-243-9143 Electrical Engineer ISG, Inc. 15 East Hickory Street, Suite 300 Mankato,MN 56001 Ph: 507-387-6651 Structural Engineer .� ISG,Inc. 15 East Hickory Street, Suite 300 Mankato,MN 56001 ... Ph: 507-387-6651 Waterloo Bldg.Dept. City Hall 715 Mulberry Waterloo, IA 50703 Ph: 319-291-4319 PROJECT#19-23188 S.I.B. Page 2 1 PLAN ROOMS Construction Update Plan Room 221 Park Street PO Box 695 (50303) Des Moines, IA 50309 Ph: 515-288-8904; 800-362-2578 Fax: 515-288-2617 McGraw Hill Construction Update(Dodge) 2507 Ingersoll Avenue Des Moines IA 50312 Ph: 515-223-1046 Fax: 515-223-8564 McGraw Hill Construction Update(Dodge) 3872 Elmore Ave. Davenport,IA 52807 Ph: 563-355-1250 Fax: 563-355-1283 I 1 i 1 I I 1 PROJECT#19-23188 S.I.B. Page 3 1,. 3.2.4. INTERPRETATION OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS In the event that any questions shall arise after the letting of the contract respecting the true meaning of the drawings and specifications,the matter shall be referred to the Architect,whose decision shall be conclusive upon all parties to the contract. No advantage shall be taken of any manifest errors or omissions which affect the submitted bid. 3.3.3. APPROVAL OF SUBSTITUTIONS Approval to bid any material other than the specified products and any listed pre-approved substitutions must be requested by the supplier in accordance with Division I-016000. If approved,the Architect will submit an approval letter. The requesting letter must be received by the Architect no less than 5 business days prior to the bid date. A copy of the approval letter shall accompany the proposal of such material to the Contractor. Any materials not so approved will not be permitted on the project. This also applies to Subcontractors which must be approved prior to the bidding when so specified. 3.4.1. ADDENDA Add the following: All contractors are required to register on Rapidsrepro.com/planroom for this project. Addenda will be distributed through that source. If any contractor does not have the ability to register on the internet for Rapidsrepro.com/planroom,they are required to contact Rapids Reproductions' office at 1-800-383-1223 to make other arrangements to receive addenda.Bidders must acknowledge receipt of any/all addenda on their Form of Proposal form. ARTICLE 4 BIDDING PROCEDURES 4.1.1. FORM AND STYLE OF BIDS The bidder may remove the proposal bound in these specifications. A new Form of Proposal will be forwarded with addendum for the prime bidder's use if changes have been made to the Form. 4.2. BID SECURITY 4.2.1. Modify subparagraph 4.2.1. as follows: Bid Security will be required as stipulated in the Advertisement to Bid, and if bid bond is used shall be as specified in Instructions to Bidders A701,4.2.2. Bid security shall be submitted in a separate envelope than the proposal form under the letterhead of the Contractor. The envelope shall have typed on its face the following identification: Bid Security for the FIVE SULLIVAN BROTHERS CONVENTION CENTER EXHIBITION - HALL CEILING RENOVATION FOR THE CITY OF WATERLOO,IOWA. 4.3. SUBMISSION OF BIDS 4.3.1. IDENTIFICATION OF PROPOSAL Proposal shall be submitted in a single envelope under the letterhead of the Contractor. The envelope shall have typed on its face the following identification: Proposal for the FIVE SULLIVAN BROTHERS CONVENTION CENTER EXHIBITION HALL CEILING RENOVATION FOR THE CITY OF WATERLOO,IOWA. If mailed,the outside envelope must be addressed to KELLEY FELCHLE,CITY CLERK. 4.3.2. SUBMISSION OF BIDS Bids shall be mailed or delivered to the Waterloo City Clerk's Office on the Form of Proposal(or copy)so as to reach their destination prior to the time set for bidding in the Advertisement to Bid. All bids will be time and date stamped upon receipt. PROJECT#19-23188 S.I.B. Page 4 Abt1 4.4.1. WITHDRAWAL OF BID No bidder may withdraw his bid for a period of thirty(30)days after the date and hour set for the opening of bids. 4.4.5. SPECIAL NOTICE Bidders are hereby given notice to check carefully the accuracy and arithmetic of their bids before submission- pleas of errors in bids will result in rejection of that bid and award to the next low bidder and disposition of bid security is at the discretion of the Owner. ARTICLE 5 CONSIDERATION OF BIDS 5.1.2. STANDARD OF BIDDING PROCEDURES komt Bidding and award procedures will be conducted according to the latest edition of"Manual of Recommended Procedure for Competitive Bidding and Award of Building Contracts" as prepared by C.C.I. (Construction Council of Iowa). %n. 5.3.1. ACCEPTANCE OF BIDS Bids will be acted upon at the time of bidding or at such subsequent time as the Owner may decide within the time limit stated in S.I.B.4.4.1. above. ARTICLE 6 POST-BID INFORMATION ... 6.1.2. QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS Submission of the proposal for this work shall constitute assurance that the Contractor is qualified and will be able to furnish all of the requirements of this contract, including bonds,guarantees,insurance,and related items as required and herein set out. ARTICLE 7 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND 7.3. BOND Bond under this contract will be required according to 7.1.1. Furnishing the Bond shall be executed within 14 days of the Notice of Award of Contract. The Bond shall continue for twelve(12)months from the day on which final payment under the contract falls due and shall be written on AIA Document A312. Contractor shall deliver a bond t... in the full amount(100%)of the contract sum concurrently with the signed Agreement. ARTICLE 8 ENUMERATION OF THE PROPOSED CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 8.1.1. FORM OF CONTRACT If the Contractor be notified of the acceptance of this proposal,he agrees to execute a contract for the work for the L. stated compensation in the form of the AIA Standard Form of Agreement Between Contractor and Owner for Construction,AIA Document A101,2017 Edition, sample copy on file at the Architect's office. The prime Contractor shall execute the signed agreement within 14 days of the Notice of Award of Contract. PROJECT#19-23188 S.I.B. Page 5 CLARIFICATIONS&MODIFICATIONS TO STANDARD A101 Under 5.1 PROGRESS PAYMENTS:Modify as follows: Section 5.1.3 reflects the following: The Architect must receive the Contractor's application for payment not later than the last day of a month and the Owner must pay the Contractor not later than the 15th day of the following month. Also,under Section 5.1.3, if the Contractor fails to submit a payment application to the Architect by the last day of a month, the Owner shall not be required to make payment to the Contractor until the Owner's next regular payment cycle which would be the 15th day of the month two months after receipt of the Pay Application. In light of the new competitive bidding law,add the following to Section 5.1.8: Request for Early Release of Retainage Funds: „y Upon achieving Substantial Completion, as defined by Iowa Code Chapter 26,the Contractor may formally request the release of all or part of the retainage funds being held on the Project. The Contractors' request for Release of the Retainage Funds shall be accompanied by a sworn statement that ten (10) calendar days prior to filing the Request for Release of the Funds a notice was given to all known subcontractors, subsubcontractors and suppliers that the Contractor is requesting the early release of retainage funds. If proper documentation is received from the Contractor,the Owner will release all retainage funds at the next monthly council meeting or within thirty(30)days, whichever is less,except it may retain the following: a) An amount equal to 200%of the value of labor or materials yet to be provided on the Project as determined by the Owner and its authorized contract representative. For purposes of section, "authorized contract representative"means the Architect of record on the Project,unless otherwise specified. b) An amount equal to 200%of the value of any Chapter 573 claims currently on file at the time the Request of Release of Retainage is approved. If the Owner withholds an amount from the retainage payment to the Contractor, the Owner will provide a reason the request is being denied to the Contractor within thirty(30)calendar days of the receipt of the request. Article 5.2 outlines the provisions regarding final payment and references Subparagraph 12.2.2 of AIA Document A201-2017. Under the Contract,the Owner's final payment to the Contractor shall be made no later than thirty-one (31)days after the issuance of the Architect's final Certificate of Payment. Under Section 5.2.2 add that the owner may withhold 200%of the value of the work not satisfactorily completed at the time of fmal acceptance as well as the withholding of 200% of the value of any Iowa Code Chapter 573 claims on file 30 days after final acceptance prior to the making of any final payment. Under Article 7 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION,modify as follows: P"1 The Contract may be terminated by either the Owner or the Contractor as provided in Article 14 of the General Conditions,and the Owner may suspend work in accordance with Article 14 of the General Conditions. Under Article 8 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS,modify as follows: Under Section 8.2,the late payment provision should be amended to read as follows: Payments due and unpaid under the contract document shall bear interest from the date payment is due at a rate equal to the rate specified by rule pursuant to Iowa code Section 74A.2. 1 1 PROJECT#19-23188 S.I.B. Page 6 ,��R CITY OF WATERLOO si Municipal Bidding and COVID- 19 The Waterloo City Clerk's Office is committed to balancing the important role municipal bidding plays in the local economy with ensuring the safety of city staff as COVID-19 cases spread through Iowa. — We encourage prospective bidders to follow the guidelines below for submitting bids while public access to City Hall is limited and the City Clerk's Office is closed to the public. — 1. We strongly recommend all bidders submit bids by mail, Fed-Ex, or UPS prior to the bid deadline. Bids should be mailed to the following address: City Clerk's Office 715 Mulberry Street Waterloo, IA 50703 Please note on the envelope which project you are bidding on. 2. Contractors wishing to deliver a bid in person while public access to City Hall is limited should call the City Clerk's Office at 319-291-4323 prior to dropping off a bid in person. In the event another city department receives a bid, employees will work to ensure it arrives at the correct location prior to the bid opening. Bids delivered to a department other than City Clerk's Office will be accepted if received prior to the deadline listed in the notice. 3. All bids received will be initialed and the time received recorded, in accordance with Iowa public bidding laws. 4. Bid openings will be held in the Harold E. Getty Council Chambers on the second floor of City Hall until public access to City Hall changes. The bid openings will be livestreamed on YouTube and made available on the city website. 5. Contractors or the public may request copies of opened bids by calling the City Clerk's Office at 319-291-4323 or emailing clerk(a�waterloo-ia.orq. Received bids are made available on the Document Center page of the city website after the bid opening at the following link: http://www.cityofwaterlooiowa.com/government/citydocumentsearch/index.php 6. Please direct questions about this process to the City Clerk's Office at 319-291-4323. 1 1 FORM OF PROPOSAL GENERAL CONTRACT 1. SUBMITTED TO: CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA 2. SUBMITTED BY: 3. PROJECT: FIVE SULLIVAN BROTHERS CONVENTION CENTER EXHIBITION HALL CEILING RENOVATION FOR THE CITY OF WATERLOO,IOWA 4. DOCUMENTS: A. Advertisement to Bid. B. Instructions and Supplementary Instructions to Bidders. C. General and Supplementary General Conditions. D. Proposal Bid Form properly executed with Bid Security and/or other Supplementary Forms. E. Plans and Specifications. F. Addendum No. Dated Addendum No. Dated Addendum No. Dated Addendum No. Dated (Contractor to insert number of each Addendum received) 5. AGREEMENTS: In submitting this proposal,the Contractor agrees to the following stipulations A. Contract date will be on or after the bidding date, and Contractor will be required to hold valid all terms of the proposal. B. The requirements of the Instructions to Bidders will be adhered to. ,,.,! C. If the undersigned be notified of the acceptance of this proposal,he/she agrees to execute a contract for the above work,for the below stated compensation in the form prescribed in Article 8.1 of the Supplementary Instructions to Bidders. sarq D. The work will be accomplished in accord with the contract documents. E. The undersigned agrees, if awarded the contract,to have the work substantially completed on or before the 7th day of August 2020. F. The undersigned agrees, if awarded the contract and required by Article 7 to execute and deliver to the Owner prior to the signing of the agreement, a satisfactory bond in the form set out in Paragraph 7.3 of the Supplementary Instructions to Bidders. G. To include in the bid all other taxes lawfully assessed against the Contractor or company in connection with the work included herein. SEE: SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 3.6.1. TAXES 6. PROPOSAL Having carefully examined the contract documents as well as the premises and conditions affecting the work,the undersigned hereby proposes to furnish all labor and materials to complete the general contract requirements of the project in accordance with said documents for the sum of: DOLLARS ($ ) BASIS BID** (**Basis Bid to include Contingency Allowance, see Section 012100 Allowances) Contractor initial here acknowledging allowances are included in Basis Bid Form of Proposal-General Contract(Continued) Respectfully Submitted, PERSON,FIRM OR CORPORATION BIDDER FIRM: BY: Signature/Title BY: Print/Type above name/Title .� DATE: ADDRESS 1: ADDRESS 2: CITY, STATE,ZIP: PHONE: FAX: EMAIL: 3idder Status Form _To be completed by all bidders Part A Please answer"Yes' or"No" for each of the following: E Yes ❑ No My company is authorized to transact business in Iowa. (To help you determine if your company is authorized, please review the worksheet on the next page). C Yes ❑ No My company has an office to transact business in Iowa. C Yes ❑ No My company's office in Iowa is suitable for more than receiving mail, telephone calls, and e-mail. C Yes ❑ No My company has been conducting business in Iowa for at least 3 years prior to the first request for bids on this project. ❑ Yes n No My company is not a subsidiary of another business entity or my company is a subsidiary of another business entity that would qualify as a resident bidder in Iowa. If you answered "Yes"for each question above, your company qualifies as a resident bidder. Please complete Parts B and D of this form. If you answered "No" to one or more questions above, your company is a nonresident bidder. Please complete Parts C and D of this form. —To be completed by resident bidders Part B My company has maintained offices in Iowa during the past 3 years at the following addresses: r Dates: / / to / / Address: City, State, Zip: Dates: / / to / / Address: City, State, Zip: Dates: / / to / / Address: You may attach additional sheet(s) if needed. City, State, Zip: To be completed by non-resident bidders Part C _ 1. Name of home state or foreign country reported to the Iowa Secretary of State: 2. Does your company's home state or foreign country offer preferences to resident bidders, resident labor force preferences or any other type of preference to bidders or laborers? Yes ❑ No 3. If you answered "Yes" to question 2, identify each preference offered by your company's home state or foreign country and the appropriate legal citation. You may attach additional sheet(s) if needed. To be completed by all bidders Part D I certify that the statements made on this document are true and complete to the best of my knowledge and I know that my failure to provide accurate and truthful information may be a reason to reject my bid. Firm Name: — Signature: Date: You must submit the completed form to the governmental body requesting bids per 875 Iowa Administrative Code Chapter 156. This form has been approved by the Iowa Labor Commissioner. 309-6001 (09-15) Worksheets Authorization to Transact Business This worksheet may be used to help complete Part A of the Resident Bidder Status form. If at least one of the following — describes your business, you are authorized to transact business in Iowa. _ Yes N• o My business is currently registered as a contractor with the Iowa Division of Labor. n Yes n N• o My business is a sole proprietorship and I am an Iowa resident for Iowa income tax purposes. ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is a general partnership or joint venture. More than 50 percent of the general partners or joint venture parties are residents of Iowa for Iowa income tax purposes. ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is an active corporation with the Iowa Secretary of State and has paid all fees required by the Secretary of State, has filed its most recent biennial report, and has not filed articles of dissolution. Yes r- N• o My business is a corporation whose articles of incorporation are filed in a state other than Iowa, the corporation has received a certificate of authority from the Iowa secretary of state, has filed its most recent biennial report with the secretary of state, and has neither received a certificate of withdrawal from the secretary of state nor had its authority revoked. - C Yes ( No My business is a limited liability partnership which has filed a statement of qualification in this state and the statement has not been canceled. - C Yes ❑ No My business is a limited liability partnership which has filed a statement of qualification in a state other than Iowa, has filed a statement of foreign qualification in Iowa and a statement of cancellation has not been filed. ❑ Yes n N• o My business is a limited partnership or limited liability limited partnership which has filed a certificate of limited partnership in this state, and has not filed a statement of termination. - n Yes fl N• o My business is a limited partnership or a limited liability limited partnership whose certificate of limited partnership is filed in a state other than Iowa, the limited partnership or limited liability limited partnership has received notification from the Iowa secretary of state that the application for certificate of authority has been approved and no notice of cancellation has been filed by the limited partnership or the limited liability limited partnership. — ❑ Yes ❑ No My business is a limited liability company whose certificate of organization is filed in Iowa and has not filed a statement of termination. - n Yes n N• o My business is a limited liability company whose certificate of organization is filed in a state other than Iowa, has received a certificate of authority to transact business in Iowa and the certificate has not been revoked or canceled. -- 309-6001 (09-15) • City of Waterloo Iowa Construction Sales Tax Exemption Contractor Information Required Contractor Name Contact Name Phone Address Contractor Type: Prime Subcontractor Federal Employer Identification Number Project Name Project Description Description of Work: Brickwork Landscaping Carpentry Painting Concrete Paving Drywall-Plaster-Insulation Plumbing Electrical Roofing-Siding-Sheet Metal Excavation/Grading Windows Flooring Wrecking-Demolition Heavy Construction Other(Please specify) Heating-Ventilating-Air Conditioning -' Contractor Construction Sales Tax Exemption Form Contractor Info Updated 4/14/04 "1 GENERAL CONDITIONS General Conditions of the Contract for Construction shall be AIA Document A-201,2017 by the American Institute of Architects,are hereby made to govern the accompanying drawings and specifications,except that the accompanying Supplementary General Conditions shall take precedence over and modify, delete and/or add to any statements of the AIA forms. Although AIA Document A201,2017 is not bound in these specifications,the document is considered inclusive by reference and as modified by the Supplementary General Conditions hereafter. A copy of the General Conditions is available for purchase at the Architect's office or through AIA Iowa. 1 1 } 1 i I i "1 Ada ADocument A201 — 2017 nom General Conditions of the Contract for Construction for the following PROJECT: (Name and location or address) ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS: The author of this document has added information needed for its completion.The author may also THE OWNER: have revised the text of the original (Name, legal status and address) AIA standard form.An Additions and Deletions Report that notes added information as well as revisions to the standard form text is available — from the author and should be THE ARCHITECT: reviewed.A vertical line in the left (Name, legal status and address) margin of this document indicates where the author has added necessary information and where the author has added to or deleted from the original AIA text. TABLE OF ARTICLES This document has important legal consequences.Consultation with an 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS attorney is encouraged with respect to its completion or modification. 2 OWNER For guidance in modifying this 3 CONTRACTOR document to include supplementary conditions,see AIA Document 4 ARCHITECT A503T^",Guide for Supplementary Conditions. 5 SUBCONTRACTORS 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK 8 TIME 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS a 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT 15 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES AIA Document A201 T"'—2017.Copyright©1911,1915, 1918,1925,1937,1951,1958, 1961,1963,1966,1970,1976, 1987, 1997,2007 and 2017 by The Init. American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WA N1NS:This AlAtDocument is protected by U.S.Copyright Law end International Treaties, Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA' Document,or any portion of it,may res€,1t in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 11:38:53 ET on 11/16/2018 under Order No. 1875935897 which expires on 07/13/2019,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA5D) , INDEX 2.5, 3.1.3,3.5,3.10.2,4.2.7 (Topics and numbers in bold are Section headings.) Architect's Authority to Reject Work 3.5,4.2.6, 12.1.2, 12.2.1 _ Architect's Copyright Acceptance of Nonconforming Work 1.1.7, 1.5 9.6.6,9.9.3, 12.3 Architect's Decisions Acceptance of Work 3.7.4,4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.11,4.2.12,4.2.13,4.2.14,6.3, 9.6.6,9.8.2,9.9.3,9.10.1,9.10.3, 12.3 7.3.4,7.3.9, 8.1.3, 8.3.1,9.2,9.4.1,9.5,9.8.4,9.9.1, Access to Work 13.4.2, 15.2 "" 3.16,6.2.1, 12.1 Architect's Inspections Accident Prevention 3.7.4,4.2.2,4.2.9,9.4.2,9.83,9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.4 10 Architect's Instructions ,.. Acts and Omissions 3.2.4,3.3.1,4.2.6,4.2.7, 13.4.2 3.2, 3.3.2,3.12`.8,3.18,4.2.3, 8.3.1,9.5.1, 10.2.5, Architect's Interpretations 10.2.8, 13.3.2, 14.1, 15.1.2, 15.2 4.2.11,4.2.12 Addenda Architect's Project Representative 1.1.1 4.2.10 _ Additional Costs,Claims for Architect's Relationship with Contractor 3.7.4,3.7.5, 10.3.2, 15.1.5 1.1.2, 1.5,2.3.3,3.1.3,3.2.2,3.2.3,3.2.4, 3.3.1,3.4.2, .... Additional Inspections and Testing 3.5,3.7.4,3.7.5,3.9.2,3.9.3,3.10,3.11,3.12, 3.16, 9.4.259.8.3712.2.1713.4 3.18,4.1.2,4.2,5.2, 6.2.2,7, 8.3.1,9.2,9.3,9.4,9.5, Additional Time, Claims for 9.7, 9.8,9.9, 10.2.6, 10.3, 11.3, 12, 13.3.2, 13.4, 15.2 3.2.4,3.7.4,3.7.5,3.10.2, 8.3.2, 15.1.6 Architect's Relationship with Subcontractors Administration of the Contract 1.1.2,4.2.3,4.2.4,4.2.6,9.6.3,9.6.4, 11.3 _ 3.1.3,4.2,9.4,'9.5 Architect's Representations Advertisement or invitation to Bid 9.4.2,9.5.1,9.10.1 r,., 1.1.1 Architect's Site Visits Aesthetic Effect 3.7.4,4.2.2,4.2.9,9.4.2,9.5.1,9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.4 " 4.2.13 Asbestos Allowances 10.3.1 — 3.8 Attorneys'Fees Applications for Payment 3.18.1, 9.6.8,9.10.2, 10.3.3 4.2.5,7.3.9,9.2,9.3,9.4,9.5.1, 9.5.4, 9.63,9.7, 9.10 Award of Separate Contracts ,,, Approvals 6.1.1,6.1.2 2.1.1,2.3.1,2.5,3.1.3,3.10.2,3.12.8,3.12.9, Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for 3.12.10.1,4.2.7,9.3.2, 13.4.1 Portions of the Work Arbitration 5.2 — 8.3.1, 15.3.2, 15.4 Basic Definitions ARCHITECT 1.1 4 Bidding Requirements Architect,Definition of 1.1.1 4.1.1 Binding Dispute Resolution Architect,Extent of Authority 8.3.1,9.7, 11.5, 13.1, 15.1.2, 15.1.3, 15.2.1, 15.2.5, 2.5, 3.12.7,4.1.2,4.2,5.2, 6.3,7.1.2, 7.3.4,7.4,9.2, 15.2.6.1, 15.3.1, 15.3.2, 15.3.3, 15.4.1 9.3.1,9.4,9.5,9.6.3,9.8,9.10.1,9.10.3, 12.1, 12.2.1, Bonds,Lien 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.4, 15.2.1 7.3.4.4,9.6.8,9.10.2,9.10.3 Architect,Limitations of Authority and Bonds,Performance,and Payment _. Responsibility 7.3.4.4,9.6.7,9.10.3, 11.1.2, 11.1.3, 11.5 2.1.1,3.12.4,3.12.8,3.12.10,4.1.2,4.2.1,4.2.2, Building information Models Use and Reliance 4.2.3,4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.10,4.2.12,4.2.13,5.2.1,7.4, 1.8 9.4.2,9.5.4,9.6.4, 15.1.4, 15.2 Building Permit _. Architect's Additional Services and Expenses 3.7.1 2.5, 12.2.1, 13.4.2, 13.4.3, 14.2.4 Capitalization Architect's Administration of the Contract 1.3 _ 3.1.3,3.7.4, 15.2, 9.4.1,9.5 Certificate of Substantial Completion Architect's Approvals 9.8.3,9.8.4,9.8.5 Init. AIA Document A201 TM-2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The .... American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AlA' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 2 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA' Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 11:38:53 ET on 11/16/2018 under Order No. 1875935897 which expires on 07/13/2019,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA5D) 8.1 "'4 Certificates for Payment Ym 3.7.4,4.2.8,8.3.1, 10.3 1 4.2.1,4.2.5,4.2.9,9.3.3, 9.4,9.5,9.6.1,9.6.6,9.7, Conditions of the Contract 9.10.1,9.10.3, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4, 15.1.4 1.1.1, 6.1.1,6.1.4 Certificates of Inspection,Testing or Approval Consent,Written 13.4.4 3.4.2,3.14.2,4.1.2,9.8.5,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3, 13.2, Certificates of Insurance 15.4.4.2 9.10.2' Consolidation or Joinder Change Orders 15.4.4 1.1.1,3.4.2,3.7.4,3.8.2.3, 3.11,3.12.8,4.2.8,5.2.3, CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY 7.1.2,7.1.3, 7.2,7.3.2 7.3.7,7.3.9,7.3.10, 8.3.1, SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 9.3.1.1,9.10.3, 10.3.2, 11.2, 11.5, 12.1.2 1.1.4,6 Change Orders,Definition of Construction Change Directive,Definition of 7.2.1 7.3.1 CHANGES IN THE WORK Construction Change Directives 2.2.2,3.11,4.2.8,7, 7.2.1, 7.3.1,7.4, 8.3.1,9.3.1.1, 1.1.1,3.4.2,3.11,3.12.8,4.2.8,7.1.1,7.1.2, 7.1.3, 11.5 7.3,9.3.1.1 Claims, Definition of Construction Schedules,Contractor's .,. 15.1.1 3.10,3.11,3.12.1,3.12.2,6.1.3, 15.1.6.2 Claims,Notice of Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts 1.6.2, 15.1.3 5.4, 14.2.2.2 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES Continuing Contract Performance "+ 3.2.4,6.1:1,6.3, 7.3.9, 9.3.3,9.10.4, 10.3.3, 15, 15.4 15.1.4 Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims Contract,Definition of 15.4.1 1.1.2 Claims for Additional Cost CONTRACT,TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION 3.2.4,3.3.1,3.7.4,7.39,9.5.2, 10.2.5, 10.3.2, 15.1.5 OF THE Claims for Additional Time 5.4.1.1,5.4.2, 1 1.5, 14 3.2.4,3.3.1,3.7.4,6.1.1, 8.3.2,9.5.2, 10.3.2, 15.1.6 Contract Administration ' Concealed or Unknown Conditions,Claims for 3.1.3,4,9.4,9.5 3.7.4 Contract Award and Execution, Conditions Relating Claims for Damages to 3.2.4,3.18, 8.3.3,9.5.1,9.6.7, 10.2.5,10.3.3, 11.3, 3.7.1,3.10,5.2,6.1 11.3.2, 14.2.4. 15.1.7 Contract Documents,Copies Furnished and Use of + Claims Subject to Arbitration 1.5.2,2.3.6,5.3 15.4.1 Contract Documents,Definition of aet Cleaning Up 1.1.1 t 3.15,6.3 Contract Sum ti Commencement of the Work,Conditions Relating to 2.2.2,2.2.4,3.7.4,3.7.5,3.8,3.10.2,5.2.3,7.3,7.4, 2.2.J,3.2.2, 3.4.1,3.71,3.10.1,3.12.6,5.2.1 5.2.3, 9.1, 9.2,9.4.2,9.5.1.4,9.6.7,9.7, 10.3.2, 11.5, 12.1.2, i 6.2.2, 8.1.2,8.2.2,8.3.1, 11.1, 11.2, 15.1.5 12.3, 14.2.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.4.2, 15.1.5, 15.2.5 Commencement of the Work,Definition of Contract Sum,Definition of 8.1.2 9.1 — Communications Contract Time 3.9.1,4.2.4 1.1.4,2.2.1,2.2.2,3.7.4,3.7.5, 3.10.2, 5.2.3, 6.1.5, Completion,Conditions Relating to 7.2.1.3,7.3.1,7.3.5,7.3.6,7,7,7.3.10,7.4, 8.1.1, 3.4.1,3.11,3.15,4.2.24.2.9, 8.2,9.4.2,9.8, 9.9.1, 8.2.1, 8.2.3, 8.3.1,9.5.1,9.7, 10.3.2, 12.1.1, 12.1.2, 9.10, 12.2, 14.1.2, 15.1.2 14.3.2, 15.1.4.2, 15.1.6.1, 15.2.5 COMPLETION,PAYMENTS AND Contract Time,Definition of 9 8.1.1 --- Completion, Substantial CONTRACTOR 1 3.10.1,-4.2.9, 8.1.1, 8.1.3,8.2.3,9.4.2,9.8,9.9.1, 3 9.10.35 12.2, 15.1.2 Contractor,Definition of Compliance with Laws 3.1, 6.1.2 2.3.2,3.2.3,3.6,3.7,3.12.10,3.13,9.6.4, 10.2.2, Contractor's Construction and Submittal Schedules 13.1, 13.3, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 13.5, 14.1.1, 14.2.1.3, 3.10,3.12.1,3.12.2,4.2.3,6.1.3, 15.1.6.2 15.2.8, 15.4.2, 15.4.3 Contractor's Employees Awl Concealed or Unknown Conditions Init AIA Document A201 TN—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AM' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA' Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be 3 / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 11:38:53 ET on 11/16/2018 under Order No. 1875935897 which expires on 07/13/2019,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA5D) 2.2.4,3.3.2,3.4.3,3.8.1,3.9,3.18.2,4.2.3,4.2.6, Damage to the Work 10.2, 10.3, 11.3, 14.1, 14.2.1.1 3.14.2,9.9.1, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.4, 12.2.4 Contractor's Liability Insurance Damages,Claims for 11.1 3.2.4,3.18, 6.1.1,8.3.3,9.5.1,9.6.7, 10.3.3, 113.2, - Contractor's Relationship with Separate Contractors 11.3, 14.2.4, 15.1.7 and Owner's Forces Damages for Delay — 3.12.5,3.14.2,4.2.4,6, 11.3, 12.2.4 6.2.3, 8.3.3,9.5.1.6,9.7, 10.3.2, 14.3.2 Contractor's Relationship with Subcontractors Date of Commencement of the Work,Definition of 1.2.2,2.2.4,3.3.2,3.18.1,3.18.2,4.2.4,5,9.6.2, 8.1.2 9.6.7,9.10.2, 11.2, 11.3, 11.4 Date of Substantial Completion,Definition of Contractor's Relationship with the Architect 8.1.3 1.1.2, 1.5,2.3.3,3.1.3,3.2.2,3.2.3,3.2.4, 3.3.1,3.4.2, Day,Definition of 3.5.1,3.7.4,3.10,3.11, 3.12,3.16,3.18,4.2, 5.2, 8.1.4 6.2.2,7, 8.3.1,9.2,9.3,9.4,9.5,9.7,9.8,9.9, 10.2.6, Decisions of the Architect 10.3, 11.3, 12, 13.4, 15.1.3, 15.2.1 3.7.4,4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.11,4.2.12,4.2.13,6.3,7.3.4, Contractor's Representations 7.3.9, 8.1.3,8.3.1,9.2,9.4,9.5.1,9.8.4,9.9.1, 13.4.2, 3.2.1,3.2.2,3.5,3.12.6,6.2.2, 8.2.1,9.3.3,9.8.2 14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.1, 15.2 Contractor's Responsibility for Those Performing the Decisions to Withhold Certification Work 9.4.1,9.5,9.7, 14.1.1.3 3.3.2,3.18, 5.3, 6.1.3, 6.2, 9.5.1, 10.2.8 Defective or Nonconforming Work,Acceptance, — Contractor's Review of Contract Documents Rejection and Correction of 3.2 2.5,3.5,4.2.6, 6.2.3,9.5.1,9.5.3,9.6.6,9.8.2,9.9.3, Contractor's Right to Stop the Work 9.10.4, 12.2.1 2.2.2,9.7 Definitions Contractor's Right to Terminate the Contract 1.1,2.1.1,3.1.1,3.5,3.12.1,3.12.2,3.12.3,4.1.1,5.1, 14.1 6.1.2,7.2.1,7.3.1,8.1,9.1,9.8.1, 15.1.1 Contractor's Submittals Delays and Extensions of Time -- 3.10,3.11,3.12,4.2.7,5.2.1, 5.2.3,9.2,9.3,9.8.2, 3.2, 3.7.4,5.2.3,7.2.1,7.3.1,7.4, 8.3,9.5.1,9.7, 9.8.3,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3 10.3.2, 10.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.6, 15.2.5 Contractor's Superintendent Digital Data Use and Transmission 3.9, 10.2.6 1.7 Contractor's Supervision and Construction Disputes Procedures 6.3,7.3.9, 15.1, 15.2 1.2_2,3.3,3.4, 3.12.10,4.2.2,4.2.7,6.1.3,6.2.4, Documents and Samples at the Site -- 7.1.3,7.3.4, 7.3.6,8.2, 10, 12, 14, 15.1.4 3.11 Coordination and Correlation Drawings,Definition of 1.2,3.2.1,3.3.1,3.10,3.12.6,6.1.3,6.2.1 1.1.5 Copies Furnished of Drawings and Specifications Drawings and Specifications,Use and Ownership of 1.5,2.3.6,3.11 3.11 Copyrights Effective Date of Insurance 1.5,3.17 8.2.2 -T Correction of Work Emergencies 2.5.3.7.3,9.4.2,9.8.2,9.8.3, 9.9.1, 12.1.2, 12.2, 12.3, 10.4, 14.1.1.2, 15.1.5 15.1.3.1, 15.1.3.2, 15.2.1 Employees,Contractor's Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents 3.3.2,3.4.3,3.8.1,3.9,3.18.2,4.2.3,4.2.6, 10.2, 1.2 10.3.3, 11.3, 14.1, 14.2.1.1 Cost,Definition of Equipment,Labor,or Materials 7.3.4 1.1.3, 1.1.6,3.4,3.5,3.8.2,3.8.3,3.12,3.13, 3.15.1, Costs 4.2.6,4.2.7,5.2.1,6.2.1,7.3.4,9.3.2,9.3.3,9.5.1.3, 2.5, 3.2.4,3.7.3,3.8.2,3.15.2,5.4.2,6.1.1, 6.2.3, 9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2 7.3.3.3, 7.3.4,7.3.8, 7.3.9,9.10.2, 10.3.2, 10.3.6, Execution and Progress of the Work 11.2, 12.1.2, 12.2.1, 122.4, 13.4, 14 1.1.3, 1.2.1, 1.2.2,2.3.4,2.3.6,3.1,3.3.1,3.4.1,3.7.1, Cutting and Patching 3.10.1,3.12,3.14,4.2,6.2.2,7.1.3,7.3.6,8.2,9.5.1, 3.14, 6.2.5 9.9.1, 10.2, 10.3, 12.1, 12.2, 14.2, 14.3.1, 15.1.4 Damage to Construction of Owner or Separate Extensions of Time Contractors 3.2.4,3.7.4,5.2.3,7.2.1,7.3,7.4,9.5.1,9.7, 10.3.2, 3.14.2, 6.2.4, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.4, 12.2.4 10.4, 14.3, 15.1.6, 15.2.5 i AIA Document A201 TM-2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The b.. Init. American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA'' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties, 4 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA' Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 11:38:53 ET on 11/16/2018 under Order No. 1875935897 which expires on 07/13/2019,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA5D) i, i " i Failure of Payment INSURANCE AND BONDS 1 9.5.1.3,9.7,9.10.2, 13.5, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2 11 Faulty Work Insurance Companies,Consent to Partial Occupancy (See Defective or Nonconforming Work) 9.9.1 7 Final Completion and Final Payment Insured loss,Adjustment and Settlement of 4.2.1,4.2.9,9.8.2,9.10, 12.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 11.5 Financial Arrangements,Owner's Intent of the Contract Documents 2.2.1, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.4 1.2.1,4.2.7,4.2.12,4.2.13 GENERAL PROVISIONS Interest 1 13.5 Governing Law Interpretation 13.1 1.1.8, 1.2.3, 1.4,4.1.1,5.1,6.1.2, 15.1.1 Guarantees(See Warranty) Interpretations,Written Hazardous Materials and Substances 4.2.11,4.2.12 —' 10.2.4, 10.3 Judgment on Final Award identification of Subcontractors and Suppliers 15.4.2 5.2.1 Labor and Materials,Equipment Indemnification 1.1.3, 1.1.6,3.4,3.5,3.8.2,3.8.3,3.12,3.13,3.15.1, 3.17,3.18,9.6.8, 9.10.2, 10.3.3, 11.3 5.2.1,6.2.1, 7.3.4,9.3.2,9.3.3,9.5.1.3,9.10.2, 10.2.1, Information and Services Required of the Owner 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2 2.1.2,2.2,2.3, 3.2.2,3.12.10.1,6.1.3,6.1.4,6.2.5, Labor Disputes 9.6.1,9.9.2,9.10.3,'103.3, 11.2, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 8.3.1 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4, 15.1.4 Laws and Regulations Initial Decision 1.5,2.3.2,3.2.3,3.2.4,3.6,3.7,3.12.10,3.13,9.6.4, a,, 15.2 9.9.1, 10.2.2, 13.1, 13.3.1, 13.4.2, 13.5, 14, 15.2.8, Initial Decision Maker,Definition of 15.4 1.1.8 Liens Initial Decision Maker, Decisions 2.1.2,9.3.1,9.3.3,9.6.8,9.10.2,9.10.4, 15.2.8 14.2.4, 15.1.4.2, 15.2.1, 15.2.2, 15.2.3, 15.2.4, 15.2.5 Limitations,Statutes of Initial Decision Maker,Extent of Authority 12.2.5, 15.1.2, 15.4.1.1 14.2.4, 15.1.4.2, 15.2.1, 15.2.2, 15.2.3, 15.2.4, 15.2.5 Limitations of Liability ® Injury or Damage to Person or Property 3.2.2,3.5,3.12.10, 3.12.10.1,3.17,3.18.1,4.2.6, 10.2.8, 10.4 4.2.7,6.2.2,9.4.2,9.6.4,9.6.7,9.6.8, 10.2.5, 10.3.3, Inspections 11.3, 12.2.5, 13.3.1 1 3.1.3 `3.3.3,3.7.1,4.2.2,4.2.6,42.9, 9.4.2,9.8.3, Limitations of Time 9.9.2,9.10.1, 12.2.1, 13.4 2.1.2,2.2,2.5,3.2.2,3.10, 3.11,3.12.5,3.15.1,4.2.7, 1 Instructions to Bidders 5.2,5.3,5.4.1,6.2.4,7.3,7.4, 8.2,9.2,9.3.1,9.3.3, ` 1.1.1 9.4.1,9.5,9.6,9.7,9.8,9.9,9.10, 12.2, 13.4, 14, 15, instructions to the Contractor 15.1.2, 15.1.3, 15.1.5 3.2.4,3.3.1,3.8.1,5.2.1,7,8.2.2, 12, 13.4.2 Materials, Hazardous Instruments of Service,Definition of 10.2.4, 10.3 1.1.7 Materials,Labor,Equipment and r" Insurance 1.1.3, 1.1.6,3.4.1,3.5,3.8.2,3.8.3,3.12,3.13,3.15.1, 6.1.1,7.3.4, 8.2.2,9.3.2,9.8.4,9.9.1, 9.10.2, 10.2.5, 5.2.1,6.2.1, 7.3.4,9.3.2,9.3.3,9.5.1.3,9.10.2, 11 10.2.1.2, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2 Insurance,Notice of Cancellation or Expiration Means,Methods,Techniques,Sequences and .-a 11.1.4, 11.2.3 Procedures of Construction Insurance,Contractor's Liability 3.3.1,3.12.10,4.2.2,4.2.7,9.4.2 11.1 Mechanic's Lien -r insurance,Effective Date of 2.1.2,9.3.1,9.3.3,9.6.8,9.10.2,9.10.4, 15.2.8 8.2.2, 14.4.2 Mediation Insurance,Owner's Liability 8.3.1, 15.1.3.2, 15.2.1, 15.2.5, 15.2.6, 15.3, 15.4.1, 11.2 15.4.1.1 Insurance,Property Minor Changes in the Work i 10.2.5, 11.2, 11.4, 11.5 1.1.1,3.4.2,3.12.8,4.2.8,7.1,7.4 Insurance, Stored Materials MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS — 9.3.2 13 Init. AIA Document A201 T"-2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AlA? Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 5 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document.or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 11:38:53 ET on 11/16/2018 under Order No. 1875935897 which expires on 07/13/2019,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA5D) Modifications,Definition of Separate Contracts -- 1.1.1 6.1 ii— Modifications to the Contract Owner's Right to Stop the Work 1.1.1, 1.1.2,2.5,3.11,4.1.2,4.2.1,5.2.3,7, 8.3.1,9.7, 2.4 -- 10.3.2 Owner's Right to Suspend the Work Mutual Responsibility 14.3 6.2 Owner's Right to Terminate the Contract Nonconforming Work,Acceptance of 14.2, 14.4 9.6.6,9.9.3, 12.3 Ownership and Use of Drawings, Specifications and Nonconforming Work,Rejection and Correction of Other Instruments of Service 2.4,2.5,3.5,4.2.6, 6.2.4,9.5.1,9.8.2,9.9.3,9.10.4, 1.1.1, 1.1.6, 1.1.7, 1.5,2.3.6,3.2.2,3.11,3.17,4.2.12, _. 12.2 5.3 Notice Partial Occupancy or Use 1.6, 1.6.1, 1.6.2,2.1.2,2.2.2.,2.2.3,2.2.4,2.5,3.2.4, 9.6.6,9.9 3.3.1,3.7.4,3.7.5,3.9.2,3.12.9, 3.12.10,5.2.1,7.4, Patching,Cutting and 8.2.2 9.6.8, 9.7,9.10.1, 10.2.8, 10.3.2, 11.5, 12.2.2.1, 3.14,6.2.5 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 14.1, 14.2.2, 14.4.2, 15.1.3, 15.1.5, Patents 15.1.6, 15.4.1 3.17 , Notice of Cancellation or Expiration of Insurance Payment,Applications for 11.1.4, 11.2.3 4.2.5,7.3.9,9.2,9.3,9.4,9.5, 9.6.3,9.7,9.8.5,9.10.1, ...— Notice of Claims 14.2.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 1.6.2,2.1.2,3.7.4,9.6.8, 10.2.8, 15.1.3, 15.1.5, Payment,Certificates for 15.1.6, 15.2.8, 15.3.2, 15.4.1 4.2.5,4.2.9,9.3.3,9.4,9.5,9.6.1,9.6.6,9.7,9.10.1, Notice of Testing and Inspections 9.10.3, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4 13.4.1, 13.4.2 Payment,Failure of Observations,Contractor's 9.5.1.3,9.7,9.10.2, 13.5, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2 3.2, 3.7.4 Payment,Final Occupancy 4.2.1,4.2.9,9.10, 12.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 2.3.1,9.6.6, 9.8 Payment Bond,Performance Bond and Orders,Written 7.3.4.4,9.6.7,9.10.3, 11.1.2 1.1.1,2.4,3.9.2,7, 8.2.2, 11.5, 12.1, 12.2.2.1, 13.4.2, Payments,Progress 14.3.1 9.3,9.6,9.8.5, 9.10.3, 14.2.3, 15.1.4 _ OWNER PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 2 9 ... Owner,Definition of Payments to Subcontractors 2.1.1 5.4.2,9.5.1.3,9.6.2,9.6.3,9.6.4,9.6.7, 14.2.1.2 } Owner,Evidence of Financial Arrangements PCB 2.2, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.4 10.3.1 Owner,Information and Services Required of the Performance Bond and Payment Bond 2.1.2,2.2,2.3,3.2.2,3.12.10,6.1.3,6.1.4,6.2.5, 7.3.4.4,9.6.7,9.10.3, 11.1.2 9.3.2,9.6.1,9.6.4,9.9.2,9.10.3, 10.3.3, 11.2, 13.4.1, Permits,Fees,Notices and Compliance with Laws 13.4.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4, 15.1.4 2.3.1,3.7,3.13,7.3.4.4, 10.2.2 Owner's Authority PERSONS AND PROPERTY,PROTECTION OF 1.5,2.1.1,2.3.32.4,2.5,3.4.2,3.8.1,3.12.10,3.14.2, 10 4.1.2,4.2.4,4.2.9,5.2.1,5.2.4,5.4.1, 6.1,6.3,7.2.1, Polychlorinated Biphenyl 7.3.1,8.2.2,8.3.1,9.3.2,9.5.1,9.6.4, 9.9.1,9.10.2, 10.3.1 10.3.2, 11.4, 11.5, 12.2.2, 12.3, 13.2.2, 14.3, 14.4, Product Data,Definition of 15.2.7 3.12.2 — Owner's Insurance Product Data and Samples, Shop Drawings 11.2 3.11,3.12,4.2.7 Owner's Relationship with Subcontractors Progress and Completion 1.1.2,5.2,5.3,5.4, 9.6.4,9.10.2, 14.2.2 4.2.2, 8.2,9.8,9.9.1, 14.1.4, 15.1.4 Owner's Right to Carry Out the Work Progress Payments 2.5, 14.2.2 9.3, 9.6,9.8.5, 9.10.3, 14.2.3, 15.1.4 Owner's Right to Clean Up Project,Definition of '... 6.3 1.1.4 Owner's Right to Perform Construction and to Award Project Representatives _ AIA Document A201 TM-2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The .... Init. American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties, 6 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlAi= Document.or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties.and will be __ i prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 11.38:53 ET on 11/16/2018 under Order No. 1875935897 which expires on 07/13/2019,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA5D) ti... 7 "1 4.2.10 6.1.1 t Property Insurance Shop Drawings,Definition of 10.2.5, 11.2 3.12.1 7 Proposal Requirements Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples 1.1.1 3.11 3.12,4.2.7 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY Site, Use of 10 3.13, 6.1.1, 6.2.1 A', Regulations and Laws Site Inspections i 1.5,2.3.2,3.2.3,3.6,3.7,3.12.10,3.13,9.6.4,9.9.1, 3.2.2,3.3.3,3.7.1,3.7.4,4.2,9.9.2,9.4.2,9.10.1, 13.4 102.2, 13.1,13.3, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 13.5, 14, 15.2.8, Site Visits,Architect's „* 15.4 3.7.4,4.2.2,4.2.9,9.4.2,9.5.1,9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.4 Rejection of Work Special Inspections and Testing 4.2.6, 12.2.1 4.2.6, 12.2.1, 13.4 Releases and Waivers of Liens Specifications,Definition of "" 93.1,9.10.2 1.1.6 Representations Specifications 3.2.1,3.5,3.12.6, 8.21, 9.3.3,9.4.2,9.5.1, 9.10.1 1.1.1, 1.1.6, 1.2.2, 1.5,3.12.10,3.17,4.2.14 " r Representatives Statute of Limitations 2.1.13.1.13.94.1.14.2.10, 13.2.1 15.1.2, 15.4.1.1 Responsibility for Those Performing the Work Stopping the Work 3.3.2,3.18,''4.2.2,4.23, 5.3,6.1.3,6.2,6.3,9.5.1, 10 2.2.2,2.4,9.7, 10.3, 14.1 Retainage Stored Materials 9.3.1, 9.6.2, 9.8.5, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3 6.2.1, 9.3.2, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.4 Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions Subcontractor,Definition of by Contractor 5.1.1 3.2,3.12.7, 6.1.3 SUBCONTRACTORS Review of Contractor's Submittals by Owner and 5 Architect Subcontractors,Work by *01 3.10.1,3.10.2, 3.11, 3.12,4.2,5.2,6.1.3,9.2,9.8.2 1.2.2,3.3.2,3.12.1,3.18,4.2.3,5.2.3,5.3,5.4, i Review of Shop Drawings,Product Data and 9.3.1.2,9.6.7 Samples by Contractor Subcontractual Relations All 3.12 5.3,5.4,9.3.1.2,9.6,9.10, 10.2.1, 14.1, 14.2.1 Rights and Remedies Submittals ( 1.1.2,2.4,2.5, 3.5, 3.7.4,3.15.2,4.2.6,5.3,5.4,6.1, 3.10,3.11,3.12,4.2.7,5.2.1,5.2.3, 7.3.4, 9.2,9.3, 6.3,7.3.1, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.2.5, 10.3, 12.2.1, 12.2.2, 9.8, 9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3 12.2.4, 13.3, 14, 15.4 Submittal Schedule 1 Royalties,Patents and Copyrights 3.10.2, 3.12.5,4.2.7 3.17 Subrogation,Waivers of Rules and Notices for Arbitration 6.1.1, 11.3 15.4,1 Substances, Hazardous Safety of Persons and Property 10.3 10.2, 10.4 Substantial Completion Safety Precautions and Programs 4.2.9, 8.1.1, 8.1.3,8.2.3,9.4.2,9.8,9.9.1, 9.10.3, 3.3.1,4.2.2,4.2.7 5.3, 10.1, 10.2, 10.4 12.2, 151.2 Samples,Definition of Substantial Completion,Definition of 3.12.3 9.8.1 "+► Samples,Shop Drawings,Product Data and Substitution of Subcontractors 1 3.11,3.12,4.2.7 5.2.3,5.2.4 Samples at the Site,Documents and Substitution of Architect "k1 3.11 , 2.3.3 t Schedule of Values Substitutions of Materials 9.2,9.3,1 3.4.2,3.5,7.3.8 Schedules,Construction Sub-subcontractor,Definition of 3.10,3.12.1,3.12.2, 6.1.3, 15.1.6.2 5.1.2 Separate Contracts and Contractors Subsurface Conditions 1.1.4,3.12.5,3.14.2,4.2.4,4.2.7,6, 8.31, 12.1.2 3.7.4 .11 Separate Contractors,Definition of Successors and Assigns I (nit AIA Document A201 T.'-2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 7 ,,ate Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 11:38:53 ET on 11/16/2018 under Order No.11 1875935897 which expires on 07/13/2019,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA5D) i 13.2 2.1.2,2.2,2.5,3.2.2,3.10,3.11,3.12.5,3.15.1,4.2, Superintendent 5.2,5.3,5.4,6.2.4,7.3,7.4, 8.2,9.2,9.3.1,9.3.3, 3.9, 10.2.6 9.4.1,9.5,9.6,9.7, 9.8,9.9,9.10, 12.2, 13.4, 14, Supervision and Construction Procedures 15.1.2, 15.1.3, 15.4 1.2.2,3.3,3.4,3.12.10,4.2.2,4.2.7,6.1.3,6.2.4, Time Limits on Claims 7.1.3,7.3.4,8.2, 8.3.1,9.4.2, 10, 12, 14, 15.1.4 3.7.4, 10.2.8, 15.1.2, 15.1.3 — Suppliers Title to Work 1.5, 3.12.1,4.2.4,4.2.6,5.2.1,9.3,9.4.2,9.5.4,9.6, 9.3.2,9.3.3 9.10.5, 14.2.1 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK _ Surety 12 5.4.1.2,9.6.8,9.8.5,9.10.2.9.10.3, 11.1.2, 14.2.2, Uncovering of Work 15.2.7 12.1 Surety,Consent of Unforeseen Conditions,Concealed or Unknown — 9.8.5,9.10.2,9.10.3 3.7.4, 8.3.1, 10.3 Surveys Unit Prices 1.1.7,2.3.4 7.3.3.2,9.1.2 — Suspension by the Owner for Convenience Use of Documents 14.3 1.1.1, 1.5,2.3.6,3.12.6,5.3 Suspension of the Work Use of Site 3.7.5,5.4.2, 14.3 3.13, 6.1.1,6.2.1 — Suspension or Termination of the Contract Values,Schedule of 5.4.1.1, 14 9.2, 9.3.1 Taxes Waiver of Claims by the Architect 4 3.6,3.8.2.1, 7.3.4.4 13.3.2 Termination by the Contractor Waiver of Claims by the Contractor 14.1, 15.1.7 9.10.5, 13.3.2, 15.1.7 Termination by the Owner for Cause Waiver of Claims by the Owner 5.4.1.1, 14.2, 15.1.7 9.9.3,9.10.3,9.10.4, 12.2.2.1, 13.3.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.7 Termination by the Owner for Convenience Waiver of Consequential Damages 14.4 14.2.4, 15.1.7 Termination of the Architect Waiver of Liens 2.3.3 9.3,9.10.2,9.1 0.4 Termination of the Contractor Employment Waivers of Subrogation 14.2.2 6.1.1, 11.3 Warranty TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE 3.5,4.2.9,9.3.3,9.8.4,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.4, 12.2.2, CONTRACT 15.1.2 14 Weather Delays Tests and Inspections 8.3, 15.1.6.2 3.1.3,3.3.3,3.7.1,4.2.2,4.2.6,4.2.9,9.4.2,9.8.3, Work,Definition of 9.9.2,9.10.1, 10.3.2, 12.2.1, 13.4 1.1.3 "• TIME Written Consent 8 1.5.2,3.4.2,3.7.4,3.12.8,3.14.2,4.1.2,9.3.2,9.10.3, Time,Delays and Extensions of 13.2, 13.3.2, 15.4.4.2 3.2.4,3.7.4,5.2.3,7.2.1,7.3.1,7.4,8.3,9.5.1,9.7, Written Interpretations 10.3.2, 10.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.6, 15.2.5 4.2.11,4.2.12 Time Limits Written Orders 1.1.1,2.4,3.9, 7,8.2.2, 12.1, 12.2, 13.4.2, 14.3.1 ... 1 AIA Document A201 TM-2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The .. Init. American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This MA' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties, 8 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AM''Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties.and will be i prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 11:38:53 ET on 11/16/2018 under Order No. 1875935897 which expires on 07/13/2019,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA5D) r-. sink ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS §1.1 Basic Definitions §1.1.1 The Contract Documents The Contract Documents are enumerated in the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor(hereinafter the Agreement)and consist of the Agreement,Conditions of the Contract(General,Supplementary and other Conditions),Drawings,Specifications,Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract,other documents listed in the Agreement,and Modifications issued after execution of the Contract.A Modification is(1)a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties,(2)a Change Order,(3)a Construction Change Directive,or(4)a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect.Unless specifically enumerated in the Agreement,the Contract Documents do not include the advertisement or invitation to bid,Instructions to Bidders,sample forms, other information furnished by the Owner in anticipation of receiving bids or proposals,the Contractor's bid or proposal,or portions of Addenda relating to bidding or proposal requirements. §1.1.2 The Contract The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction.The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations,representations,or agreements,either written or oral.The Contract may be amended or modified only by a Modification.The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a contractual relationship of any kind(1)between the Contractor and the Architect or the Architect's consultants, (2)between the Owner and a Subcontractor or a Sub-subcontractor,(3)between the Owner and the Architect or the Architect's consultants,or(4)between any persons or entities other than the Owner and the -- Contractor.The Architect shall,however,be entitled to performance and enforcement of obligations under the Contract intended to facilitate performance of the Architect's duties. §1.1.3 The Work The term"Work"means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents,whether completed or partially completed,and includes all other labor,materials,equipment,and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations.The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project. §1.1.4 The Project The Project is the total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part and which may include construction by the Owner and by Separate Contractors. §1.1.5 The Drawings The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents showing the design,location and —; dimensions of the Work,generally including plans,elevations,sections,details,schedules,and diagrams. §1.1.6 The Specifications The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials, equipment,systems,standards and workmanship for the Work,and performance of related services. §1.1.7 Instruments of Service �•+► Instruments of Service are representations,in any medium of expression now known or later developed,of the tangible and intangible creative work performed by the Architect and the Architect's consultants under their respective professional services agreements. Instruments of Service may include,without limitation,studies, surveys,models,sketches,drawings,specifications,and other similar materials. §1.1.8 Initial Decision Maker The Initial Decision Maker is the person identified in the Agreement to render initial decisions on Claims in accordance with Section 15.2.The Initial Decision Maker shall not show partiality to the Owner or Contractor and shall not he liable for results of interpretations or decisions rendered in good faith. §1.2 Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents §1.2.1 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor.The Contract Documents are complementary,and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all;performance by the Contractor shall be required only to the extent ""f Init. AIA Document A201 TM—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976, 1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AiA," Document;or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be 9 / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 11:38:53 ET on 11/16/2018 under Order No. 1875935897 which expires on 07/13/2019,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA5D) consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to produce the indicated results. §,1.2.1.1`The invalidity of any provision of the Contract Documents shall not invalidate the Contract or its remaining - provisions.If it is determined that any provision of the Contract Documents violates any law, or is otherwise invalid or unenforceable,then that provision shall be revised to the extent necessary to make that provision legal and - enforceable.In such case the Contract Documents shall be construed,to the fullest extent permitted by law,to give effect to the parties' intentions and purposes in executing the Contract. §1.2.2 Organization of the Specifications into divisions,sections and articles,and arrangement of Drawings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade. §1.2.3 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents,words that have well-known technical or construction industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings. Uwe §1.3 Capitalization Terms capitalized in these General Conditions include those that are(1)specifically defined, (2)the titles of numbered articles, or(3)the titles of other documents published by the American Institute of Architects. S.. §1.4 Interpretation In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents frequently omit modifying words such as"all"and"any"and articles such as"the''and"an,"but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears in _ another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement. §1.5 Ownership and Use of Drawings,Specifications,and Other Instruments of Service §1.5.1 The Architect and the Architect's consultants shall be deemed the authors and owners of their respective Instruments of Service,including the Drawings and Specifications,and retain all common law,statutory,and other reserved rights in their Instruments of Service,including copyrights.The Contractor,Subcontractors,Sub- subcontractors,and suppliers shall not own or claim a copyright in the Instruments of Service. Submittal or ... distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in connection with the Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of the Architect's or Architect's consultants'reserved rights. §1.5.2 The Contractor,Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors,and suppliers are authorized to use and reproduce the >,.. Instruments of Service provided to them,subject to any protocols established pursuant to Sections 1.7 and 1.8,solely and exclusively for execution of the Work.All copies made under this authorization shall bear the copyright notice, if any, shown on the Instruments of Service.The Contractor,Subcontractors,Sub-subcontractors,and suppliers may not use the Instruments of Service on other projects or for additions to the Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific written consent of the Owner,Architect,and the Architect's consultants. §1.6Notice §1.6.1 Except as otherwise provided in Section 1.6.2,where the Contract Documents require one party to notify or give notice to the other party, such notice shall be provided in writing to the designated representative of the party to whom the notice is addressed and shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person,by mail,by courier,or;by electronic transmission if a method for electronic transmission is set forth in the Agreement. §1.6.2 Notice of Claims as provided in Section 15.1.3 shall be provided in writing and shall be deemed to have been duly served only if delivered to the designated representative of the party to whom the notice is addressed by limor certified or registered mail,or by courier providing proof of delivery. §1.7 Digital Data Use and Transmission The parties shall agree upon protocols governing the transmission and use of Instruments of Service or any other information or documentation in digital form.The parties will use AIA Document E203TM_2013,Building Information Modeling and Digital Data Exhibit,to establish the protocols for the development,use,transmission, and exchange of digital data. AIA Document A201 TM—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The Init. American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and international Treaties. 10 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA' Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 11:38:53 ET on 11/16/2018 under Order No. 1875935897 which expires on 07/13/2019,and is not for resale. (3B9ADA5D) User Notes: "1" §1.8 Building Information Models Use and Reliance Any use of,or reliance on,all or a portion of a building information model without agreement to protocols governing the use of,and reliance on,the information contained in the model and without having those protocols set forth in AlA Document E203TM-2013,Building Information Modeling and Digital Data Exhibit,and the requisite AlA Document G202Tm-2013,Project Building Information Modeling Protocol Form,shall be at the using or relying party's sole risk and without liability to the other party and its contractors or consultants,the authors of,or contributors to,the building information model,and each of their agents and employees. ARTICLE 2 OWNER §2.1 General §2.1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The Owner shall designate in writing a representative who shall have express authority to bind the Owner with respect to all matters requiring the Owner's approval or authorization. Except as otherwise provided in Section 4.2.1,the Architect does not have such authority.The term"Owner"means the Owner or the Owner's authorized representative. §2.1.2 The Owner shall furnish to the Contractor,within fifteen days after receipt of a written request, information necessary and relevant for the Contractor to evaluate,give notice of,or enforce mechanic's lien rights. Such information shall include a correct statement of the record legal title to the property on which the Project is located, usually referred to as the site,and the Owner's interest therein. §2.2 Evidence of the Owner's Financial Arrangements§2.2.1 Prior to commencement of the Work and upon written request by the Contractor,the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence that the Owner has made financial arrangements to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract.The Contractor shall have no obligation to commence the Work until the Owner provides such evidence. If commencement of the Work is delayed under this Section 2.2.1,the Contract Time shall be extended appropriately. §2.2.2 Following commencement of the Work and upon written request by the Contractor,the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence that the Owner has made financial arrangements to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract only if(1)the Owner fails to make payments to the Contractor as the Contract Documents require; (2)the Contractor identifies in writing a reasonable concern regarding the Owner's ability to make payment when due; or(3)a change in the Work materially changes the Contract Sum. If the Owner fails to provide such evidence,as required,within fourteen days of the Contractor's request,the Contractor may immediately stop the Work and,in that event,shall notify the Owner that the Work has stopped.However,if the request is made because a change in the Work materially changes the Contract Sum under(3)above,the Contractor may immediately stop only that portion of the Work affected by the change until reasonable evidence is provided.If the Work is stopped under this Section 2.2.2,the Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor's reasonable costs of shutdown,delay and start-up,plus interest as provided in the Contract Documents. §2.2.3 After the Owner furnishes evidence of financial arrangements under this Section 2.2, the Owner shall not rr materially vary such financial arrangements without prior notice to the Contractor. §2.2.4 Where the Owner has designated information furnished under this Section 2.2 as"confidential,"the Contractor shall keep the information confidential and shall not disclose it to any other person.However,the "1 Contractor may disclose"confidential"information,after seven(7)days'notice to the Owner,where disclosure is required by law,including a subpoena or other form of compulsory legal process issued by a court or governmental entity,or by court or arbitrator(s)order. The Contractor may also disclose"confidential"information to its employees,consultants,sureties, Subcontractors and their employees,Sub-subcontractors,and others who need to know the content of such information solely and exclusively for the Project and who agree to maintain the confidentiality of such information. §2.3 Information and Services Required of the Owner §2.3.1 Except for permits and fees that are the responsibility of the Contractor under the Contract Documents, including those required under Section 3.7.1,the Owner shall secure and pay for necessary approvals,easements, Init. AIA Document A201"'—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This ALA' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and international Treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA, Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be 11 prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 11:38:53 ET on 11/16/2018 under Order No. 1875935897 which expires on 07/13/2019,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA5D) assessments and charges required for construction,use or occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent changes in existing facilities. •— §2.3.2 The Owner shall retain an architect lawfully licensed to practice architecture,or an entity lawfully practicing - • architecture,in the jurisdiction where the Project is located.That person or entity is identified as the Architect in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. "' §2.3.3 If the employment of the Architect terminates,the Owner shall employ a successor to whom the Contractor has no reasonable objection and whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the Architect. §2.3.4 The Owner shall furnish surveys describing physical characteristics, legal limitations and utility locations for the site of the Project, and a legal description of the site.The Contractor shall be entitled to rely on the accuracy of information furnished by the Owner but shall exercise proper precautions relating to the safe performance of the Work. §2.3.5 The Owner shall furnish information or services required of the Owner by the Contract Documents with reasonable promptness. The Owner shall also furnish any other information or services under the Owner's control and relevant to the Contractor's performance of the Work with reasonable promptness after receiving the Contractor's written request for such information or services. §2.3.6 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor one copy of the Contract Documents for purposes of making reproductions pursuant to Section 1.5.2. §2.4 Owner's Right to Stop the Work If the Contractor fails to correct Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents as required by Section 12.2 or repeatedly fails to carry out Work in accordance with the Contract Documents,the Owner may issue a written order to the Contractor to stop the Work or any portion thereof until the cause for such order has been eliminated;however,the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity,except to the extent required by Section 6.1.3. ..- §2.5 Owner's Right to Carry Out the Work If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails within a ten-day period after receipt of notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default IMO or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may,without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may have, correct such default or neglect. Such action by the Owner and amounts charged to the Contractor are both subject to prior approval of the Architect and the Architect may,pursuant to Section 9.5.1,withhold or nullify a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part,to the extent reasonably necessary to reimburse the Owner for the reasonable cost of correcting such deficiencies,including Owner's expenses and compensation for the Architect's additional services made necessary by such default,neglect,or failure.If current and future payments are not sufficient to cover such amounts,the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. If the Contractor disagrees with the actions of the Owner or the Architect,or the amounts claimed as costs to the Owner,the Contractor may file a Claim pursuant to Article 15. ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR §3.1 General §3.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number.The Contractor shall be lawfully licensed,if required in the jurisdiction where the Project is located.The Contractor shall designate in writing a representative who shall have express authority to bind the Contractor with respect to all matters under this Contract.The term"Contractor"means the Contractor or the Contractor's authorized representative. §3.1.2 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. §3.1.3 The Contractor shall not be relieved of its obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract 1... Documents either by activities or duties of the Architect in the Architect's administration of the Contract,or by tests, inspections or approvals required or performed by persons or entities other than the Contractor. AIA Document A201 T"—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The �... init. American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AEA" Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 12 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties.and will be . prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AlA software at 11:38:53 ET on 11/16/2018 under Order No. 1875935897 which expires on 07/13/2019,and is not for resale. (3B9ADA5D) User Notes: I 0.44 §3.2 Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions by Contractor §3.2.1 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor has visited the site, become generally familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed,and correlated personal observations with requirements of the Contract Documents. §3.2.2 Because the Contract Documents are complementary,the Contractor shall,before starting each portion of the Work,carefully study and compare the various Contract Documents relative to that portion of the Work,as well as the information furnished by the Owner pursuant to Section 2.3.4,shall take field measurements of any existing conditions related to that portion of the Work,and shall observe any conditions at the site affecting it. These obligations are for the purpose of facilitating coordination and construction by the Contractor and are not for the purpose of discovering errors,omissions,or inconsistencies in the Contract Documents;however,the Contractor shall promptly report to the Architect any errors,inconsistencies or omissions discovered by or made known to the Contractor as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require.It is recognized that the --- Contractor's review is made in the Contractor's capacity as a contractor and not as a licensed design professional, unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents. — §3.2.3 The Contractor is not required to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws,statutes,ordinances,codes,rules and regulations,or lawful orders of public authorities,but the Contractor shall promptly report to the Architect any nonconformity discovered by or made known to the Contractor as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require. §3.2.4 If the Contractor believes that additional cost or time is involved because of clarifications or instructions the Architect issues in response to the Contractor's notices or requests for information pursuant to Sections 3.2.2 or 3.2.3,the Contractor shall submit Claims as provided in Article 15. If the Contractor fails to perform the obligations of Sections 3.2.2 or 3.2.3,the Contractor shall pay such costs and damages to the Owner,subject to Section 15.1.7, as would have been avoided if the Contractor had performed such obligations.If the Contractor performs those obligations,the Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or Architect for damages resulting from errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents,for differences between field measurements or conditions and the Contract Documents,or for nonconformities of the Contract Documents to applicable laws,statutes, ordinances,codes,rules and regulations,and lawful orders of public authorities. §3.3 Supervision and Construction Procedures §3.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work,using the Contractor's best skill and attention.The Contractor shall be solely responsible l ar,and have control over,construction means,methods, techniques, sequences,and procedures,and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract. If the Contract 1 Documents give specific instructions concerning construction means,methods,techniques,sequences,or procedures,the Contractor shall evaluate the jobsite safety thereof and shall be solely responsible for the jobsite safety of such means,methods,techniques,sequences,or procedures.If the Contractor determines that such means, methods,techniques,sequences or procedures may not be safe,the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Owner and Architect,and shall propose alternative means,methods,techniques,sequences,or procedures.The Architect shall evaluate the proposed alternative solely for conformance with the design intent for the completed construction. • Unless the Architect objects to the Contractor's proposed alternative, the Contractor shall perform the Work using its alternative means,methods,techniques,sequences,or procedures. §3.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor's employees, Subcontractors and their agents and employees,and other persons or entities performing portions of the Work for,or on behalf of,the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors. §3.3.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of portions of Work already performed to determine that such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent Work. §3.4 Labor and Materials §3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor, materials,equipment,tools,construction equipment and machinery,water,heat,utilities,transportation,and other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work,whether temporary or permanent ...� and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work. Init AIA Document A201 TM—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA, Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and international Treaties. 13 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be "11 / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 11:38:53 ET on 11/16/2018 under Order No. 1875935897 which expires on 07/13/2019,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA5D) = i §3.4.2 Except in the case of minor changes in the Work approved by the Architect in accordance with Section 3.12.8 or ordered by the Architect in accordance with Section 7.4,the Contractor may make substitutions only with the consent of the Owner,after evaluation by the Architect and in accordance with a Change Order or Construction --- Change Directive. bop §3.4.3 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contractor's employees and other persons carrying out the Work.The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or persons not properly skilled in tasks assigned to them. §3.5 Warranty - §3.5.1 The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be of good quality and new unless the Contract Documents require or permit otherwise.The Contractor further warrants that the Work will conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents and will be free from defects,except for those inherent in the quality of the Work the Contract Documents require or permit. Work,materials,or equipment not conforming to these requirements may be considered defective.The Contractor's warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse,alterations to the Work not executed by the Contractor,improper or insufficient maintenance,improper operation,or normal wear and tear and normal usage.If required by the Architect,the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. §3.5.2 All material,equipment,or other special warranties required by the Contract Documents shall be issued in the name of the Owner,or shall be transferable to the Owner,and shall commence in accordance with Section 9.8.4. §3.6 Taxes The Contractor shall pay sales,consumer,use and similar taxes for the Work provided by the Contractor that are legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded,whether or not yet effective or merely scheduled to go into effect. §3.7 Permits,Fees,Notices and Compliance with Laws §3.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall secure and pay for the building permit as well as for other permits,fees,licenses,and inspections by government agencies necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work that are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and legally required at the time bids are received or negotiations concluded. .m §3.7.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by applicable laws,statutes,ordinances,codes, rules and regulations,and lawful orders of public authorities applicable to performance of the Work. §3.7.3 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to applicable laws,statutes,ordinances,codes, rules and regulations,or lawful orders of public authorities,the Contractor shall assume appropriate responsibility for such Work and shall bear the costs attributable to correction. r... §3.7.4 Concealed or Unknown Conditions If the Contractor encounters conditions at the site that are(1)subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions that differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents or(2)unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature that differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in _. construction activities of the character provided for in the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall promptly provide notice to the Owner and the Architect before conditions are disturbed and in no event later than 14 days after first observance of the conditions.The Architect will promptly investigate such conditions and,if the Architect determines that they differ materially and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor's cost of,or time required for,performance of any part of the Work,will recommend that an equitable adjustment be made in the Contract Sum or Contract Time,or both.If the Architect determines that the conditions at the site are not materially different from those indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the terms of the Contract is justified,the Architect shall promptly notify the Owner and Contractor,stating the reasons.If either party disputes the Architect's determination or recommendation,that party may submit a Claim as provided in Article 15. Init. AIA Document A201 TM—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The �... American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA'- Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 14 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA' Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties.and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 11:38:53 ET on 11/16/2018 under Order No. 1875935897 which expires on 07/13/2019,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA5D) .-- §3.7.5 If,in the course of the Work,the Contractor encounters human remains or recognizes the existence of burial markers,archaeological sites or wetlands not indicated in the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall immediately suspend any operations that would affect them and shall notify the Owner and Architect.Upon receipt of such notice,the Owner shall promptly take any action necessary to obtain governmental authorization required to resume the operations.The Contractor shall continue to suspend such operations until otherwise instructed by the Owner but shall continue with all other operations that do not affect those remains or features.Requests for adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time arising from the existence of such remains or features may be made as provided in Article 15. §3.8 Allowances §3.8.1 The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the Contract Documents. Items covered by allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such persons or entities as the Owner may direct, but the Contractor shall not be required to employ persons or entities to whom the Contractor has reasonable objection. §3.8.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, .1 allowances shall cover the cost to the Contractor of materials and equipment delivered at the site and all required taxes,less applicable trade discounts; .2 Contractor's costs for unloading and handling at the site,labor,installation costs,overhead,profit,and other expenses contemplated for stated allowance amounts shall be included in the Contract Sum but not in the allowances;and .3 whenever costs are more than or less than allowances,the Contract Sum shall be adjusted accordingly 4 by,Change Order. The amount of the Change Order shall reflect(1)the difference between actual costs and the allowances under Section 3.8.2.1 and(2)changes in Contractor's costs under Section 3.82.2. §3.8.3 Materials and equipment under an allowance shall be selected by the Owner with reasonable promptness. §3.9 Superintendent §3.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at the Project site during performance of the Work.The superintendent shall represent the Contractor,and communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. §3.9.2 The Contractor,as soon as practicable after award of the Contract,shall notify the Owner and Architect of the name and qualifications of a proposed superintendent.Within 14 days of receipt of the information,the Architect may notify the Contractor,stating whether the Owner or the Architect(1)has reasonable objection to the proposed superintendent or(2)requires additional time for review.Failure of the Architect to provide notice within the 14-day period shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection. ... §3.9.3 The Contractor shall not employ a proposed superintendent to whom the Owner or Architect has made reasonable and timely objection.The Contractor shall not change the superintendent without the Owner's consent, which shall not unreasonably be withheld or delayed. §3.10 Contractor's Construction and Submittal Schedules §3.10.1 The Contractor,promptly after being awarded the Contract,shall submit for the Owner's and Architect's information a Contractor's construction schedule for the Work.The schedule shall contain detail appropriate for the Project,including(1)the date of commencement of the Work,interim schedule milestone dates,and the date of 4 Substantial Completion;(2)an apportionment of the Work by construction activity;and(3)the time required for completion of each portion of the Work. The schedule shall provide for the orderly progression of the Work to completion and shall not exceed time limits current under the Contract Documents. The schedule shall be revised at appropriate intervals as required by the conditions of the Work and Project. §3.10.2 The Contractor,promptly after being awarded the Contract and thereafter as necessary to maintain a current submittal schedule,shall submit a submittal schedule for the Architect's approval.The Architect's approval shall not be unreasonably delayed or withheld.The submittal schedule shall(1)be coordinated with the Contractor's construction schedule,and(2)allow the Architect reasonable time to review submittals.Iithe Contractor fails to submit a submittal schedule,or fails to provide submittals in accordance with the approved submittal schedule,the Init. MA Document A201 T"-2 01 7.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 5 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 11:38:53 ET on 11/16/2018 under Order No. 1875935897 which expires on 07/13/2019,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA5D) Contractor shall not be entitled to any increase in Contract Sum or extension of Contract Time based on the time required for review of submittals. No,,,, §'3.10.3 The Contractor shall perform the Work in general accordance with the most recent schedules submitted to • the Owner and Architect. §3.11 Documents and Samples at the Site The Contractor shall make available,at the Project site,the Contract Documents,including Change Orders, Construction Change Directives,and other Modifications,in good order and marked currently to indicate field changes and selections made during construction,and the approved Shop Drawings,Product Data, Samples,and similar required submittals.These shall be in electronic form or paper copy,available to the Architect and Owner, and delivered to the Architect for submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work as a record of the Work as constructed. §3.12 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples §3.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings,diagrams,schedules,and other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor,manufacturer,supplier,or distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work. §3.12.2 Product Data are illustrations,standard schedules,performance charts,instructions,brochures,diagrams, and other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work. §3.12.3 Samples are physical examples that illustrate materials,equipment,or workmanship,and establish standards r.- by which the Work will be judged. §3.12.4 Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples,and similar submittals are not Contract Documents.Their purpose is to demonstrate how the Contractor proposes to conform to the information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents for those portions of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittals. Review by the Architect is subject to the limitations of Section 4.2.7.Informational submittals upon which the Architect is not expected to take responsive action may be so identified in the Contract Documents. Submittals that are not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action. §3.12.5 The Contractor shall review for compliance with the Contract Documents,approve,and submit to the Architect, Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples,and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents,in accordance with the submittal schedule approved by the Architect or,in the absence of an approved submittal schedule,with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner or of Separate Contractors. §3.12.6 By submitting Shop Drawings,Product Data, Samples,and similar submittals,the Contractor represents to the Owner and Architect that the Contractor has(1)reviewed and approved them,(2)determined and verified materials,field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto,or will do so,and(3)checked and ►.. coordinated the information contained within such submittals with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents. §3.12.7 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittal and review of Shop Drawings,Product Data, Samples,or similar submittals,until the respective submittal has been approved by the Architect. §3.12.8 The Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals except that the Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for deviations from the requirements of the Contract Documents by the Architect's approval of Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples,or similar submittals,unless the Contractor has specifically notified the Architect of such deviation at the time of submittal and(1)the Architect has given written approval to the specific deviation as a minor change in the Work,or(2)a Change Order or Construction Change Directive has been issued authorizing the deviation.The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Drawings, Product Data,Samples,or similar submittals,by the Architect's approval thereof. L AIA Document A201 TM—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The Init. American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AMA' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and international Treaties. 16 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlAf Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties.and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 11:38:53 ET on 11/16/2018 under Order No. 1875935897 which expires on 07/13/2019,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA5D) §3.12.9 The Contractor shall direct specific attention,in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings,Product Data, Samples,or similar submittals,to revisions other than those requested by the Architect on previous submittals.In the absence of such notice,the Architect's approval of a resubmission shall not apply to such revisions. §3.12.10 The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services that constitute the practice of architecture or engineering unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless the Contractor needs to provide such services in order to carry out the Contractor's responsibilities for construction means,methods,techniques,sequences,and procedures.The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services in violation of applicable law. §3.12.10.1 If professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems,materials,or equipment are specifically required of the Contractor by the Contract Documents,the Owner and the Architect will specify all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy.The Contractor shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy and accuracy of the performance and design criteria provided in the Contract Documents.The Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by an appropriately licensed design professional,whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings,calculations,specifications,certifications,Shop Drawings,and other submittals prepared by such professional. Shop Drawings,and other submittals related to the _ Work,designed or certified by such professional,if prepared by others,shall bear such professional's written approval when submitted to the Architect.The Owner and the Architect shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy and accuracy of the services,certifications,and approvals performed or provided by such design professionals, provided the Owner and Architect have specified to the Contractor the performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy.Pursuant to this Section 3.12.10,the Architect will review and approve or take other appropriate action on submittals only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. §3.12.10.2 If the Contract Documents require the Contractor's design professional to certify that the Work has been performed in accordance with the design criteria,the Contractor shall furnish such certifications to the Architect at the time and in the form specified by the Architect. §3.13 Use of Site The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by applicable laws,statutes,ordinances,codes, rules and regulations,lawful orders of public authorities,and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment. §3.14 Cutting and Patching §3.14.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting,fitting,or patching required to complete the Work or to make its parts fit together properly.All areas requiring cutting,fitting,or patching shall be restored to the condition existing prior to the cutting,fitting,or patching,unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents. §3.14.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or partially completed construction of the Owner or Separate Contractors by cutting,patching,or otherwise altering such construction,or by excavation.The Contractor shall not cut or otherwise alter construction by the Owner or a Separate Contractor except with written consent of the Owner and of the Separate Contractor.Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. The Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold,from the Owner or a Separate Contractor,its consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work. §3.15 Cleaning Up §3.15.1 The Contractor shall keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation of waste materials and rubbish caused by operations under the Contract. At completion of the Work,the Contractor shall remove waste materials,rubbish,the Contractor's tools,construction equipment,machinery,and surplus materials from and about the Project. §3.15.2 If the Contractor fails to clean up as provided in the Contract Documents,the Owner may do so and the aft" Owner shall be entitled to reimbursement from the Contractor. Init. AIA Document A201 TM-2 01 7.Copyright©1911,1915, 1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA3 Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 17 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 11:38:53 ET on 11/16/2018 under Order No. 1875935897 which expires on 07/13/2019,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA5D) §3.16 Access to Work The Contractor shall provide the Owner and Architect with access to the Work in preparation and progress wherever .._ located. §3.17 Royalties, Patents and Copyrights The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees.The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement of copyrights and patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on account thereof,but shall not be responsible for defense or loss when a particular design,process,or product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents,or where the copyright violations are contained in Drawings, Specifications, or other documents prepared by the Owner or Architect.However,if an infringement of a copyright or patent is discovered by,or made known to,the Contractor,the Contractor shall be responsible for the loss unless the information is promptly furnished to the Architect. §3.18 Indemnification §3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law,the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, Architect, Architect's consultants,and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims,damages, losses,and expenses,including but not limited to attorneys' fees,arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work,provided that such claim,damage,loss,or expense is attributable to bodily injury,sickness,disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property(other than the Work itself),but only to the extent caused by the negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor,a Subcontractor,anyone directly or indirectly employed by them,or anyone for whose acts they may liable,regardless of whether or not such claim,damage,loss,or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed to negate,abridge,or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity that would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Section 3.18. §3.18.2 In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Section 3.18 by an employee of the Contractor, a Subcontractor,anyone directly or indirectly employed by them,or anyone for whose acts they may be liable,the indemnification obligation under Section 3.18.1 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages, compensation,or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or a Subcontractor under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts,or other employee benefit acts. ARTICLE 4 ARCHITECT §4.1 General §4.1.1 The Architect is the person or entity retained by the Owner pursuant to Section 2.3.2 and identified as such in ... the Agreement. §4.1.2 Duties,responsibilities,and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents shall not be restricted,modified,or extended without written consent of the Owner,Contractor,and Architect. Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. §4.2 Administration of the Contract �.. §4.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents and will be an Owner's representative during construction until the date the Architect issues the final Certificate for Payment. The Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents. §4.2.2 The Architect will visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of construction,or as otherwise agreed with the Owner,to become generally familiar with the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed, 11 and to determine in general if the Work observed is being performed in a manner indicating that the Work,when fully completed,will be in accordance with the Contract Documents.However,the Architect will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work.The Architect will not have control over,charge of,or responsibility for the construction means,methods,techniques,sequences or procedures,or for the safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work,since these are solely the Contractor's rights and responsibilities under the Contract Documents. §4.2.3 On the basis of the site visits,the Architect will keep the Owner reasonably informed about the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed,and promptly report to the Owner(l)known deviations from the AIA Document A201 TN-2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The �.. Init. American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AMA' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. $ Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be _ prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 11:38:53 ET on 11/16/2018 under Order No. 1875935897 which expires on 07/13/2019,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA5D) �► Contract Documents,(2)known deviations from the most recent construction schedule submitted by the Contractor, and(3)defects and deficiencies observed in the Work. The Architect will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Architect will not have control over or charge of,and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of,the Contractor, Subcontractors, .•Y or their agents or employees,or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work. §4.2.4 Communications --� The Owner and Contractor shall include the Architect in all communications that relate to or affect the Architect's services or professional responsibilities.The Owner shall promptly notify the Architect of the substance of any direct communications between the Owner and the Contractor otherwise relating to the Project. Communications by and with the Architect's consultants shall be through the Architect. Communications by and with Subcontractors and suppliers shall be through the Contractor.Communications by and with Separate Contractors shall be through the Owner.The Contract Documents may specify other communication protocols. §4.2.5 Based on the Architect's evaluations of the Contractor's Applications for Payment,the Architect will review and certify the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts. §4.2.6 The Architect has authority to reject Work that does not conform to the Contract Documents.Whenever the Architect considers it necessary or advisable,the Architect will have authority to require inspection or testing of the Work in accordance with Sections 13.4.2 and 13.4.3,whether or not the Work is fabricated,installed or completed. However,neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision made in good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Architect to the Contractor, Subcontractors, suppliers,their agents or employees,or other persons or entities performing portions of the Work. §4.2.7 The Architect will review and approve,or take other appropriate action upon,the Contractor's submittals such as Shop Drawings,Product Data,and Samples,but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents.The Architect's action will be taken in accordance with the submittal schedule approved by the Architect or,in the absence of an approved submittal schedule,',with reasonable promptness while allowing sufficient time in the Architect's professional judgment to permit adequate review.Review of such submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of other details such as dimensions and quantities,or for substantiating instructions for installation or performance of equipment or systems,all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor as required by the Contract Documents.The Architect's review of the Contractor's submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligations under Sections 3.3,3.5,and 3.12.The Architect's review shall not constitute approval of safety precautions or of any construction means,methods,techniques,sequences,or procedures.The Architect's — approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a component. §4.2.8 The Architect will prepare Change Orders and Construction Change Directives,and may order minor changes in the Work as provided in Section 7.4.The Architect will investigate and make determinations and 'nt recommendations regarding concealed and unknown conditions as provided in Section 3.7.4. §4.2.9 The Architect will conduct inspections to determine the date or dates of Substantial Completion and the date .Ekl, of final completion; issue Certificates of Substantial Completion pursuant to Section 9.8;receive and forward to the Owner,for the Owner's review and records,written warranties and related documents required by the Contract and assembled by the Contractor pursuant to Section 9.10;and issue a final Certificate for Payment pursuant to Section 9.10. §4.2.10 If the Owner and Architect agree,the Architect will provide one or more Project representatives to assist in carrying out the,Architect's responsibilities at the site.The Owner shall notify the Contractor of any change in the duties,responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Project representatives. §4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and decide matters concerning performance under,and requirements of,the Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contractor.The Architect's response to such requests 'ar will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness. §4.2.12 Interpretations and decisions of the Architect will be consistent with the intent of,and reasonably inferable ,.� from,the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of drawings.When making such interpretations (nit AIA Document A201 TM—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AIAr Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties, 19 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA'Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 11:38:53 ET on 11/16/2018 under Order No. 1875935897 which expires on 07/13/2019,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA5D) and decisions,the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor,will not show partiality to either,and will not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions rendered in good faith. §4.2.13 The Architect's decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with the intent expressed in the Contract Documents. §4.2.14 The Architect will review and respond to requests for information about the Contract Documents.The Architect's response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness. If appropriate,the Architect will prepare and issue supplemental Drawings and Specifications in response to the requests for information. ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS §5.1 Definitions — §5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site.The term"Subcontractor"is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Subcontractor.The term"Subcontractor" does not include a Separate Contractor or the subcontractors of a Separate Contractor. — §5.1.2 A Sub-subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site.The term"Sub-subcontractor"is referred to throughout the Contract Imo Documents as if singular in number and means a Sub-subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Sub- subcontractor.. §5.2 Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Portions of the Work §5.2.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents,the Contractor,as soon as practicable after award of the Contract,shall notify the Owner and Architect of the persons or entities proposed for each principal portion of the Work,including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design.Within 14 days of Ions receipt,of the information,the Architect may notify the Contractor whether the Owner or the Architect(1)has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or entity or(2)requires additional time for review.Failure of the Architect to provide notice within the 14-day period shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection. §5.2.2 The Contractor shall not contract with a proposed person or entity to whom the Owner or Architect has made reasonable and timely objection.The Contractor shall not be required to contract with anyone to whom the Contractor has made reasonable objection. §5.2.3 If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Contractor,the Contractor shall propose another to whom the Owner or Architect has no reasonable objection.If the proposed but rejected Subcontractor was reasonably capable of performing the Work,the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be increased or decreased by the difference,if any,occasioned by such change,and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued before commencement of the substitute Subcontractor's Work.However,no increase in the Contract Sum or Contract Time shall be allowed for such change unless the Contractor has acted promptly and responsively in submitting names as required. §5.2.4 The Contractor shall not substitute a Subcontractor,person,or entity for one previously selected if the Owner or Architect makes reasonable objection to such substitution. §5.3 Subcontractual Relations By appropriate written agreement,the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor,to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor,to be bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract Documents,and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities,including the responsibility for safety of the Subcontractor's Work that the Contractor,by these Contract Documents,assumes toward the Owner and Architect. Each subcontract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights,and shall allow to the Subcontractor,unless specifically provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement,the benefit of all rights,remedies,and redress against the Contractor that the Contractor,by the Contract Documents,has against the Owner.Where appropriate,the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub-subcontractors.The Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor, AIA Document A201 T"—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The r.,. Init. American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This MA''Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties, 20 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA'Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 11:38:53 ET on 11/16/2018 under Order No. 1875935897 which expires on 07/13/2019,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA5D) prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement,copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound,and,upon written request of the Subcontractor,identify to the Subcontractor terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract agreement that may be at variance with the Contract Documents. Subcontractors will similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documents available to their respective proposed Sub- subcontractors. §5.4 Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts §5.4.1 Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is assigned by the Contractor to the Owner,provided that .1 assignment is effective only after termination of the Contract by the Owner for cause pursuant to ..F Section 14.2 and only for those subcontract agreements that the Owner accepts by notifying the Subcontractor and Contractor;and .2 assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surety,if any,obligated under bond relating to the Contract. When the Owner accepts the assignment of a subcontract agreement,the Owner assumes the Contractor's rights and obligations under the subcontract. §5.4.2 Upon such assignment,if the Work has been suspended for more than 30 days,the Subcontractor's compensation shall be equitably adjusted for increases in cost resulting from the suspension. §5.4.3 Upon assignment to the Owner under this Section 5.4,the Owner may further assign the subcontract to a successor contractor or other entity.If the Owner assigns the subcontract to a successor contractor or other entity, the Owner shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all of the successor contractor's obligations under the subcontract. ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS §6.1 Owner's Right to Perform Construction and to Award Separate Contracts §6.1.1 The term"Separate Contractor(s)"shall mean other contractors retained by the Owner under separate agreements. The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner's own forces,and with Separate Contractors retained under Conditions of the Contract substantially similar to those of this Contract,including those provisions of the Conditions of the Contract related to insurance and waiver of subrogation. §6.1.2 When separate contracts are awarded for different portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site,the term"Contractor"in the Contract Documents in each case shall mean the Contractor who executes each separate Owner-Contractor Agreement. §6.1.3 The Owner shall provide for coordination of the activities of the Owner's own forces and of each Separate Contractor with the Work of the Contractor,who shall cooperate with them. The Contractor shall participate with any Separate Contractors and the Owner in reviewing their construction schedules.The Contractor shall make any revisions to its construction schedule deemed necessary after a joint review and mutual agreement. The construction schedules shall then constitute the schedules to be used by the Contractor,Separate Contractors,and the Owner until subsequently revised. §6.1.4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,when the Owner performs construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner's own forces or with Separate Contractors,the Owner or its Separate Contractors shall have the same obligations and rights that the Contractor has under the Conditions of the Contract, including,without excluding others,those stated in Article 3,this Article 6,and Articles 10, 1 I,and 12. §6.2 Mutual Responsibility §6.2.1 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and Separate Contractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and performance of their activities,and shall connect and coordinate the Contractor's construction and operations with theirs as required by the Contract Documents. §6.2.2 If part of the Contractor's Work depends for proper execution or results upon construction or operations by 1 the Owner or a Separate Contractor,the Contractor shall,prior to proceeding with that portion of the Work, Init. MA Document A201 TM-2017.Copyright©1911,1915, 1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976, 1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AlA`- Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties, 21 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA''' Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 11:38:53 ET on 11/16/2018 under Order No. 1875935897 which expires on 07/13/2019,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA5D) promptly notify the Architect of apparent discrepancies or defects in the construction or operations by the Owner or Separate Contractor that would render it unsuitable for proper execution and results of the Contractor's Work. ti.. Failure of the Contractor to notify the Architect of apparent discrepancies or defects prior to proceeding with the Work shall constitute an acknowledgment that the Owner's or Separate Contractor's completed or partially completed construction is fit and proper to receive the Contractor's Work.The Contractor shall not be responsible for discrepancies or defects in the construction or operations by the Owner or Separate Contractor that are not apparent. §6.2.3 The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for costs the Owner incurs that are payable to a Separate ... Contractor because of the Contractor's delays,improperly timed activities or defective construction.The Owner shall be responsible to the Contractor for costs the Contractor incurs because of a Separate Contractor's delays, improperly timed activities,damage to the Work or defective construction. §6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage that the Contractor wrongfully causes to completed or partially completed construction or to property of the Owner or Separate Contractor as provided in Section 10.2.5. §6.2.5 The Owner and each Separate Contractor shall have the same responsibilities for cutting and patching as are described for the Contractor in Section 3.14. §6.3 Owner's Right to Clean Up If a dispute arises among the Contractor,Separate Contractors,and the Owner as to the responsibility under their respective contracts for maintaining the premises and surrounding area free from waste materials and rubbish,the Owner may clean up and the Architect will allocate the cost among those responsible. �.. ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK §7.1 General §7.1.1 Changes in the Work may be accomplished after execution of the Contract,and without invalidating the Contract,by Change Order,Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work,subject to the limitations stated in this Article 7 and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. §7.1.2 A Change Order shall be based upon agreement among the Owner,Contractor,and Architect.A Construction Change Directive requires agreement by the Owner and Architect and may or may not be agreed to by the Contractor. An order for a minor change in the Work may be issued by the Architect alone. §7.1.3 Changes in the Work shall be performed under applicable provisions of the Contract Documents.The Contractor shall proceed promptly with changes in the Work,unless otherwise provided in the Change Order, Construction Change Directive,or order for a minor change in the Work. §7.2 Change Orders §7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner,Contractor,and Architect stating their agreement upon all of the following: .1 The change in the Work; .2 The amount of the adjustment,if any,in the Contract Sum;and .3 The extent of the adjustment,if any,in the Contract Time. §7.3 Construction Change Directives §7.3.1 A Construction Change Directive is a written order prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner and Architect,directing a change in the Work prior to agreement on adjustment,if any,in the Contract Sum or Contract Time,or both.The Owner may by Construction Change Directive,without invalidating the Contract,order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions,deletions,or other revisions,the Contract Sum and Contract Time being adjusted accordingly. §7.3.2 A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the absence of total agreement on the terms of a Change Order. §7.3.3 If the Construction Change Directive provides for an adjustment to the Contract Sum,the adjustment shall be based on one of the following methods: Init. AIA Document A201 TM-2017.Copyright()1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AlA' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 22 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AM= Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 11:38:53 ET on 11/16/2018 under Order No. 1875935897 which expires on 07/13/2019,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA5D) .1 Mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit evaluation; .2 Unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon; .3 Cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutually acceptable fixed or percentage fee; or .4 As provided in Section 7.3.4. §7.3.4 If the Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees with the method for adjustment in the Contract Sum, the Architect shall determine the adjustment on the basis of reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to the change,including,in case of an increase in the Contract Sum,an amount for overhead and profit as set forth in the Agreement,or if no such amount is set forth in the Agreement,a reasonable amount.In such case,and also under Section 7.3.3.3,the Contractor shall keep and present,in such form as the Architect may prescribe,an itemized accounting together with appropriate supporting data.Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,costs for the purposes of this Section 7.3.4 shall be limited to the following: .1 Costs of labor,including applicable payroll taxes,fringe benefits required by agreement or custom, workers'compensation insurance,and other employee costs approved by the Architect; .2 Costs of materials,supplies,and equipment, including cost of transportation,whether incorporated or consumed; .3 Rental costs of machinery and equipment,exclusive of hand tools,whether rented from the Contractor or others; .4 Costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance,permit fees,and sales,use,or similar taxes,directly related to the change;and .5 Costs of supervision and field office personnel directly attributable to the change. §7.3.5 If the Contractor disagrees with the adjustment in the Contract Time,the Contractor may make a Claim in accordance with applicable provisions of Article 15. §7.3.6 Upon receipt of a Construction Change Directive,the Contractor shall promptly proceed with the change in the Work involved and advise the Architect of the Contractor's agreement or disagreement with the method,if any, provided in the Construction Change Directive for determining the proposed adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. §7.3.7 A Construction Change Directive signed by the Contractor indicates the Contractor's agreement therewith, including adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract Time or the method for determining them. Such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded as a Change Order. §7.3.8 The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor to the Owner for a deletion or change that results in a net decrease in the Contract Sum shall be actual net cost as confirmed by the Architect.When both additions and credits covering related Work or substitutions are involved in a change,the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis of net increase, if any,with respect to that change. §7.3.9 Pending final determination of the total cost of a Construction Change Directive to the Owner,the Contractor may request payment for Work completed under the Construction Change Directive in Applications for Payment. The Architect will make an interim determination for purposes of monthly certification for payment for those costs and certify for payment the amount that the Architect determines,in the Architect's professional judgment,to be reasonably justified. The Architect's interim determination of cost shall adjust the Contract Sum on the same basis as a Change Order,subject to the right of either party to disagree and assert a Claim in accordance with Article 15. §7.3.10 When the Owner and Contractor agree with a determination made by the Architect concerning the '1 adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time,or otherwise reach agreement upon the adjustments, such agreement shall be effective immediately and the Architect will prepare a Change Order. Change Orders may be issued for all or any part of a Construction Change Directive. §7.4 Minor Changes in the Work The Architect may order minor changes in the Work that are consistent with the intent of the Contract Documents and do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Sum or an extension of the Contract Time.The Architect's order for minor changes shall be in writing.If the Contractor believes that the proposed minor change in the Work will I nit. AIA Document A201 T"-2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties.Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AtA' Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties.and will be 23 prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 11:38:53 ET on 11/16/2018 under Order No. 1875935897 which expires on 07/13/2019,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA5D) affect the Contract Sum or Contract Time,the Contractor shall notify the Architect and shall not proceed to implement the change in the Work.If the Contractor performs the Work set forth in the Architect's order for a minor change without prior notice to the Architect that such change will affect the Contract Sum or Contract Time,the Contractor waives any adjustment to the Contract Sum or extension of the Contract Time. ARTICLE 8 TIME §8.1 Definitions §8.1.1 Unless otherwise provided,Contract Time is the period of time,including authorized adjustments,allotted in the Contract Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work. ... §8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in the Agreement. §8.1.3 The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the Architect in accordance with Section 9.8. §8.1.4 The term"day"as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless otherwise specifically defined. §8.2 Progress and Completion §8.2.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract.By executing the Agreement, the Contractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing the Work. §8.2.2 The Contractor shall not knowingly,except by agreement or instruction of the Owner in writing,commence the Work prior to the effective date of insurance required to be furnished by the Contractor and Owner. �.. §8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time. §8.3 Delays and Extensions of Time §8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the commencement or progress of the Work by(1)an act or neglect of the Owner or Architect,of an employee of either,or of a Separate Contractor; (2)by changes ordered in the �.. Work; (3)by labor disputes,fire,unusual delay in deliveries,unavoidable casualties,adverse weather conditions documented in accordance with Section 15.1.6.2,or other causes beyond the Contractor's control;(4)by delay authorized by the Owner pending mediation and binding dispute resolution;or(5)by other causes that the Contractor asserts,and the Architect determines,justify delay,then the Contract Time shall be extended for such reasonable time as the Architect may determine. §8.3.2 Claims relating to time shall be made in accordance with applicable provisions of Article 15. �... §8.3.3 This Section 8.3 does not preclude recovery of damages for delay by either party under other provisions of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION §9.1 Contract Sum §9.1.1 The Contract Sum is stated in the Agreement and,including authorized adjustments,is the total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. §9.1.2 If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon,and if quantities originally contemplated are materially changed so that application of such unit prices to the actual quantities causes substantial .. inequity to the Owner or Contractor,the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted. §9.2 Schedule of Values Where the Contract is based on a stipulated sum or Guaranteed Maximum Price,the Contractor shall submit a schedule of values to the Architect before the first Application for Payment,allocating the entire Contract Sum to the various portions of the Work.The schedule of values shall be prepared in the form,and supported by the data to substantiate its accuracy,required by the Architect.This schedule,unless objected to by the Architect,shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's Applications for Payment.Any changes to the schedule of values shall be submitted to the Architect and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect may require,and AIA Document A201 TN-2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The Init. American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 24 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA-- Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 11:38:53 ET on 11/16/2018 under Order No. 1875935897 which expires on 07/13/2019,and is not for resale. (369ADA5D) ►� User Notes: 1 unless objected to by the Architect,shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's subsequent Applications for Payment. ..� §9.3 Applications for Payment §9.3.1 At least ten days before the date established for each progress payment,the Contractor shall submit to the Architect an itemized Application for Payment prepared in accordance with the schedule of values, if required under Section 9.2,for completed portions of the Work. The application shall be notarized,if required,and supported by all data substantiating the Contractor's right to payment that the Owner or Architect require,such as copies of requisitions,and releases and waivers of liens from Subcontractors and suppliers, and shall reflect retainage if provided for in the Contract Documents. §9.3.1.1 As provided in Section 7.3.9,such applications may include requests for payment on account of changes in the Work that have been properly authorized by Construction Change Directives,or by interim determinations of the Architect, but not yet included in Change Orders. §9.3.1.2 Applications for Payment shall not include requests for payment for portions of the Work for which the Contractor does not intend to pay a Subcontractor or supplier,unless such Work has been performed by others whom the Contractor intends to pay. §9.3.2Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,payments shall be made on account of materials and — equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work.If approved in advance by the Owner, payment may similarly be made for materials and equipment suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing. Payment for materials and equipment stored on or off the site shall be conditioned upon compliance by the Contractor with procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner's title to such materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner's interest,and shall include the costs of applicable insurance, storage, and transportation to the site,for such materials and equipment stored off the site. §9.3.3 The Contractor,warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment. The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an Application for Payment all Work for which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and payments received from the Owner shall,to the best of the Contractor's knowledge,information,and belief,be free and clear of liens,claims, security interests, or encumbrances,in favor of the Contractor,Subcontractors,suppliers,or other persons or entities that provided labor.materials,and equipment relating to the Work. §9.4 Certificates for Payment §9.4.1 The Architect will,within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment,either(1) issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment in the full amount of the Application for Payment,with a copy to the Contractor; or(2)issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment for such amount as the Architect determines is properly due,and notify the Contractor and Owner of the Architect's reasons for withholding certification in part as provided in Section 9.5.1; or(3)withhold certification of the entire Application for Payment,and notify the Contractor and Owner of the Architect's reason for withholding certification in whole as provided in Section 9.5.1. §9.4.2 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the Architect to the Owner, based on the Architect's evaluation of the Work and the data in the Application for Payment,that,to the best of the Architect's knowledge,information,and belief,the Work has progressed to the point indicated,the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents,and that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. The foregoing representations are subject to an evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion,to results of subsequent tests and inspections,to correction of minor deviations from the Contract Documents prior to completion,and to specific qualifications expressed by the ''4 Architect. However,the issuance of a Certificate for Payment will not be a representation that the Architect has(1) made exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work;(2)reviewed construction means,methods,techniques,sequences,or procedures; (3)reviewed copies of requisitions received 1 from Subcontractors and suppliers and other data requested by the Owner to substantiate the Contractor's right to payment; or(4)made examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum. Init. ALA Document A201 TN-2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958, 1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 byThe American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright A. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA Document,or anyyne ciiland Law and Internationalpelis, Treaties, 25 d will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AlA software atsever11:38:53 ET on 11/16/2018� under�Order No. 1875935897 which expires on 07/13/2019,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA5D) iI §9.5 Decisions to Withhold Certification §9.5.1 The Architect may withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part,to the extent reasonably necessary ... to protect the Owner,if in the Architect's opinion the representations to the Owner required by Section 9.4.2 cannot be made.If the Architect is unable to certify payment in the amount of the Application,the Architect will notify the Contractor and Owner as provided in Section 9.4.1.If the Contractor and Architect cannot agree on a revised amount,the Architect will promptly issue a Certificate for Payment for the amount for which the Architect is able to make such representations to the Owner.The Architect may also withhold a Certificate for Payment or,because of subsequently discovered evidence,may nullify the whole or a part of a Certificate for Payment previously issued,to such extent as may be necessary in the Architect's opinion to protect the Owner from loss for which the Contractor is responsible,including loss resulting from acts and omissions described in Section 3.3.2,because of .1 defective Work not remedied; .2 third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims,unless security acceptable to the Owner is provided by the Contractor; .3 failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or suppliers for labor,materials or equipment; .4 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum; .5 damage to the Owner or a Separate Contractor; .6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time,and that the unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for the anticipated delay;or .7 repeated failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. §9.5.2 When either party disputes the Architect's decision regarding a Certificate for Payment under Section 9.5.1, in whole or in part,that party may submit a Claim in accordance with Article 15. y- §9.5.3 When the reasons for withholding certification are removed,certification will be made for amounts previously withheld. §9.5.4 If the Architect withholds certification for payment under Section 9.5.1.3,the Owner may,at its sole option, issue joint checks to the Contractor and to any Subcontractor or supplier to whom the Contractor failed to make payment for Work properly performed or material or equipment suitably delivered.If the Owner makes payments by L., joint check,the Owner shall notify the Architect and the Contractor shall reflect such payment on its next Application for Payment. §9.6 Progress Payments §9.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment,the Owner shall make payment in the manner and within the time provided in the Contract Documents,and shall so notify the Architect. , §9.6.2 The Contractor shall pay each Subcontractor,no later than seven days after receipt of payment from the Owner,the amount to which the Subcontractor is entitled,reflecting percentages actually retained from payments to the Contractor on account of the Subcontractor's portion of the Work.The Contractor shall,by appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor,require each Subcontractor to make payments to Sub-subcontractors in a similar manner. §9.6.3 The Architect will,on request,furnish to a Subcontractor,if practicable,information regarding percentages of L. completion or amounts applied for by the Contractor and action taken thereon by the Architect and Owner on account of portions of the Work done by such Subcontractor. §9.6.4 The Owner has the right to request written evidence from the Contractor that the Contractor has properly paid i.. Subcontractors and suppliers amounts paid by the Owner to the Contractor for subcontracted Work.If the Contractor fails to furnish such evidence within seven days,the Owner shall have the right to contact Subcontractors and suppliers to ascertain whether they have been properly paid.Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an ►.. obligation to pay,or to see to the payment of money to,a Subcontractor or supplier,except as may otherwise be required by law. §9.6.5 The Contractor's payments to suppliers shall be treated in a manner similar to that provided in Sections 9.6.2, •— 9.6.3 and 9.6.4. AIA Document A201'"-2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The l"' Init. American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA"Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 26 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA.,'Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 11:38:53 ET on 11/16/2018 under Order No. 1875935897 which expires on 07/13/2019,and is not for resale. (3B9ADA5D) L' User Notes: 1 7 ""`1 §9.6.6 A Certificate for Payment,a progress payment,or partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents. §9.6.7 Unless the Contractor provides the Owner with a payment bond in the full penal sum of the Contract Sum, payments received by the Contractor for Work properly performed by Subcontractors or provided by suppliers shall be held by the Contractor for those Subcontractors or suppliers who performed Work or furnished materials,or both, under contract with the Contractor for which payment was made by the Owner.Nothing contained herein shall — require money to be placed in a separate account and not commingled with money of the Contractor,create any fiduciary liability or tort liability on the part of the Contractor for breach of trust,or entitle any person or entity to an award of punitive damages against the Contractor for breach of the requirements of this provision. §9.6.8 Provided the Owner has fulfilled its payment obligations under the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall defend and indemnify the Owner from all loss,liability,damage or expense,including reasonable attorney's fees and litigation expenses,arising out of any lien claim or other claim for payment by any Subcontractor or supplier of — any tier.Upon receipt of notice of a lien claim or other claim for payment,the Owner shall notify the Contractor.If approved by the applicable court,when required,the Contractor may substitute a surety bond for the property against which the lien or other claim for payment has been asserted. §9.7 Failure of Payment If the Architect does not issue a Certificate for Payment,through no fault of the Contractor,within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment,or if the Owner does not pay the Contractor within seven days after the date established in the Contract Documents,the amount certified by the Architect or awarded by binding dispute,resolution,then the Contractor may,upon seven additional days'notice to the Owner and Architect,stop the Work until payment of the amount owing has been received.The Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor's reasonable costs of shutdown,delay and start- up,plus interest as provided for in the Contract Documents. §9.8 Substantial Completion rub §9.8.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use. §9.8.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work,or a portion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept separately,is substantially complete,the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect a comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment.Failure to include an item on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. §9.8.3 Upon receipt of the Contractor's list,the Architect will make an inspection to determine whether the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete. if the Architect's inspection discloses any item,whether or not 7 included on the Contractor's list,which is not sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work or designated portion thereof for its intended use,the Contractor shall,before issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion,complete or correct such item upon notification ..•1 by the Architect.In such case,the Contractor shall then submit a request for another inspection by the Architect to d determine Substantial Completion. §9.8.4 When the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete,the Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion that shall establish the date of Substantial Completion; establish responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for security,maintenance,heat,utilities,damage to the Work and insurance;and fix the time within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying the — Certificate.Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion. §9.8.5 The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the Owner and Contractor for their written `N acceptance of responsibilities assigned to them in the Certificate. Upon such acceptance,and consent of surety if any,the Owner shall make payment of retainage applying to the Work or designated portion thereof. Such payment shall be adjusted for Work that is incomplete or not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Init AIA Document A201 TM—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This MA' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties, 27 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA,, Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 11:38:53 ET on 11/16/2018 under Order No. 1875935897 which expires on 07/13/2019,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA5D) i §9.9 Partial Occupancy or Use §9.9.1 The Owner may occupy or use any completed or partially completed portion of the Work at any stage when r.. such portion is designated by separate agreement with the Contractor,provided such occupancy or use is consented to by the insurer and authorized by public authorities having jurisdiction over the Project. Such partial occupancy or use may commence whether or not the portion is substantially complete,provided the Owner and Contractor have accepted in writing the responsibilities assigned to each of them for payments,retainagc, if any,security, maintenance,heat,utilities,damage to the Work and insurance,and have agreed in writing concerning the period for correction of the Work and commencement of warranties required by the Contract Documents.When the Contractor considers a portion substantially complete,the Contractor shall prepare and submit a list to the Architect as provided under Section 9.8.2. Consent of the Contractor to partial occupancy or use shall not be unreasonably withheld.The stage of the progress of the Work shall be determined by written agreement between the Owner and Contractor or,if no agreement is reached,by decision of the Architect. §9.9.2 Immediately prior to such partial occupancy or use,the Owner,Contractor,and Architect shall jointly inspect the area to be occupied or portion of the Work to be used in order to determine and record the condition of the Work. §9.9.3 Unless otherwise agreed upon,partial occupancy or use of a portion or portions of the Work shall not constitute acceptance of Work not complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents. §9.10 Final Completion and Final Payment §9.10.1 Upon receipt of the Contractor's notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance and upon receipt of a final Application for Payment,the Architect will promptly make such inspection.When the Architect finds the Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed,the Architect will �.. promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment stating that to the best of the Architect's knowledge,information and belief,and on the basis of the Architect's on-site visits and inspections,the Work has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and that the entire balance found to be due the Contractor and noted in the final Certificate is due and payable.The Architect's final Certificate for Payment will constitute a further representation that conditions listed in Section 9.10.2 as precedent to the Contractor's being entitled to final payment have been fulfilled. §9.10.2 Neither final payment nor any remaining retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor submits to the Architect(1) an affidavit that payrolls,bills for materials and equipment,and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner's property might be responsible or encumbered(less amounts withheld by Owner)have been paid or otherwise satisfied,(2)a certificate evidencing that insurance required by the Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect,(3)a written statement that the Contractor knows of no reason that the insurance will not be renewable to cover the period required by the Contract Documents 4 consent of surety,if an to final payment, documentation of anyspecial warranties such as ►.. j ,� ) Y, Y� Py (5) p manufacturers' warranties or specific Subcontractor warranties,and(6)if required by the Owner,other data establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations,such as receipts and releases and waivers of liens,claims, security interests, or encumbrances arising out of the Contract,to the extent and in such form as may be designated 1.... by the Owner.If a Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Owner,the Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien,claim,security interest,or encumbrance.If a lien,claim,security interest,or encumbrance remains unsatisfied after payments are made,the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may be compelled to pay in discharging the lien, claim,security interest,or encumbrance,including all costs and reasonable attorneys' fees. §9.10.3 If,after Substantial Completion of the Work,final completion thereof is materially delayed through no fault .. of the Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion,and the Architect so confirms,the Owner shall,upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Architect,and without terminating the Contract,make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed,corrected,and accepted. If the remaining balance for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than retainage stipulated in the Contract Documents,and if bonds have been furnished,the written consent of the surety to payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Architect prior to certification of such payment. Such payment shall be made under terms and conditions governing final payment, 1mm except that it shall not constitute a waiver of Claims. AIA Document A2D1"—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The i..r Init. American Institute of Architects.AU rights reserved.WARNING:This AiA"- Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and international Treaties. 28 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA' Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 11:38:53 ET on 11/16/2018 under Order No. 1875935897 which expires on 07/13/2019,and is not for resale. User Notes: (389ADA5D) d §9.10.4 The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of Claims by the Owner except those arising from .1 liens,Claims,security interests,or encumbrances arising out of the Contract and unsettled; .2 failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents; .3 terms of special warranties required by the Contract Documents;or .4 audits performed by the Owner,if permitted by the Contract Documents,after final payment. §9.10.5 Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor,a Subcontractor,or a supplier,shall constitute a waiver of "'' claims by that payee except those previously made in writing and identified by that payee as unsettled at the time of final Application for Payment. ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY §10.1 Safety Precautions and Programs The Contractor shall be,responsible for initiating,maintaining,and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the Contract. §10.2 Safety of Persons and Property §10.2.1 The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for safety of,and shall provide reasonable protection to prevent damage,injury,or loss to .1 employees on the Work and other persons who may be affected thereby; .2 the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein,whether in storage on or off the site, under care,custody,or control of the Contractor,a Subcontractor,or a Sub-subcontractor;and .3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto,such as trees,shrubs,lawns,walks,pavements,roadways, structures,and utilities not designated for removal,relocation,or replacement in the course of construction. §10.2.2 The Contractor shall comply with,and give notices required by applicable laws,statutes,ordinances,codes, rules and regulations,and lawful orders of public authorities,bearing on safety of persons or property or their protection from damage,injury,or loss. §10.2.3 The Contractor shall implement,erect,and maintain,as required by existing conditions and performance of the Contract,reasonable safeguards for safety and protection,including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards;promulgating safety regulations;and notifying the owners and users of adjacent sites and utilities of the safeguards. §10.2.4 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment,or unusual methods are -4 necessary for execution of the Work,the Contractor shall exercise utmost care and carry on such activities under supervision of properly qualified personnel. §'10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss(other than damage or loss insured under property insurance required by the Contract Documents)to property referred to in Sections 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3 caused in whole or in part by the Contractor,a Subcontractor,a Sub-subcontractor,or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them,or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under Sections 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3.The Contractor may make a Claim for the cost to remedy the damage or loss to the extent such damage or loss is attributable to acts or omissions of the Owner or Architect or anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them,or by anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable,and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contractor.The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in addition to the Contractor's obligations under Section 3.18. §10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of the Contractor's organization at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents.This person shall be the Contractor's superintendent unless otherwise designated by the Contractor in writing to the Owner and Architect. §10.2.7 The Contractor shall not permit any part of the construction or site to be loaded so as to cause damage or create an unsafe condition. Init. AIA Document A201 T"—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This ALA' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 29 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA,Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 11:38:53 ET on 11/16/2018 under Order No. 1875935897 which expires on 07/13/2019,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA5D) §10.2.8 Injury or Damage to Person or Property If either party suffers injury or damage to person or property because of an act or omission of the other party,or of others for whose acts such party is legally responsible,notice of the injury or damage,whether or not insured,shall be given to the other party within a reasonable time not exceeding 21 days after discovery.The notice shall provide sufficient detail to enable the other party to investigate the matter. §10.3 Hazardous Materials and Substances §10.3.1 The Contractor is responsible for compliance with any requirements included in the Contract Documents regarding hazardous materials or substances. if the Contractor encounters a hazardous material or substance not ... addressed in the Contract Documents and if reasonable precautions will be inadequate to prevent foreseeable bodily injury or death to persons resulting from a material or substance,including but not limited to asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl(PCB),encountered on the site by the Contractor,the Contractor shall,upon recognizing the condition, immediately stop Work in the affected area and notify the Owner and Architect of the condition. §10.3.2 Upon receipt of the Contractor's notice,the Owner shall obtain the services of a licensed laboratory to verify the presence or absence of the material or substance reported by the Contractor and, in the event such material or substance is found to be present,to cause it to be rendered harmless.Unless otherwise required by the Contract .� Documents,the Owner shall furnish in writing to the Contractor and Architect the names and qualifications of persons or entities who are to perform tests verifying the presence or absence of the material or substance or who are to perform the task of removal or safe containment of the material or substance.The Contractor and the Architect will promptly reply to the Owner in writing stating whether or not either has reasonable objection to the persons or entities proposed by the Owner.If either the Contractor or Architect has an objection to a person or entity proposed by the Owner,the Owner shall propose another to whom the Contractor and the Architect have no reasonable objection.When the material or substance has been rendered harmless,Work in the affected area shall resume upon written agreement of the Owner and Contractor.By Change Order,the Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor's reasonable additional costs of shutdown,delay, and start-up. §10.3.3 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor, Subcontractors,Architect,Architect's consultants,and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims,damages,losses,and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys' fees,arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work in the affected area if in fact the material or substance presents the risk of bodily injury or death as described in Section 10.3.1 and has not been rendered harmless,provided that such claim,damage, loss,or expense is attributable to bodily injury,sickness,disease or death,or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself),except to the extent that such damage,loss,or expense is due to the fault or negligence of the party seeking indemnity. §10.3.4 The Owner shall not be responsible under this Section 10.3 for hazardous materials or substances the Contractor brings to the site unless such materials or substances are required by the Contract Documents.The Owner shall be responsible for hazardous materials or substances required by the Contract Documents,except to the extent of the Contractor's fault or negligence in the use and handling of such materials or substances. §10.3.5 The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for the cost and expense the Owner incurs(1)for remediation of hazardous materials or substances the Contractor brings to the site and negligently handles,or(2)where the Contractor fails to perform its obligations under Section 10.3.1,except to the extent that the cost and expense are due to the Owner's fault or negligence. §10.3.6 If,without negligence on the part of the Contractor,the Contractor is held liable by a government agency for the cost of remediation of a hazardous material or substance solely by reason of performing Work as required by the Contract Documents,the Owner shall reimburse the Contractor for all cost and expense thereby incurred. §10.4 Emergencies In an emergency affecting safety of persons or property,the Contractor shall act,at the Contractor's discretion,to prevent threatened damage,injury,or loss.Additional compensation or extension of time claimed by the Contractor on account of an emergency shall be determined as provided in Article 15 and Article 7. AIA Document A201 TM-2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The r... init. American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and international Treaties. 30 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document;or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 11:38:53 ET on 11/16/2018 under Order No. 1875935897 which expires on 07/13/2019,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA5D) L ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS §11.1 Contractor's Insurance and Bonds §11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase and maintain insurance of the types and limits of liability,containing the endorsements,and subject to the terms and conditions,as described in the Agreement or elsewhere in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall purchase and maintain the required insurance from an insurance company or insurance companies lawfully authorized to issue insurance in the jurisdiction where the Project is located.The Owner,Architect,and Architect's consultants shall be named as additional insureds under the Contractor's —' commercial general liability policy or as otherwise described in the Contract Documents. §11.1.2 The Contractor shall provide surety bonds of the types, for such penal sums,and subject to such terms and conditions as required by the Contract Documents.The Contractor shall purchase and maintain the required bonds from a company or companies lawfully authorized to issue surety bonds in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. §11.1.3 Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of bonds covering payment of obligations arising under the Contract,the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of the bonds or shall authorize a copy to be furnished. §11.1.4 Notice of Cancellation or Expiration of Contractor's Required Insurance.Within three(3)business days of the date the Contractor becomes aware of an impending or actual cancellation or expiration of any insurance required by the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall provide notice to the Owner of such impending or actual cancellation — or expiration.Upon receipt of notice from the Contractor,the Owner shall,unless the lapse in coverage arises from an act or omission of the Owner,have the right to stop the Work until the lapse in coverage has been cured by the procurement of replacement coverage by the Contractor. The furnishing of notice by the Contractor shall not relieve the Contractor of any contractual obligation to provide any required coverage. §11.2 Owner's Insurance §11.2.1 The Owner shall purchase and maintain insurance of the types and limits of liability, containing the — endorsements,and subject to the terms and conditions,as described in the Agreement or elsewhere in the Contract Documents. The Owner shall purchase and maintain the required insurance from an insurance company or insurance companies lawfully authorized to issue insurance in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. §11.2.2 Failure to Purchase Required Property Insurance.If the Owner fails to purchase and maintain the required property insurance,with all of the coverages and in the amounts described in the Agreement or elsewhere in the Contract Documents,the Owner shall inform the Contractor in writing prior to commencement of the Work.Upon receipt of notice from the Owner,the Contractor may delay commencement of the Work and may obtain insurance that will protect the interests of the Contractor,Subcontractors,and Sub-Subcontractors in the Work.When the failure to provide coverage has been cured or resolved,the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be equitably adjusted. In the event the Owner fails to procure coverage,the Owner waives all rights against the Contractor, Subcontractors,and Sub-subcontractors to the extent the loss to the Owner would have been covered by the insurance to have been procured by the Owner.The cost of the insurance shall be charged to the Owner by a Change Order.If the Owner does not provide written notice,and the Contractor is damaged by the failure or neglect of the --1 Owner to purchase or maintain the required insurance,the Owner shall reimburse the Contractor for all reasonable costs and damages attributable thereto. §11.2.3 Notice of Cancellation or Expiration of Owner's Required Property Insurance.Within three(3)business days of the date the Owner becomes aware of an impending or actual cancellation or expiration of any property insurance required by the Contract Documents,the Owner shall provide notice to the Contractor of such impending or actual cancellation or expiration.Unless the lapse in coverage arises from an act or omission of the Contractor: (1)the Contractor,upon receipt of notice from the Owner,shall have the right to stop the Work until the lapse in coverage has been cured by the procurement of replacement coverage by either the Owner or the Contractor;(2)the Contract Time and Contract Sum shall be equitably adjusted;and(3)the Owner waives all rights against the Contractor, Subcontractors,and Sub-subcontractors to the extent any loss to the Owner would have been covered by the insurance had it not expired or been cancelled. If the Contractor purchases replacement coverage,the cost of the insurance shall be charged to the Owner by an appropriate Change Order.The furnishing of notice by the Owner shall not relieve the Owner of any contractual obligation to provide required insurance. Init. MA Document A201 TM-2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AlPe Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 31 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA', Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 11:38:53 ET on 11/16/2018 under Order No. 1875935897 which expires on 07/13/2019,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA5D) §11.3 Waivers of Subrogation §11.3.1 The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against(I)each other and any of their subcontractors,sub- subcontractors,agents,and employees,each of the other;(2)the Architect and Architect's consultants;and(3) Separate Contractors,if any,and any of their subcontractors,sub-subcontractors,agents,and employees,for damages caused by fire,or other causes of loss,to the extent those losses are covered by property insurance required by the Agreement or other property insurance applicable to the Project,except such rights as they have to proceeds of such insurance.The Owner or Contractor,as appropriate,shall require similar written waivers in favor of the individuals and entities identified above from the Architect,Architect's consultants,Separate Contractors, subcontractors,and sub-subcontractors.The policies of insurance purchased and maintained by each person or entity ... agreeing to waive claims pursuant to this section 11.3.1 shall not prohibit this waiver of subrogation.This waiver of subrogation shall be effective as to a person or entity(1)even though that person or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification,contractual or otherwise,(2)even though that person or entity did not pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly,or(3)whether or not the person or entity had an insurable interest in the damaged property. §11.3.2 If during the Project construction period the Owner insures properties,real or personal or both,at or adjacent to the site by property insurance under policies separate from those insuring the Project,or if after final payment ... property insurance is to be provided on the completed Project through a policy or policies other than those insuring the Project during the construction period,to the extent permissible by such policies,the Owner waives all rights in accordance with the terms of Section 11.3.1 for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss covered by this separate property insurance. §11.4 Loss of Use, Business Interruption,and Delay in Completion Insurance The Owner, at the Owner's option,may purchase and maintain insurance that will protect the Owner against loss of use of the Owner's property,or the inability to conduct normal operations,due to fire or other causes of loss.The Owner waives all rights of action against the Contractor and Architect for loss of use of the Owner's property,due to fire or other hazards however caused. §11.5 Adjustment and Settlement of Insured Loss §11.5.1 A loss insured under the property insurance required by the Agreement shall be adjusted by the Owner as fiduciary and made payable to the Owner as fiduciary for the insureds,as their interests may appear,subject to ... requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause and of Section 11.5.2.The Owner shall pay the Architect and Contractor their just shares of insurance proceeds received by the Owner,and by appropriate agreements the Architect and Contractor shall make payments to their consultants and Subcontractors in similar manner. §11.5.2 Prior to settlement of an insured loss,the Owner shall notify the Contractor of the terms of the proposed settlement as well as the proposed allocation of the insurance proceeds.The Contractor shall have 14 days from receipt of notice to object to the proposed settlement or allocation of the proceeds.If the Contractor does not object, the Owner shall settle the loss and the Contractor shall be bound by the settlement and allocation.Upon receipt,the Owner shall deposit the insurance proceeds in a separate account and make the appropriate distributions.Thereafter, if no other agreement is made or the Owner does not terminate the Contract for convenience,the Owner and -- Contractor shall execute a Change Order for reconstruction of the damaged or destroyed Work in the amount allocated for that purpose. If the Contractor timely objects to either the terms of the proposed settlement or the allocation of the proceeds,the Owner may proceed to settle the insured loss,and any dispute between the Owner and Contractor arising out of the settlement or allocation of the proceeds shall be resolved pursuant to Article 15. Pending resolution of any dispute,the Owner may issue a Construction Change Directive for the reconstruction of the damaged or destroyed Work. ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK §12.1 Uncovering of Work §12.1.1 If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the Architect's request or to requirements specifically expressed in the Contract Documents,it must,if requested in writing by the Architect,be uncovered for the Architect's examination and be replaced at the Contractor's expense without change in the Contract Time. §12.1.2 If a portion of the Work has been covered that the Architect has not specifically requested to examine prior to its being covered,the Architect may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor. If such Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment to AIA Document A201 TN—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The ►� Init. American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 32 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA'Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 11:38:53 ET on 11/16/2018 under Order No. 1875935897 which expires on 07/13/2019,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA5D) Una the Contract Sum and Contract Time as may be appropriate.If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents,the costs of uncovering the Work,and the cost of correction,shall be at the Contractor's expense. §12.2 Correction of Work §12.2.1 Before Substantial Completion The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Architect or failing to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents,discovered before Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated,installed or — completed. Costs of correcting such rejected Work,including additional testing and inspections,the cost of uncovering and replacement,and compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby, shall be at the Contractor's expense. §'12.2.2 After Substantial Completion §12.2.2.1 In addition to the Contractor's obligations under Section 3.5,if,within one year after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof or after the date for commencement of warranties established under Section 9.9.1,or by terms of any applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of notice from the Owner to do so,unless the Owner has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition.The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition.During the one-year period for correction of Work,if the Owner fails to notify the Contractor and give the Contractor an opportunity to make the correction,the Owner waives the rights to require correction by the Contractor and to make a claim for breach of warranty.If the Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work within a reasonable time during that period after receipt of notice from the Owner or Architect,the Owner may correct it in accordance with Section 2.5. §12.2.2.2 The one-year period for correction of Work shall be extended with respect to portions of Work first performed after Substantial Completion by the period of time between Substantial Completion and the actual completion of that portion of the Work. §12.2.2.3 The one-year period for correction of Work shall not be extended by corrective Work performed by the Contractor pursuant to this Section 12.2. §12.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site portions of the Work that are not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by the Contractor nor accepted by the Owner. §12.2.4 The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged construction of the Owner or Separate Contractors,whether completed or partially completed,caused by the Contractor's correction or removal of Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. §12.2.5 Nothing contained in this Section 12.2 shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to other obligations the Contractor has under the Contract Documents.Establishment of the one-year period for f correction of Work as described in Section 12.2.2 relates only to the specific obligation of the Contractor to correct the Work,and has no relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced,nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contractor's liability with respect to the Contractor's obligations other than specifically to correct the Work. §12.3 Acceptance of Nonconforming Work If the Owner prefers to accept Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents,the Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction,in which case the Contract Sum will be reduced as appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not final payment has been made. I ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS §13.1 Governing Law The Contract shall be governed by the law of the place where the Project is located,excluding that jurisdiction's choice of law rules. If the parties have selected arbitration as the method of binding dispute resolution,the Federal 1 Arbitration Act shall govern Section 15.4. Init AIA Document A201 Tu—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNiNG:This AlA'' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and international Treaties. 33 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA, Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 11:38:53 ET on 11/16/2018 under Order No. 1875935897 which expires on 07/13/2019,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA5D) §13.2 Successors and Assigns §13.2.1 The Owner and Contractor respectively bind themselves,their partners,successors,assigns,and legal representatives to covenants,agreements,and obligations contained in the Contract Documents.Except as provided ... in Section 13.2.2,neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract as a whole without written consent of the other.If either party attempts to make an assignment without such consent,that party shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all obligations under the Contract. §13.2.2 The Owner may,without consent of the Contractor,assign the Contract to a lender providing construction financing for the Project,if the lender assumes the Owner's rights and obligations under the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall execute all consents reasonably required to facilitate the assignment. §13.3 Rights and Remedies §13.3.1 Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and rights and remedies available thereunder ■— shall be in addition to and not a limitation of duties,obligations,rights,and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law. Vow §13.3.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner,Architect,or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of a right or duty afforded them under the Contract,nor shall such action or failure to act constitute approval of or acquiescence in a breach thereunder,except as may be specifically agreed upon in writing. §13.4 Tests and Inspections §13.4.1 Tests,inspections,and approvals of portions of the Work shall be made as required by the Contract Documents and by applicable laws,statutes,ordinances,codes,rules,and regulations or lawful orders of public authorities.Unless otherwise provided,the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests,inspections,and approvals with an independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner,or with the appropriate public authority,and shall bear all related costs of tests,inspections,and approvals.The Contractor shall give the Architect timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures.The Owner shall bear costs of tests,inspections,or approvals that do not become requirements until after bids are received or negotiations concluded.The Owner shall directly arrange and pay for tests,inspections,or approvals where building codes or applicable laws or regulations so require. §13.4.2 If the Architect,Owner,or public authorities having jurisdiction determine that portions of the Work require additional testing,inspection,or,approval not included under Section 13.4.1,the Architect will,upon written authorization from the Owner,instruct the Contractor to make arrangements for such additional testing,inspection, .-. or approval,by an entity acceptable to the Owner,and the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Architect of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. Such costs,except as provided in Section 13.4.3,shall be at the Owner's expense. §13.4.3 If procedures for testing,inspection,or approval under Sections 13.4.1 and 13.4.2 reveal failure of the portions of the Work to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents,all costs made necessary by such failure,including those of repeated procedures and compensation for the Architect's services and expenses, L. shall be at the Contractor's expense. §13.4.4 Required certificates of testing,inspection,or approval shall,unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents,be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Architect. §13.4.5 If the Architect is to observe tests,inspections,or approvals required by the Contract Documents,the Architect will do so promptly and,where practicable,at the normal place of testing. ... §13.4.6 Tests or inspections conducted pursuant to the Contract Documents shall be made promptly to avoid unreasonable delay in the Work. §13.5 Interest Payments due and unpaid under the Contract Documents shall bear interest from the date payment is due at the rate the parties agree upon in writing or,in the absence thereof,at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project is located. AIA Document A201 TN—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The �... Init. American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA'' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 34 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA'Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 11:38:53 ET on 11/16/2018 under Order No. 1875935897 which expires on 07/13/2019,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA5D) � ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT §14.1 Termination by the Contractor §14.1.1 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if the Work is stopped for a period of 30 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor,a Subcontractor,a Sub-subcontractor,their agents or employees,or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work,for any of the following reasons: .1 Issuance of an order of a court or other public authority having jurisdiction that requires all Work to be stopped; .2 An act of government,such as a declaration of national emergency,that requires all Work to be stopped; .3 Because the Architect has not issued a Certificate for Payment and has not notified the Contractor of the reason for withholding certification as provided in Section 9.4.1,or because the Owner has not made payment on a Certificate for Payment within the time stated in the Contract Documents;or .4 The Owner has failed to furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence as required by Section 2.2. §14.1.2 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if,through no act or fault of the Contractor,a Subcontractor,a Sub-subcontractor,thew agents or employees,or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work, repeated suspensions, delays,or interruptions of the entire Work by the Owner as described in Section 14.3, constitute in the aggregate more than 100 percent of the total number of days scheduled for completion,or 120 days in any 365-day period,whichever is less. §14.1.3 If one of the reasons described in Section 14.1.1 or 14.1.2 exists,the Contractor may,upon seven days' notice to the Owner and Architect,terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for Work executed, as well as reasonable overhead and profit on Work not executed,and costs incurred by reason of such termination. _ §14.1.4 If the Work is stopped for a period of 60 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor,a Subcontractor,a Sub-subcontractor,or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work because the Owner has repeatedly failed to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to matters important to the progress of the Work,the Contractor may,upon seven additional days'notice to the Owner and the Architect,terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner as provided in Section 14.1.3. §14.2 Termination by the Owner for Cause §14.2.1 The Owner may terminate the Contract if the Contractor .1 repeatedly refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials; .2 fails to make payment to Subcontractors or suppliers in accordance with the respective agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors or suppliers; .3 repeatedly disregards applicable laws,statutes,ordinances,codes,rules and regulations,or lawful orders of a public authority;or .4 otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision of the Contract Documents. §14.2.2 When any of the reasons described in Section 14.2.1 exist,and upon certification by the Architect that sufficient cause exists to justify such action,the Owner may,without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the Owner and after giving the Contractor and the Contractor's surety,if any,seven days'notice,terminate employment l., of the Contractor and may,subject to any prior rights of the surety: .1 Exclude the Contractor from the site and take possession of all materials,equipment,tools,and construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor; .2 Accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Section 5.4;and .3 Finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient.Upon written request of the Contractor,the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor a detailed accounting of the costs incurred by the Owner in finishing the Work. §14.2.3 When the Owner terminates the Contract for one of the reasons stated in Section 14.2.1,the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is finished. §14.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work,including compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby,and other damages incurred by the Owner and not expressly waived,such excess shall be paid to the Contractor.If such costs and damages exceed the unpaid balance, Init. AIA Document A201 T"-2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AK' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 35 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AW Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 11:38:53 ET on 11/16/2018 under Order No. 1875935897 which expires on 07/13/2019,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA5D) the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner.The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner,as the case may be,shall be certified by the Initial Decision Maker,upon application,and this obligation for payment shall survive termination of the Contract. §14.3 Suspension by the Owner for Convenience §14.3.1 The Owner may,without cause,order the Contractor in writing to suspend,delay or interrupt the Work, in whole or in part for such period of time as the Owner may determine. §14.3.2 The Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be adjusted for increases in the cost and time caused by suspension,delay,or interruption under Section 14.3.1. Adjustment of the Contract Sum shall include profit.No adjustment shall be made to the extent 1 .1 that performance is,was,or would have been, so suspended,delayed,or interrupted,by another cause for which the Contractor is responsible;or .2 that an equitable adjustment is made or denied under another provision of the Contract. §14.4 Termination by the Owner for Convenience §14.4.1 The Owner may, at any time,terminate the Contract for the Owner's convenience and without cause. §14.4.2 Upon receipt of notice from the Owner of such termination for the Owner's convenience,the Contractor shall .1 cease operations as directed by the Owner in the notice; .2 take actions necessary,or that the Owner may direct,for the protection and preservation of the Work; and .3 except for Work directed to be performed prior to the effective date of termination stated in the notice, terminate all existing subcontracts and purchase orders and enter into no further subcontracts and purchase orders. Iowa §14.4.3 In case of such termination for the Owner's convenience,the Owner shall pay the Contractor for Work properly executed;costs incurred by reason of the termination,including costs attributable to termination of Subcontracts;and the termination fee,if any,set forth in the Agreement. ARTICLE 15 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES §15.1 Claims §15.1.1 Definition A Claim is a demand or assertion by one of the parties seeking,as a matter of right,payment of money,a change in the Contract Time,or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract.The term"Claim"also includes other disputes and matters in question between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or relating to the Contract.The responsibility to substantiate Claims shall rest with the party making the Claim.This Section 15.1.1 does not require the Owner to file a Claim in order to impose liquidated damages in accordance with the Contract Documents. §15.1.2 Time Limits on Claims The Owner and Contractor shall commence all Claims and causes of action against the other and arising out of or related to the Contract,whether in contract,tort,breach of warranty or otherwise,in accordance with the requirements of the binding dispute resolution method selected in the Agreement and within the period specified by applicable law,but in any case not more than 10 years after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work.The Owner and Contractor waive all Claims and causes of action not commenced in accordance with this Section 15.1.2. §15.1.3 Notice of Claims §15.1.3.1 Claims by either the Owner or Contractor,where the condition giving rise to the Claim is first discovered prior to expiration of the period for correction of the Work set forth in Section 12.2.2,shall be initiated by notice to the other party and to the Initial Decision Maker with a copy sent to the Architect,if the Architect is not serving as the initial Decision Maker. Claims by either party under this Section 15.1.3.1 shall be initiated within 21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim or within 21 days after the claimant first recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim,whichever is later. AIA Document A201 TM—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The Init. American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA'' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 36 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA' Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 11:38:53 ET on 11/16/2018 under Order No. 1875935897 which expires on 07/13/2019,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA5D) '■ §15.1.3.2 Claims by either the Owner or Contractor,where the condition giving rise to the Claim is first discovered after expiration of the period for correction of the Work set forth in Section 12.2.2,shall be initiated by notice to the other party.In such event,no decision by the Initial Decision Maker is required. §15.1.4 Continuing Contract Performance §15.1.4.1 Pending final resolution of a Claim, except as otherwise agreed in writing or as provided in Section 9.7 and Article 14,the Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Contract and the Owner shall - continue to make payments in accordance with the Contract Documents. §15.1.4.2 The Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be adjusted in accordance with the Initial Decision Maker's decision,subject to the right of either party to proceed in accordance with this Article 15.The Architect will issue Certificates for Payment in accordance with the decision of the Initial Decision Maker. §15.1.5 Claims for Additional Cost If the Contractor wishes to make a Claim for an increase in the Contract Sum,notice as provided in Section 15.1.3 shall be given before proceeding to execute the portion of the Work that is the subject of the Claim.Prior notice is not required for Claims relating to an emergency endangering life or property arising under Section 10.4. §15.1.6 Claims for Additional Time §15.1.6.1 If the Contractor wishes to make a Claim for an increase in the Contract Time,notice as provided in Section 15.1.3 shall be given.The Contractor's Claim shall include an estimate of cost and of probable effect of �- delay on progress of the Work.In the case of a continuing delay,only one Claim is necessary. §15.1.6.2 If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a Claim for additional time,such Claim shall be documented by data substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time,could not have been reasonably anticipated,and had an adverse effect on the scheduled construction. §15.1.7 Waiver of Claims for Consequential Damages The Contractor and Owner waive Claims against each other for consequential damages arising out of or relating to this Contract.This mutual waiver includes .1 damages incurred by the Owner for rental expenses,for losses of use,income,profit,financing, business and;reputation,and for loss of management or employee productivity or of the services of such persons;and .2 damages incurred by the Contractor for principal office expenses including the compensation of personnel stationed there,for losses of financing,business and reputation,and for loss of profit, except anticipated profit arising directly from the Work. This mutual waiver is applicable,without limitation,to all consequential damages due to either party's termination _ in accordance with Article 14.Nothing contained in this Section 15.1.7 shall be deemed to preclude assessment of liquidated damages,when applicable,in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. §15.2 Initial Decision §15.2.1 Claims,excluding those where the condition giving rise to the Claim is first discovered after expiration of 7 the period for correction of the Work set forth in Section 12.2.2 or arising under Sections 10.3, 10.4,and 11.5, shall be referred to the Initial Decision Maker for initial decision.The Architect will serve as the Initial Decision Maker, unless otherwise indicated in the Agreement.Except for those Claims excluded by this Section 15.2.1,an initial decision shall be required as a condition precedent to mediation of any Claim. If an initial decision has not been rendered within 30 days after the Claim has been referred to the initial Decision Maker,the party asserting the Claim may demand mediation and binding dispute resolution without a decision having been rendered. Unless the Initial Decision Maker and all affected parties agree,the Initial Decision Maker will not decide disputes between the Contractor and persons or entities other than the Owner. §15.2.2 The Initial Decision Maker will review Claims and within ten days of the receipt of a Claim take one or more of the following actions: (1)request additional supporting data from the claimant or a response with supporting data from the other party, (2)reject the Claim in whole or in part,(3)approve the Claim,(4)suggest a compromise, or(5)advise the parties that the Initial Decision Maker is unable to resolve the Claim if the Initial Decision Maker — lacks sufficient information to evaluate the merits of the Claim or if the Initial Decision Maker concludes that,in the Init. AIA Document A201 TM-2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and international Treaties. 37 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this Alfa' Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be - / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 11:38:53 ET on 11/16/2018 under Order No. 1875935897 which expires on 07/13/2019,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA5D) Initial Decision Maker's sole discretion,it would be inappropriate for the Initial Decision Maker to resolve the Claim. §15.2.3 In evaluating Claims,the Initial Decision Maker may,but shall not be obligated to,consult with or seek information from either party or from persons with special knowledge or expertise who may assist the Initial Decision Maker in rendering a decision.The Initial Decision Maker may request the Owner to authorize retention of such persons at the Owner's expense. §15.2.4 If the Initial Decision Maker requests a party to provide a response to a Claim or to furnish additional supporting data,such party shall respond,within ten days after receipt of the request,and shall either(1)provide a ... response on the requested supporting data,(2)advise the Initial Decision Maker when the response or supporting data will be furnished,or(3)advise the Initial Decision Maker that no supporting data will be furnished.Upon receipt of the response or supporting data,if any,the Initial Decision Maker will either reject or approve the Claim •— in whole or in part. §15.2.5 The Initial Decision Maker will render an initial decision approving or rejecting the Claim,or indicating that the Initial Decision Maker is unable to resolve the Claim.This initial decision shall(1)be in writing;(2)state the reasons therefor; and(3)notify the parties and the Architect,if the Architect is not serving as the Initial Decision Maker,of any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both.The initial decision shall be final and binding on the parties but subject to mediation and,if the parties fail to resolve their dispute through mediation,to binding INIMP dispute resolution. §15.2.6 Either party may file for mediation of an initial decision at any time,subject to the terms of Section 15.2.6.1. §15.2.6.1 Either party may,within 30 days from the date of receipt of an initial decision,demand in writing that the other party tile for mediation.If such a demand is made and the party receiving the demand fails to file for mediation within 30 days after receipt thereof,then both parties waive their rights to mediate or pursue binding tam dispute resolution proceedings with respect to the initial decision. §15.2.7 In the event of a Claim against the Contractor,the Owner may,but is not obligated to,notify the surety,if any,of the nature and amount of the Claim.If the Claim relates to a possibility of a Contractor's default,the Owner may,but is not obligated to,notify the surety and request the surety's assistance in resolving the controversy. §15.2.8 If a Claim relates to or is the subject of a mechanic's lien,the party asserting such Claim may proceed in t.. accordance with applicable law to comply with the lien notice or filing deadlines. §15.3 Mediation §15.3.1 Claims,disputes,or other matters in controversy arising out of or related to the Contract,except those waived as provided for in Sections 9.10.4,9.10.5,and 15.1.7,shall be subject to mediation as a condition precedent to binding dispute resolution. §15.3.2 The parties shall endeavor to resolve their Claims by mediation which,unless the parties mutually agree otherwise,shall be administered by the American Arbitration Association in accordance with its Construction industry Mediation Procedures in effect on the date of the Agreement. A request for mediation shall be made in writing,delivered to the other party to the Contract,and filed with the person or entity administering the mediation. The request may be made concurrently with the filing of binding dispute resolution proceedings but,in such event, mediation shall proceed in advance of binding dispute resolution proceedings,which shall be stayed pending mediation for a period of 60 days from the date of filing,unless stayed for a longer period by agreement of the parties or court order.If an arbitration is stayed pursuant to this Section 15.3.2,the parties may nonetheless proceed to the selection of the arbitrator(s)and agree upon a schedule for later proceedings. §15.3.3 Either party may,within 30 days from the date that mediation has been concluded without resolution of the dispute or 60 days after mediation has been demanded without resolution of the dispute,demand in writing that the other party file for binding dispute resolution. If such a demand is made and the party receiving the demand fails to file for binding dispute resolution within 60 days after receipt thereof,then both parties waive their rights to binding dispute resolution proceedings with respect to the initial decision. Init AIA Document A201 TM—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The V.w American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AlA' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 38 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties.and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 11:38:53 ET on 11/16/2018 under Order No. 1875935897 which expires on 07/13/2019,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA5D) { §15.3.4 The parties shall share the mediator's fee and any filing fees equally.The mediation shall be held in the place where the Project is located,unless another location is mutually agreed upon.Agreements reached in mediation shall be enforceable as settlement agreements in any court having jurisdiction thereof. §15.4 Arbitration §15.4.1 If the parties have selected arbitration as the method for binding dispute resolution in the Agreement,any Claim subject to,but not resolved by,mediation shall be subject to arbitration which,unless the parties mutually agree otherwise,shall be administered by the American Arbitration Association in accordance with its Construction Industry Arbitration Rules in effect on the date of the Agreement.The Arbitration shall be conducted in the place where the Project is located,unless another location is mutually agreed upon. A demand for arbitration shall be made in writing,delivered to the other party to the Contract, and filed with the person or entity administering the arbitration. The party filing a notice of demand for arbitration must assert in the demand all Claims then known to that party on which arbitration is permitted to be demanded. §15.4.1.1 A demand for arbitration shall be made no earlier than concurrently with the filing of a request for mediation,but in no event shall it be made after the date when the institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on the Claim would be barred by the applicable statute of limitations.For statute of limitations purposes,receipt of a written demand for arbitration by the person or entity administering the arbitration shall constitute the institution of legal or equitable proceedings,based on the Claim. §15.4.2 The award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators shall be final,and judgment may be entered upon it in accordance with applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof: §15.4.3 The foregoing agreement to arbitrate and other agreements to arbitrate with an additional person or entity duly consented to by parties to the Agreement,shall be specifically enforceable under applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof §15.4.4 Consolidation or Joinder §15.4.4.1 Subject to the rules of the American Arbitration Association or other applicable arbitration rules,either party may consolidate an arbitration conducted under this Agreement with any other arbitration to which it is a party provided that(1)the arbitration agreement governing the other arbitration permits consolidation,(2)the arbitrations to be consolidated substantially involve common questions of law or fact,and(3)the arbitrations employ materially similar procedural rules and methods for selecting arbitrator(s). §15.4.4.2 Subject to the rules of the American Arbitration Association or other applicable arbitration rules,either party may include by joinder persons or entities substantially involved in a common question of law or fact whose presence is required if complete relief is to be accorded in arbitration,provided that the party sought to be joined consents in writing to such joinder. Consent to arbitration involving an additional person or entity shall not constitute consent to arbitration of any claim,dispute or other matter in question not described in the written consent. §15.4.4.3 The Owner and Contractor grant to any person or entity made a party to an arbitration conducted under — this Section 15.4,whether by joinder or consolidation,the same rights of joinder and consolidation as those of the Owner and Contractor under this Agreement. Init. AIA Document A201 T"-2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937,1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AlA' Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and international Treaties. 39 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA5 Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was produced by AIA software at 11:38:53 ET on 11/16/2018 under Order No. 1875935897 which expires on 07/13/2019,and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA5D) 1 7 ARTICLE 15 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 15.1. SCOPE The following Supplementary General Conditions shall be intended to modify and expand the referenced General Conditions and they shall take precedence over any statements of the AIA documents. The article and paragraph of the General Conditions which the supplementary statements refer to is so noted. ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.1.1 .THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Delete the last sentence of paragraph 1.1.1., and replace with the following: The Contract Documents also include the bidding requirements (Advertisement to Bid, Notice to Bidders and Instructions to Bidders). Unless specifically enumerated in the agreements, the Contract Documents do not include sample forms and the Contractor's Bid. 1.1.2 THE CONTRACT Add the following new language as Subparagraph 1.1.2.1: 7 The Contract Documents shall be signed by the Owner and Contractor. If either the Owner or Contractor or both do not sign all the Contract Documents the Architect shall identify such unsigned Documents. No Contract shall be formed between the parties until all Contract Documents are executed by both parties ARTICLE 2 OWNER 2.1 GENERAL, add the following: Owner shall mean CITY OF WATERLOO,IOWA. 2.3 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER Add the following language to the end of Paragraph 2.3.4: The Contractor shall compare information furnished by the Owner(including surveys and soil tests with observable physical conditions) and the Contract Documents and on the basis of such review, shall report to the Owner and Architect any conflicts, errors or omissions. Contractor shall be responsible for any additional costs, delays and damages resulting from the Contractor's failure to immediately report any such errors, inconsistencies or omissions. ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR 7 3.1.1.1. DEFINITIONS All references to the "Contractor", etc., in this specification shall mean the prime General Contractor and shall be included as part of the prime Contractor's work if it occurs in the specifications issued under the scope of the prime Contractor's work, unless specifically stated otherwise. See "Supplementary Instructions to Bidders" 3.1.5. for documents under the prime Contractor's work. ( 7 PROJECT#19-23188 S.G.C. Page 1 7 f44 L. 3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR Add the following new language to the end of Paragraph 3.2.1: The Contractor also represents that all Contract Documents for the Project have been examined; including those intended for work of trades not normally performed by the Contractor's own forces, and that it has become thoroughly familiar with all conditions which may pertain to or affect the Work under the Contract. 3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS Add the following language to the end of Paragraph 3.4.1: Work required by the Contract Documents to be performed after working hours or work the Contractor elects to perform after hours shall be completed at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.4.1.1. MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS All manufactured articles,materials, and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected,erected,used, cleaned and conditioned as directed by the manufacturer. Manufacturer's specifications including installation shall govern, unless these specifications are in conflict,in which case the more restrictive requirement shall be met. :.. Add the new Paragraph 3.4.4 which reads as follows: Contractor shall perform the Work so as to cause a minimum of inconvenience to and interruption of the Owner's operations. Any and all interruptions of the operations of the Owner necessary for the performance of the Work shall be noted in the progress schedule and the Contractor shall additionally give the Owner sufficient advance notice of such interruption as to allow the Owner to adjust operations accordingly. Contractor's failure to give the Owner timely notice of such intentions shall place the responsibility of any resulting delays or additional costs solely with the Contractor. 3.5.1.1. RESPONSIBILITY The General Contractor shall assume responsibility for the building and protecting the work completed until such time as final acceptance by the Owner. Each Contractor is responsible for his/her own work. 3.6.1. TAXES As this is a tax-exempt entity,the Contractors are not required to pay sales tax on building materials. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and their Subcontractors to pay sales tax on items only that do not �. become part of the realty being constructed. Examples Include: • barricades •building equipment* • compressors • cranes • drill press • dynamite • electric generators • forms • fuel • hand tools • lathes • lodging • machinery* • pile drivers •replacement parts for equipment • scaffolds • stakes • tools • utilities • vehicles, including grading, lifting and excavating vehicles • warning lights • * Machinery or other equipment that remain tangible personal property rather than becoming part of real property may be purchased by the contractor tax free for resale. However, it must be separately itemized and transferred to the exempt entity. The rental of construction equipment for use on or in connection with new construction, reconstruction, alteration, expansion or remodeling of a building or structure is exempt from Iowa sales or use tax. Certain construction-related equipment is not subject to local option tax but remains subject to the state sales tax. L. See Rule 701-107.9 for details. The Owner will provide to the successful contractor the required authorization letter and exemption certificate. The Contractor shall then forward these items to Subcontractors. �.. PROJECT#19-23188 S.G.C. Page 2 L 3.7.1.1. CONSTRUCTION PERMITS '"1 "The Contractor" referred to in this paragraph shall mean the General Contractor including the Mechanical, Electrical, and any Subcontractor's costs. "'� 3.7.2.1. BUILDING CODE All construction under this contract shall conform to the requirements of the local authority. The provisions of the International Building Code 2015 and/or currently adopted State of Iowa Code as adopted and amended by the local —'� authority shall be strictly followed. Local Planning and Zoning regulations, ordinances and requirements shall be i followed as adopted. 3.7.2.2. EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY During the performance of this contract,the Contractor agrees as follows: (1) The Contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, creed, color, religion, national origin, sex, sexual orientation, age or physical or mental disability. The Contractor will take affirmative action to ensure that applicants are employed and that employees are treated during employment without regard to their race,creed,color, religion,national origin,sex,age or physical or mental disability except where it relates to a bona.fide occupational qualification. Such action shall include but not be limited to the following: employment, upgrading, demotion or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. (2) The Contractor will, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the Contractor, state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to MMI race, creed, color, religion, national origin, sex, age or physical or mental disability except where it relates to a bona fide occupational qualification. (3) The Contractor will send to each labor union or representative of workers with which he has a collective bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding a notice advising the labor union or workers' representative of the Contractor's commitments under this nondiscrimination clause a shall post copies of the notice in conspicuous places available to employees and applicants for employment. (4) The Contractor will comply with all relevant provisions of the Iowa Civil Rights Act of 1965 as amended, Iowa Executive Order#15 of 1973, Federal Executive Order 11246 of 1965 as amended by Federal Executive Order 11375 of 1967, the Equal Employment Opportunity Act of 1972, and all federal, state and local AMR provisions relevant to fair employment. (5) In the event of the Contractor's noncompliance with the nondiscrimination clauses of this contract or with any of the aforesaid rules, regulations or requests, this contract may be cancelled, terminated or ...1 suspended in whole or in part and the Contractor may be declared ineligible for further contracts with the Owner. In addition, the Owner or institutions may take such further action,and such other sanctions may be imposed and remedies invoked, as provided by the Iowa Civil Rights Act of 1965 as amended, Chapter 601A, Code of Iowa 1973,as heretofore and hereafter amended or as otherwise provided by law. (6) The Contractor will include the provisions of paragraphs (1) through (5) hereof in every subcontract and purchase order unless specifically exempted by the Owner, in accordance with the rules and regulations of the Owner, so that such provisions will be binding on each Subcontractor and vendor. The Contractor will take such action with respect to any Subcontractor or purchase order as the Owner or the authorized representative thereof, may direct as a means of enforcing such provisions including sanctions for noncompliance. 3.7.5 Delete 3.7.5 in its entirety and substitute with the following: PROJECT#19-23188 S.G.C. Page 3 1 1 v 3.7.5 If, in the course of the Work, the Contractor knowingly encounters and recognizes human remains, burial markers, archeological sites or previously undelineated wetlands not indicated in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall immediately suspend any operations that would affect them and shall notify the Owner and Architect. Upon receipt of such notice, the Owner shall promptly take any action necessary to obtain governmental authorization required to resume the operations. The Contractor shall continue to suspend such operations until otherwise instructed by the Owner but shall continue with all other operations that do not affect those remains or features. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time arising from the existence or good faith ,. belief of such existence of such remains or features may be made as provided in Article 15. Add a new Paragraph 3.7.6 which reads as follows: The Contractor is responsible for scheduling inspections related to the performance of its Work and ensuring Work is complete for inspections. Any costs associated with reinspection caused by irregularities, deficiencies or non- conforming Work will be borne by the responsible contractor including all Architectural and Engineering Services related to evaluation of the problem and development of an acceptable solution. 3.8. ALLOWANCES add Paragraph 3.8.4 as follows: See Division I-012100 Allowances for individual items for material allowances. 3.10 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION&SUBMITTAL SCHEDULES l.. Paragraph 3.10.1, after the last word in paragraph, "Project," and add the words, "or as requested by the Owner or Architect". 3.10.2:Delete the last sentence of 3.10.2 so that the section now reads as follows: 3.10.2 The Contractor shall prepare a submittal schedule promptly after being awarded the Contract and thereafter as necessary to maintain a current submittal schedule, and shall submit the schedule(s) for the Architect's approval. The Architect's approval shall not unreasonably be delayed or withheld. The submittal schedule shall (1) be coordinated with the Contractor's construction schedule, and (2) allow the Architect reasonable time to review submittals. Add a new Paragraph 3.13.1 which shall read as follows: The Contractor shall not bring or permit any subcontractor, supplier or anyone else for whom the Contractor is responsible,to bring on the site any asbestos,PCB's petroleum,hazardous waste or radioactive materials(except for proper use in performing the Work). ARTICLE 4 ARCHITECT 4.1.1.1. ARCHITECT Architect shall mean the firm of ISG, Inc.,314 East 4th Street,Waterloo,Iowa 50703-4704. 4.1.1.2. MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL CONSULTANT Mechanical Consultant shall mean the firm of ISG, Inc., 1300 Walnut Street, Suite 101, Des Moines, IA 50309; L. Electrical Consultant of ISG, Inc. 115 East Hickory Street, Suite 300,Mankato,MN 56001. 4.2.2.1. REQUIRED OBSERVATIONS Throughout the plans and specifications, observations are called for by the Architect at certain stages of construction. The Contractor may not cover the work and to do so will require removal of all work covering the work to be viewed. The Contractor shall notify the Architect at least one (1) day prior to the time he will have to proceed with the work. The Architect agrees to visit the site within that time, or the Contractor may proceed with _ the work if the Architect fails to do so. See Division I-014000. PROJECT#19-23188 S.G.C. Page 4 4.2.15. EXTRA SERVICE OF THE ARCHITECT If due to the neglect or fault of the Contractor damage is done to any existing building or grounds or work in place so that additional work is caused the Architect over and above his normal duties or if the contract time exceeds the time specified by more than 25%, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to reimburse the Owner for these extra "1 services of the Architect caused by the Contractor's neglect or work. This charge is based on two-and-one-half times the per hour rate for draftsmen and principals, plus .mileage at the current IRS rate. See 017700 for additional inspection services. ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS 5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK. Amend Paragraph 5.2.1, Lines 1-2, by deleting the words: "as soon as practicable after award of contract" and inserting in lieu thereof: "within ten(10)days after the award of contract". 5.2.1.1. AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS No payments will be approved until Subcontractors and suppliers list has been submitted and approved. ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 6.1.5. WORK NOT INCLUDED All items herein specifically stated as being by other than this Contractor or by others who are not included in the Contractor's work, and all items designated N.I.C. or "by others" on the drawings are not a part of this Contractor's work. ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.2 CHANGE ORDERS Add paragraph 7.2.2 as follows: The form used to process a change order will be on AIA Document G701. Add the following subparagraph 7.2.3: 1 7.2.3 The forms used to process a Change Order will include AIA Document G701, Change Order. Add the following to subparagraph 7.3.2: ",and upon prior written approval of the Owner." { ARTICLE 8 TIME 8.1 DEFINITIONS Add the following language to the end of Paragraph 8.1.2: "or the date of the Notice to Proceed, whichever occurs later." Delete Subparagraph 8.1.4 and substitute the following Subparagraph: 8.1.4 The term"Day"as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day. 7 PROJECT#19-23188 S.G.C. Page 5 I Imo imo 8.1.5.DATE OF ENCLOSURE The term "date of enclosure" shall mean the date agreed to by all prime Contractors, the Owner and Architect when the building will be enclosed, sealed from the weather, and the heating system operable. 8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME Add the following language to the end of Paragraph 8.3.1: A time extension shall be Contractor's sole remedy and compensation for all such delays other than those resulting from the acts or negligence of the Owner, the Architect, or the Owner's separate contractors (collectively "Owner Caused Delays"). For proven Owner Caused Delays,the Contractor may recoup the actual costs resulting from such delays,but not for any additional profit or fee. i I Add the following subparagraph 8.3.1.1 WORK DURING COLD WEATHER: L, During cold weather it will not be required of the Contractor that he/she continue work on the project through cold weather. The Contractor shall protect all work from freezing, etc. Any work damaged by freezing and thawing will be removed and replaced by the Contractor responsible. No time extension will be allowed for shut down in cold „ weather,unless the Contractor can substantiate unusual prolonged extreme weather by weather bureau records. ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9.2.1. SCHEDULE OF VALUES Within 14 days after contract award, a Schedule of Values shall be submitted. The Schedule of Values shall be �. listed according to the specification sections herein within divisions with each major line item identified by the spec section number including mechanical, electrical, technology, food service and any/all major subcontractors. List sub-values of major products or operations under the item. Each item shall be further subdivided for material cost L (including shipping and taxes) and labor cost listed separately. Within 10 days after submitting the Schedule of Values,the prime Contractor shall submit a schedule of payment sums,by month,for the duration of the project. 9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT Add the following paragraphs: 9.3.1.3 At least thirty (30) days before the date established for each progress payment, the Contractor shall submit 1.., to the Architect an itemized Application for Payment for operations completed in accordance with the schedule of values. Such application shall be notarized, if required, and supported by such data substantiating the Contractor's right to payment as the Owner or Architect may require, such as copies of requisitions from Subcontractors and material suppliers. If the Contract Documents require the Owner to retain a portion of the payments until some future time, the Application for Payment shall clearly state the percentage and the amount to be retained. Once the Application is approved by the Architect, the Application for Payment must be submitted for approval to the CITY OF WATERLOO,IOWA at the regularly scheduled council meeting. The application must be received at the City Clerk's office in a timely manner for it to be included in that meeting's scheduled business. After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment on a timely received Application for Payment and has released it to the Owner,the Owner shall approve payment with Contractor to receive payment by the l 5`'day of the following month. l. Until Substantial Completion,the Owner will pay ninety-five percent(95%)of the amount due the Contractor on account of Progress Payments,(5%)retainage. PROJECT#19-23188 S.G.C. Page 6 1 -1 9.5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION 9.5.3 Delete in its entirety. 9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS 9.6.4: Delete the first two sentences of 9.6.4 so that it now reads as follows: 9.6.4 Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an obligation to pay or to see to the payment of money to a Subcontractor, except as may otherwise be required by law. Add a new Paragraph 9.6.9 which shall read as follows: Payment to the Contractor will be made by the Owner from cash on hand from such sources as may be legally available. 9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION Add the following language to the end of Paragraph 9.8.1: , subject only to completion of minor punch list items, the absence of completion of which does not interfere with the Owner's intended used of the Project. Add subparagraph 9.8.5.1 as follows: 7 9.8.5.1 Request for Early Release of Retainage Funds: Upon achieving Substantial Completion, as defined by Iowa Code Chapter 26, the Contractor may formally request the release of all or part of the retainage funds being held on the Project. The Contractors' request for Release of the Retainage Funds shall be accompanied by a sworn statement that ten (10) calendar days prior to filing the Request for Release of the Funds a notice was given to all known subcontractors, subsubcontractors and suppliers that the Contractor is requesting the early release of retainage funds. If proper documentation is received from the Contractor,the Owner will release all retainage funds at the next monthly council meeting or within thirty(30)days, 1 whichever is less, except it may retain the following: a) An amount equal to 200%of the value of labor or materials yet to be provided on the Project as determined by the Owner and its authorized contract representative. For purposes of section, "authorized contract representative"means the Architect of record on the Project,unless otherwise specified. b) An amount equal to 200% of the value of any Chapter 573 claims currently on file at the time the Request of Release of Retainage is approved. 7 If the Ow ner withholds an amount from the retainage payment to the Contractor, the Owner will provide a reason the request is being denied to the Contractor within thirty(30)calendar days of the receipt of the request. Add a new Paragraph 9.8.6 which shall read as follows: The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for any Architect's additional services made necessary by the Contractor's failure to finally complete the Work within sixty (60) days after the date specified in the Contract Documents for Project Substantial Completion. Add subparagraph 9.8.6.1 as follows: Unless otherwise required by Iowa law, Final Payment shall be released no earlier than thirty-one (31) days after completion and final acceptance by the Owner of all Work required by the Contract. 1 1 PROJECT#19-23188 C S.G. . Page 7 9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT Add Subparagraph 9.10.6 to Paragraph 9.10: L 9.10.6 Final payment will be made not earlier than 31 days following approval by the CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA Council at a regularly scheduled council meeting, receipt of all Lien Waiver and/or Chapter 573 Claim Releases, Sales Tax information, and all other required closeout documents, and subject to the conditions of and in accordance with the provisions of Iowa Code Chapter 573 and Iowa Code Chapter 26. Add paragraph 9.10.7 9.10.7 The Contractor and the Contractor's surety, if any, shall be liable for and shall pay the Owner for any extra costs for engineering or architectural services, construction observation services and related expenses necessitated by the delayed prosecution of the work by the Contractor beyond the date of Final Completion required by the Agreement. Such costs are in no way a penalty, but represent additional expenses to the Owner caused by the Contractor's delay in completing the Work. ARTICLE I PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY r.. 10.2.2.1. OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY&HEALTH ACT Nothing herein specified, or shown on the drawings to the contrary shall relieve the Contractor of any obligations concerning conformance to current requirements of the Occupational Safety and Health Act as pertains to this project. Please note under Section 10.2.8 that if either party suffers injury or damage to person or property due to the act or L. omission of the other party, the injured party must provide written notice of the damage to the other party within a reasonable time of the discovery(not to exceed 21 days after discovery). 10.3.1.1. HAZARDOUS WASTE OR TOXIC SUBSTANCES (1) Friable Asbestos No friable asbestos work of any nature is included in this contract. (2) Concealed Hazardous or Toxic Substances No hazardous or toxic substances knowingly exist on the project site. If during the construction of this project, work involving friable asbestos, or hazardous or toxic substances is suspected, or encountered, the Owner or the Owner's representative shall be notified immediately and the Owner with his own forces or by separate contract shall be solely responsible for selection and complete investigation, removal and disposition of the friable asbestos hazard by appropriate licensed parties in full accordance with any and all applicable laws and regulations. The Architect and Contractor shall be indemnified and held harmless from all claims and costs incurred in defending claims based on hazardous waste or toxic substances discovered at the project site. The Architect is not responsible for any failure to discover any hazardous waste or toxic substances not specifically indicated in the contract — documents. If the Contractor claims that delay or additional cost is involved because of such action by the Owner,he shall make such claim immediately as provided elsewhere in the contract documents. PROJECT#19-23188 S.G.C. Page 8 { ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS 11.1.1.1 WORKER'S COMPENSATION INSURANCE The Contractor shall purchase and maintain Worker's Compensation for not less than the following limits,or greater, if required by law: a State: Statutory .b Applicable Federal: Statutory .c Employer's Liability: $500,000 per Accident .d Injury by Disease: $500,000 per Employee $500,000 Aggregate 11.1.2.1 LIABILITY INSURANCE The Contractor shall purchase and maintain Comprehensive General Liability Insurance and Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance to cover the operations of the Contractor, the operations of the Subcontractors (Contingent or Independent), product and completed operations, personal injury, and contractual liability to include coverage for the Hold Harmless and Indemnification Clause in Article 3.18. Certificates shall be submitted on AIA Document G705 or the ACORD 25 Certificate of Insurance Form. Policy shall include a statement of 30 days minimum advance notice of material change or cancellation of policy to the Owner. The Architect and Owner, along with their respective officers, agency and employees, shall be named as additional insured for Ongoing Operations and Products/Completed Operations on the Contractor, Subcontractor's and any Sub-Subcontractors Commercial General Liability Policy, which must be primary and noncontributory with respect to the additional insured. Minimum Policy Limits: .1 Comprehensive or Commercial General Liability(including Premises-Operation;Independent mom Contractor's Protection; Products and Completed Operations;Broad Form Property Damage): .a Bodily Injury: $1,000,000 Each Occurrence $2,000,000 Aggregate .b Property Damage: $1,000,000 Each Occurrence $2,000,000 Aggregate .c Products and Completed Operations: $2,000,000 Aggregate .d Property Damage Liability shall provide X, C and U Coverage for Explosion, Collapse and Underground Hazard Exposures,respectively. .e Products and Completed Operations coverage shall be maintained for 3 years after final payment. .f Broad Form Property Damage coverage shall include Completed Operations. .g General Liability coverage shall contain a per project aggregate clause. .2 Contractual Liability: .a Bodily Injury: 1 $1,000,000 Each Occurrence $2,000,000 Aggregate .b Property Damage: $1,000,000 Each Occurrence $2,000,000 Aggregate PROJECT#19-23188 S.G.C. Page 9 L i L .3 Personal Injury,with Employment Exclusion deleted: $1,000,000 Aggregate .4 Business or Commercial Automobile Liability(including owned,non-owned and hired vehicles): .a Bodily Injury: $1,000,000 Each Person $1,000,000 Each Occurrence .b Property Damage: $1,000,000 Each Occurrence $1,000,000 Combined Single Limit .5 Umbrella Excess Policy: $3,000,000 over primary insurance The Contractor shall either (1) require each of his Subcontractors to procure and to maintain during the life of his subcontract, public liability and property damage coverage of the type and in the same amount as specified in the preceding paragraphs,or(2)insure the activities of his Subcontractors in his own policy. Insurance on equipment,tools, sheds,plant,etc., shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. 11.2.1.1 BUILDER'S RISK FOR AMOUNT OF CONTRACT "The Owner shall purchase and maintain property insurance upon the entire work at the site to the full insurable value thereof. This insurance shall include the interests of the Owner, the Architect, the Contractor, the Subcontractors and sub-Subcontractors, all of whom shall be named as additional insured, and shall include the "Special" covered causes of loss, insurance for physical loss or damage." The Contractor and the Architect will be named and furnished a copy of the coverage at the beginning of the project. ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 13.1 GOVERNING LAW 13.1:Delete the words following"where the Project is located"in 13.1 so that it now reads as follows: Amend Paragraph 13.1 to read as follows: 13.1 The Contract shall be governed by the laws of the State of Iowa. •— Delete Subparagraph 13.5 and substitute the following Subparagraph: 13.5 Payments due and unpaid under the Contract Documents shall bear interest from the date the payment is due and shall bear interest at the rate established by Section 74A.2, Code of Iowa. Add the following paragraph to ARTICLE 13: 13.6 Conformance with Laws. 13.6.1 The Contractor shall conform in all respects with the provisions of the Federal Civil Rights Act,the Code of Iowa, Chapter 216 Civil Rights Commission and the rules and regulations adopted thereto by the Iowa Civil Rights 6, Commission. The Contractor shall not discriminate against any employee or applicant because of race, color, religion, sex, national origin, ancestry, age, marital status, sexual orientation, physical or mental handicap. The Contractor shall comply with all applicable federal, state and local, laws, rules, regulations, ordinances,policies and procedures, including the CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA policies and procedures. The Contractor shall require similar clauses in all of its subcontracts for service or materials. PROJECT#19-23188 S.G.C. Page 10 ARTICLE 15 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES 15.1.2 TIME LIMITS ON CLAIMS Strike 15.1.2 in its entirety and substitute the following: 15.1.2. COMMENCEMENT OF STATUTORY LIMITATION PERIOD 15.1.2.1 As between the Owner and Contractor: 1 1. Before Substantial Completion. As to acts or failures to act occurring prior to the relevant date of Substantial Completion, any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than such date of Substantial Completion; 2. Between Substantial Completion and Final Certificate for Payment. As to acts or failures to act occurring h relevant date of Substantial Completion and prior to issuance of the final Certificate for Paymentsubsequent, anyto applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than the date of issuance of the final Certificate for Payment; and 3. After Final Certificate for Payment. As to acts or failures to act occurring after the relevant date of issuance of the final Certificate for Payment,any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than the date of any act or failure to act by the Contractor pursuant to any Warranty provided under Section 3.5, the date of any correction of the Work or failure to correct the Work by the Contractor under Section 12.2, or the date of actual commission of any other act or failure to perform any duty or obligation by the Contractor or Owner, whichever occurs last. 4 Delete Paragraph 15.1.7 in its entirety. -1 15.2.1.1 INITIAL DECISION MAKER The initial decision maker shall be the project architect or. in their absence. another employee of ISG, INC., designated at the beginning of the project. Delete Paragraph 15.2.6.1 in its entirety. Delete Paragraph 15.3.1 in its entirety and substitute the following: 15.3.1. 11 This Contractor further agrees to include a similar mediation provision in all agreements with independent Contractors, Subcontractors, suppliers and/or fabricators who are providing work for this Contractor for this project. I i PROJECT#19-23188 S.G.C. Page 11 1 1.6 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and existing building(s) during entire construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's day-to-day operations. Maintain existing exits unless otherwise indicated. 1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Owner and approval of authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Notify Owner not less than 72 hours in advance of activities that will affect Owner's ' operations. 1.7 WORK RESTRICTIONS A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations. 1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other req uirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. On-Site Work Hours: Limit work in the existing building to normal business workin hours of 7:00 a.m. to 7:00 p.m., Monday through Friday, unless otherwise indicated. g `4 1. Weekend Hours: Verify with Owner. 2. Hours for Utility Shutdowns: Coordinate with Owner. •ok C. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 611 1. Notify Architect and Owner not less than five days in advance of utility interruptions. proposed ihty 2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions. D. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and vibration, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner. 1. Notify Architect and Owner not less than lice days in advance of proposed disruptive operations. 2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with disruptive operations. E. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking and/or E-Cigarettes (electronic) are not permitted within the 1,4 building or within 25 feet of entrances, operable windows, or outdoor-air intakes. F. Restricted Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances within the existing building is not permitted. wise G. Employee Identification: Provide identification tags for Contractor personnel working on Project site. Require personnel to use identification tags at all times. SUMMARY PROJECT#19-23188 011000 3 1.8 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS 4. A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates. 2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon(:) is used within a sentence or phrase.3. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise. B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications. C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products: 1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections. 2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations scheduled on Drawings. 3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing ' r Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual. PART 2 -PRODUCTS(Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 011000 MEW SUMMARY 011000 -4 PROJECT#19-23188 SECTION 012100- ALLOWANCES 012100 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances. B. Types of allowances include the following: 1. Contingency allowances. rrq a. General allowances. b. As-built record drawing allowance. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Allowance is a quantity of work or dollar amount established in lieu of additional requirements, used to defer selection of actual materials and equipment to a later date when direction will be provided to Contractor. If necessary, additional requirements will be issued by Change Order. 1.4 SELECTION AND PURCHASE A. At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise Architect of the date when final selection, or purchase and delivery, be completed by the Owner to avoid delaying the Work. system described by an allowance must B. At Architect's request, obtain proposals for each allowance for Include recommendations that are relevant to performing the Work.use in making final selections. C. Purchase products and systems selected by Architect from the designated supplier. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances in the form specified for Change Orders. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quantities of materials delivered to the site for use in fulfillment of each allowance. I ALLOWANCES PROJECT#19-23188 012100 - B. Submit time sheets and other documentation to show labor time and cost for installation of allowance items that include installation as part of the allowance. C. Coordinate and process submittals for allowance items in same manner as for other portions of the Work. 1.7 CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCES A. Use the contingency allowance only as directed by Architect for Owner's purposes and only by Change Orders that indicate amounts to be charged to the allowance. B. Contractor's overhead, profit, and related costs for products and equipment ordered by Owner under the contingency allowance are included in the allowance and are not part of the Contract Sum. These costs include delivery, installation,taxes, insurance, equipment rental, and similar costs. C. Change Orders authorizing use of funds from the contingency allowance will include Contractor's related costs and reasonable overhead and profit. D. At Project closeout, credit unused amounts remaining in the contingency allowance to Owner by Change Order. 1.8 ADJUSTMENT OF ALLOWANCES A. Allowance Adjustment: To adjust allowance amounts, prepare a Change Order proposal based on the difference between purchase amount and the allowance,multiplied by final measurement of work-in-place where applicable. If applicable, include reasonable allowances for cutting losses,tolerances,mixing wastes, normal product imperfections,and similar margins. 1. Include installation costs in purchase amount only where indicated as part of the allowance. 2. If requested, prepare explanation and documentation to substantiate distribution of overhead costs and other markups. 3. Submit substantiation of a change in scope of Work, if any, claimed in Change Orders related to unit-cost allowances. 4. Owner reserves the right to establish the quantity of work-in-place by independent quantity survey,measure, or count. B. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the allowance described in the Contract Documents, whether for the purchase order amount or Contractor's handling,labor,installation, overhead, and profit. 1. Do not include Contractor's or subcontractor's indirect expense in the Change Order cost amount unless it is clearly shown that the nature or extent of Work has changed from what could have been foreseen from information in the Contract Documents. 2. No change to Contractor's indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher- or lower- priced materials or systems of the same scope and nature as originally indicated. 012100 -2 ALLOWANCES PROJECT#19-23188 PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used1 PART 3 -EXECUTION rt 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or defects. Return { damaged or defective products to manufacturer for replacement. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and "'k installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with related work. 3.3 I fill SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES A. CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCE: 1. GENERAL CONSTRUCTION ALLOWANCE: Include a $25,000 allowanc general construction contract. e for 2. AS-BUILT RECORD DRAWINGS ALLOWANCE: Include a $3,000 allowance r te Architect to transfer mark-ups from the "as-built" marked-up drawings to an electronic PDF for the owner. END OF SECTION 012100 64 °"T 1 ALLOWANCES .gyp 012100 3 PROJECT#19-23188 Mir SECTION 012500- SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 1 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS IA. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 00, 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions. iffit 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. f 1 1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or 7 unavailability of required warranty terms. 2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to +•T Contractor or Owner. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS 1 i, A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title 7 and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, all as applicable: a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation method r cannot be provided, if applicable. 1 b. Coordination of information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitutions with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section. t+� Significant qualities may include attributes, such as performance, weight, size, 1 durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific 1 features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified. 1 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES PROJECT#19-23188 012500 1 7 ti d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and _ installation procedures. e. Samples,where applicable or requested. f. Certificates and qualification data,where applicable or requested. g. List of similar installations for completed projects, with project names and addresses as well as names and addresses of architects and owners. h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency, indicating and interpreting j_ test results for compliance with requirements indicated. i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from ICC-ES.j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed ti,,, substitutions with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's ...• letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery. 1 k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. 1. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents, except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials and is appropriate for applications indicated. m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. ,- 2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within •. 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work. b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers. pi—, 1.6 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved substitutions. , 4 L. SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 -2 PROJECT#19 23188 i 1 or 1 1.7 SUBSTITUTIONS et A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substituti need for change, but not later than 15 days on immediately on discovery submittals. Y prior to time required for preparation and rev wof of related • 1• Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's following conditions are satisfied. If the following will return requests without action, except request for substitution when the "T conditions are not satisfied# requirements: to record noncomplianceArchitect p with these a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Docume nts and will produce indicated results. b. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. c. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. V d. Requested substitution has received necessary rY a p provals of authorities having e. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. f. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of g• Requested substitution provides specified warranty. the Work. h. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, re gm has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is I compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all quested substitution B. Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received contractors involved. ', within 60 days after the Notice of Award. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect. "► 1 Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for s 1 following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to recordubstitution when the requirements: noncompliance with these a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner e, energy must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation other construction bymay include lit b. Requested substitution does anot require extensive nd similar considerations. services, increased cost of I Documents. revisions to the Contract j e Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents "' indicated results. and will produce e d• Substitution request is fully documented and properly Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor'smicon. f. Requested substitution has received necessa construction schedule. jurisdiction. necessary approvals of authorities having g. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. h. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. I requested i• Requested substitution provides specified warranty• J• If requested substitution involves more than one contractor has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniformandcon iste substitution s nt, is compatible with other products and is acceptable to all contractors SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES involved. PROJECT#19-23188 012500-3 I PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Usedl PART 3 -EXECUTION ot Used) END OF SECTION 012500 012500 - 4 SUBSTITUTIONPROCEDURES i t MI u SECTION 012600- CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 PART 1 - GENERAL 164i 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS i , A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. +* 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications. 1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK 't, A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on Work,nor changes in the not on AIA Document G710. All 1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract tion of Time. I f necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. Time. If 1• g ProposalRequestsP ications. ,, Work Change issued by Architect are not instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within 10 days after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute cost a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminatedthe change. total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey with �'i to substantiate quantities. data b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amo unts of trade discounts. alt c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates g the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration,stafrttca of and ,. finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requestingan extension of the Contract Time. e. Quotation Form: Use forms acceptable to Architect. ‘, B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim bysubmitting ao request for require cmodifications . the change to Architect. 1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on t Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate t g he E proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. he effect of the 1 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES .at PROJECT#19-23188 012600 - 1 1 I n costs 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated uest dad unitnish survey ithta total to amount of purchases and credits to be made. q substantiate quantities. rental, and amounts of trade 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment discounts. 4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the chaindica es the effect of the ... e. 5. Include an updated Contractor's constructionuration, start imes, change, including, but not limited to, ch�� s in activity float beforedrequesting an exdtension ish tof the and activity relationship. Use available total Contract Time. for product or system specified. 6. Comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitutn Procedures" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product orsystemy 7. Proposal Request Form: Use form acceptable to Architect. 1.5 ADMINISTRATIVE CHANGE ORDERS istrative procedures A. for Allowance Adjustment: See Section 012100 "Allowances"the Contract Sump to reflect actual costs of preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting allowances. r B. Unit-Price Adjustment: See Section 012200 "Unit therContraoct Sum reflect measured scope — istrative procedures for preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting of unit-price work. 1.6 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES Arc A. On Owner's approval of a Work Change Proposal Request, G Ohitect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and.Contractor on AIA Document — 1.7 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE nstructi on A A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may einstrua octs Contract ht gpro Directive w th a 4,..AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. n of 1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete change the Contract Sum or the e in the Work. It 1.. \ also designates method to be followed to determine1 Contract Time. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the B. � Construction Change Directive. 1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to ;,� substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. �..--- PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Usedl END OF SECTION 012600 012600 2 1...,CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PROJECT#19-23188 t.. SECTION 012900-PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS j A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General an Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Sectional Supplementary 1.2 SUMMARY ,ga A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. p cess H1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract ...ikj Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing 1 Applications for Payment. Contractor's 1 1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of I 7 Contractor's Construction Schedule. 1. Coordinate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following: a. Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets. b. Submittal Schedule. c. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Seectio estabctionn.. items for 'I, 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values: a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. c. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. 1 e. Date of submittal. PAYMENT PROCEDURES PROJECT 119 23188 012900- 1 I k 2. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed: a. Related Specification Section or Division. ... b. Description of the Work. c. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. _ e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders(numbers)that affect value. g. Dollar value of the following, as a percentage of the Contract sum to nearest one- hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. 1) Labor. 2) Materials. t- 3) Equipment. 3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract detailin reougp facilitateProject continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progressCoordmate with s. Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts, in excess of five percent of the Contract Sum. d principal subcontracts r Project a. Includeose separateequir line itemsnan amount totaling five e percent of the ContractoSum and -,. closeout requirements m subcontract amount. `., Mechanical and Electrical contracts shall be broken down by specification section, labor and material. ..,^ 4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar;total shall equal the Contract Sum. r each part of Work where 5. Provide a separate line item in the Schedulemate�als or equf Values ipment purchased or fabricated ,,,,, Applications for Payment may include and stored,but not yet installed. a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If specified, (— include evidence of insurance or bonded warehousing. w s,for 6. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial ue iso tcost of s part materialf the Work.each ,� subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed 7. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each allowance. Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by 1 measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine quantities. 8. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. ... a. Temporary facilities and other major cost it cos that ret not os diirect cost of actual ual work-in-place may be shown either asSep ,� of Values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option. 9. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next ` Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. 012900 - 2 fir PAYMENT PROCEDURES PROJECT#19-23188 °01, t 1 1 1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT At, A. Each Application for Payment following the initial Application for Payment shall be consistent 1 with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for r by Owner. 1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. B. RETAINAGE: Contractor shall show a retainage of 5%of completed work amount to be withheld from each application for payment. Upon substantial completion of the entire work, a sum sufficient to decrease the total retainage to 5%of the contract sum,plus such other retainages as the Architect shall determine for all incomplete work and unsettled claims may be egat authorized. After Substantial Completion, the Architect may authorize payment beyond the 5%retainage ....N. amount if the Contractor is making satisfactory progress toward a timely completion of the project. However, the Architect will, at no time, authorize payment beyond 2 times the value of Jot the work to be completed until the Architect authorizes the final Request for Payment. C. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction Work covered by each A lic t ., ion for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement. Payments generally will be made by the 15th day of each month. Progress payments shall be submitted to Architect by the last dayof the covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the last dayThe period I of the month. I D. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and Sheets as form for Applications for Payment. AIA Document G703 Continuation E. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete to applications without action. p ete 1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction 1 Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment, metwhether or not payment has been received. Include only amounts for work completed at # time of Application for Payment. 3. Include amounts of signed Change Orders issued before last day of construction period covered by application. t F. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between items ', stored on-site and items stored off-site. I 1 1. Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and consent of surety to payment, for stored materials. 2. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices. Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not include overhead and profit on stored materials. PAYMENT PROCEDURES Al PROJECT#19-23188 012900 3 i 3. Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following: — a. Value of materials previously stored and remaining stored as of date of previous — Applications for Payment. b. Value of previously stored materials put in place after date of previous Application for Payment and on or before date of current Application for Payment. c. Value of materials stored since date of previous Application for Payment and remaining stored as of date of current Application for Payment. g G. Transmittal: Submit one (1) signed and notarized original copy and three (3) copies of each i ... Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required. 1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application. H. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of Values. 3. Contractor's Construction Schedule(preliminary if not final). 4. Products list. '^' 5. Schedule of unit prices. 6. Submittals Schedule(preliminary if not final). 7. List of Contractor's staff assignments. ,r, 8. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 9. Copies of building permits. 10. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work. 11. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 12. Performance and payment bonds. 13. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance. ".. I. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect howmg issues the Certificate timpateio of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Pay , for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a `� statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. This application shall reflect Certificate(s) of Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. L !9 J. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final Application for Payment with releases and the supportingfollow documentation not previously submitted and accepted,including,but not limited, 1. Recommendation of final acceptance by the Architect. 2. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. low3. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 012900 - 4 PAYMENT PROCEDURES PROJECT#19-23188 r 4. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 5. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 6. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 7. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 8. Evidence that claims have been settled. 9. All written guarantees and warranties required by these specifications are on file 10. All shop drawings, schedules and operator's manuals, properly bound and indexed, are on file. 11. Executed final acceptance by the Owner. 12. As-built marked up set of construction drawings. PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION(Not Used) END OF SECTION 012900 4144 i sat i 1 I mil t l¢ I I PAYMENT PROCEDURES 0l 2900 5 + II PROJECT#19-23188 i 1 SECTION 013100-PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 'a.an A. Drawings and g general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following: 1. General coordination procedures. 2. Coordination drawings. 3. RFIs. 4. Project meetings. B. Each contractor shall participate in coordination • p requirements. Certain areas of responsibility are assigned to a specific contractor. 1.3 DEFINITIONS oat A. BIM: Building Information Modeling. B. RFI: Request for Information. Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form: Imo1. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s)covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract. B. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and cellular ( telephone numbers and e-mail addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of individuals assigned to Project. 1 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PROJECT#119-23188 013100 1 h. 1. Post copies of list in project meeting room, in temporary field office, and in prominent location in built facility. Keep list current at all times. 2. ConstructionwllSuperintendent:uperindent Generalhe dutyto observerthatll assign a specifications are followed and :ent to the � job. It will be the Super :"'" that the Architect is notified if deviations occur. 1.5 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of ach part of the Work.depend on each other foro Coordinate i.- construction operations included in different Sections that proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. limim 2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. ,.. of B. Coordination: Each contractor shall coordinate its construction operations atof each with pa those f Work other contractors and entities to ensure efficient and orderly Each contractor shall coordinate its own operations with operations included in different `N, Sections that depend on each other for proper installation,connection, and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where \., installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service,and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. 4. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair of all components, including mechanical and electrical. ._ C. Prepare memoranda for distribution clude such items as equ red noti esoutlining al procedures 1.. , reports, and l � required for coordinationlist of attendees at meetings. 1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required. ... D. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and scheduled activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to,the following: _ 1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Preparation of the schedule of values. hh 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 2 PROJECT#19-23188 0,4 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. AN; 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems. gawit 1.6 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION(RFI) A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information, clarification, or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. i 1. Architect will return without response those RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities I2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid t I work or work of subcontractors. delays in Contractor's l'ul B. Content of the RFL• Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or t interpretation and the following: 1. Project name. 2. Project number. 3• Date. ...44. Name of Contractor. i 5. Name of Architect. 6. RFI number,numbered sequentially. 1 7. RFI subject. 8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. -- 11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the i Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. I 12. Contractor's signature. 13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches. of affected C. RFI Forms: AIA Document G716 or Software-generated form with substantially the same i i content as indicated above, acceptable to Architect. "'' 1. Attachments shall be electronic files in PDF format. D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. '1 Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect T after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day. .,,, 1. The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action: l PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION w PROJECT#19-23188 013100 3 1 a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods. d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. f. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs. tion, in which case 2. Architect's action may includW request from time of additional receipt by architect of additional 1.—Architect's time for response ill date information. to the Contract Time or the 3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a Contractor to submit Change Contract Sum may be eligibleChange Proposal according to ,...fo Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures." _ a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or r the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 5 days of receipt of the RFI response. E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log monthly.Include the following: 1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Architect. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect's response was received. �, 8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request,as appropriate. 9. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor LI disagrees with response. i 1.7 PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise indicated. 1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is i required, of date and time of each meeting. NotifyOwner and Architect of scheduled II., dates and times a minimum of 5 working days prior to meeting. attendees. _ 2. Agenda:Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute ill recorto ld significant discussions ' 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conductingmeeting w 1..• and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect,within three days of the meeting. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100- 4 i PROJECT#19-23188 7 B. Preconstruction Conferenc e: Architect will schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference 0.4 before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 10 days after execution of the Agreement. 1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; `I Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 7 2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: a. Responsibilities and personnel assignments. b. Tentative construction schedule. c. Phasing. d. Critical work sequencing and long lead items. lalt e. Designation of key personnel and their duties. 1 f. Lines of communications. g. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. h. Procedures for RFIs. `'I i. Procedures for testing and inspecting. j. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. k. Distribution of the Contract Documents. ',‘ 1. Submittal procedures. m. Preparation of Record Documents. n. Use of the premises. o. Work restrictions. o P. Working hours. q. Owner's occupancy requirements. r. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. 7 s. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns. t. Construction waste management and recycling. u. Parking availability. ' v. Office, work, and storage areas. 1 w. Equipment deliveries and priorities. x. First aid. y. Security. z. Progress cleaning. 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes. C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity when required by other sections and when required for coordination with i other construction. 1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates. 7 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION �s PROJECT#19-23188 013100 5 1 2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following: a. Contract Documents. Ii., \ b. Options. c. Related RFIs. d. Related Change Orders. `" e. Purchases. f. Deliveries. g. Submittals. 1...h. Sustainable design requirements. i. Review of mockups. j. Possible conflicts. k. Compatibility requirements. 1. Time schedules. m. Weather limitations. -. n. Manufacturer's written instructions. o. Warranty requirements. p. Compatibility of materials. t q. Acceptability of substrates. '' r. Temporary facilities and controls. s. Space and access limitations. t. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. u. Testing and inspecting requirements. v. Installation procedures. w. Coordination with other work. x. Required performance results. y. Protection of adjacent work. z. Protection of construction and personnel. two discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including 3. Record significant conference required corrective measures and actions. and to other parties �.• 4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present requiring information. luded. 5. Do not proceed with installation the conference id�ments to successfully performancecof the Initiate whatever actions are necessaryto resolve $o•' Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date. 1 D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at regular intervals. 1. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. _. 2. Attendees: In additiontnrother entn ty concerned with current progress or involved i subcontractor, supplier,, andn atives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, - planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to �.. conclude matters relating to the Work. 3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. L. 013100 - 6 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PROJECT#19 23188 I1, a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review I ,,,� Determine whether each activity is on time, aheadrosche since the last meeting. f in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determinele, ond how br schedule, j behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and 1 -- parties involved to a • subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. and 1) Review schedule for next period. b.II 7 Review present and future needs of each entity present, includingthe following: ollowmg: 1) Interface requirements. 1 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. i 7 4) Deliveries. 5) Off-site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site use. t 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Progress cleaning. 10) Quality and work standards. 11) Status of correction of deficient items. 12) Field observations. 13) Status of RFIs. " 14) Status of Proposal Requests. I 15) Pending changes. 16) Status of Change Orders. 17) Pending claims and disputes. 18) Documentation of information for payment requests. 4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information. the a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue — revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. PART 2 -PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 -EXECUTION Not Used) END OF SECTION 013100 I f H PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PROJECT#19-23188 I 013100 - 7 I SECTION 013200- CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. pP ary 1.2 SUS A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of 1 I construction during performance of the Work, including the following: g •- 1. Startup construction schedule. 2. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 3. Daily construction reports. 4. Material location reports. 5. Site condition reports. 6. Unusual event reports. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, 4 and controlling the construction Project. Activities included in a construction schedule c time and resources. consume I 1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times. 2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network. 7 B. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction "'°`i project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations ,' determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project. C. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float. D. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity. 7 E. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity. °I' F. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment1 necessary for com le 1 activity as scheduled. p hng an CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PROJECT#19-23188 013200- 1 6: 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format: 1. Working electronic copy of schedule file,where indicated. 2. PDF file. 3. Two paper copies,of sufficient size to display entire period or schedule, as required. B. Startup construction schedule.C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule — for entire construction period. 1. Submit a working digital copy of schedule, using software indicated, and labeled to comply with requirements for submittals. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the schedule of values, list of subcontracts, 4 chedule progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and submittal s � reports. 1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities involved. 2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence. 1.6 CON IRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE GENERAL A. Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules ien usingsched current version of a program that has been developed specifically to manage cons B. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the Work to date of final completion. 1. Contract completion date shall not bchanged by su byission Chon of e aO schedule that shows an der. 1 early completion date,unless specifically ... C Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents and final c schedule, including, but not limited to,the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Complete D. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues: ' Jr* 1. Unresolved issues. 2. Unanswered Requests for Information. 3. Rejected or unreturned submittals. So.4. Notations on returned submittals. 5. Pending modifications affecting the Work and the Contract Time. 013200 -2 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PROJECT#19-23188 `l.... i! 161'i E. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility. i 1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities. 1.7 GANTT-CHART SCHEDULE RE UIREMENTS A. Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal, Gantt-chart-type, Contractor's Construction Schedule within 30 days of date established for the Notice of Award. 1. Base schedule on the startup construction schedule and additional information received since the start of Project. B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of I i each week with a continuous vertical line. I ,,,,, 1. For construction activities that require three months or longer to complete, indicate an estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments within time bar. — PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION(Not Used) END OF SECTION 013200 t I 1 I lail ti I yl 1 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PROJECT#19-23188 013200 3 SECTION 013300-SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES-PAPER/ELECTRONIC 013300 ti PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS j A. Drawings andgeneral i provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1"1 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. '1 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action. B. Informational Submittals: Written information that action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.Architect's responsive 1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES { A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 0-4 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testin delive } submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. g' rye other 4.01 2 Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. B. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of related construction activities. C. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 1 4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PROJECT#19-23188 013300 1 1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal. 4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants, Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal. _ D. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. 1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal o onr label or rtitl title e eb blockt record 1 2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. ..... 3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken: a„ a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect. d. Name and address of Contractor. e. Name and address of subcontractor. f. Name and address of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. h. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. i. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. E. Deviations: Highlight or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract *....- Documents on submittals. al, and unless F. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies pren equired for final the Contract Documents, initial submittal � Architect observes noncompliance with provisions may serve as final submittal. 1. Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of `� copies to Architect. 2. Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will be marked with action taken and will be returned. G. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and ect handling. Transmit each submittal using othernthanal form.Contractorroritthoserwithout Contractor .. return submittals, without review, received from sources review. ...., 1. Transmittal Form: Provide locations on form for the following information: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Destination (To:). . d. Source(From:). '■' e. Names of subcontractor,manufacturer, and supplier. f. Category and type of submittal. n_ 013300 - 2 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PROJECT#19-23188 .r g• Submittal purpose and description. traith. Specification Section number and title. i. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. J. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. k. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. 1. Remarks. m. Signature of transmitter. H. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are approved. I• Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. of J. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating approved by Architect. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 1.1 2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Sections.Specification I B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of constru type of product or equipment. coon and 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings,not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options o ti 4.64 3. Include the following information, as applicable: P are applicable. ,.� a. Manufacturer's written recommendations. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Manufacturer's installation instructions. d. Standard color charts. 1.1 e. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. 1i f Operational range diagrams. g. Standard product operation and maintenance manuals. h. Compliance with specified referenced standards. i• Testing by recognized testing agency. j• Application of testing agency labels and seals. k. Notation of coordination requirements. 4. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Sam les. "i p SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PROJECT#19-23188 013300- 3 n 5. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of Product Data, unless ootherwopyise a in icajed. Architect will return two copies. Mark up and retain one ct Record Document. C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specificC informatiDoon, drawn or accurately standard printed ale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the 1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Dimensions. b. Identification of products. c. Roughing-in and setting diagrams. d. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and control wiring. e. Design calculations. f. Compliance with specified standards. g. Notation of coordination requirements. h. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. i. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated. j. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. 2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches butno larger er than 24 of each ruby 36 inches.architect will 3. Number of Copies: Submit five opaque (bond) copies return all but one copy, or submit(in pdf form)electronic copy via email to the Architect. Architect will return stamped pdf to contractor via email. ons. All shop 4. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings as on them when the Contractor for in these receivesthem from the drawings shall have the date marked `„ supplier. Shop drawings shall be submitted through the Contractor and shall not come direct from the supplier to the Architect. Shop drawings that are not dated and signed as approved by the Contractor will not be accepted or reviewed and will be marked "resubmit" and sent back to the Contractor. Shop drawings for the mechanical and ... electrical work shall be sent to the Consultant if other than the Architect. D. Samp les: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these ` e eristics delivered and installed.characteristicstween with other elements Submit toparison of sArchite Architect s ixb weeks submittal and actual component as1 of Contract Signature. ,..... 1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. 2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: �—. a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. r.. is,..,013300 -4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PROJECT#19-23188 � 97 3. Quantity and Size: All samples shall be submitted in duplicate except show the expected range of color and texture or variation in the material.note tSiizes of the "` samples shall be according to the following schedule unless otherwise specified. Submit sam les as soon as ossible for coordination of color selections. " a. Finish materials (Ceramic tile attern): Two samples minimum, 12" square and mounted or installed on suitable hardboard or surface compatible to the surface on which the material is to be applied. Samples shall indicate complete application as specified including color selected. b. Other materials: Shall be a suitable length or size, which will show the representative arrangement, finish, or material, which will be required for the ..4 project. In the case of small items, individual items of the size specified will be ' acceptable. i 4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-7 control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets ma used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. Y be "1 a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual l Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use. b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor. 5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. a. Number of Samples: Submit two full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected ted from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected. 11 E. Product Schedule or List: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended locatio Include the following information in tabular form: n. 1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product. 2. Number and name of room or space. —1 4. Location within room or space. 4• Number of Copies: Submit four copies of product schedule or list, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. ill a. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. F. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Use CSI Form 1.5A. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying i products. 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s)covered by subcontract. 13. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract. n i SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PROJECT#19-23188 013300- 5 1 4. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of subcontractor list, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. . a. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. 4 2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS i,-- A. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners,and other information specified. B. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. C. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. t D. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. E. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. F. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified ults testing in agency, l y,fo on testing complianceae with standard form, indicating and interpreting requirements in the Contract Documents. .. current uct G. Product Test Reports: Prepare written s reports indicating Contrac Documents.od Baser reports on uced by manufacturer complies with require ; evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or t on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. H. Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect L. for Project. Include the following information: � 1. Name of evaluation organization. 2. Date of evaluation. 3. Time period when report is in effect. 4. Product and manufacturers' names. 5. Description of product. 6. Test procedures and results. 1� 7. Limitations of use. I. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements." : 013300- 6 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PROJECT#19-23188 J. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. K. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data." L. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. -•� Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers. M. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable: 1. Preparation of substrates. °IN 2. Required substrate tolerances. 3. Sequence of installation or erection. 4. Required installation tolerances. 5. Required adjustments. 6. Recommendations for cleaning and protection. N. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized 04_ service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable: . I 1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with 4.111( requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions,products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. O. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage. P. Material Safety Data Sheets(MSDSs): Submit information directly to Owner. 1. Architect will not review submittals that include MSDSs and will return the entire submittal for resubmittal. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PROJECT#19-23188 013300 7 i + Q. Finish Schedule: Each contractor shall submit to the Architect brand names,types, and samples of all finish materials for the project. Upon approval, the Architect will prepare a schedule of color selections for all finishes throughout the building. The General Contractor may obtain up to 15 copies of this schedule from the Architect so that he may distribute these to his/her material suppliers and subcontractors. The Mechanical and Electrical contractors shall each be provided two copies. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. lam 1. Contractor's name. 2. Date Contractor received drawings from supplier. 3. Any changes or notations in green pencil. 4. A statement that the Contractor has reviewed the drawings and finds them to be correct `r except as noted. 5 Signature of person making Contractor review. ..,, 6. Any deviations from drawings and specifications noted,underlined or circled in green. 3.2 ARCHITECT'S /ACTION A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required in red, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. D. Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned without review. E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 8 PROJECT#19-23188 3.3 OWNER'S COPIES A. At the end of the project, each Contractor shall present to the Owner two (2)approved copies of all shop drawings, schedules and operating manuals, and warranties suitably bound and indexed by Division, in a 3-ring binder. END OF SECTION 013300 V i `i 1 i I ) SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PROJECT#19 23188 013300 9 1 SECTION 014000- UALITY � REU�EMENTS PART 1 - 014000 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS i A. Drawings and general provisions of the Conditions and other Divprovision i Specification including General and "'9 pecification Sections, apply to this Section. Supplementary 1.2 SUMMARY "` A. Section includes administrative and pr ocedural rocedural requirements for quality assurance and quality '� B. Testing and inspection services are required indicated. sp services not relieve Contractor r e to verify offmppon sice with for requirements compliancewihspecified e Contract Document requirements. responsibility tJ for with the 1. Specific quality-assurance and quality-control ahty control requirements for individual work results are specified in their respective .,� Sections may also cover pr duction o standaSpecification Sections. Requirements in i b 2 Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do notindividual assurance and quality-control procedures that facilitat limit Contractor's other Document requirements. quality- 3• Requirements for Contractor to compliance with the Contract Requirements en for provide quality-assurance and required boy this Architect Owner, or authorities havingquality-control control services •-. 4. Specific test and inspection requirements are not s jurisdiction are not limited by specified in this Section. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Field Quality-Control Tests: Tests and ins ec the Work and for completed Work. p bons that are performed on site for installation of B. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor employee, or Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor,traanother entity incluing installation, erection, application, engaged by Contractor performnd similar a particularoprt construction o as an assembly, and operations. operation, 1 Use of trade-specific terminology certain trade-specific activities beyin referring to a trade or entity that requirements specified applyperformed by accredited or unionized oes individuals,ot require hor exclusively to specific trade(s). I C. Product Tests: Tests and inspections that are j" Plaroduct (NRTL performed b MST's National L) coding to 29 CFR 1910.7, by a nationallync recognized a co testing qualified to conduct Voluntary Laboratory by a testing agency accredited according to product testingAccreditation Program (NVLAP), b establish product performance and compliance with to by a testing agency authorities having Jurisdiction, to QUALITY REQUIREMENTS "`� PROJECT#19-23188 014000- 1 D. Source Quality-Control Tests: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source; for -- or shop. plant,mill,factory, �, example, inspections, or both. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, p E. Testing Ag Y agencY. } laboratory shall mean the same as testing g Qualityon of the Services:t against actions, and procedures performed before and during F. k to guard against defects and deficiencies and. substantiate that proposed execution of the Work 1 ith requirements. t� construction will comply and after procedures, and related actions during Services: Tests, inspections, pi G. Quality-Controlc ito evaluate that actual products incorporatedon�tol hevi Workko not requirements. Contractor's quality 6. d execution of the Work 1 with req Architect. completed construction comply include contract administration activities performed by L CONFLICTING RE UIREMENTS 1.4 � Requirements: If compliance di r mor standardsosfl or Standards and Other A. Conflictingrequirements levels, comply with the most stringent requirements are specified and the standardsiesor orality apparently equal,tot Architect requirements for minimum quantities quality requirements that are different,but requirement.Refer conflicting q for direction before proceeding. quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be QualityLevels: The comply exactly with the th B. Minimum um provided o The actual installation may P or performed. minimume miimum specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. quantity or qualityg p as these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, Top comply with ►..r appropriate, for the conte xt of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS in "Quality Assurance" Article to Qualifications: For testing agencies specified TestingAgency proof of qualifications in the form of a t` A. of the testing agency by a recognized authority. demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include e recent report on the inspection \re \ g. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following: 1. Specification Section number and test and inspections. 2. Entity responsible for performing , 3. Description of test and inspection. standards. 4. Identification of applicable 5. Identification of test and inspection methods. 6. Number of tests and inspections required. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 7. samples. �,. 8. Requirements for obtaining p es control service. 9. Unique characteristics of each q ty C. Reports: Prepare and s ubmit certified written reports and documents as specified. �► 014000 -2 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PROJECT#19-23188 7 1 I D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's record, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 7 1.6 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following: i 1. Date of issue. -- 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. .„ 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspection. "f 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. " 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting. B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other 1 1 Sections. Include the following: 1. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of technical representative making report. i 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance 7complies with requirements. r 6. Statement whether conditions,products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. I " C. Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting 1 manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections.Include the following: 1. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of factory-authorized representative making report. service 2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements. sit 3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 4. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. `-1 5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PROJECT 119-23188 014000 3 i Wm 1 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. As applicable,procure products 6. from manufacturers able to meet qualification requirements, warranty requirements, and technical or factory-authorized service representative requirements. 1.— C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar eilar o th w lose a indii suffiiateden for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, production capacity to produce required units. D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, applying, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose :wo work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services aredefined n matetas hose ial, dpeigo rformed aed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar extent to those indicated for this Project. a. F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy .. qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated. 1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for �. specialists. G. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of a manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe sextent to those inspect installation for of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, this Project. `" tati e of H. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An utooiiz d ect r presenat v of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer P manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. 1.8 QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components an equipment Sectionstallation, including 1.. 013300 "Submittal _ service connections. Report results in writing as specifiedI Procedures." ," i a. 014000 -4 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PROJECT 419-23188 1 milt I j B. Manufacturer's Technical Services: representative to observe and inspect heeeWork. Manufacturer's technical services include participation in preinstallation conferences, engage a manufacturers technical ' representative's conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection substrates comp and portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports. of completed —1 C. Associated Contractor Services: Cooperate with agencies and required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control representatives performing services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit q -control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary ( of personnel. Provide the following: p assignment •-, 1. Access to the Work. ,` 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that re ,,4 inspection. Assist agency in obtaining samples. quire testing and 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing control by testing site. and inspection equipment at Project D. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate quality-control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid required nece quality-assurance r murance and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspection. necessity of eovin g and 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. PART 2 -PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG IA. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests inspections.Include the following: i' 1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection. B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access t inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours. to test and I 1. Submit log at Project closeout as part of Project Record Documents. i QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PROJECT#19-23188 014000- 5 L \\ 3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General : On completion of testing, inspection, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates durable seams that arshes. ore e as invisible as hed areas L P and extend restoration into adjoining are possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Section 017300 "Execution. B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities. t assignment of l.. C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of theg responsibility for quality-control services. .. 3.3 RE UIRED OBSERVATIONS OF THE ARCHITECT A. The Contractor shall note throughout the planseas are acgu guideons where only, and do"required necessarily observations" are called for. The following General Conditions. indicate all site visits required. See Supplementary >_ Before any ceiling Before any painting Substantial completion review Final review One-year warranty review ..— \ END OF SECTION 014000 O14000 - 6 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PROJECT#19-23188 rr SECTION 014200- REFERENCES 014200 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary �- Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "authorized," "selected," "required,"and "permitted" "requested," have the same meaning as "directed." D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms includin form on "noted," "scheduled,"and "specified"have the same meaning as "indicated." mg "shown," E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. G. "Install": Unload, temporarily store, unpack, assemble, erect, place, anchor, dimension, finish,cure,protect, clean, and similar operations at PrProject site. apply, work to H. "Provide":Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site 7 is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land which Project is to be built. on 1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent ! requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated. REFERENCES --� 014200 1 PROJECT#19-23188 6 fa ar with C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Copies Project scould uld benda it are not 6. i industry standards applicable to its construction activity. app bound with the Contract Documents. i 1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source. L 1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS ecifications or other L. A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations recognized name of the entities acronyms are used in in n the following list. Contract Documents, they shall mean g This information is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents. 1. AABC - Associated Air Balance Council;www.aabc.com. L. 2. AAMA- American Architectural Manufacturers Association;www aamanet.org. 3. AAPFCO- Association of American Plant Food Control Officials;www aapfco.org. 4. AASHTO - American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials; www transportation.org. 5. AATCC -American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists; www aatcc.org. 6. ABMA- American Bearing Manufacturers Association;www americanbearin s.or . 7. ABMA- American Boiler Manufacturers Association;www.abma.com. `. 8. ACI -American Concrete Institute; (Formerly: ACI International);www.abma.com. 9. ACPA- American Concrete Pipe Association; concrete-pipe.org. aeic.org. 10. AEIC - Association of Edison Illuminating Companies,Inc. (The);ww w. 11. AF&PA - American Forest&Paper Association;www afandpa.org. 12. AGA- American Gas Association;ww____w aga_org• ahm__or 13. ARAM-Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers;www _a_- g• 14. AHRI-Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute(The); gi i ii t• . t.- 15. Al -Asphalt Institute;www.as haltinstitute.or . 16. AIA-American Institute of Architects(The);ww.____�_Aa ii Z. 17. AISC - American Institute of Steel Construction;www______aisaorg. ;.- 18. AISI- American Iron and Steel Institute;www.steel.org• aitc glulam.or 19. AITC - American Institute of Timber Construction;www -g• 20. AMCA-Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.;www.amca.org. i,.. 21. ANSI- American National Standards Institute;www.ani.org. 22. AOSA - Association of Official Seed Analysts,Inc.;www.aosaseed.com. 23. APA- APA-The Engineered Wood Association;www apawood rg w .o . . 24. APA- Architectural Precast Association;ww archprecast.org. 25. API - American Petroleum Institute;www•apl•org. 26. ARI-Air-Conditioning&Refrigeration Institute;(See AHRI). i�.. as 27. ARI- American Refrigeration Institute; (See AHRI). haltroofing.org. 28. ARMA- Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association;www p , 29. ASCE- American Society of Civil Engineers;w ww asce.org.30. ASCE/SEI - American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute; (See L ASCE). 31. ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers; ' www ashra or g e. . 32. ASME - ASME International; (American Society of Mechanical Engineers ; www.asme.org. L 014200 - 2 REFERENCES PROJECT#19 23188 L 1 33. ASSE-American Society of Safety Engineers(The); www.asse.org. 34. ASSE-American Society of Sanitary Engineering; www.asse-plumbing.org. "41 35. ASTM - ASTM International; www.astm.org. 36. ATIS - Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions; www.atis.org. 37. AWEA-American Wind Energy Association; www.awea.org. 38. AWI-Architectural Woodwork Institute; www.awinet.org. 39. AWMAC - Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada; www.awmac.com. 40. AWPA-American Wood Protection Association; www.awpa.com. 41. AWS -American Welding Society; www.aws.org. 42. AWWA-American Water Works Association; www.awwa.org. 43. BHMA- Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; www.buildershardware.com. 44. BIA-Brick Industry Association(The); www.gobrick.com. 45. BICSI- BICSI,Inc.; www.bicpi.org. 46. BIFMA - BIFMA International; (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association); www.bifma.org. 47. BISSC -Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee; www.biscc.org. 48. BWF - Badminton World Federation; (Formerly: International Badminton Federation); www.bissc.org. 49. CDA - Copper Development Association; www.copper.org. 50. CEA - Canadian Electricity Association; www.electricity.ca. 51. CEA- Consumer Electronics Association; www.ce.org. 52. CFFA- Chemical Fabrics and Film Association,Inc.; www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com. 53. CFSEI - Cold-Formed Steel Engineers Institute; www.cfsei.org. al 54. CGA - Compressed Gas Association; www.cganet.com. 55. CIMA- Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association;www.cellulose.org. 56. CISCA- Ceilings& Interior Systems Construction Association; www.cisca.org. 57. CISPI- Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute;www.cispi.org. 58. CLFMI- Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute; www.chainlinkinfo.org. 59. CPA - Composite Panel Association; www.pbmdf.com. 60. CRI - Carpet and Rug Institute(The); www.carpet-rug.org. 61. CRRC - Cool Roof Rating Council; www.coolroofs.org. 1 62. CRSI- Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute; www.crsi.org. 63. CSA- Canadian Standards Association;www.csa.ca. 64. CSA - CSA International; (Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services); www.csa- international.org. 65. CSI - Construction Specifications Institute(The);www.csinet.org. 66. CSSB - Cedar Shake& Shingle Bureau; www.cedarbureau.org. 67. CTI - Cooling Technology Institute; (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute); www.cti.org. 68. CWC - Composite Wood Council; (See CPA). 69. DASMA -Door and Access Systems Manufacturers Association; www.dasma.com. 70. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute; www.dhi.org. 71. ECA - Electronic Components Association; (See ECIA). 72. ECAMA-Electronic Components Assemblies&Materials Association; (See ECIA). 73. ECIA- Electronic Components Industry Association; www.eciaonline.org. 74. EIA-Electronic Industries Alliance; (See TIA). 75. EIMA- EIFS Industry Members Association; www.eima.com. ""1 76. EJMA- Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.ejma.org. ' 77. ESD - ESD Association; (Electrostatic Discharge Association); www.esda.org. 78. ESTA- Entertainment Services and Technology Association; (See PLASA). 79. EVO- Efficiency Valuation Organization; www.evo-world.org. REFERENCES PROJECT#19-23188 014200 3 80. FCI -Fluid Cont rols Institute; www.fluidcontrolsinstitute.org. L 81. FIBA - Federation Internationale de Basketball; (The International Basketball Federation); www.fiba.com. 82. FIVB - Federation Internationale de Volleyball; (The International Volleyball L Federation); www.fivb.org. 83. FM Approvals- FM Approvals LLC;www.fmglobal.com. 84. FM Global -FM Global; (Formerly: FMG-FM Global);www.fmglobal.com. L 85. FRSA - Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors Association, Inc.; www.floridaroof.com. t 86. FSA-Fluid Sealing Association;www.fluidsealing.com. 87. FSC -Forest Stewardship Council U.S.;www.fscus.org. 4. 88. GA- Gypsum Association;www.gypsum.org. 89. GANA- Glass Association of North America;www.glasswebsite.com. t 90. GS - Green Seal; www.greenseal.org. 91. HI-Hydraulic Institute;www.pumps.org. 92. HI/GAMA- Hydronics Institute/Gas Appliance Manufacturers Association; (See AHRI). 93. HMMA- Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association; (See NAAMM). ... I 94. HPVA-Hardwood Plywood &Veneer Association; www.hpva.org. 95. HPW-H. P. White Laboratory, Inc.;www.hpwhite.com. 4 96. IAPSC -International Association of Professional Security Consultants;www.iapsc.org. 97. IAS -International Accreditation Service;www.iasonline.org. 98. IAS -International Approval Services; (See CSA). 99. ICBO- International Conference of Building Officials;(See ICC). ... 100. ICC -International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org. 101. ICEA- Insulated Cable Engineers Association,Inc.;www.icea.net. 102. ICPA-International Cast Polymer Alliance; www.icpa-hq.org. . 103. ICRI-International Concrete Repair Institute,Inc.;www.icri.org. 104. IEC -International Electrotechnical Commission;http://www.iec.ch. 105. IEEE-Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers,Inc. (The);www.ieee.org.106. IES - Illuminating Engineering Society; (Formerly: Illuminating Engineering Society of r ... North America);www.iea.org. 107. IESNA-Illuminating Engineering Society of North America;(See IES). , 108. IEST- Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology;www.iest.org. w.. 109. IGMA- Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance;www.igmaonline.org. 110. IGSHPA - International Ground Source Heat Pump Association; www.igshpa.okstate.edu. 6. 111. ILI-Indiana Limestone Institute of America,Inc.;www.iliai.com. 112. Intertek - Intertek Group; (Formerly: ETL SEMCO; Intertek Testing Service NA); www.intertek.com. ►... 113. ISA - International Society of Automation (The); (Formerly: Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society); www.isa.org.114. ISAS -Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society(The); (See ISA). 115. ISFA - International Surface Fabricators Association; (Formerly: International Solid Surface Fabricators Association);www.isfanow.org. 116. ISO-International Organization for Standardization; www.iso.org. L 117. ISSFA-International Solid Surface Fabricators Association; (See ISFA). L. 118. ITU -International Telecommunication Union;www.itu.int/home. 119. KCMA-Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association;www.kcma.org. 120. LMA -Laminating Materials Association; (See CPA). 4. 121. LPI- Lightning Protection Institute; www.lightning.org. 122. MBMA-Metal Building Manufacturers Association; www.mbma.com. ►.. 0 REFERENCES 14200 -4 PROJECT#19-23188 4... I 123. MCA-Metal Construction Association; www.metalconstruction.org. 124. MFMA-Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.maplefloor.org. '1 125. MFMA- Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc.;www.metalframingmfg.org. 126. MHIA - Material HandlingIndustry try of America; www.mhia.org. 127. MIA- Marble Institute of America; www.marble-institute.com. 128. MMPA - Moulding&Millwork Producers Association; www.wmmpa.com. 129. MPI-Master Painters Institute;www.paintinfo.com. 130. MSS - Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.; www.mss-hq.org. 131. NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; www.naamm.org. 132. NACE - NACE International; (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International); www.nace.org. 133. NADCA-National Air Duct Cleaners Association; www.nadca.com. 134. NAIMA-North American Insulation Manufacturers Association;www.naima.org. '"' 135. NBGQA-National BuildingGranite 136. NBI -New Buildings Institute; www.nQewbu ldivarries Association, g Sorg ion, Inc.; www.nbgga.com. 137. NCAA-National Collegiate Athletic Association(The); www.ncaa.org. 138. NCMA-National Concrete Masonry Association; www.ncma.org. 139. NEBB -National Environmental Balancing Bureau; www.nebb.org. 140. NECA-National Electrical Contractors Association; www.necanet.org. 141. NeLMA-Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association; www.nelma.org. { 142. NEMA-National Electrical Manufacturers Association;www.nema.org. 143. NETA-InterNational Electrical Testing Association; www.netaworld.org. 144. NFHS -National Federation of State High School Associations;www.nfhs.org. 145. NFPA-National Fire Protection Association; www.nfpa.org. 146. NFPA -NFPA International; (See NFPA). 147. NFRC -National Fenestration Rating Council; www.nfrc.org. 148. NHLA -National Hardwood Lumber Association; www.nhla.com. 149. NLGA -National Lumber Grades Authority;www.nlga.org. 150. NOFMA-National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association; (See NWFA). 151. NOMMA-National Ornamental &Miscellaneous Metals Association; www.nomma.org. 152. NRCA -National Roofing Contractors Association; www.nrca.net. 153. NRMCA- National Ready Mixed Concrete Association; www.nrmca.org. -si 154. NSF-NSF International; www.nsf.org. 155. NSPE-National Society of Professional Engineers; www.nspe.org. 156. NSSGA -National Stone, Sand& Gravel Association; www.nssga.org. .-, 157. NTMA-National Terrazzo& Mosaic Association, Inc. (The); www.ntma.com. 158. NWFA-National Wood Flooring Association; www.nwfa.org. 159. PCI-Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute; www.pci.org. 160. PDI-Plumbing&Drainage Institute; www.pdionline.org. 161. PLASA - PLASA; (Formerly: ESTA - Entertainment Services and Technology Association); www.plasa.org. 162. RCSC -Research Council on Structural Connections; www.boltcouncil.org. 163. RFCI - Resilient Floor Covering Institute; www.rfci.com. 164. RIS -Redwood Inspection Service; www.redwoodinspection.com. 165. SAE - SAE International; www.sae.org. 166. SCTE- Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers; www.scte.org. 167. SDI- Steel Deck Institute; www.sdi.org. 168. SDI - Steel Door Institute; www.steeldoor.org. g 169. SEFA- Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (The); www.sefalabs.com. REFERENCES 014200 PROJECT#19-23188 5 L 170. SEI/AS CE - Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers; (See L ASCE). 171. SIA- Security Industry Association;www.siaonline.org. 172. SJI - Steel Joist Institute;www.steeljoist.org. L 173. SMA- Screen Manufacturers Association;www.smainfo.org. 174. SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; www.smacna.org. 175. SMP I'E- Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers;www.smpte.org. 176. SPFA- Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance;www.sprayfoam.org. 177. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau; www.spib.org. ` 178. SPRI - Single Ply Roofing Industry;www.spri.org. 179. SRCC- Solar Rating&Certification Corporation;www.solar-rating.org. 180. SS1NA- Specialty Steel Industry of North America;www.ssina.com. 181. SSPC- SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings;www.sspc.org. '" 182. STI - Steel Tank Institute;www.steeltank.com. 183. SWI - Steel Window Institute;www.steelwindows.com. ` 184. SWPA- Submersible Wastewater Pump Association; www.swpa.org. L 185. TCA-Tilt-Up Concrete Association; www.tilt-up.org. 186. TCNA- Tile Council of North America,Inc.; www.tileusa.com. 187. TEMA-Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association,Inc.;www.tema.org. 1 188. TIA - Telecommunications Industry Association (The); (Formerly: TIA/EIA - Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance); www.tiaonline.org. I644. 189. TIA/EIA- Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance; (See TIA). 190. TMS- The Masonry Society;www.masonrysociety.org. L. 191. TPI-Truss Plate Institute;www.tpinst.org. 192. TPI -Turfgrass Producers International; www.turfgrasssod.org. 193. TRI -Tile Roofing Institute;www.tileroofing.org. t 194. UL-Underwriters Laboratories Inc.;www.ul.com. `' 195. UNI -Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association;www.uni-bell.org. 196. USAV-USA Volleyball;www.usavolleyball.org. 197. USGBC-U.S. Green Building Council;www.usgbc.org. L. 1 198. USITT-United States Institute for Theatre Technology,Inc.;www.usitt.org. 199. WASTEC - Waste Equipment Technology Association;www.wastec.org. L 200. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau; www.wclib.org. 201. WCMA- Window Covering Manufacturers Association;www.wcmanet.org. 202. WDMA-Window&Door Manufacturers Association;www.wdma.com. 203. WI -Woodwork Institute;www.wicnet.org. `„ 204. WSRCA- Western States Roofing Contractors Association;www.wsrca.com. 205. WWPA- Western Wood Products Association;www.wwpa.org. ; B. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract 6.4 Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. This information is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents. 1. DIN-Deutsches Institut fur Normung e.V.; www.din.de. 2. IAPMO - International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials; www.iapmo.org. 4."' 3. ICC -International Code Council;www.iccsafe.org. 4. ICC-ES -ICC Evaluation Service,LLC; www.icc-es.org. 0 REFERENCES 14200 - 6 PROJECT#19-23188 1 C. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or { other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Information is subject to change and is up to date as of the date of the Contract Documents. 1. COE- Army Corps of Engineers; www.usace.army.mil. — 2. CPSC - Consumer Product Safety Commission; www.cpsc.gov. 3. DOC - Department of Commerce; National Institute of Standards and Technology; www.nist.gov. 4. DOD -Department of Defense; www.quicksearch.dla.mil. 5. DOE- Department of Energy; www.energy.gov. 6. EPA-Environmental Protection Agency; www.epa.gov. 7. FAA - Federal Aviation Administration; www.faa.gov. ^' 8. FG-Federal Government Publications; www.gpo.gov/fdsys. 9. GSA - General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov. 10. HUD-Department of Housing and Urban Development; www.hud.gov. 11. LBL - Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory; Environmental Energy Technologies • Division;www.eetd.lbl.gov. 12. OSHA- Occupational Safety&Health Administration; www.osha.gov. 13. SD - Department of State; www.state.gov. 14. TRB - Transportation Research Board; National Cooperative Highway Research Program; The National Academies; www.trb.or_g. ..� 15. USDA - Department of Agriculture; Agriculture Research Service; U.S. Salinity Laboratory; www.ars.usda.gov. 16. USDA-Department of Agriculture; Rural Utilities Service; www.usda.gov. 17. USDOJ- Department of Justice; Office of Justice Programs; National Institute of Justice; www.oip.usdoj.gov. 18. USP- U.S. Pharmacopeia] Convention;www__usp off. 19. USPS - United States Postal Service; www.usps.com. D. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. This information is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents. 1. CFR - Code of Federal Regulations; Available from Government Printing Office; www.gpo.gov/fdsys. 2. DOD - Department of Defense; Military Specifications and Standards; Available from DLA Document Services; www.quicksearch.dla.mil. 3. DSCC -Defense Supply Center Columbus; (See FS). 4. FED-STD-Federal Standard; (See FS). 5. FS - Federal Sp ecification; Available from DLA Document Services; 7 www.quicksearch.dla.mil. a. Available from Defense Standardization Program; www.dsp.dla.mil. b. Available from General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov. c. Available from National Institute of Building Sciences/Whole Building Design Guide; www.wbdg.org/ccb. 6. MILSPEC - Military Specification and Standards; (See DOD). 7. USAB - United States Access Board; www.access-board.gov. 8. USATBCB - U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board; (See '� USAB). 7 REFERENCES PROJECT#19-23188 014200 - 7 E. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or L other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. This information is subject to change and is believed to be accurate as of the date of the Contract Documents. L. 1. CBHF; State of California; Department of Consumer Affairs; Bureau of Electronic and Appliance Repair,Home Furnishings and Thermal Insulation;www.bearhfti.ca.gov. L. 2. CCR; California Code of Regulations; Office of Administrative Law; California Title 24 Energy Code;www.calregs.com. 3. CDHS; California Department of Health Services; (See CDPH). L.. 4. CDPH; California Department of Public Health; Indoor Air Quality Program; www.cal- ia 5. CPUC; California Public Utilities Commission;www.cpuc.ca.gov. 6. SCAQMD; South Coast Air Quality Management District;www.aqmd.gov. 7. TFS; Texas A&M Forest Service; Sustainable Forestry and Economic Development; www.txforestservice.tamu.edu. END OF SECTION 014200 r.. 014200 - 8 REFERENCES PROJECT#19-23188 SECTION 015000- TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY .,, A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. 1.3 USE CHARGES A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities engaged in the Project to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including,but not limited to, Architect,occupants of Project, testing agencies,and authorities having jurisdiction. 7 B. Water and Sewer Service from Existing System: Water from Owner's existing water system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations. C. Electric Power Service from Existing System: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire-prevention program. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each '^! temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - I PROJECT#19-23188 i 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during itsL. use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 0.148-inch-thick, galvanized-steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized-steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch-OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch-OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch-OD top and bottom rails. Provide concrete or galvanized-steel bases for supporting posts. B. Polyethylene Sheet: Reinforced, fire-resistive sheet, 10-mil minimum thickness, with flame- spread rating of 15 or less per ASTM E 84 and passing NFPA 701 Test Method 2. C. Dust-Control Adhesive-Surface Walk-Off Mats: Provide mats minimum 36 by 60 inches. D. Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; `. with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50,respectively. 2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading. B. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of Owner, Architect, and construction personnel office activities and to accommodate Project meetings specified in other Division 01 Sections. Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows: 1. Furniture required for Project-site documents including file cabinets, plan tables, plan racks, and bookcases. 2. Conference room of sufficient size to accommodate meetings of 10 individuals. Provide electrical power service and 120-V ac duplex receptacles, with no fewer than one .. receptacle on each wall. Furnish room with conference table, chairs, and 4-foot-square tack and marker boards. 3. Drinking water and private toilet. 4. Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature of 68 to 72 deg F. 5. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc at desk height. 2.3 EQUIPMENT L. A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000- 2 PROJECT#19-23188 1 1 B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control. 1 1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is prohibited. 2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location and application. 3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return-air grille in system and remove at end of construction and clean HVAC system as required in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures." PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES, GENERAL A. Conservation: Coordinate construction and use of temporary facilities with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of temporary utilities to minimize waste. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the --, Work. 1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Section 011000 "Summary." B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.3 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service. 1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary,to make connections for temporary services. B. Water Service: Connect to Owner's existing water service facilities. Clean and maintain water service facilities in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these --, facilities to condition existing before initial use. I. Where installations below an outlet might be damaged by spillage or leakage, provide a drip pan of suitable size to minimize water damage. Drain accumulated water promptly from pans. 7 i TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 3 7 PROJECT#19-23188 4 C. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of L. construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. 1. Toilets: Use of Owner's existing toilet facilities will be permitted, as long as facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use. L D. Temporary Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. 1. Provide temporary dehumidification systems when required to reduce ambient and �.. substrate moisture levels to level required to allow installation or application of finishes and their proper curing or drying. 2. The Contractor will maintain working temperature of minimum 55 degrees F. in 1,.. construction areas at all times except that during placing, setting and curing of interior masonry, concrete, plaster, gypsum board spackling, ceramic tile and similar work, the minimum temperature shall be 60 degrees F. During installation of interior millwork, wood and composition flooring, acoustic tile, painting and decorating and until the time the Owner assumes responsibility for the building, a minimum 60 degree F temperature shall be maintained. The Contractor will be back charged for excessive heat beyond this temperature after the time the Owner assumes the cost of energy consumption. The building will be brought to a temperature of 80 degrees F for a minimum of 96 hours continuously before any finish painting, floor covering, or ceiling tiles will be installed. During this time, there shall be a continuous movement of air throughout the areas to be finished to ensure that the moisture of construction is removed from the space E. Isolation of Work Areas in Occupied Facilities: Prevent dust, fumes, and odors from entering occupied areas. 1. Prior to commencing work, isolate the HVAC system in area where work is to be performed. 2. Maintain dust partitions during the Work. Use vacuum collection attachments on dust- producing equipment. Isolate limited work within occupied areas using portable dust- L containment devices. 3. Perform daily construction cleanup and final cleanup using approved, HEPA-filter- equipped vacuum equipment. F. Electric Power Service: Connect to Owner's existing electric power service. Maintain equipment in a condition acceptable to Owner. G. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions. 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 4 PROJECT#19-23188 7 H. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all construction personnel. 1. At each telephone,post a list of important telephone numbers. a. Police and fire departments. b. Ambulance service. c. Contractor's home office. d. Contractor's emergency after-hours telephone number. e. Architect's office. f. Engineers'offices. g. Owner's office. "1 h. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices. —1 3.4 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants. B. Parking: Use designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas for construction personnel. C. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water. 1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or —+ adjoining properties or endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities. 2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations. D. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted. 1. Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs as indicated on Drawings. Ear 2. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project. a. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors. 3. Maintain and touch up signs so they are legible at all times. 4. Install Architect's sign as provided by Architect. Attach to project fence or at other location as designated by Architect. At end of project, remove and store for Architect to collect. -� E. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste jfrom construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with progress cleaning requirements in Section 017300 "Execution." F. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel. 1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment"and not temporary facilities. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 5 PROJECT#19-23188 G. Existing Elevator Use: Use of Owner's existing elevators will be permitted, provided elevators are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore elevators to condition existing before initial use, including replacing worn cables, guide shoes, and similar items of limited life. 1. Do not load elevators beyond their rated weight capacity. 2. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect elevator car and entrance doors and frame. If, despite such protection, elevators become damaged, engage elevator Installer to restore damaged work so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in field to the shop, make required repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required. H. Existing Stair Usage: Use of Owner's existing stairs will be permitted, provided stairs are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore stairs to condition existing before initial use. 1. Provide protective coverings,barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect stairs L and to maintain means of egress. If stairs become damaged, restore damaged areas so no evidence remains of correction work. Temporary Use of Permanent Stairs: Use of new stairs for construction traffic will be permitted, provided stairs are protected and finishes restored to new condition at time of Substantial Completion. 3.5 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities. 1. Where access to adjacent properties is required in order to affect protection of existing facilities, obtain written permission from adjacent property owner to access property for that purpose. B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air,waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. 1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Section 011000 "Summary." L C. Stormwater Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of +_ stormwater from heavy rains. D. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root ire systems from damage,flooding, and erosion. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 6 PROJECT#19-23188 L E. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people from easily entering site except by entrance gates. 1 1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations. 2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized personnel. F. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance,vandalism,theft, and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each workday. '11 G. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having f jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting. 1 H. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction. L Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. 1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is incomplete, insulate temporary enclosures. J. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241; manage fire-prevention program. 1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. Comply with additional limits on smoking specified in other Sections. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information. "'S 3.6 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. I' 1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 7 PROJECT#19-23188 D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, 6:4 when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. `� 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2. Remove temporary roads and paved areas not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent construction. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION 015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 8 PROJECT#19-23188 SECTION 016000-PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 nog PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Oa. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or "*'` taken from previously y purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," -;( "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. +�y 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved by Architect through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in- service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a single manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation. In addition to the basis-of-design product description, product attributes and characteristics may be listed to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, in-service performance and physical properties, weight, dimension, durability, visual characteristics, and other special features and requirements for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification. C. Subject to Compliance with Requirements: Where the phrase "Subject to compliance with requirements" introduces a product selection procedure in an individual Specification Section, provide products qualified under the specified product procedure. In the event that a named product or product by a named manufacturer does not meet the other requirements of the specifications, select another named product or product from another named manufacturer that does meet the requirements of the specifications. Submit a comparable product request, if applicable. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PROJECT#19-23 1 88 016000 1 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Comparable Product Request Submittal: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify basis-of-design product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. r Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "Comparable Products" Article. 2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request,or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation,whichever is later. s� a. Form of Architect's Approval of Submittal: As specified in Section 013300 �-- "Submittal Procedures." - b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated. at, B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 013300 I "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE "' A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if ` f previously selected products were also options. 1. Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors. 2. If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible Ne products,Architect will determine which products shall be used. B. Identification of Products: Except for required labels and operating data, do not attach orbow imprint manufacturer or product names or trademarks on exposed surfaces of products or equipment that will be exposed to view in occupied spaces or on the exterior. 1. Labels: Locate required product labels and stamps on a concealed surface, or, where required for observation following installation, on a visually accessible surface that is not _ conspicuous. 2. Equipment Nameplates: Provide a permanent nameplate on each item of service- connected or power-operated equipment. Locate on a visually accessible but inconspicuous surface. Include information essential for operation, including the t following: a. Name of product and manufacturer. b. Model and serial number. c. Capacity. d. Speed. _ e. Ratings. 3. See individual identification sections in Divisions 21, 22, 23, and 26 for additional identification requirements. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 2 PROJECT#19-23188 1 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Delivery and Handling: 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other '"t losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected. C. Storage: 1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 7. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and 7 equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner. ..� 1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES 1 A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. wirk 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide 111! specific rights for Owner. I ' B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS -•7 PROJECT#19 23l 88 016000 - 3 2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using indicated form properly executed. 3. See other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures." - Immo PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES w-- A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation. _ 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items .. needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used ti successfully in similar situations on other projects. 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties meeting e requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make Nye selection. 5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products. 6. Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal," or"or approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. 'r a. Submit additional documentation required by Architect in order to establish equivalency of proposed products. Evaluation of"or equal" product status is by the Architect,whose determination is final. B. Product Selection Procedures: 1. Sole Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. a. Sole product may be indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: ... 2. Sole Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. — Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be y considered. a. Sole manufacturer/source may be indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance N,c with requirements, provide products by the following: ... PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 4 PROJECT#19-23188 I � V 3. Limited List of Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with '..k requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will be considered unless otherwise indicated. •. a. Limited list of products may be indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: ..." 4. Non-Limited List of Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both I available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, which complies with requirements. •.. a. Non-limited list of products is indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: " alb, ... 5. Limited List of Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with •. requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will be considered unless otherwise indicated. a. Limited list of manufacturers is indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance 1 with requirements, provide products by one of the following: ..." mit 6. Non-Limited List of Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, which complies with requirements. 7 a. Non-limited list of manufacturers is indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers whose products may be incorporated in the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: ..." 7 7. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or At. indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. 1 Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes,profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named I manufacturers. i a. For approval of products by unnamed manufacturers, comply with requirements in '" Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for substitutions for convenience. 1 1 C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample," provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. 1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for proposal of product. d PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PROJECT#19-23188 016000 5 7 D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. ,T 2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A. Conditions for Consideration of Comparable Products: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Evidence that proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, is r.p consistent with the Contract Documents, will produce the indicated results, and is compatible with other portions of the Work. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant product qualities L. include attributes such as type, function, in-service performance and physical properties, weight, dimension, durability, visual characteristics, and other specific features and requirements. 2. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 3. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 4. Samples, if requested. B. Submittal Requirements: Approval by the Architect of Contractor's request for use of comparable product is not intended to satisfy other submittal requirements. Comply with ,.. specified submittal requirements. PART 3-EXECUTION(Not Used) END OF SECTION 016000 inn 11 IMom PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 6 PROJECT#19-23188 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION FORM EMAIL TO PROJECT ARCHITECT: Nathan.Compton@ISGlnc.com ISG, INC. 314 E. 4TH STREET WATERLOO,IA 50703 TEL: (319)234-1515 PROJECT#19-23188: CITY OF WATERLOO 5 SULLIVAN CONVENTION CENTER EXHIBITION HALL CEILING RENOVATION We hereby submit for your consideration the following product as substitute for specified item for the above project: SECTION PAGE PARAGRAPH/LINE SPECIFIED ITEM Proposed Substitution: Attach complete product description, drawings, photographs, performance and test data, warranty, information and other information necessary for evaluation. Identify specific model numbers, finishes, options,etc. A. Will changes be required to building design or drawing dimensions in order to properly install proposed substitution? Yes_No . If yes,explain. B. Will the undersigned pay for changes to the building design,including engineering and drawings costs,caused by mak requested substitution? Yes No . C. Differences between proposed substitution and specified item. D. What affect does substitution have on other trades? r► E. Does manufacturer's warranty of the proposed substitution differ from that specified? Yes No mat If yes,explain Submitted by: For architect's use only: Signature Accepted P Accepted As Noted Firm Not accepted Received too Late 401 Address By: Date: Date: Remarks: TELEPHONE: -4 FAX: EMAIL: 7 7 SECTION 017300- EXECUTION ma, 017300 PART 1 - GENERAL j '1 l 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and provisions general of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 11.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to,the following: 1. Installation of the Work. 01 2. Cutting and patching. 3. Coordination of Owner-installed products. 4. Progress cleaning. 5. Starting and adjusting. 6. Protection of installed construction. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of 0 subsequent work. 1 B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after "ai installation of subsequent work. 1 ow 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Cutting and Patching Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. ,7 1. Prior to commencing work requiring cutting and patching, review extent of cutting and patching anticipated and examine procedures for ensuring satisfactory result from cutting and patching work. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cutting 111 and patching to attend, including the following: a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Trade supervisor responsible for cutting operations. al c.d. Trade supervisor(s)responsible for patching of each type of substrate. Mechanical, electrical, and utilities subcontractors' supervisors, to the extent each .44 trade is affecting by cutting and patching operations. 1 2. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures potential conflicts before proceeding.di and resolve I EXECUTION 7 PROJECT#19-23188 017300 1 I lime 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS `^ A. Cutting and Patching Plan: Submit plan describing procedures at least 10 days prior to the time cutting and patching will be performed. Include the following information: ... 1. Extent: Describe reason for and extent of each occurrence of cutting and patching. — 2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to 4, structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building appearance and other significant visual elements. 3. Products: List products to be used for patching and firms or entities that will perform R patching work. 4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. 5. Utilities and Mechanical and Electrical Systems: List services and systems that cutting and patching procedures will disturb be tempr orat services nd rily service. lndi ate�lengths t of me relocated and those that will out permanent services and systems will be disrupted. 1 a. Include description of provisions for temporary services and systems during interruption of permanent services and systems. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements. i 1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection. 2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operational elements include the following: a. Primary operational systems and equipment. b. Fire separation assemblies. c. Air or smoke barriers. d. Fire-suppression systems. e. Plumbing piping systems. f. Mechanical systems piping and ducts. g. Control systems. h. Communication systems. i. Fire-detection and-alarm systems. j. Conveying systems. `•- k. Electrical wiring systems. I. Operating systems of special construction. row km. 017300 -2 EXECUTION PROJECT#19-23188 3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in "} reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Other construction elements include but are not 1 limited to the following: oat a. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. b. Membranes and flashings. c. Exterior curtain-wall construction. d. Sprayed fire-resistive material. e. Equipment supports. f. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. ~ g. Noise-and vibration-control elements and systems. 4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual •ismi evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. 'mot B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment. PART 2-PRODUCTS 1 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces top d possible. the fullest extent 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of ..+ in-place materials. 1 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION 1 A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, mechanical and electrical 7 systems, and other construction affecting the Work. 1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service underground electrical services; and other utilities. piping; 2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public *4utilities serving Project site. 1 EXECUTION 01 PROJECT#19-23188 017300 3 I 1 B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, withlInstaller to or Aeplicator s and othreserent where indicated, for compliance with requirements for insationions affecting performance. Record observations. 1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of -- connections before equipment and fixture installation. �. 2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. 3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. C. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following: 1. Description of the Work. 2. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. 3. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. 4. Recommended corrections. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION 1 A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility and Owner that is necessary to ;! adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control i of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 017300 - 4 EXECUTION PROJECT#19-23188 al 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated. 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches in occupied spaces and 90 inches in unoccupied spaces. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. 1 D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on site and placement in permanent locations. 1 F. Tools and Equipment: Where possible, select tools or equipment that excessive noise levels. p minimize production of G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other portions of the Work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to com 1 with indicated requirements. p y H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size 44- and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions. 1 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. ..► 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with ,..a. integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to 1 Project site in time for installation. i I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, daif arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. J. Repair or remove and replace damaged, defective, or nonconforming Work. mil 1. Comply with Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for repairing or removing and replacing defective Work. mak i EXECUTION PROJECT#19 23188 017300 - 5 J 3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. ..., 1. Cut in-place constructiona installation components formance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required torestoresurfacs to their if.original condition. B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair material materialr damageds cut or nof , during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with so as to void existing warranties. 1 C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut. 1 D. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be ;I exposed during cutting and patching operations. E. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free - passage to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and patching according to ...... requirements in Section 011000 "Summary." F. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems "^ are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to minimize interruption to occupied areas. G. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar methods least likely e elements operations, including excavation,possible, w proposed procedures owith original Installer;ained or - comply adjoining construction. If ` with original Installer's written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. ` 2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill. 4. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 5. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. ` i H. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing,refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other , Sections,where applicable. "" 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate physical integrity of installation. L 017300 - 6 EXECUTION PROJECT#19-23188 ( 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of p t hing and refinishing. g a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. ,.t 3. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance. 4. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure. 1. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils,putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces. 3.5 OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction personnel. B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's construction personnel. 1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress. 064 2. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction personnel at preinstallation conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction personnel if portions of the Work depend on Owner's construction. l ti 3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING '.T A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F. 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored. 4. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where Contractor and other contractors are working concurrently. B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. EXECUTION 017300- 7 if PROJECT#19-23188 • C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate. D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written !' instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific tohealth or cleaning not posed urfac cleaning . ■- materials that are not hazardousproperty and that will not damage ex E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to ensure that no part of the construction,completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. K. If cleaning is not done according to the above schedule,the Architect may direct the Owner and or other agencies to perform such cleaning and the prime contractors will each pay up to $20 per hour for such work. ... 3.7 STARTING AND ADJUSTING A. Coordinate startup and adjusting of equipment and operating components with requirements in Section 019113 "General Commissioning Requirements." B. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. C. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. D. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 017300 - 8 EXECUTION PROJECT#19-23188 `� I PI E. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements." 7 3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 7 B. Protection of Existing Items: Provide protection and ensure that existing items to remain undisturbed by construction are maintained in condition that existed at commencement of the Work. C. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. 1, END OF SECTION 017300 ti "1 i 1 ! 7 PA 1 y aral 71 EXECUTION •w PROJECT#19-23188 017300 9 i OMNI II ma lam vamp May .1.0• Nom. Wm. Inug ••••• IN.11 Immo lomm SECTION 017700- CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to,the following: 1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Warranties. 4. Final cleaning. 5. Repair of the Work. ..� 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of cleaning agent. B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion. C. Certified List of Incomplete Items:Final submittal at final completion. 1 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS • A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction. *-1 B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS "t A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other Sections. 1.6 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 1 PROJECT#19-23188 Imp B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties, `-- workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Architect. Label with manufacturer's name and model number. a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain Owner's signature for receipt of submittals. 5. Submit testing, adjusting, and balancing records. 6. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days ., prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment. 4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. 6. Advise Owner of changeover in utility services. 7. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. — 8. Complete final cleaning requirements. 9. Touch up paint and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. �- D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of 10 days prior to date the Work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of .r unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect,that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 -2 PROJECT#19-23188 1. Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. — 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion. 1.7 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 012900 "Payment Procedures." 2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. All trailers, access roads, construction signs, unused, broken or demolition materials have { been removed from the site and the premises returned to the original condition in the opinion of the Architect. 5. Lien waiver or Final Release of Claim Form from General Contractor. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. If additional visits are required because the work has not been completed satisfactorily, the Architect (also the Engineer for Mechanical and Electrical Contracts), will bill the Owner for these visits, and this cost will be deducted from the Contractor's final payment. The cost of these visits will be figured at our current hourly rate from the Architect's office to the site and back again, plus mileage for that travel at the current allowed IRS rate per mile. An equal allowance will be allowed for the Engineer from their office. 1.8 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if .1 necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. "1 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PROJECT#19-23188 017700 -3 3. Include the following information at the top of each page: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number. 4. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format: a. MS Excel electronic file. Architect will return annotated file. b. PDF electronic file. Architect will return annotated file. c. Web-based project software upload. Utilize software feature for creating and updating list of incomplete items(punch list). d. Two paper copies. Architect will return two copies. 1.9 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of .• the Work where warranties are indicated to commence on dates other than date of Substantial Completion, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty. B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project Manual. C. Warranty Electronic File: Provide warranties and bonds in PDF format. Assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single electronic PDF file with bookmarks enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document. op- 1. Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect. D. Warranties in Paper Form: 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title ti.. "WARRANTIES," Project name,and name of Contractor. 4. Submit to Architect for approval. E. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 4 PROJECT#19-23188 1 PART 2-PRODUCTS f 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. 1. Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal's GS-37, or if GS-37 is not applicable, use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum allowable VOC levels. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and ^°{ maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification .,f of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, _ including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. c. Rake grounds that are not planted, mulched, or paved to a smooth, even textured surface. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from 4.4 Project site. e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, +- free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain. 1 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 PROJECT#19-23188 5 j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Polish mirrors and glass,taking care not to scratch surfaces. k. Remove labels that are not permanent. 1. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. �.. m. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. n. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers,registers, and grills. o. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction or that display contamination with particulate matter on inspection. 1) Clean HVAC system in compliance with NADCA ACR. Provide written report on completion of cleaning. P. Clean light fixtures,lamps, globes,and reflectors to function with full efficiency. q. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 015000 .� "Temporary Facilities and Controls." 3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion. B. Repair, or remove and replace, defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly , adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified ,. condition. 1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other damaged transparent materials. 2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration. a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification. bow 3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity. 4• 4. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. END OF SECTION 017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 6 PROJECT#19-23188 SECTION 017823- OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply pp y to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following: 1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory manuals. 2. Systems and equipment operation manuals. 3. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals. 4. Product maintenance manuals. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction. B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Y A. Submit operation and maintenance manuals indicated. Provide content for each manual as specified in individual Specification Sections, and as reviewed and approved at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section. 0.4 1. Architect will comment on whether content of operation and maintenance submittals is acceptable. 2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions and field conditions. B. Format: Submit operation and maintenance manuals in the following format: 1. Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect. Enable reviewer comments on draft submittals. AND ..� 2. Submit two paper copies. Architect will return two copies. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA Ol 7823 - l PROJECT#19-23188 i � , 4.. C. Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for %..., Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect will return copy with comments. 1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments and prior to commencing demonstration and training. 1.„ D. Comply with Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation. 1.5 FORMAT OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS , A. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic PDF file for each manual type required. 1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable file size. , 1 2. File Names and Bookmarks: Bookmark individual documents based on file names. Name `" document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening file. e B. Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard-copy,bound and labeled volumes. I 1. Binders: Heavy-duty,three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary L to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-1l-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets. L. 11 a. if two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize f data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross- reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system. b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of 6 contents, and indicate Specification Section number on bottom of spine. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets. t 2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section of the manual. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components 1 of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification 1 Section number and title of Project Manual. 3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software storage media for computerized electronic equipment. Enclose title pages and directories in clear plastic sleeves. 4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-1 1-inch white bond paper. t OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 2 PROJECT#19-23188 ' 6. 5. Drawings: Attach reinforced,punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text. a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts. b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled ,.' envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations. 1 1.6 REQUIREMENTS FOR OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Organization of Manuals: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed: 71 1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents. B. Title Page: Include the following information: 1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name and contact information for Contractor. 6. Name and contact information for Architect. 7. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the systems contained in the manuals. 8. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals. C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual. y, 1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set. D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder. E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems." OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 3 PROJECT#19-23188 1 1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY MANUAL ..,,, A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides an organized reference to operation and maintenance manuals. List items and their location to facilitate ready access to desired information.Include the following: 1. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to 1 operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system. L. 2. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list. 3. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and n! maintenance manual. 1.8 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT OPERATION MANUALS `.. A. Systems and Equipment Operation Manual: Assemble a complete set of data indicating j, operation of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include i information required for daily operation and management, operating standards, and routine and special operating procedures. , 1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel. B. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information: ..... 1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and equipment indicated on Contract Documents. L. 2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor has delegated design responsibility. 3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. L 5. Operating logs. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Control diagrams. 8. Piped system diagrams. 9. Precautions against improper use. 10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates. C. Descriptions: Include the following: 1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract ►.. Documents. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 4 PROJECT#19-23188 D. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures. E. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed. F. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color coding where required for identification. ...� 1.9 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Systems and Equipment Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of data indicating maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include '~` manufacturers' maintenance documentation, preventive maintenance procedures and frequency, repair procedures, wiring and systems diagrams, lists of spare parts, and warranty information. .-� 1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel. B. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, -14 maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranties and bonds as described below. C. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable. D. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Include the following information for each '1 component part or piece of equipment: 1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins; include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable. a. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and 4-1maintenance of equipment or systems. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 5 *-1PROJECT#19-23188 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and component removal,replacement, and assembly. 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. t` E. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures: 1. Test and inspection instructions. 2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal,repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available. F. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment. 1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies. Jr. 2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance. G. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services. H. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent. I. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and fr.. conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. fte J. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. 1. Do not use original project record documents as part of maintenance manuals. 1.10 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS �— A. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work. B. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below. — OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 6 PROJECT#19-23188 "1 C. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and ..� telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable. D. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color,pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products. E. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following: ilmark 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions. F. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services. G. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION(Not Used) 1 END OF SECTION 017823 1 1 1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 7 PROJECT#19-23188 I SECTION 017839-PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY t A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following: 1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. 4. Miscellaneous record submittals. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1. Number of Copies: Submit one set(s)of marked-up record prints. B. Record Specifications: Submit one paper copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications. C. Record Product Data: Submit one paper copy of each submittal. 1. Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit duplicate marked-up Product Data as a component of manual. 1.4 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued. ,.� 1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique. { c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. e. Cross-reference record prints to corresponding photographic documentation. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 1 PROJECT#19-23188 2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to,the following: a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Depths of foundations. d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. g. Actual equipment locations. h. Duct size and routing. i. Locations of concealed internal utilities. j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. k. Changes made following Architect's written orders. 1. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically. 3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints. 4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. 5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. 6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification,where applicable. B. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. 1. Record Prints: Organize record prints into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. 2. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled. 3. Record Digital Data Files: Organize digital data information into separate electronic files that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each digital data file. 4. Identification: As follows: a. Project name. b. Date. `" 4 c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Architect. e. Name of Contractor. 1.5 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. } PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 -2 PROJECT#19-23188 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. 3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to ,.., provide a record of selections made. 4. For each principal product, indicate whether record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as record Product Data. 5. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where applicable. B. Format: Submit record Specifications as paper copy. 1.6 RECORD PRODUCT DATA ..*4 A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project. B. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where applicable. C. Format: Submit record Product Data as paper copy. 1. Include record Product Data directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of record Product Data. 1.7 MAINTENANCE OF RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintenance of Record Documents: Store record documents in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. PART 2 -PRODUCTS PART 3-EXECUTION 1 4 END OF SECTION 017839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 3 PROJECT#19-23188 SECTION 017900-DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING .., 017900 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel, including the following: 1. Instruction in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For instructor. B. Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length of instruction time. C. Evaluations: For each participant and for each training module, submit results and documentation of performance-based test. 7 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with •" requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and training. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to minimize disrupting Owner's operations and to ensure availability of Owner's personnel. B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction 7 time, and course content. C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved, operation, and maintenance ►� manuals. DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING PROJECT#19-23188 017900 1 1.6 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM 6. A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections,and as follows: 1. Heat generation. 2. Refrigeration systems, including chillers. 3. HVAC systems, including air-handling equipment, air distribution systems and terminal equipment and devices. 4. HVAC instrumentation and controls. 5. Electrical service and distribution, including transformers, switchboards, panelboards, uninterruptible power supplies and motor controls. B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each module, include instruction for the following as applicable to the system, equipment, or component: 1. Basis of System Design,Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following: f L. a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. c. Operating standards. d. Regulatory requirements. e. Equipment function. f. Operating characteristics. +.' g. Limiting conditions. h. Performance curves. 2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail: a. Emergency manuals. �. b. Systems and equipment operation manuals. c. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals. d. Product maintenance manuals. e. Project Record Documents. We f. Identification systems. g. Warranties and bonds. h. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments. 3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable: a. Instructions on meaning of warnings,trouble indications, and error messages. b. Instructions on stopping. c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. 1...d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits. e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems. f. Special operating instructions and procedures. DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900 - 2 PROJECT#19-23188 1 i i 4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable: ala. Startup procedures. 1 b. Equipment or system break-in procedures. c. Routine and normal operating instructions. d. Re -.1gulahon and control procedures. e. Control sequences. f. Safety procedures. g• Instructions on stopping. h. Normal shutdown instructions. i. Operating procedures for emergencies. j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure. "' k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. I. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. m. Special operating instructions and procedures. 5. Adjustments: Include the following: a. Alignments. b. Checking adjustments. c. Noise and vibration adjustments. d. Economy and efficiency adjustments. 7 6. Troubleshooting: Include the following: a. Diagnostic instructions. 7 b. Test and inspection procedures. 7. Maintenance: Include the following: a. Inspection procedures. b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. ...1d. Procedures for routine cleaning. e. Procedures for preventive maintenance. f. Procedures for routine maintenance. g• Instruction on use of special tools. 8. Repairs: Include the following: a. Diagnosis instructions. b. Repair instructions. c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. .-, d. Instructions for identifying parts and components. + e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance. 1.7 PREPARATION A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training '." module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in coordination with y requirements in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data." 7B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location. DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING "1 PROJECT#19 23188 017900 - 3 i 1.8 INSTRUCTION A. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system. 1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants. B. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed-on times. For equipment that requires — seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season. 1. Schedule training with Owner,through Architect,with at least 14 days' advance notice. L- C. Training Location and Reference Material: Conduct training on-site in the completed and fully operational facility using the actual equipment in-place. Conduct training using final operation and maintenance data submittals. D. Evaluation: At conclusion of each training module, assess and document each participant's mastery of module by use of a demonstration performance-based test. E. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and give to Owner. Remove instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial training use. PART 2 -PRODUCTS PART 3 -EXECUTION END OF SECTION 017900 NNW DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900 - 4 PROJECT#19-23188 1 061000-ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Framing with dimension lumber. 2. Wood blocking 3. Connectors and supports. 1 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Exposed Framing: Framing not concealed by other construction. B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in least dimension. C. Timber: Lumber of 5 inches nominal or greater in least dimension. -1! D. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: ..� 1. RIS: Redwood Inspection Service. 2. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 3. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association. 1 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. 2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency. 3. For fire-retardant treatments specified to be High-Temperature (HT) type, include physical properties of treated lumber both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5664. ROUGH CARPENTRY PROJECT#19-23188 1 061000 1 i 4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of L. treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 5. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS L A. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the t ALSC Board of Review. B. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES: 1. Wood-preservative-treated wood. 2. Fire-retardant-treated wood. 3. Engineered wood products. �- 4. Shear panels. 5. Power-driven fasteners. 6. Powder-actuated fasteners. ,... 7. Expansion anchors. 8. Metal framing anchors. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Engineered Wood Products: Obtain each type of engineered wood �.. product through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Forest Certification: For the following wood products, provide materials produced from wood L obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC 1.2, "Principles and Criteria": 1 1. Dimension lumber framing. L. 2. Timber. 3. Laminated veneer lumber. , L 4. Parallel-strand lumber. 5. Prefabricated wood I-joists. i 6. Rim boards. 7. Miscellaneous lumber. L 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING rr A. Stack lumber flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air 1 circulation around stacks and under coverings. . f ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 2 PROJECT#19-23188 I PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency —' is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on 7end or back of each piece. 3. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. 4. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent for 2-inch nominal thickness or less, 19 percent for more than 2-inch nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated. I C. Engineered Wood Products: Provide engineered wood products acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that show compliance with building code in effect for Project. 1. Allowable Design Stresses: Provide engineered wood products with allowable design stresses, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. 2.2 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with '1+ requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire- test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency. B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. 1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fire-retardant-treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where indicated. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 3 PROJECT#19-23188 3. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated. 4. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber shall be tested according ASTM D 5664 and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to ASTM D 6841. For enclosed roof framing, framing in attic spaces, and where high temperature fire-retardant treatment is indicated, provide material with adjustment factors of not less than 0.85 modulus of elasticity and 0.75 for extreme fiber in bending for ''- Project's climatological zone. C. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Kiln-dry �. plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent. D. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency. 1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece. �. E. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes. F. Application: Treat all rough carpentry unless otherwise indicated. 1. Concealed blocking. 2. Framing for non-load-bearing partitions. 3. Framing for non-load-bearing exterior walls. 4. Plywood backing panels. 2.3 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING A. Maximum Moisture Content: 19 percent. B. Interior Partitions: Construction or No. 2 grade of any species. 1. Mixed southern pine; SPIB. 2. Spruce-pine-fir(south);NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 3. Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA. C. Exterior Framing: No. 2 grade and any of the following species: l. Douglas fir-larch; WWPA. 2. Hem-fir; WCLIB or WWPA. 3. Spruce-pine-fir(south); WWPA. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 4 —" PROJECT#19-23188 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER 7A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 4. Cants. 5. Furring. 6. Utility shelving. B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species: 1. Mixed southern pine; SPIB. 2. Hem-fir; WCLIB, or WWPA. 3. Spruce-pine-fir(south);NeLMA,WCLIB,or WWPA. 4. Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA. 71 C. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work. D. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling. 7 2.5 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged,fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2-inch I -• nominal thickness. 2.6 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. —1 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1. 1 ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 5 PROJECT#19-23188 F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. G. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. 1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, I Class Fe/Zn 5. 2.7 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS L. A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc. 2. USP Structural Connectors. B. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. C. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653, G60 coating designation. 1. Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated. D. Hot-Dip, Heavy-Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653; structural steel (SS), high-strength low-alloy steel Type A (HSLAS Type A), or high-strength low-alloy steel Type B (HSLAS Type B); G185 coating designation; and not less than 0.036 inch thick. �- 4 1. Use for wood-preservative-treated lumber and where indicated. E. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304. 1. Use for exterior locations and where indicated. F. Joist Hangers: U-shaped joist hangers with 2-inch- long seat and 1-1/4-inch- wide nailing flanges at least 85 percent of joist depth. , 1. Thickness: 0.050 inch. G. I-Joist Hangers: U-shaped joist hangers with 2-inch- long seat and 1-1/4-inch- wide nailing flanges full depth of joist. Nailing flanges provide lateral support at joist top chord. 1. Thickness: 0.050 inch. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 6 PROJECT#19-23188 H. Top Flange Hangers: U-shaped joist hangers, full depth of joist, formed from metal strap with tabs bent to extend over and be fastened to supporting member. 1. Strap Width: 2 inches. 2. Thickness: 0.062 inch. .001 I. Bridging: Rigid,V-section, nailless type, 0.050 inch thick, length to suit joist size and spacing. J. Post Bases: Adjustable-socket type for bolting in place with standoff plate to raise post 1 inch above base and with 2-inch- minimum side cover, socket 0.062 inch thick, and standoff and adjustment plates 0.108 inch thick. K. Joist Ties: Flat straps, with holes for fasteners, for tying joists together over supports. 1. Width: 1-1/4 inches. 2. Thickness: 0.062 inch. 3. Length: As indicated. L. Rafter Tie-Downs: Bent strap tie for fastening rafters or roof trusses to wall studs below, 1-1/2 inches wide by 0.050 inch thick. M. Rafter Tie-Downs (Hurricane or Seismic Ties): Bent strap tie for fastening rafters or roof trusses to wall studs below, 2-1/4 inches wide by 0.062 inch thick. Tie fits over top of rafter or truss and fastens to both sides of rafter or truss, face of top plates, and side of stud below. N. Floor-to-Floor Ties: Flat straps, with holes for fasteners, for tying upper floor wall studs to band joists and lower floor studs, 1-1/4 inches wide by 0.050 inch thick by 36 inches long. O. Wall Bracing: T-shaped bracing made for letting into studs in saw kerf, 1-1/8 inches wide by 9/16 inch deep by 0.034 inch thick with hemmed edges. P. Wall Bracing: Angle bracing made for letting into studs in saw kerf, 15/16 by 15/16 by 0.040 inch thick with hemmed edges. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated. } B. Adhesives for Gluing Furring and Sleepers to Concrete or Masonry: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer. C. Eave Ventilation Trough: Material is a preformed rigid fiberboard or plastic sheet designed and sized to fit between roof framing members and to provide cross ventilation between insulated attic spaces and vented eaves. 1 7 1 ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 7 PROJECT#19-23188 PART 3 - EXECUTION lam 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL low A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. C. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. D. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring backing panels. Install fire-retardant treated plywood backing panels with classification marking of testing agency exposed to view. E. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install fasteners through each fastener hole. F. Install sill sealer gasket to form continuous seal between sill plates and foundation walls. _ G. Do not splice structural members between supports, unless otherwise indicated. H. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. 1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches o.c. I. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated and as follows: i L 1. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more than 96 inches o.c. with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted to close furred spaces. L.. 2. Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level, at ceiling line of top story, and at not more than 96 inches o.c. Where fire blocking is not inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted solid wood blocks of same width as framing members and 2-inch nominal-thickness. 3. Fire block concealed spaces between floor sleepers with same material as sleepers to limit concealed spaces to not more than 100 sq. ft. and to solidly fill space below partitions. 4. Fire block concealed spaces behind combustible cornices and exterior trim at not more than 20 feet o.c. r.. i ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 8 PROJECT#19-23188 ( J. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with -� function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. K. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber. 1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water. L. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. +ti 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. 3. Table 23-II-B-1, "Nailing Schedule," and Table 23-II-B-2, "Wood Structural Panel Roof Sheathing Nailing Schedule," in ICBO's Uniform Building Code. 4. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2), "Alternate Attachments," in ICC's International Residential Code for One- and Two- Family Dwellings. Rol M. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; do not countersink nail heads, unless otherwise indicated. 3.2 WOOD SLEEPER, BLOCKING,AND NAILER INSTALLATION A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for tolerance of finish work. B. Furring to Receive Plywood or Hardboard Paneling: Install 1-by-3-inch nominal- size furring de horizontally and vertically at 24 inches o.c. C. Furring to Receive Gypsum Board: Install 1-by-2-inch nominal- size furring vertically at 16 inches o.c. -11 END OF SECTION 061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 9 PROJECT#19-23188 092216 -NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. • 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes non-load-bearing steel framing members for the following applications: 1. Interior suspension systems (e.g., supports for gypsum ceilings, suspended soffits, and grid systems etc.). 111 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non- load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. Products used in the assembly shall carry a classification label from a testing laboratory acceptable to authority having jurisdiction. B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. �+ PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 SUSPENSION SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- diameter wire. 1-1 B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete: 1. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching wit wire hangers and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 by an independent testing agency. NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 1 PROJECT#19-23188 1 C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16-inch diameter. D. Carrying Channels: Cold-formed, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.0538 inch and minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges. 1. Depth: 2-1/2 inches E. Furring Channels(Furring Members): " 1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.053-inch bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges, 3/4 inch deep. 1=y? 2. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. a. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Dietrich UltraSTEELTM Framing 25 gauge-equivalent. 1) UltraSTEEL® fire rated partitions to be installed in accordance with UL V450 or UL V438 or UL U419. b. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: members that can show certified third party testing in accordance with ICC—ES—AC86 that meets ASTM C645 Section 9.2. c. Depth: 2-1/2 inches. 3. Dimpled Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.025 inch. b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. .., 4. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch deep. a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.018 inch. 5. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- deep members designed to reduce sound transmission. a. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Dietrich Metal Framing Resilient Channel RCSD. b. Configuration: Hat shaped. 2.2 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards. r.. 1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide the following: 1. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size. imm NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 2 PROJECT#19-23188 1 "1 I PART 3 -EXECUTION 7 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, 61 cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. 1 B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. •l 3.2 PREPARATION 1 A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building 1 structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength. 1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction. "'. B. Coordination with Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials: 1. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling Ak. runners (tracks) to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. Where offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates fastened to building structure not more than 24 inches o.c. 04. 2. After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove them only to extent necessary Ifor installation of non-load-bearing steel framing. Do not reduce thickness of fire- resistive materials below that required for fire-resistance ratings indicated. Protect adjacent fire-resistive materials from damage. im 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL ! A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754,except comply with framing sizes and spacing indicated. 1. UltraSTEEL® fire rated partitions to be installed in accordance with UL V450 or UL V438 or UL U419. 2. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation. 7 B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars,toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. 1 C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. �' D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing �l members. Frame both sides of joints independently. NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 3 ,cA PROJECT#19-23188 I 3.4 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Install suspension system components in sizes and spacings indicated on Drawings, but not less than those required by referenced installation standards for assembly types and other assembly components indicated. ,..a B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. JUM C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger +� spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards. 3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 4. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. 5. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that extend through forms. 6. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck. 7. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports. E. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet .r. measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes. END OF SECTION 092216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 4 PROJECT#19-23188 ■w 092900- GYPSUM BOARD 092900 1 PART 1 - GENERAL t"M 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions re% and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. I ••! 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Texture finishes. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Before beginning gypsum board installation, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and 611, execution. 1. Install mockups for the following: a. Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations. b. Each texture finish indicated. 2. Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting and wallcoverings, on exposed surfaces for review of mockups. ., 3. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING "'4 A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging. GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 1 PROJECT#19-23188 Ilmwp 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS k. A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more strip ent. B. Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed a d conditioned. C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging,or irregular shape. --- 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. PART2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS _ A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. +s B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. 0- 2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and _ that correspond with support system indicated. ... 2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Complying with ASTM C 36 or ASTM C 1396, as applicable to type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: w a. G-P Gypsum. b. National Gypsum Company. -- c. USG Corporation. d. Serious Materials,Inc. (Quiet Rock). - B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396. +, 1. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 2 .. PROJECT#19-23188 C. Type X: 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. D. Flexible Type: ASTM C 1396. Manufactured to bend to fit radii and to be more flexible than "4 standard regular-type gypsum board of same thickness. 1. Thickness: 1/4 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced galvanized steel sheet. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead. b. Bullnose bead. c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. f. Expansion(control)joint. g. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges. 2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping or drying-type, all-purpose compound. was a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use drying-type, all-purpose compound or high-build interior coating product designed for application by airless sprayer and to be used instead of skim coat to produce Level 5 finish. GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 3 PROJECT#19-23188 2.6 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. Woo B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate. C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. 2.7 TEXTURE FINISHES A. Primer: As recommended by textured finish manufacturer for moisture resistant board only. B. Polystyrene Aggregate Ceiling Finish: Water-based, job-mixed, polystyrene aggregate finish a_ with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of not more than 25 when tested according to ASTM E 84. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: a. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC; ToughRock Ceiling Textures/Polystyrene. b. National Gypsum Company; ProForm Perfect Spray. c. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Ceiling Spray Texture, QT. 2. Texture: Level 4 Finish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION NI/A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. .� 3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL ,. A. Comply with ASTM C 840. IWO • GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 4 PROJECT#19-23188 j H 1 � B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate ogit supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow '41 1/4-to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant. 1 G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported)edges of stud flanges first. I. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. '°`! J. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. 3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD ,,o A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations: 1. Type X: All gypsum board surfaces not indicated otherwise below. 2. Flexible Type: a. To accommodate tight curved surfaces, apply in double layer. b. As indicated on the plans. GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 5 PROJECT#19-23188 B. Single-Layer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated. _ 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless conditions warrant horizontal application, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire- resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels. b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise :. indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. 3. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically with no end joints. Locate edge Mew joints over furring members. 4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. bow C. Multilayer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and offset face-layer joints 1 framing member, 16 inches minimum, from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance- rated assembly. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions. 3. On Z-furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring members. 4. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws D. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate (other than studs,joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set. E. Curved Surfaces: 1. Installpanels horizontally (perpendicular to supports) and unbroken, to extentpossible, (p p pp ) across curved surface plus 12-inch- long straight sections at ends of curves and tangent to them. 1 2. For double-layer construction, fasten base layer to studs with screws 16 inches o.c. Center gypsum board face layer over joints in base layer, and fasten to studs with screws spaced 12 inches o.c. GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 6 PROJECT#19-23188 3.4 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. ark B. Prefill open joints, beveled edges, and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended oak for tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM ink C 840: t 1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed surface areas,and where indicated. 2. Level 2: Surfaces that are substrate for tile or for acoustical tile. 1 3. Level 3: Surfaces receiving medium or heavy-textured finishes before painting or heavy wallcoverings. 4. Level 4: Surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Level 5: Surfaces that will receive gloss and semi-gloss enamels and/or surfaces subject to severe lighting. 117 a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 09 Sections. 3.5 APPLYING TEXTURE FINISHES A. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces receiving texture finishes. Apply primer to surfaces that are clean,dry, and smooth. 1 B. Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to produce a uniform texture matching approved mock-up free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of application patterns. C. Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive texture '`~i finish by covering them with masking agents, polyethylene film, or other means. If, despite these precautions, texture finishes contact these surfaces, immediately remove droppings and overspray to prevent damage according to texture-finish manufacturer's written o"t recommendations. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other *41 non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application. B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. GYPSUM BOARD 092900- 7 PROJECT#19-23188 C. Remove and replace panels that are wet,moisture damaged, and mold damaged. r„ 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,discoloration, sagging,or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 092900 skr ... y.. Nom • GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 8 PROJECT#19-23188 SECTION 095123 -ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 095123 PART 1 - GENERAL r► 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. +01 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Acoustical tiles for interior ceilings. mg,I B. Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices to be cast in concrete. 4 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at the site. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For seismic restraints for ceiling systems. 1. Include design calculations for seismic restraints including analysis data signed and .oi sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Acoustical Ceiling Units:Full-size tiles equal to 2 percent of quanti ty installed. 2. Suspension-System Components: Quantity of each concealed grid and exposed component equal to 2 percent of quantity installed. ACOUSTIC AL TILE CEILINGS 095123 - 1 PROJECT#19-23188 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical tiles, suspension-system components, and accessories to Project site and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. B. Before installing acoustical tiles, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized "r moisture content. 4 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical tile ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. 1. Pressurized Plenums: Operate ventilation system for not less than 48 hours before beginning acoustical tile ceiling installation. immo PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 ACOUSTICAL TILES A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following available products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. CertainTeed Corporation. 3. United States Gypsum Company. B. Acoustical Tile Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard tiles of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by type, form, pattern, acoustical • rating, and light reflectance unless otherwise indicated. �* C. Classification: Provide tiles as follows: 1. Type and Form: Type III, mineral base with painted finish D. Color: White E. Light Reflectance(LR): 85 percent, determined in accordance with ASTM E1264 F. Ceiling Attenuation Class(CAC): Not less than 40. `K G. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): Not less than 0.70, determined in accordance with ASTM 1264. ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 095123 - 2 PROJECT#19-23188 1-. H. Edge/Joint Detail: Angled Tegular .. I. Thickness: 3/4 inch J. Surface Pattern: Non-directional fine Fissured .414 K. Product: Fine Fissured 1820 as manufactured by Armstrong or approved equal. 2.2 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM I A. Basis-of-Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide comparable product by one of the following: 1. Armstrong Prelude Max XL or approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION �'► A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing and substrates to which acoustical tile ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine acoustical tiles before installation. Reject acoustical tiles that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION ark A. Testing Substrates: Before adhesively bonding tiles to wet-placed substrates such as cast-in- place concrete or plaster, test and verify that moisture level is below tile manufacturer's ,w recommended limits. B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical tiles to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width tiles at borders unless otherwise indicated, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. C. Layout openings for penetrations centered on the penetrating items. mor 3.3 INSTALLATION OF SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS mak A. Install suspended acoustical tile ceilings according to ASTM C 636/C 636M, and manufacturer's written instructions. al ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 095123 - 3 PROJECT#19-23188 B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. 2. Splay hangers only where required miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by tom bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension-system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. 4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly to structure or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. .,. 5. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for both the structure to which hangers are attached and the type of hanger involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 6. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete. 7. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires. 8. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 9. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 10. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member. 11. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within Immo performance limits established by referenced standards. C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors. D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical tiles. 1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed. 2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends. Miter corners accurately and connect securely. 3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim. E. Install suspension-system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. Irm ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 095123 - 4 PROJECT#19-23188 1 SECTION 099123 -INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 .•� PART 1 - GENERAL .mo► 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary i+t Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates: Alt 1. Gypsum board. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. B. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat. 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Apply coats on Samples in steps to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. „11 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. { 1. Paint: Furnish not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. 421 INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 1 PROJECT#19-23188 B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. ►.. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Ion 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of the following: 1. Benjamin Moore& Co. 2. PPG Architectural Coatings. 3. Sherwin-Williams Company(The). 2.2 PAINT, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: 1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer,based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. B. VOC Content: For field applications inside the building, wall paints shall comply with VOC '— content limits of authorities having jurisdiction and the following VOC content limits: 1. Interior Flat Latex Wall Paint: 50 g/L. 2. Interior Nonflat Latex Wall Paint: 150 g/L. C. VOC Emissions: For field applications inside the building, wall paints shall contain no more than half of the chronic REL of VOCs when tested according to the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." The building concentration of formaldehyde shall not exceed half of the indoor recommended exposure limit or 33 mcg/cu. m and that of acetaldehyde shall not exceed 9 mcg/cu. m. D. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. +r- PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 2 PROJECT#19-23188 B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth. D. Spray-Textured Ceiling Substrates: Verify that surfaces are dry. 11. E. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing finishes and primers. F. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated. B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual." 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. 4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, a identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers. INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 3 ,,,� PROJECT#19-23188 B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of �• other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.5 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Spray-Textured Ceiling Substrates: 1. Latex System MPI INT 9.1E: Spray applied. a. Prime Coat: Latex, interior,matching topcoat. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, eggshell. B. Gypsum Board Substrates: 1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System MPI INT 9.2M: a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, interior, institutional low odor/VOC. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat.c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, eggshell. END OF SECTION 099123 INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 4 PROJECT#19-23188 i talk' 1,1 11 1 I FN� L 1 I ,111 SECTION 23 0010 BASIC MECHANICAL HVAC REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Basic Mechanical HVAC Requirements specifically applicable to Division 23 in addition to Division 1 - General Requirements. 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Mechanical HVAC Contract shall also include furnishing and installing a complete heating, ventilating and air conditioning system for the building remodel and all other related work as called for under the specifications and shown on plans. 1.03 WORK INCLUDED A. The Mechanical HVAC Contract shall include all work under the listed Division 23 of the Specifications Index and all related Mechanical work as shown on the Drawings for the project. B. A Complete table of Mechanical Reference Symbols is shown on the plans. C. Under this Contract the HVAC Contractor shall furnish the Owner with electronic pdf format of all pertinent systems related documents. Submit manuals to the Engineer for his review. The _. information shall contain the following items: 1. Shop drawings on all major equipment. 2. Operating Instructions for all major equipment. 3. Maintenance Instructions for all major equipment. 4. Wiring diagrams for all equipment. 5. Test and Balance Reports. 6. The Mechanical installation to be made under Division 23 is set up for contract bidding as .. follows: a. Mechanical HVAC Contractor is a sub-contractor to the General Contractor or Construction Manager. 1) The Mechanical contractor is responsible for own equipment, such as cranes, lifts, etc. in order to provide a complete installation of mechanical systems. 1.04 SPECIFICATIONS COMPLIANCE A. The requirements of these specifications shall be complied with. Every foreman and lead mechanic shall be provided with a complete copy of this specification. 1.05 INCONSISTENCIES A. If there is an inconsistency in the quality and/or quantity of Work required by the Contract Documents, either the greater quality and/or quantity of Work indicated shall be provided in accordance with the Engineer's interpretation without change in the contract sum. 1.06 CODES, FEES AND LATERAL COSTS A. The Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning Installation shall meet all applicable local, state and federal codes and standards. B. All permits necessary for a complete heating and ventilation installation shall be paid for by this Contractor. 1.07 REFERENCES A. All equipment, piping, etc., shall be new and shall be installed to meet the approval of the following City of Des Moines, Iowa current building codes and ammended ordinances. 1.08 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division 01 3000. B. Submit shop drawings and product data grouped to include complete submittals of related systems, products, and accessories in a single submittal. C. All documents shall be submitted in .pdf format unless pre-approved by Engineer. The contractor shall not use any equipment or materials that does not have the engineer's stamped approval. Project No. 19-23188 Section 23 0010 - Page 1 of 4 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation D. Mark dimensions and values in units to match those specified. 1.09 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Install Work in locations shown on Drawings, unless prevented by Project conditions. 1.10 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Construct Work in sequence under provisions of Division 1. 1.11 PRE-CONSTRUCTION COORDINATION AND VERIFICATION A. This Contractor shall coordinate his work with other Contractors on this job. Any conflict which cannot be resolved shall be settled by the Architect/Engineer. B. Field verification of scale dimensions on plans is directed since actual locations, distances and levels will be governed by actual field conditions. C. The Contractors shall check architectural, structural, plumbing, heating, ventilating and electrical plans to avert possible installation conflicts. Should drastic changes from original plans be necessary to resolve such conflicts this Contractor shall notify the Architect/Engineer and secure written approval and agreement on necessary adjustments before the installation is started. D. Discrepancies shown on different plans or between plans and actual field conditions or between plans and specifications shall promptly be brought to the attention of the Architect/Engineer for a decision. E. The Contractor shall consider, review and comprehend the complete set of construction documents, etc., Architectural, Structural, Mechanical, Electrical, etc., (Drawings and Specifications) as his complete set. He will be responsible for any and all mechanical work shown or stated (to be by him), to include this work in his bid and install such items even though they are not specifically shown or stated on the Mechanical section of the plans and specifications. 1.12 COORDINATION A. Contractor shall be responsible for continual coordination of the mechanical work with other trades so as to avoid conflicts in installation. Contractor shall cooperate with other trades to assure that construction proceeds in an orderly and timely manner. B. Study the civil, structural, electrical, shop and any specialty drawings and specifications to determine required coordination. 1. Anchor bolts, sleeves, inserts and supports that may be required for the mechanical work shall be furnished and installed under the same division of the specifications as the respective items to be supported. Excluded from this requirement are cast in place anchor bolts if required for this project. 2. Slots, chases, openings and recesses through floors and walls as specified will be provided by the various trades in their respective materials, but the trade requiring them shall see that they are properly located in zones provided or otherwise approved by the Engineer or Architect and/or Owner. 3. Locations of pipes, panels, equipment, fixtures, etc., shall be adjusted to accommodate interferences encountered. The Project Coordinator shall determine the exact rerouting and location of each pipe and/or duct encountered prior to fabrication. a. Right-of-Way: Lines which pitch shall have the right of way over those which do not pitch. Lines whose elevations cannot be changed shall have the right of way over lines whose elevations can be changed. b. Offsets, transitions and changes in direction in pipes shall be made as required to maintain proper head room and pitch of sloping lines whether or not indicated on the drawings. 4. Installation of Arrangement: The contractor shall install all mechanical work to permit removal of, and access to, (without damage to other parts) all parts requiring periodic replacement or maintenance. C. Layout Priority: 1. All trades shall understand that other trades will need to work in the same areas during the project. All final decisions as to the right-of-way and runs of utility lines (pipes, ducts, etc.) shall be made by Owner and/or Architect. In general, priority shall be given as follows: Project No. 19-23188 Section 23 0010 - Page 2 of 4 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation a. Process or Plumbing piping which must be sloped and drainable b. Sheet metal ductwork c. Light Fixtures d. Plumbing waste lines, downspouts, and vents e. Sprinkler piping f. Gravity water lines g. Ice water or steam lines h. Refrigerant lines i. Gas and air lines j. Plumbing water k. Electrical conduit I. Control air lines D. PREPARE DETAILED SHOP DRAWINGS WHERE NECESSARY TO ASSURE PROPER FIT AND NECESSARY CLEARANCE. 1.13 CUTTING, PATCHING AND FIRESTOPPING '— A. This Mechanical Contractor shall set all sleeves in construction for his work. Where cutting is required, it shall be done by this Contractor. All patching shall be done by the General Contractor. General contractor shall provide and install firestopping materials. 1.14 ELECTRICAL A. Electrical Contractor shall furnish all motor starters and motor controls and provide all wiring for motor control operation, except if specified otherwise. 1.15 ADDITIONAL ELECTRICAL COSTS A. If the Mechanical Contractor substitutes equipment for specified units, the mechanical contractor shall be responsible for any additional electrical installation costs for this substitution whether the other equipment was listed as equal in the specification or was approved equal after the project was in the bidding process. 1.16 GUARANTEE — A. This Contractor shall be responsible for the proper installation and working of everything in this contract and shall guarantee to remedy free of charge any defects in workmanship and materials that may appear to give or gives rise to trouble of any kind for a period of one year from date of final substantial completion. PART 2PRODUCTS 2.01 NOT USED PART 3EXECUTION 3.01 NOT USED END OF SECTION Project No. 19-23188 Section 23 0010 - Page 3 of 4 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation SECTION 23 0130.51 HVAC AIR-DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM CLEANING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cleaning of HVAC duct system, equipment, and related components. AHU #1 &#2 System. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. HVAC System: For purposes of this section, the surfaces to be cleaned include all interior surfaces of the heating, air-conditioning and ventilation system from the points where the air enters the system to the points where the air is discharged from the system, including the inside of air distribution equipment, coils, and condensate drain pans; see NADCA ACR for more details. 1. Above-ceiling plenum for supply air is required to be cleaned. 2. Above-ceiling plenum for return air is required to be cleaned. 3. Makeup air system is required to be cleaned. '- 4. Exhaust-only system is required to be cleaned. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NADCA ACR -Assessment, Cleaning and Restoration of HVAC Systems; 2013. B. UL 181 - Standard for Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors; current edition, including all revisions. C. UL 181A- Closure Systems for Use with Rigid Air Ducts; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Project Cleanliness Evaluation and Cleaning Plan, as specified. C. Project Closeout Report: Include field quality control reports, evidence of satisfactory cleaning, and documentation of items needing further repair. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Cleaning Contractor Qualifications: Company specializing in the cleaning and restoration of HVAC systems as specified in this section. 1. Certified by one of the following: a. NADCA, National Air Duct Cleaners Association: www.nadca.com 2. Having minimum of three years documented experience. 3. Employing for this project a supervisor certified as an Air Systems Cleaning Specialist by NADCA. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT A. Vacuum Devices and Other Tools: Exceptionally clean, in good working order, and sealed when brought into the facility. B. Vacuum Devices That Exhaust Air Inside Building, Including Hand-Held and Wet Vacuums: Equipped with HEPA filtration with 99.97 percent collection efficiency for minimum 0.3-micron size particles and DOP test number. C. Vacuum Devices That Exhaust Air Outside Building, Including Truck- and Trailer-Mounted Types: Equipped with particulate collection including adequate filtration to contain debris removed from the HVAC system; exhausted in manner that prevents contaminant re-entry to building; compliant with applicable regulations as to outdoor environmental contamination. 2.02 REPLACEMENT PRODUCTS A. Fibrous Glass Insulation: Provide material complying with UL 181 equivalent to existing material in quality and thickness. Project No. 19-23188 Section 23 0130.51 - Page 1 of 4 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation PART 3 EXECUTION — 3.01 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Comply with applicable federal, state, and local requirements. B. Perform cleaning, inspection, and remediation in accordance with the recommendations of NADCA"Assessment, Cleaning and Restoration of HVAC Systems" (ACR) and as specified herein. C. Where NADCA ACR uses the terms "recommended", "highly recommended", or"ideally" in regard to a certain procedure or activity, do that unless it is clearly inapplicable to the project. D. Obtain Owner's approval of proposed temporary locations for large equipment. E. Designate a decontamination area and obtain Owner's approval. F. When portions of the facility are to remain occupied or in operation during cleaning activities, provide adequate controls or containment to prevent access to spaces being cleaned by unauthorized persons and provide detailed instructions to Owner as to these controls or containment. G. If unforeseen mold or other biological contamination is encountered, notify Architect immediately, identifying areas affected and extent and type of contamination. '- 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Inspect the system as required to determine appropriate methods, tools, equipment, and protection. B. Start of cleaning work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions. C. When concealed spaces are later made accessible, examine and document interior conditions prior to beginning cleaning. D. Document all instances of mold growth, rodent droppings, other biological hazards, and damaged system components. 3.03 PREPARATION A. When cleaning work might adversely affect life safety systems, including fire and smoke detection, alarm, and control, coordinate scheduling and testing and inspection procedures with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Ensure that electrical components that might be adversely affected by cleaning are de-energized, locked out, and protected prior to beginning work. C. Air-Volume Control Devices: Mark the original position of dampers and other air-directional mechanical devices inside the HVAC system prior to starting cleaning. D. Access to Concealed Spaces: Use existing service openings and make additional service openings as required to accomplish cleaning and inspection. 1. Do not cut openings in non-HVAC components without obtaining the prior approval of Owner. 2. Make new openings in HVAC components in accordance with NADCA Standard 05; do not — compromise the structural integrity of the system. 3. Do not cut service openings into flexible duct; disconnect at ends for cleaning and inspection. 3.04 CLEANING A. Use any cleaning method recommended by NADCA ACR unless otherwise specified; do not use methods prohibited by NADCA ACR, or that will damage HVAC components or other work, or that will significantly alter the integrity of the system. B. Obtain Owner's approval before using wet cleaning methods; ensure that drainage is adequate before beginning. C. Ducts: Mechanically clean all portions of ducts. D. Hoses, Cables, and Extension Rods: Clean using suitable sanitary damp wipes at the time they are being removed or withdrawn from their normal position. Project No. 19-23188 Section 23 0130.51 - Page 2 of 4 _ Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation E. Coils: Follow NADCA ACR completely including measuring static pressure drop before and after cleaning; do not remove refrigeration coils from system to clean; report coils that are permanently impacted. F. Fibrous Glass Material: Use HEPA vacuuming equipment, under constant negative pressure, do not permit to get wet, and do not damage surfaces; replace material damaged by cleaning operations. G. Existing Damaged Fibrous Glass Material: Report to Architect all evidence of damage, deterioration, delaminating, friable material, mold or fungus growth, or moisture that cannot be remedied by cleaning or resurfacing with an acceptable insulation repair coating. 1. Remove unremediable material and clean underlying surfaces. H. Collect debris removed during cleaning; ensure that debris is not dispersed outside the HVAC .. system during the cleaning process. I. Store contaminated tools and equipment in polyethylene bags until cleaned in the designated decontamination area. 3.05 REPAIR A. Repair openings cut in the ventilation system so that they do not significantly alter the airflow or adversely impact the facility's indoor air quality. B. At insulated ducts and components, accomplish repairs in such a manner as to achieve the equivalent thermal value. C. Reseal new openings in accordance with NADCA Standard 05. D. Reseal rigid fiber glass duct systems using closure techniques that comply with UL 181 or UL 181A. E. When new openings are intended to be capable of being re-opened in the future, clearly mark -- them and report their locations to Owner in project report documents. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Ensure that the following field quality control activities are completed prior to application of any treatments or coatings and prior to returning HVAC system to normal operation. B. Visually inspect all portions of the cleaned components; if not visibly clean as defined in NADCA ACR, re-clean and reinspect. C. Coils: Cleaning must restore the coil pressure drop to within 10 percent of the coil's original installed pressure drop; if original pressure drop is not known, coil will be considered clean if free of foreign matter and chemical residue based on visual inspection. D. Notify Architect when cleaned components are ready for inspection. E. When directed, re-clean components until they pass. F. Submit evidence that all portions of the system required to be cleaned have been cleaned satisfactorily. 3.07 ADJUSTING A. After satisfactory completion of field quality control activities, restore adjustable devices to original settings, including, but not limited to, dampers, air directional devices, valves, fuses, and circuit breakers. 3.08 WASTE MANAGEMENT A. Double-bag waste and debris in 6 mil, 0.006 inch thick polyethylene plastic bags. B. Dispose of debris off-site in accordance with applicable federal, state and local requirements. END OF SECTION Project No. 19-23188 Section 23 0130.51 - Page 3 of 4 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation SECTION 23 0593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of air systems. B. Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AABC (NSTSB) -AABC National Standards for Total System Balance, 7th Edition; 2016. B. ASHRAE Std 111 - Measurement, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Building HVAC Systems; 2008. C. NEBB (TAB) - Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental Systems; 2015, Eighth Edition. D. SMACNA(TAB) - HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting and Balancing; 2002. 1.04 SUBMITTALS -- A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. TAB Plan: Submit a written plan indicating the testing, adjusting, and balancing standard to be followed and the specific approach for each system and component. -- 1. Include certification that the the contract documents have been reviewed, the equipment and systems, and the control system with the Architect and other installers to sufficiently understand the design intent for each system. 2. Include at least the following in the plan: a. List of all air flow, water flow, sound level, system capacity and efficiency measurements to be performed and a description of specific test procedures, parameters, formulas to be used. -- b. Copy of field checkout sheets and logs to be used, listing each piece of equipment to be tested, adjusted and balanced with the data cells to be gathered for each. c. Expected problems and solutions, etc. d. Time schedule for TAB work to be done in phases (by floor or unit, etc.). e. Exhaust fan balancing and capacity verifications, including any required room pressure differentials. C. Final Report: Indicate deficiencies in systems that would prevent proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance. 1. Submit to the the Construction Manager within two weeks after completion of testing, adjusting, and balancing. 2. Revise TAB plan to reflect actual procedures and submit as part of final report. 3. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project. Provide final copies for Architect and for inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals. 4. Provide reports in electronic PDF file format manuals, complete with index page and indexing tabs, with cover identification at front and side. Include set of reduced drawings with air outlets and equipment identified to correspond with data sheets, and indicating thermostat locations. 5. Include actual instrument list, with manufacturer name, serial number, and date of calibration. 6. Form of Test Reports: Where the TAB standard being followed recommends a report _ format use that; otherwise, follow ASHRAE Std 111. 7. Units of Measure: Report data in both I-P (inch-pound) and SI (metric) units. 8. Include the following on the title page of each report: a. Name of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency. -- b. Address of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency. c. Telephone number of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency. d. Project name. e. Project location. Project No. 19-23188 Section 23 0593 - Page 1 of 6 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation f. Project Architect. g. Project Engineer. h. Project Contractor. i. Project altitude. j. Report date. D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of flow measuring stations and balancing valves and rough setting. _ PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Perform total system balance in accordance with one of the following: 1. AABC (NSTSB), AABC National Standards for Total System Balance. 2. ASHRAE Std 111, Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of _ Building Heating, Ventilation, Air-Conditioning, and Refrigeration Systems. 3. SMACNA (TAB). 4. Maintain at least one copy of the standard to be used at project site at all times. B. Begin work after completion of systems to be tested, adjusted, or balanced and complete work prior to Substantial Completion of the project. C. Where HVAC systems and/or components interface with life safety systems, including fire and smoke detection, alarm, and control, coordinate scheduling and testing and inspection procedures with the authorities having jurisdiction. D. TAB Agency Qualifications:1. Company specializing in the testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems specified in this section. 2. Having minimum of three years documented experience. 3. Certified by one of the following: -- a. AABC, Associated Air Balance Council: www.aabc.com/#sle; upon completion submit AABC National Performance Guaranty. b. NEBB, National Environmental Balancing Bureau: www.nebb.org/#sle. c. TABB, The Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau of National Energy Management Institute: www.tabbcertified.org/#sle. E. TAB Supervisor and Technician Qualifications: Certified by same organization as TAB agency. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Verify that systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Ensure the following conditions: 1. Systems are started and operating in a safe and normal condition. — 2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable. 3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment. 4. Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in addition to final — filters. 5. Duct systems are clean of debris. 6. Fans are rotating correctly. 7. Fire and volume dampers are in place and open. 8. Air coil fins are cleaned and combed. 9. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place. 10. Air outlets are installed and connected. — 11. Duct system leakage is minimized. 12. Service and balance valves are open. B. Submit field reports. Report defects and deficiencies that will or could prevent proper system — balance. C. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.03 PREPARATION A. Hold a pre-balancing meeting at least one week prior to starting TAB work. Project No. 19-23188 Section 23 0593 - Page 2 of 6 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation 1. Require attendance by all installers whose work will be tested, adjusted, or balanced. — B. Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations. Make instruments available to Architect to facilitate spot checks during testing. C. Provide additional balancing devices as required. 3.04 ADJUSTMENT TOLERANCES A. Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 10 percent of design for supply systems and plus or minus 10 percent of design for return and exhaust systems. B. Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust total to within plus 10 percent and minus 10 percent of design to space. Adjust outlets and inlets in space to within plus or minus 10 percent of design. C. Hydronic Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 10 percent of design. 3.05 RECORDING AND ADJUSTING A. Field Logs: Maintain written logs including: 1. Running log of events and issues. 2. Discrepancies, deficient or uncompleted work by others. 3. Contract interpretation requests. 4. Lists of completed tests. B. Ensure recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions. C. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops. D. Mark on drawings the locations where traverse and other critical measurements were taken and cross reference the location in the final report. E. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such disruption has been rectified. F. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings. G. At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded in report. Recheck points or areas as selected and witnessed by the Owner. 3.06 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply, return, and exhaust air quantities at site altitude. B. Make air quantity measurements in ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional area of duct. C. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets. D. Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts and noise. E. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extend that adjustments do not create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by duct internal devices such as dampers and splitters. F. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide drive changes required. Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation. G. Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities recorded at each outlet or inlet. H. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil pressure drops, and total pressure across the fan. Make allowances for 50 percent loading of filters. I. Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for design conditions. J. Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers to check leakage. 3.07 SCOPE A. Test, adjust, and balance the following: -- 1. Air Coils. Project No. 19-23188 Section 23 0593 - Page 3 of 6 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation 2. Air Handling Units. '- 3. Fans. 4. Air Filters. 5. Air Inlets and Outlets. 3.08 MINIMUM DATA TO BE REPORTED A. Electric Motors: 1. Manufacturer. 2. Model/Frame. 3. HP/BHP. 4. Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load. 5. RPM. 6. Service factor. 7. Starter size, rating, heater elements. 8. Sheave Make/Size/Bore.B. V-Belt Drives: 1. Identification/location. 2. Required driven RPM. 3. Driven sheave, diameter and RPM. 4. Belt, size and quantity. 5. Motor sheave diameter and RPM. 6. Center to center distance, maximum, minimum, and actual. C. Cooling Coils: 1. Identification/number. 2. Location. 3. Service. 4. Manufacturer. 5. Air flow, design and actual. - 6. Entering air DB temperature, design and actual. 7. Entering air WB temperature, design and actual. 8. Leaving air DB temperature, design and actual. 9. Leaving air WB temperature, design and actual. 10. Saturated suction temperature, design and actual. 11. Air pressure drop, design and actual. D. Return Air/Outside Air: 1. Identification/location. 2. Design air flow. 3. Actual air flow. '- 4. Design return air flow. 5. Actual return air flow. 6. Design outside air flow. 7. Actual outside air flow. 8. Return air temperature. E. Exhaust Fans: 1. Location. 2. Manufacturer. 3. Model number. 4. Serial number. '- 5. Air flow, specified and actual. F. Duct Traverses: 1. System zone/branch. - 2. Duct size. 3. Area. 4. Design velocity. 5. Design air flow. 6. Test velocity. Project No. 19-23188 Section 23 0593 - Page 4 of 6 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation 7. Test air flow. 8. Duct static pressure. -- 9. Air temperature. 10. Air correction factor. 3.09 APPROVAL A. The engineer shall review the final test and balance report. The engineer will confirm that the test and balance meets design and will have final say on the approval of the test and balance report. END OF SECTION Project No. 19-23188 Section 23 0593 - Page 5 of 6 -- Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation SECTION 23 0713 DUCT INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Duct insulation. B. Duct liner. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 6116 -Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions. B. Section 23 0553 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C553 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications; 2013. B. ASTM C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation; 2014. C. ASTM C1071 - Standard Specification for Fibrous Glass Duct Lining Insulation (Thermal and Sound Absorbing Material); 2012. D. ASTM C1290 - Standard Specification for Flexible Fibrous Glass Blanket Insulation Used to Externally Insulate HVAC Ducts; 2011. E. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2016. F. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2016. G. ASTM G21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi; 2015. H. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures necessary to ensure acceptable workmanship and that installation standards will be achieved. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products of the type specified in this section with not less than three years of documented experience. B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this section, with minimum three years of experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification, including product density and thickness. B. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original wrapping. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives, mastics, and insulation cements. B. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours. Project No. 19-23188 Section 23 0713 - Page 1 of 4 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL 723. 2.02 GLASS FIBER, FLEXIBLE A. Insulation: ASTM C553; flexible, noncombustible blanket. — 1. 'K' value: 0.36 at 75 degrees F, when tested in accordance with ASTM C518. 2. Maximum Service Temperature: 450 degrees F. 3. Maximum Water Vapor Absorption: 5.0 percent by weight. B. Vapor Barrier Jacket: 1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film. 2. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.02 perm inch, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M. — 3. Secure with pressure sensitive tape. C. Vapor Barrier Tape: 1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with pressure — sensitive acrylic based adhesive. 2.03 DUCT LINER A. DESCRIPTION 1. NBR/PVC-based closed cell, flexible elastomeric foam thermal and acoustic insulation. It is environmentally friendly as it is free of CFCs, HFCs, HCFCs, PBDEs, formaldehyde and fibers. An EPA registered antimicrobial agent is incorporated into the product providing additional protection against mold, fungal and bacterial growth. It is UL GREENGUARDR Gold Certified for low VOC emissions. B. APPLICATIONS 1. Service temperatures ranging from -297°F (-182°C) to +220°F (+104°C). When using — factory-applied PSA, the low temperature limit is -40°F (-40°C). When the product is installed fully adhered to the insulated surface (via contact adhesive or PSA), the high temperature limit is +200°F (+93°C). The product is used to reduce sound transmission ...- and/or retard heat gain/loss and prevent condensation when used as an internal liner on square, rectangular, round or oval ductwork or equipment. C. INSTALLATION _ 1. Install on non-operational systems with clean, dry surfaces in ambient conditions between 40°F and 100°F. For square or rectangular ducts, properly sized insulation sheets should have 100% coverage of an approved contact adhesive applied to both surfaces. Compression joints should be used on all butt edges. Mechanical fasteners should be used in accordance with SMACNA guidelines. When air stream velocities exceed 4,000 FPM (20.3m/second), metal nosing is recommended to be applied to every leading edge. Nosing may be formed, channeled or zee-attached on duct by screws, rivets or welds. ASTM C1710. D. FLAME AND SMOKE RATING 1. Thicknesses of 2" (50 mm) and below has a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke development rating of 50 or less as tested to ASTM E84, "Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials". It is acceptable for duct/plenum applications, meeting the requirements of NFPA 90A/B. E. Liner Fasteners: Galvanized steel, self-adhesive pad with integral head. F. Adhesive: Waterproof, fire-retardant type, ASTM C916. G. Liner Fasteners: Galvanized steel, self-adhesive pad with integral head. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that ducts have been tested before applying insulation materials.B. Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry. Project No. 19-23188 Section 23 0713 - Page 2 of 4 _ Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards. C. Insulated ducts conveying air below ambient temperature: 1. Provide insulation with vapor barrier jackets. 2. Finish with tape and vapor barrier jacket. 3. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations. 4. Insulate entire system including fittings, joints, flanges, fire dampers, flexible connections, and expansion joints. D. Insulated ducts conveying air above ambient temperature: 1. Provide with or without standard vapor barrier jacket. 2. Insulate fittings and joints. Where service access is required, bevel and seal ends of insulation. E. Duct and Plenum Liner Application: 1. Adhere insulation with adhesive for 90 percent coverage. 2. Seal and smooth joints. Seal and coat transverse joints. 3. Seal liner surface penetrations with adhesive. 4. Duct dimensions indicated are net inside dimensions required for air flow. Increase duct size to allow for insulation thickness. 3.03 SCHEDULES A. Return Duct Branches: NEW WORK ONLY 1. 1" Liner. Increase sheet metal size indicated on plans. B. Supply Ducts: NEW WORK ONLY 1. Flexible Glass Fiber Duct Insulation: 1.5 inches thick. END OF SECTION Project No. 19-23188 Section 23 0713 - Page 3 of 4 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation SECTION 23 3100 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal ductwork. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 23 0130.51 - HVAC Air-Distribution System Cleaning: Cleaning ducts after completion of installation. B. Section 23 0593 -Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC. C. Section 23 0713 - Duct Insulation: External insulation and duct liner. D. Section 23 3300 -Air Duct Accessories. E. Section 23 3700 -Air Outlets and Inlets. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASHRAE (FUND) -ASHRAE Handbook - Fundamentals; Most Recent Edition Cited by Referring Code or Reference Standard. — B. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2019a. C. NFPA 90A- Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; 2015. D. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible; 2005 (Rev. 2009). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data for duct materials. C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of ducts and duct fittings. Record changes _ in fitting location and type. Show additional fittings used. 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install duct sealants when temperatures are less than those recommended by sealant — manufacturers. B. Maintain temperatures within acceptable range during and after installation of duct sealants. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DUCT ASSEMBLIES A. Regulatory Requirements: Construct ductwork to comply with NFPA 90A standards. B. Ducts: Galvanized steel, unless otherwise indicated. C. Low Pressure Supply (Heating Systems): 2 inch w.g. pressure class, galvanized steel. D. Return and Relief: 1 inch w.g. pressure class, galvanized steel. -- 2.02 MATERIALS A. Galvanized Steel for Ducts: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M FS Type B, with G60/Z180 coating. 2.03 DUCTWORK FABRICATION A. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA (DCS) and as indicated. B. No variation of duct configuration or size permitted except by written permission. Size round duct installed in place of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE (FUND) Handbook - Fundamentals. C. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated. D. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows must be used, provide air foil turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation. Project No. 19-23188 Section 23 3100 - Page 1 of 2 _ Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation E. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible; — maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergence downstream. F. Fabricate continuously welded round and oval duct fittings in accordance with SMACNA (DCS). — 2.04 MANUFACTURED DUCTWORK AND FITTINGS A. Spiral Ducts: Round spiral lockseam duct with galvanized steel outer wall. 1. Manufacture in accordance with SMACNA (DCS). B. Round Ducts: Round lockseam duct with galvanized steel outer wall. 1. Manufacture in accordance with SMACNA (DCS). C. Flexible Ducts: Black polymer film supported by helically wound spring steel wire. — 1. Pressure Rating: 4 inches WG positive and 0.5 inches WG negative. 2. Maximum Velocity: 4000 fpm. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 20 degrees F to 175 degrees F. — D. Round Duct Connection System: Interlocking duct connection system in accordance with SMACNA (DCS). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install, support, and seal ducts in accordance with SMACNA (DCS). B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system. D. Duct sizes indicated are inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain sizes inside lining. E. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities. END OF SECTION Project No. 19-23188 Section 23 3100 - Page 2 of 2 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation SECTION 23 3300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Air turning devices/extractors. B. Duct access doors. C. Duct test holes. D. Flexible duct connectors. E. Volume control dampers. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 23 3100 - HVAC Ducts and Casings. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NFPA 90A- Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; 2015. B. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible; 2005 (Rev. 2009). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide for shop fabricated assemblies including volume control dampers. Include electrical characteristics and connection requirements. C. Project Record Drawings: Record actual locations of access doors and test holes. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING -- A. Protect dampers from damage to operating linkages and blades. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 AIR TURNING DEVICES/EXTRACTORS A. Multi-blade device with radius blades attached to pivoting frame and bracket, steel construction, with push-pull operator strap. 2.02 DUCT ACCESS DOORS A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA (DCS) and as indicated. B. Access doors with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable. 2.03 DUCT TEST HOLES A. Temporary Test Holes: Cut or drill in ducts as required. Cap with neat patches, neoprene plugs, threaded plugs, or threaded or twist-on metal caps. B. Permanent Test Holes: Factory fabricated, air tight flanged fittings with screw cap. Provide extended neck fittings to clear insulation. 2.04 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTORS A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA (DCS) and as indicated. B. Flexible Duct Connections: Fabric crimped into metal edging strip. 2.05 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA (DCS) and as indicated. B. Splitter Dampers: _ 1. Material: Same gage as duct to 24 inches size in either direction, and two gages heavier for sizes over 24 inches. 2. Blade: Fabricate of single thickness sheet metal to streamline shape, secured with continuous hinge or rod. 3. Operator: Minimum 1/4 inch diameter rod in self aligning, universal joint action, flanged bushing with set screw C. Single Blade Dampers: Project No. 19-23188 Section 23 3300 - Page 1 of 2 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation 1. Fabricate for duct sizes up to 6 by 30 inch. _ 2. Blade: 24 gage, 0.0239 inch, minimum. D. Multi-Blade Damper: Fabricate of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 8 by 72 inch. Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized channel frame with suitable hardware. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION _ A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NFPA 90A, and follow SMACNA (DCS). Refer to Section 23 3100 for duct construction and pressure class. B. Provide duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes. C. Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches are taken from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install minimum 2 duct widths from duct take-off. D. Use splitter dampers only where indicated. E. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, grilles, and registers, regardless of whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, grille, or register assembly. END OF SECTION Project No. 19-23188 Section 23 3300 - Page 2 of 2 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation SECTION 23 3700 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES — A. Slot ceiling diffusers. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AMCA 500-L - Laboratory Methods of Testing Louvers for Rating; 2015. B. ARI 890 - Standard for Air Diffusers and Air Diffuser Assemblies; Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute; 2001. C. ASHRAE Std 70 - Method of Testing the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets; 2006 (R2011). D. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible; 2005 (Rev. 2009). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data for equipment required for this project. Review outlets and inlets as to size, finish, and type of mounting prior to submission. Submit schedule of outlets and inlets showing type, size, location, application, and noise level. 1. Include complete performance data and descriptive literature including finish and _ accessory items. C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of air outlets and inlets. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Test and rate air outlet and inlet performance in accordance with ASHRAE Std 70. B. Test and rate louver performance in accordance with AMCA 500-L. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Krueger: www.krueger-hvac.com. B. Price Industries: www.price-hvac.com. C. Titus: www.titus-hvac.com. D. Tuttle and Bailey; : www.tuttleandbailey.com/#sle. E. Nailor F. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 CEILING SLOT DIFFUSERS A. Type: Continuous (See Schedule) wide slot, two slots wide, with adjustable vanes for left, right, or vertical discharge. B. Fabrication: Aluminum extrusions with factory clear lacquer finish. C. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. D. Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting and gasket, mitered end border. E. Plenum: Integral, galvanized steel, insulated. 2.03 CEILING EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES A. Type: Streamlined blades, 3/4 inch minimum depth, 3/4 inch maximum spacing, with blades set at 45 degrees, horizontal face. B. Fabrication: Steel with 20 gage. 0.0359 inch minimum frames and 22 gage, 0.0299 inch minimum blades, steel and aluminum with 20 gage, 0.0359 inch minimum frame, or aluminum extrusions, with factory baked enamel finish. C. Color: Project No. 19-23188 Section 23 3700 - Page 1 of 2 _ Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation D. Damper on RETURN AIR PLENUM ONLY: Integral, gang-operated, opposed blade type with removable key operator, operable from face where not individually connected to exhaust fans. 2.04 CEILING LINEAR EXHAUST AND RETURN GRILLES A. Type: Streamlined blades with 90 degree one-way deflection, 1/8 by 3/4 inch on 1/4 inch centers. B. Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting. C. Fabrication: Steel with 20 gage, 0.0359 inch minimum frames and 22 gage, 0.0299 inch minimum blades, steel and aluminum with 20 gage, 0.0359 inch minimum frame, or aluminum extrusions, with factory baked enamel finish. D. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. The contractor shall inspect all equipment for damage upon delivery and shall immediately report damage to the owner and replace or repair such damage to the satisfaction of the owner. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform with architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement. C. All grilles shall be installed tight on their respective mounting surfaces, installed plumb and true with room dimensions, and accurately centered on projections, recesses, windows, ceiling grids, light fixtures, or doors. Provide appropriate frame wherever necessary to adapt to mounting surface. D. Install items in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E. Install grilles to ductwork with air tight connection. 3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING _ A. All installed materials shall have debris removed and shall be vacuumed clean of dust. Remove any strippable protective coating using manufacturer's recommended method. END OF SECTION Project No. 19-23188 Section 23 3700 - Page 2 of 2 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation -art :w;, :;- ,: :> <, -n s.. s, s€ t .�;� _ ice=, = ?:r . 4_ . „, . _...,.,... ...„.,...._, ‘", _, .,,1„.•.....„ itc:__-_,,...,. . . .t*.v.. ..i. i„,..;,,,,„•,,._•Iv„„ , 'ram `a„ __: mod- �,�: a a' . ,,, .....,..__,...„,_ FSN. �N _id., _ .: t�+•'a. SSA ,if. :. 4.0.!__,..,... , .....f:......,"„.:,..„..:. : -__.. .-:.-„,,,._.r.... __..7.,... . ,--f:,:';;-,"-:-.4:.-:',-:.- ',-.7'.--;*:`.,-;.-......i' It--''._,,,'?.7-.-z r...-• - -•'41frer,„1"`..'41,-.;,7-77...77 - _ -4:-.:"fit=:de'_ _ __ £� ., - `-h".- :ate(' - - x+2g, _�...� '.�5,`_ `S • . - %'KC".'�n.'.. - :5 Via'-r 3` fw,��, I. • �i'�sM1� _ - _c' " - •-' y ; : 3 ry 2c-, ��-Y - t.. .,..... ...,.,. ,, ., !.4,,,i.„...:„.....,. .._,� _ t t yti ' �� � . q .• --t � - - y'44 - -- - - .E; - ' mn. f .- _i 'St-. ' _�!„u'.,. - -- � Y 'Yt ' a 7± ' :roa' .^�•7r _ - � _: _ .} 7' t,,•: .2- ice 3,` _ q' : ';- =� nor .: . . - ,~� - -- ,:�,,.'r ',.�., 4 4 . . „„. .„.. .. -Y •i �i Y 'M1' =_wn Fi _ S,_ _ ":+f Kt.`- = :"vim tP - -',". - i ' o"-,,,, 4 ,1e.,:-,,Zx,:,-1•.1,,-,4:7,,..--,..7c_4,;'-'-..7„,,.., A„4 i'--r-.,,--XC4,.'-t.-7-,.-,7i,",s-4,--.,t:,,-;, ,}A s4g,; _ _y„ '`t'..c-_. _ -_p• ft,. ;g'`ir _ - _ _ zn'' __ -,yam-:3F,' ,,J:- _ - - C[ - Fes- t' - V"- - -k'_m-'` _ 'yb„_ r3 Y^ "^'u". - - _kr__'' ',4',+.n'_ 'v`- _ _ J'A4.,2' ty. ' <..v•:'r ,,`x. _ _ _ :•. _ _ t.41 w i . 4., , F - - - > yam,`�`.' • _ :.'�y:hH'• ram'., >S'j:t'k"„':a- - _ z'd: T „+ ac"ate. -"! ria F[:t i•S ` Sa> - J `" :• '�. ' T`l - hr?-".r,'__ __ .- -i r.w -fp` _4j3yT?3 Y__ _�•� `_i .. ,,,,, -.,,,-_„.-:, _ •„_-„ r. 4 .,;%+: •So- - "-r _ -tea. ,. •,° , - . ice; ? a _fir. fr. '��y> ��-'• y^F _ - - w�.. - yky�v�� .. N �'.t',s,tx r _ _t:£'.?', - - -C+r .: �•-- ^SS�-_ . `=.'sat=. ,,.A_ l.2•,_. i�- - `:k'�: , = i, .fix t, -n - 3 3.'S „fx Y,d _ ;;.1%,4-,.,:-.--,---4":--•:.52{•4.,..-.!-;:<-V"...-,-,:'-:.:-',---:--••."-.'. ,'---: t` _ - � • _ :'-�'?•' T'¢v�w�� - - - � .�-err-�'a "_ _ _ vim'• '�:tr.'�'s. ., F - ...,•-•„:„,,,,„...,...,....-...i,,,-,2-,,,„,,,_;„;::._. _ .0 i:.--1...,: ,,,,r...=,-,-,„-;:.--'-4.--i'.,7,-;,:,'.-4 Y,„•••'X.1;--- - -,- .- ,, -, _ = • d �P- s,. ae.,, k ; a t - ` �'.• A - td„� -a' Y _ ,q ` - �ml. f;K ':2 -4\ate` _ �s - es. - - �,.u'l, •`•. ..,, _ - t;'y • S?- . i . a i` • _ rf' Se,^"'L.- - : spry .-.' _?S." _ +G-,.y. is $.',u - '..s` ' SECTION 26 0010 _ BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART IGENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES: — A. Basic Electrical Requirements specifically applicable to Division 26 Sections, in addition to Division 01 -General Requirements. 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK: A. The Electrical Contract Installation shall include a complete Electrical Installation for the project. All conduit, fixtures and equipment herein specified, mentioned or shown on Drawings, shall be furnished and installed in place, connected up and ready for normal operation except for such — items as are specifically mentioned to be furnished by others. 1.03 WORK INCLUDED: A. The Electrical Contract shall include all work under the listed Sections of the Specifications Index and all related Electrical work as shown on the Drawings for the project. B. A Complete table of Electrical Reference Symbols is shown on the plans. C. Under this Contract the Electrical Contractor shall furnish the Owner with two 3-ring binders of all pertinent systems related documents. Submit manuals to the Engineer for his review. The Engineer will then turn books over to the Owner. The books shall contain the following items: 1. Shop drawings on all major equipment. _ 2. Operating Instructions for all major equipment. 3. Maintenance Instructions for all major equipment. 4. Wiring diagrams for all equipment. 5. Control drawings for any systems not furnished under other contracts. D. The Electrical contractor is responsible for own equipment, such as cranes, lifts, etc. in order to provide a complete installation of Electrical systems. E. The Electrical Contractor is responsible for contacting the utility company and coordinating the power connection for the building service. Include all costs in bid. F. Coordinate utility service outages and reconnections with Utility Company and Owner. G. Branch feeders, branch wiring, receptacles, special outlets, switches, light fixtures, dimmers, contactors, starters, timers, etc., as shown on the plans or required for operation of the electrical system. H. A fire alarm system, including all conduit and wiring, manual pull stations, audio/visual warning alarms, smoke detectors, and fire alarm panel with annunciator. I. Repair of all damage done to the premises as a result of the installation and removal of all debris or surplus material left by those engaged in the work. J. All new outside building lighting and sign lighting, including wiring, timers, photocells, switches and circuit breakers. 1.04 SPECIFICATIONS COMPLIANCE A. The requirements of these specifications shall be complied with in every respect. Therefore, it shall be absolutely mandatory that the job foreman, all lead electricians, subcontractors and their foreman have completely studied these specifications, be completely knowledgeable as to their entire contents, and maintain a copy at the job-site. Failure to comply with this requirement will be reason to presume the electrician or subcontractor is not in responsible charge of his work due to ignorance of job requirements, and will be reason for the owner to require dismissal and replacement with approved personnel. Every foreman and lead mechanic shall be provided with a complete copy of this specification. 1.05 INCONSISTENCIES A. If there is an inconsistency in the quality and/or quantity of Work required by the Contract Documents, either the greater quality and/or quantity of Work indicated shall be provided in accordance with the Engineer/Architect's interpretation without change in the contract sum. Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0010 - Page 1 of 4 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation 1.06 CODES, FEES AND LATERAL COSTS: A. The Electrical Installation shall meet all applicable local, state and federal codes and standards. All permits necessary for a complete electrical installation shall be paid for by this Contractor. B. Except in those municipalities which provide state-approved electrical inspection, all installation of electrical equipment wiring shall be inspected by the State Board of Electricity. Allowance shall be made in the bid and contract for the cost of such inspection. C. Fees for such inspection will be charged in accordance with the rules and regulations of the State Board of Electricity. Evidence of payment of fees shall be provided by the Contractor with his Request for Payment. 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: �. A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. or other testing firm acceptable to authority having jurisdiction. — 1.08 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit under provisions of Division 01. B. Submit shop drawings and product data grouped to include complete submittals of related systems, products, and accessories in a single submittal. C. The contractor shall submit four (4) copies of shop drawings on all equipment and materials to the engineer for approval. The contractor shall not use any equipment or materials that does not have the engineer's stamped approval. D. Mark dimensions and values in units to match those specified. 1.09 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS: A. Install Work in locations shown on Drawings, unless prevented by Project conditions. 1.10 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING: A. Construct Work in sequence under provisions of Division 1. 1.11 PRE-CONSTRUCTION COORDINATION AND VERIFICATION: A. This Contractor shall coordinate his work with other Contractors on this job. Any conflict which cannot be resolved shall be settled by the Architect/Engineer. B. Field verification of scale dimensions on plans is directed since actual locations, distances and levels will be governed by actual field conditions. — C. The Contractors shall check architectural, structural, plumbing, heating, ventilating and electrical plans to avert possible installation conflicts. Should drastic changes from original plans be necessary to resolve such conflicts this Contractor shall notify the Architect/Engineer and —• secure written approval and agreement on necessary adjustments before the installation is started. D. Discrepancies shown on different plans or between plans and actual field conditions or between plans and specifications shall promptly be brought to the attention of the Architect/Engineer for a decision. E. The Contractor shall consider and review the complete set of documents, etc., Architectural, Structural, Mechanical, Electrical, etc., (Drawings and Specifications) as his complete set. He will be responsible for any and all electrical work shown or stated (to be by him), to include this work in his bid and install such items even though they are not specifically shown or stated on the Electrical section of the plans and specifications. —. F. The drawings are indicative of the work to be installed, but do not show all bends, fittings, boxes and specialties required to complete the installation. G. All conduits, wires, outlets boxes, switches, receptacles, devices and fixtures shall be included -- in the work. H. Where it is stated that the contractor shall "provide" a device or piece of equipment, it shall mean that such a device or equipments are finished and installed. _. Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0010 - Page 2 of 4 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation 1.12 CUTTING AND PATCHING: A. The Electrical Contractor shall set all sleeves in construction for his work. B. Where cutting is required, it shall be done by this Contractor. C. All patching shall be done by the Electrical Contractor. D. All conduit and outlet installations and cutting of any kind must be done with great care so as not to leave unsightly surfaces which may not be entirely concealed by plates, escutcheons or their normal concealing construction, if such unsightly conditions occur, Contractor will be required, at his own expense, to replace the damaged construction. 1.13 SCAFFOLDING: A. Furnish and erect all scaffolding, ladders, etc., required in the installation of wiring, equipment and fixtures. 1.14 ADDITIONAL ELECTRICAL COSTS: A. If the Mechanical Contractor substitutes equipment for specified units, the mechanical contractor shall be responsible for any additional electrical installation costs for this substitution whether the other equipment was listed as equal in the specification or was approved equal after the project was in the bidding process. 1.15 GUARANTEE: A. This Contractor shall be responsible for the proper installation and working of everything in this contract and shall guarantee to remedy free of charge any defects in workmanship and materials that may appear to give or gives rise to trouble of any kind for a period of one year from the time of final acceptance of his work by the Owner. B. This Contractor shall be responsible for the proper installation and working of everything in this contract and shall guarantee to remedy free of charge any defects in workmanship and materials that may appear to give or gives rise to trouble of any kind for a period of one year from date of final substantial completion. PART 2NOT USED PART 3EXECUTION 3.01 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS: A. Provide necessary power wiring for equipment furnished by others. Verify requirements with the Contractors responsible to supply each piece of equipment. Provide heavy duty disconnect switches as indicated. 3.02 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS: A. Contractor shall keep an accurate record of all deviations from contract drawings and specifications. He shall neatly and correctly enter in colored crayon any deviations on drawings affected, and shall keep drawings available for inspection. Extra set of drawings will be furnished for this purpose. B. At the completion of the job, and before final acceptance, the Contractor shall provide a complete set of as-built drawings. The Contractor shall show locations for all major electrical devices, including panelboards and all major runs of conduit, the circuiting of each fixture, outlet, etc., shall be shown. Certify to the accuracy of each print, by signature thereon, and deliver same to Architect. END OF SECTION Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0010 - Page 3 of 4 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation SECTION 26 0505 _ SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR ELECTRICAL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Electrical demolition. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Materials and equipment for patching and extending work: As specified in individual sections. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify field measurements and circuiting arrangements are as indicated. B. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities. C. Demolition drawings are based on casual field observation and existing record documents. D. Report discrepancies to Architect before disturbing existing installation. E. Beginning of demolition means installer accepts existing conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings to be removed. B. Coordinate utility service outages with utility company. C. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during construction. When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits, use personnel experienced in such operations. D. Existing Electrical Service: Maintain existing system in service until new system is complete and ready for service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Minimize outage duration. 1. Obtain permission from Owner at least 24 hours before partially or completely disabling system. 2. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area. E. Existing Fire Alarm System: Maintain existing system in service until new system is accepted. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Minimize outage duration. 1. Notify Owner before partially or completely disabling system. 2. Notify local fire service. 3. Make notifications at least 24 hours in advance. 4. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area. F. Existing Telephone System: Maintain existing system in service until new system is complete and ready for service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Minimize outage duration. 1. Notify Owner at least 24 hours before partially or completely disabling system. 2. Notify telephone utility company at least 24 hours before partially or completely disabling system. 3. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area. 3.03 DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK A. Perform work for removal and disposal of equipment and materials containing toxic substances regulated under the Federal Toxic Substances Control Act (TSCA) in accordance with applicable federal, state, and local regulations. Applicable equipment and materials include, but are not limited to: 1. PCB-containing electrical equipment, including transformers, capacitors, and switches. 2. PCB- and DEHP-containing lighting ballasts. 3. Mercury-containing lamps and tubes, including fluorescent lamps, high intensity discharge (HID), arc lamps, ultra-violet, high pressure sodium, mercury vapor, ignitron tubes, neon, and incandescent. Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0505 - Page 1 of 2 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation B. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction. — C. Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply. D. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces. Use materials to match fire —' rating of wall. E. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit servicing them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets that are not removed. F. Disconnect and remove abandoned panelboards and distribution equipment. G. Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment serving utilization equipment that has been removed. H. Disconnect and remove abandoned luminaires. Remove brackets, stems, hangers, and other accessories. — I. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work. J. Maintain access to existing electrical installations that remain active. Modify installation or provide access panel as appropriate.K. Extend existing installations using materials and methods compatible with existing electrical installations, or as specified. 3.04 CLEANING AND REPAIR A. See Section 01 7419 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal for additional requirements. B. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment that remain or that are to be reused. C. Panelboards: Clean exposed surfaces and check tightness of electrical connections. Replace damaged circuit breakers and provide closure plates for vacant positions. Provide typed circuit directory showing revised circuiting arrangement. D. Luminaires: Remove existing luminaires for cleaning. Use mild detergent to clean all exterior and interior surfaces; rinse with clean water and wipe dry. Replace lamps, ballasts and broken electrical parts in areas that ceilings are to be removed and replaced with existing light fixtures. END OF SECTION Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0505 - Page 2 of 2 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation SECTION 26 0519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Single conductor building wire. B. Metal-clad cable. C. Power and control tray cable. D. Wiring connectors. E. Electrical tape. — F. Heat shrink tubing. G. Wire pulling lubricant. H. Cable ties. I. Firestop sleeves. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping. B. Section 26 0505 - Selective Demolition for Electrical: Disconnection, removal, and/or extension of existing electrical conductors and cables. C. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems: Additional requirements for grounding conductors and grounding connectors. D. Section 26 0536 -Cable Trays for Electrical Systems: Additional installation requirements for cables installed in cable tray systems. E. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. F. Section 26 2100 - Low-Voltage Electrical Service Entrance: Additional requirements for electrical service conductors. G. Section 28 4600 - Fire Detection and Alarm: Fire alarm system conductors and cables. H. Section 31 2316 - Excavation. I. Section 31 2316.13 -Trenching: Excavating, bedding, and backfilling. J. Section 31 2323 - Fill: Bedding and backfilling. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM B3 - Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire; 2013. B. ASTM B8 - Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft; 2011. C. ASTM B33 - Standard Specification for Tin-Coated Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for Electrical Purposes; 2010 (Reapproved 2014). D. ASTM B787/B787M - Standard Specification for 19 Wire Combination Unilay-Stranded Copper Conductors for Subsequent Insulation; 2004 (Reapproved 2014). E. ASTM D3005 - Standard Specification for Low-Temperature Resistant Vinyl Chloride Plastic -� Pressure-Sensitive Electrical Insulating Tape; 2010. F. ASTM D4388 - Standard Specification for Nonmetallic Semi-Conducting and Electrically Insulating Rubber Tapes; 2013. G. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015. H. NEMA WC 70 - Power Cables Rated 2000 Volts or Less for the Distribution of Electrical Energy; 2009. I. NETA ATS -Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems; 2017. Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0519 - Page 1 of 8 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation J. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. K. UL 44 -Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. L. UL 83 - Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. `- M. UL 486A-486B -Wire Connectors; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. N. UL 486C - Splicing Wire Connectors; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. O. UL 486D - Sealed Wire Connector Systems; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. P. UL 510 - Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene, and Rubber Insulating Tape; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. Q. UL 1277 - Electrical Power and Control Tray Cables with Optional Optical-Fiber Members; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. R. UL 1569 - Metal-Clad Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate sizes of raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures installed under other .— sections with the actual conductors to be installed, including adjustments for conductor sizes increased for voltage drop. 2. Coordinate with electrical equipment installed under other sections to provide terminations suitable for use with the conductors to be installed. 3. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70. B. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store conductors and cables in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install or otherwise handle thermoplastic-insulated conductors at temperatures lower than 14 degrees F, unless otherwise permitted by manufacturer's instructions. When installation below this temperature is unavoidable, notify Architect and obtain direction before proceeding with work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE APPLICATIONS A. Do not use conductors and cables for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and — product listing. B. Provide single conductor building wire installed in suitable raceway unless otherwise indicated, permitted, or required. C. Nonmetallic-sheathed cable is not permitted. D. Underground feeder and branch-circuit cable is not permitted. E. Service entrance cable is not permitted. F. Armored cable is not permitted. G. Metal-clad cable is not permitted. — 1. Where not otherwise restricted, may be used: a. Where concealed above accessible ceilings for final connections from junction boxes to luminaires. 1) Maximum Length: 6 feet. Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0519 - Page 2 of 8 — Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation b. Where concealed in hollow stud walls in existing walls for branch circuits up to 20 A. 1) Exception: Provide single conductor building wire in raceway for circuit homerun from first outlet to panelboard. 2. In addition to other applicable restrictions, may not be used: a. Where exposed to damage. b. For damp, wet, or corrosive locations, unless provided with a PVC jacket listed as suitable for those locations. 2.02 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70. B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. C. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring, connectors, etc. as required for a complete operating system. D. Comply with NEMA WC 70. E. Thermoplastic-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 83. F. Thermoset-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 44. G. Conductor Material: 1. Provide copper conductors only. Aluminum conductors are not acceptable for this project. Conductor sizes indicated are based on copper. 2. Copper Conductors: Soft drawn annealed, 98 percent conductivity, uncoated copper conductors complying with ASTM B3, ASTM B8, or ASTM B787/B787M unless otherwise indicated. 3. Tinned Copper Conductors: Comply with ASTM B33. H. Minimum Conductor Size: 1. Branch Circuits: 12 AWG. a. Exceptions: 1) 20 A, 120 V circuits longer than 75 feet: 10 AWG, for voltage drop. 2) 20 A, 120 V circuits longer than 150 feet: 8 AWG, for voltage drop. 3) 20 A, 277 V circuits longer than 150 feet: 10 AWG, for voltage drop. 2. Control Circuits: 14 AWG. I. Conductor Color Coding: 1. Color code conductors as indicated unless otherwise required by the authority having jurisdiction. Maintain consistent color coding throughout project. 2. Color Coding Method: Integrally colored insulation. a. Conductors size 4 AWG and larger may have black insulation color coded using vinyl color coding electrical tape. 3. Color Code: a. 480Y/277 V, 3 Phase, 4 Wire System: 1) Phase A: Brown. 2) Phase B: Orange. 3) Phase C: Yellow. 4) Neutral/Grounded: Gray. b. 208Y/120 V, 3 Phase, 4 Wire System: 1) Phase A: Black. 2) Phase B: Red. 3) Phase C: Blue. 4) Neutral/Grounded: White. c. Equipment Ground, All Systems: Green. d. Isolated Ground, All Systems: Green with yellow stripe. e. Travelers for 3-Way and 4-Way Switching: Pink. f. For modifications or additions to existing wiring systems, comply with existing color _ code when existing code complies with NFPA 70 and is approved by the authority having jurisdiction. 2.03 SINGLE CONDUCTOR BUILDING WIRE A. Description: Single conductor insulated wire. Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0519 - Page 3 of 8 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation B. Conductor Stranding: 1. Feeders and Branch Circuits: a. Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Stranded. b. Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded. C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V. D. Insulation: 1. Copper Building Wire: Type THHN/THWN-2, except as indicated below. a. Size 4 AWG and Larger: Type XHHW-2. b. Installed Underground: Type XHHW-2. 2.04 METAL-CLAD CABLE A. Description: NFPA 70, Type MC cable listed and labeled as complying with UL 1569, and listed for use in classified firestop systems to be used. B. Conductor Stranding: 1. Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Stranded. 2. Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded. C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V. D. Insulation: Type THHN, THHN/THWN, or THHN/THWN-2. E. Grounding: Full-size integral equipment grounding conductor. F. Armor: Steel, interlocked tape. G. Provide PVC jacket applied over cable armor where indicated or required for environment of installed location. 2.05 POWER AND CONTROL TRAY CABLE A. Description: NFPA 70, Type TC cable listed and labeled as complying with UL 1277. B. Conductor Stranding: Stranded. C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V. D. Insulation: Type XHHW or XHHW-2. E. Jacket: PVC or Chlorinated Polyethylene (CPE). — 2.06 WIRING CONNECTORS A. Description: Wiring connectors appropriate for the application, suitable for use with the conductors to be connected, and listed as complying with UL 486A-486B or UL 486C as applicable. B. Wiring Connectors for Splices and Taps: 1. Copper Conductors Size 8 AWG and Smaller: Use twist-on insulated spring connectors. 2. Copper Conductors Size 6 AWG and Larger: Use mechanical connectors or compression connectors. C. Wiring Connectors for Terminations: 1. Provide terminal lugs for connecting conductors to equipment furnished with terminations designed for terminal lugs. 2. Provide compression adapters for connecting conductors to equipment furnished with mechanical lugs when only compression connectors are specified. 3. Where over-sized conductors are larger than the equipment terminations can accommodate, provide connectors suitable for reducing to appropriate size, but not less than required for the rating of the overcurrent protective device. — 4. Provide motor pigtail connectors for connecting motor leads in order to facilitate disconnection. 5. Copper Conductors Size 8 AWG and Larger: Use mechanical connectors or compression connectors where connectors are required. D. Twist-on Insulated Spring Connectors: Rated 600 V, 221 degrees F for standard applications and 302 degrees F for high temperature applications; pre-filled with sealant and listed as complying with UL 486D for damp and wet locations. E. Mechanical Connectors: Provide bolted type. Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0519 - Page 4 of 8 _ Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation F. Compression Connectors: Provide circumferential type or hex type crimp configuration. 2.07 ACCESSORIES A. Electrical Tape: 1. Vinyl Color Coding Electrical Tape: Integrally colored to match color code indicated; listed as complying with UL 510; minimum thickness of 7 mil; resistant to abrasion, corrosion, • and sunlight; suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 221 degrees F. 2. Vinyl Insulating Electrical Tape: Complying with ASTM D3005 and listed as complying with UL 510; minimum thickness of 7 mil; resistant to abrasion, corrosion, and sunlight; -� conformable for application down to 0 degrees F and suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 221 degrees F. 3. Rubber Splicing Electrical Tape: Ethylene Propylene Rubber (EPR) tape, complying with ASTM D4388; minimum thickness of 30 mil; suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 194 degrees F and short-term 266 degrees F overload service. 4. Electrical Filler Tape: Rubber-based insulating moldable putty, minimum thickness of 125 mil; suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 176 degrees F. 5. Moisture Sealing Electrical Tape: Insulating mastic compound laminated to flexible, all-weather vinyl backing; minimum thickness of 90 mil. B. Heat Shrink Tubing: Heavy-wall, split-resistant, with factory-applied adhesive; rated 600 V; suitable for direct burial applications; listed as complying with UL 486D. C. Wire Pulling Lubricant: Listed; suitable for use with the conductors or cables to be installed and suitable for use at the installation temperature. D. Cable Ties: Material and tensile strength rating suitable for application. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather. B. Verify that work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed. C. Verify that raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures are installed and are properly sized to accommodate conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70. D. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. E. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean raceways thoroughly to remove foreign materials before installing conductors and cables. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Circuiting Requirements: 1. Unless dimensioned, circuit routing indicated is diagrammatic. 2. When circuit destination is indicated without specific routing, determine exact routing required. 3. Arrange circuiting to minimize splices. 4. Include circuit lengths required to install connected devices within 10 ft of location indicated. 5. Maintain separation of Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 remote-control, signaling, and power-limited circuits in accordance with NFPA 70. 6. Maintain separation of wiring for emergency systems in accordance with NFPA 70. 7. Circuiting Adjustments: Unless otherwise indicated, when branch circuits are indicated as separate, combining them together in a single raceway is permitted, under the following conditions: a. Provide no more than six current-carrying conductors in a single raceway. Dedicated neutral conductors are considered current-carrying conductors. b. Increase size of conductors as required to account for ampacity derating. c. Size raceways, boxes, etc. to accommodate conductors. 8. Common Neutrals: Unless otherwise indicated, sharing of neutral/grounded conductors among single phase branch circuits of different phases installed in the same raceway is Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0519 - Page 5 of 8 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation not permitted. Provide dedicated neutral/grounded conductor for each individual branch circuit.B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship). D. Installation in Raceway: 1. Tape ends of conductors and cables to prevent infiltration of moisture and other contaminants. 2. Pull all conductors and cables together into raceway at same time. 3. Do not damage conductors and cables or exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tension and sidewall pressure. 4. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant where necessary, except when lubricant is not recommended by the manufacturer. E. Installation in Cable Tray: Also comply with Section 26 0536. F. Paralleled Conductors: Install conductors of the same length and terminate in the same manner. G. Secure and support conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70 using suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from raceways, piping, ductwork, or other systems. 1. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling support system. Do not provide support from ceiling grid or allow conductors and cables to lay on ceiling tiles. 2. Installation in Vertical Raceways: Provide supports where vertical rise exceeds permissible limits. H. Terminate cables using suitable fittings. 1. Metal-Clad Cable (Type MC): a. Use listed fittings. b. Cut cable armor only using specialized tools to prevent damaging conductors or insulation. Do not use hacksaw or wire cutters to cut armor. I. Install conductors with a minimum of 12 inches of slack at each outlet. J. Neatly train and bundle conductors inside boxes, wireways, panelboards and other equipment — enclosures. K. Group or otherwise identify neutral/grounded conductors with associated ungrounded conductors inside enclosures in accordance with NFPA 70. L. Make wiring connections using specified wiring connectors. 1. Make splices and taps only in accessible boxes. Do not pull splices into raceways or make splices in conduit bodies or wiring gutters. 2. Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections without cutting, nicking or damaging conductors. 3. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate insertion into connector. 4. Clean contact surfaces on conductors and connectors to suitable remove corrosion, oxides, and other contaminates. Do not use wire brush on plated connector surfaces. 5. Mechanical Connectors: Secure connections according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings. 6. Compression Connectors: Secure connections using manufacturer's recommended tools and dies. M. Insulate splices and taps that are made with uninsulated connectors using methods suitable for —. the application, with insulation and mechanical strength at least equivalent to unspliced conductors. 1. Dry Locations: Use insulating covers specifically designed for the connectors, electrical tape, or heat shrink tubing.a. For taped connections, first apply adequate amount of rubber splicing electrical tape or electrical filler tape, followed by outer covering of vinyl insulating electrical tape. 2. Damp Locations: Use insulating covers specifically designed for the connectors, electrical tape, or heat shrink tubing. Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0519 - Page 6 of 8 — Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation a. For connections with insulating covers, apply outer covering of moisture sealing electrical tape. b. For taped connections, follow same procedure as for dry locations but apply outer covering of moisture sealing electrical tape. 3. Wet Locations: Use heat shrink tubing. N. Insulate ends of spare conductors using vinyl insulating electrical tape. O. Field-Applied Color Coding: Where vinyl color coding electrical tape is used in lieu of integrally colored insulation as permitted in Part 2 under"Color Coding", apply half overlapping turns of tape at each termination and at each location conductors are accessible. P. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Section 07 8400. �. Q. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide final connections to all equipment and devices, including those furnished by others, as required for a complete operating system. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements. B. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conductors and cables. END OF SECTION oak Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0519 - Page 7 of 8 .... Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation SECTION 26 0526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Grounding and bonding requirements. B. Conductors for grounding and bonding. C. Connectors for grounding and bonding. D. Ground bars. E. Ground rod electrodes. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 0519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Additional requirements for conductors for grounding and bonding, including conductor color coding. B. Section 26 0536 - Cable Trays for Electrical Systems: Additional grounding and bonding requirements for cable tray systems. C. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015. B. NEMA GR 1 - Grounding Rod Electrodes and Grounding Rod Electrode Couplings; 2007. C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. D. UL 467 - Grounding and Bonding Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Verify exact locations of underground metal water service pipe entrances to building. 2. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide steel reinforcement complying with specified requirements for concrete-encased electrode. 3. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work. B. Sequencing: 1. Do not install ground rod electrodes until final backfill and compaction is complete. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70. B. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GROUNDING AND BONDING REQUIREMENTS A. Existing Work: Where existing grounding and bonding system components are indicated to be reused, they may be reused only where they are free from corrosion; integrity and continuity are verified, and where acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. B. Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing. C. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required components, conductors, connectors, conduit, boxes, fittings, supports, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete grounding and bonding system. D. Where conductor size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum size requirements specified. E. Grounding Electrode System: Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0526 - Page 1 of 4 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation 1. Provide connection to required and supplemental grounding electrodes indicated to form grounding electrode system. a. Provide continuous grounding electrode conductors without splice or joint. b. Install grounding electrode conductors in raceway where exposed to physical damage. Bond grounding electrode conductor to metallic raceways at each end with bonding jumper. 2. Metal Underground Water Pipe(s): a. Provide connection to underground metal domestic and fire protection (where — present) water service pipe(s) that are in direct contact with earth for at least 10 feet at an accessible location not more than 5 feet from the point of entrance to the building. b. Provide bonding jumper(s) around insulating joints/pipes as required to make pipe electrically continuous. c. Provide bonding jumper around water meter of sufficient length to permit removal of meter without disconnecting jumper. — 3. Metal In-Ground Support Structure: a. Provide connection to metal in-ground support structure that is in direct contact with earth in accordance with NFPA 70. 4. Concrete-Encased Electrode: a. Provide connection to concrete-encased electrode consisting of not less than 20 feet of either steel reinforcing bars or bare copper conductor not smaller than 4 AWG embedded within concrete foundation or footing that is in direct contact with earth in accordance with NFPA 70. 5. Ground Rod Electrode(s): a. Provide two electrodes unless otherwise indicated or required. b. Space electrodes not less than 10 feet from each other and any other ground electrode. c. Where location is not indicated, locate electrode(s) at least 5 feet outside building perimeter foundation as near as possible to electrical service entrance; where possible, locate in softscape (uncovered) area. 6. Provide additional ground electrode(s) as required to achieve specified grounding electrode system resistance. 7. Ground Bar: Provide ground bar, separate from service equipment enclosure, for common connection point of grounding electrode system bonding jumpers as permitted in NFPA 70. Connect grounding electrode conductor provided for service-supplied system grounding to this ground bar. a. Ground Bar Size: 1/4 by 2 by 12 inches unless otherwise indicated or required. b. Where ground bar location is not indicated, locate in accessible location as near as possible to service disconnect enclosure. c. Ground Bar Mounting Height: 18 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated. 8. Ground Riser: Provide common grounding electrode conductor not less than 3/0 AWG for tap connections to multiple separately derived systems as permitted in NFPA 70. F. Service-Supplied System Grounding: 1. For each service disconnect, provide grounding electrode conductor to connect neutral (grounded) service conductor to grounding electrode system. Unless otherwise indicated, — make connection at neutral (grounded) bus in service disconnect enclosure. 2. For each service disconnect, provide main bonding jumper to connect neutral (grounded) bus to equipment ground bus where not factory-installed. Do not make any other connections between neutral (grounded) conductors and ground on load side of service — disconnect. G. Bonding and Equipment Grounding: 1. Provide bonding for equipment grounding conductors, equipment ground busses, metallic equipment enclosures, metallic raceways and boxes, device grounding terminals, and other normally non-current-carrying conductive materials enclosing electrical conductors/equipment or likely to become energized as indicated and in accordance with NFPA 70. Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0526 - Page 2 of 4 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation 2. Raceways may be used as sole equipment grounding conductor where permitted by NFPA 70. Provide insulated equipment grounding conductor where indicated or required, including but not limited to: a. In each nonmetallic feeder and branch circuit raceway. b. In each flexible conduit. c. In outdoor portions of each metallic feeder and branch circuit raceway utilizing non-threaded fittings (where permitted) supplying rooftop multimotor and combination-load air-conditioning and refrigerating equipment. 3. Where circuit conductor sizes are increased for voltage drop, increase size of equipment grounding conductor proportionally in accordance with NFPA 70. 4. Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper. 5. Terminate branch circuit equipment grounding conductors on solidly bonded equipment ground bus only. Do not terminate on neutral (grounded) or isolated/insulated ground bus. 6. Provide bonding jumper across expansion or expansion/deflection fittings provided to accommodate conduit movement. 7. Provide bonding for interior metal piping systems in accordance with NFPA 70. This includes, but is not limited to: a. Metal water piping where not already effectively bonded to metal underground water pipe used as grounding electrode. b. Metal gas piping. H. Communications Systems Grounding and Bonding: _ 1. Provide bonding jumper in raceway from intersystem bonding termination to each communications room or backboard and provide ground bar for termination. a. Bonding Jumper Size: 6 AWG, unless otherwise indicated or required. b. Raceway Size: 3/4 inch trade size unless otherwise indicated or required. c. Ground Bar Size: 1/4 by 2 by 12 inches unless otherwise indicated or required. I. Cable Tray Systems: Also comply with Section 26 0536. 2.02 GROUNDING AND BONDING COMPONENTS A. General Requirements: 1. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. 2. Provide products listed and labeled as complying with UL 467 where applicable. B. Conductors for Grounding and Bonding, in Addition to Requirements of Section 26 0526: 1. Use insulated copper conductors unless otherwise indicated. a. Exceptions: 1) Use bare copper conductors where installed underground in direct contact with earth. 2) Use bare copper conductors where directly encased in concrete (not in raceway). C. Connectors for Grounding and Bonding: 1. Description: Connectors appropriate for the application and suitable for the conductors and items to be connected; listed and labeled as complying with UL 467. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, use exothermic welded connections for underground, concealed and other inaccessible connections. 3. Unless otherwise indicated, use mechanical connectors, compression connectors, or OWL exothermic welded connections for accessible connections. D. Ground Bars: 1. Description: Copper rectangular ground bars with mounting brackets and insulators. 2. Holes for Connections: As indicated or as required for connections to be made. E. Ground Rod Electrodes: 1. Comply with NEMA GR 1. 2. Material: Copper-bonded (copper-clad) steel. 3. Size: 3/4 inch diameter by 10 feet length, unless otherwise indicated. Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0526 - Page 3 of 4 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation PART 3 EXECUTION — 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that work likely to damage grounding and bonding system components has been completed.B. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. D. Verify that final backfill and compaction has been completed before driving rod electrodes.3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. — B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship). C. Ground Rod Electrodes: Unless otherwise indicated, install ground rod electrodes vertically. Where encountered rock prohibits vertical installation, install at 45 degree angle or bury — horizontally in trench at least 30 inches (750 mm) deep in accordance with NFPA 70 or provide ground plates. 1. Outdoor Installations: Unless otherwise indicated, install with top of rod 6 inches below _ finished grade. 2. Indoor Installations: Unless otherwise indicated, install with 4 inches of top of rod exposed. D. Make grounding and bonding connections using specified connectors. 1. Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections without cutting, nicking or damaging conductors. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate insertion into connector. 2. Remove nonconductive paint, enamel, or similar coating at threads, contact points, and contact surfaces. 3. Exothermic Welds: Make connections using molds and weld material suitable for the items to be connected in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 4. Mechanical Connectors: Secure connections according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings. 5. Compression Connectors: Secure connections using manufacturer's recommended tools and dies. E. Identify grounding and bonding system components in accordance with Section 26 0553. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements. B. Perform ground electrode resistance tests under normally dry conditions. Precipitation within the previous 48 hours does not constitute normally dry conditions. C. Investigate and correct deficiencies where measured ground resistances do not comply with specified requirements. END OF SECTION — Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0526 - Page 4 of 4 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation SECTION 26 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Support and attachment requirements and components for equipment, conduit, cable, boxes, and other electrical work. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete equipment pads. B. Section 26 0533.13 - Conduit for Electrical Systems: Additional support and attachment requirements for conduits. C. Section 26 0536 - Cable Trays for Electrical Systems: Additional support and attachment requirements for cable tray. D. Section 26 0533.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems: Additional support and attachment requirements for boxes. E. Section 26 5100 - Interior Lighting: Additional support and attachment requirements for interior luminaires. F. Section 26 5600 - Exterior Lighting: Additional support and attachment requirements for exterior luminaires. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2015. B. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2016a. C. ASTM B633 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel; 2013. D. MFMA-4 - Metal Framing Standards Publication; 2004. E. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015. F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate sizes and arrangement of supports and bases with the actual equipment and components to be installed. 2. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide additional framing and materials required for installation. 3. Coordinate compatibility of support and attachment components with mounting surfaces at the installed locations. 4. Coordinate the arrangement of supports with ductwork, piping, equipment and other potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others. 5. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work. B. Sequencing: 1. Do not install products on or provide attachment to concrete surfaces until concrete has fully cured in accordance with Section 03 3000. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with NFPA 70. B. Comply with applicable building code. C. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0529 - Page 1 of 4 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SUPPORT AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS A. General Requirements: 1. Provide all required hangers, supports, anchors, fasteners, fittings, accessories, and hardware as necessary for the complete installation of electrical work. 2. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended, where applicable. 3. Where support and attachment component types and sizes are not indicated, select in accordance with manufacturer's application criteria as required for the load to be supported. Include consideration for vibration, equipment operation, and shock loads where applicable. 4. Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing. 5. Steel Components: Use corrosion resistant materials suitable for the environment where .— installed. a. Indoor Dry Locations: Use zinc-plated steel or approved equivalent unless otherwise indicated. b. Outdoor and Damp or Wet Indoor Locations: Use galvanized steel, stainless steel, or approved equivalent unless otherwise indicated. c. Zinc-Plated Steel: Electroplated in accordance with ASTM B633. d. Galvanized Steel: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M or ASTM A153/A153M. B. Conduit and Cable Supports: Straps, clamps, etc. suitable for the conduit or cable to be supported. 1. Conduit Straps: One-hole or two-hole type; steel or malleable iron. 2. Conduit Clamps: Bolted type unless otherwise indicated. C. Outlet Box Supports: Hangers, brackets, etc. suitable for the boxes to be supported. D. Metal Channel (Strut) Framing Systems: Factory-fabricated continuous-slot metal channel (strut) and associated fittings, accessories, and hardware required for field-assembly of supports. 1. Comply with MFMA-4. `— E. Hanger Rods: Threaded zinc-plated steel unless otherwise indicated. F. Anchors and Fasteners: 1. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the anchor and fastener types indicated for the specified applications. 2. Concrete: Use preset concrete inserts, expansion anchors, or screw anchors. 3. Solid or Grout-Filled Masonry: Use expansion anchors or screw anchors. 4. Hollow Masonry: Use toggle bolts. 5. Hollow Stud Walls: Use toggle bolts. 6. Steel: Use beam clamps, machine bolts, or welded threaded studs. 7. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws. 8. Wood: Use wood screws. 9. Plastic and lead anchors are not permitted. 10. Preset Concrete Inserts: Continuous metal channel (strut) and spot inserts specifically designed to be cast in concrete ceilings, walls, and floors. a. Comply with MFMA-4. b. Channel Material: Use galvanized steel. .— c. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of metal channel (strut) framing system. 11. Post-Installed Concrete and Masonry Anchors: Evaluated and recognized by ICC Evaluation Service, LLC (ICC-ES) for compliance with applicable building code. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive support and attachment components. B. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0529 - Page 2 of 4 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship). C. Install anchors and fasteners in accordance with ICC Evaluation Services, LLC (ICC-ES) evaluation report conditions of use where applicable. D. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or other systems. E. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Architect, do not provide support from suspended ceiling support system or ceiling grid. F. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Architect, do not provide support from roof deck. G. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members without approval of Structural Engineer. H. Equipment Support and Attachment: 1. Use metal fabricated supports or supports assembled from metal channel (strut) to support equipment as required. 2. Use metal channel (strut) secured to studs to support equipment surface-mounted on hollow stud walls when wall strength is not sufficient to resist pull-out. 3. Use metal channel (strut) to support surface-mounted equipment in wet or damp locations to provide space between equipment and mounting surface. 4. Unless otherwise indicated, mount floor-mounted equipment on properly sized 3 inch high -- concrete pad constructed in accordance with Section 03 3000. 5. Securely fasten floor-mounted equipment. Do not install equipment such that it relies on its own weight for support. I. Preset Concrete Inserts: Use manufacturer provided closure strips to inhibit concrete seepage during concrete pour. J. Secure fasteners according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings. K. Remove temporary supports. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements. B. Inspect support and attachment components for damage and defects. C. Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized finishes using zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. Replace components that exhibit signs of corrosion. D. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective support and attachment components. E. Install hangers and supports as required to adequately and securely support electrical system components, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1. 1. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, or conduit. 2. Obtain permission from Architect before drilling or cutting structural members. F. Rigidly weld support members or use hexagon-head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Use spring lock washers under all nuts. G. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. H. In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards 1 inch off wall. I. Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panelboards recessed in hollow partitions. END OF SECTION Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0529 - Page 3 of 4 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation SECTION 26 0533.13 CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC). B. Intermediate metal conduit (IMC). C. Flexible metal conduit (FMC). D. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit (LFMC). E. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT). F. Rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit. G. Conduit fittings. H. Accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping. B. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. 1. Includes additional requirements for fittings for grounding and bonding. C. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. D. Section 26 0533.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems. E. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. F. Section 26 2100 - Low-Voltage Electrical Service Entrance: Additional requirements for electrical service conduits. G. Section 27 1000 - Structured Cabling: Additional requirements for communications systems conduits. H. Section 31 2316 - Excavation. I. Section 31 2316.13 -Trenching: Excavating, bedding, and backfilling. J. Section 31 2323 - Fill: Bedding and backfilling. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI C80.1 -American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC); 2005. B. ANSI C80.3 -American National Standard for Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT); 2005. C. ANSI C80.5 -American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Aluminum Conduit (ERAC); 2005. D. ANSI C80.6 -American National Standard for Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit (EIMC); 2005. E. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015. F. NECA 101 - Standard for Installing Steel Conduits (Rigid, IMC, EMT); 2013. G. NECA 102 - Standard for Installing Aluminum Rigid Metal Conduit; 2004. H. NECA 111 - Standard for Installing Nonmetallic Raceways (RNC, ENT, LFNC); 2003. `- I. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing, and Cable; 2012. J. NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit; 2005. K. NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit; 2013. L. NEMA TC 3 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing; 2015. M. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0533.13 - Page 1 of 8 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation N. UL 1 - Flexible Metal Conduit; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. O. UL 6 - Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. P. UL 6A- Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Aluminum, Red Brass, and Stainless Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.Q. UL 360- Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. R. UL 514B - Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. S. UL 651 - Schedule 40, 80, Type EB and A Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. T. UL 797 - Electrical Metallic Tubing-Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. U. UL 1242 - Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit-Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate minimum sizes of conduits with the actual conductors to be installed, including adjustments for conductor sizes increased for voltage drop. 2. Coordinate the arrangement of conduits with structural members, ductwork, piping, equipment and other potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others. 3. Verify exact conduit termination locations required for boxes, enclosures, and equipment installed under other sections or by others. 4. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide roof penetrations that preserve the integrity of the roofing system and do not void the roof warranty. 5. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work. B. Sequencing: 1. Do not begin installation of conductors and cables until installation of conduit is complete between outlet, junction and splicing points. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements for submittals procedures. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual routing for conduits installed underground, conduits embedded within concrete slabs, and conduits 2 inch (53 mm) trade size and larger. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.B. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store conduit and fittings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUIT APPLICATIONS A. Do not use conduit and associated fittings for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing. B. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the conduit types indicated for the specified applications. Where more than one listed application applies, implies all applications are acceptable. Where conduit type for a particular application is not specified, use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit. C. Underground: 1. Under Slab on Grade: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or rigid PVC conduit. 2. Exterior, Direct-Buried: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or rigid PVC conduit. 3. Where rigid polyvinyl (PVC) conduit is provided, transition to galvanized steel rigid metal conduit where emerging from underground. Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0533.13 - Page 2 of 8 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation 4. Where rigid polyvinyl (PVC) conduit larger than 2 inch (53 mm) trade size is provided, use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit elbows for bends. 5. Where steel conduit is installed in direct contact with earth where soil has a resistivity of less than 2000 ohm-centimeters or is characterized as severely corrosive based on soils report or local experience, use corrosion protection tape to provide supplementary corrosion protection or use PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit. D. Embedded Within Concrete: 1. Within Slab on Grade: Not permitted. 2. Within Slab Above Ground: Not permitted. 3. Within Concrete Walls Above Ground: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit (IMC), PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, rigid PVC conduit, or reinforced thermosetting resin conduit (RTRC). 4. Where rigid polyvinyl (PVC) conduit is provided, transition to galvanized steel rigid metal conduit where emerging from concrete. E. Concealed Within Masonry Walls: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit (IMC), or electrical metallic tubing (EMT). F. Concealed Within Hollow Stud Walls: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit(IMC), or electrical metallic tubing (EMT). G. Concealed Above Accessible Ceilings: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit(IMC), or electrical metallic tubing (EMT). H. Interior, Damp or Wet Locations: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit (IMC), or aluminum rigid metal conduit. I. Exposed, Interior, Not Subject to Physical Damage: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit (IMC), or electrical metallic tubing (EMT). J. Exposed, Interior, Subject to Physical Damage: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or intermediate metal conduit (IMC). 1. Locations subject to physical damage include, but are not limited to: a. Where exposed below 12 feet, except within electrical and communication rooms or closets. b. Where exposed below 20 feet in warehouse areas. K. Exposed, Exterior: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit(IMC), or PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit. L. Concealed, Exterior, Not Embedded in Concrete or in Contact With Earth: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit (IMC). or Schedule 40 PVC. M. Corrosive Locations Above Ground: Use aluminum rigid metal conduit. N. Connections to Luminaires Above Accessible Ceilings: Use flexible metal conduit. 1. Maximum Length: 6 feet. O. Connections to Vibrating Equipment: 1. Dry Locations: Use flexible metal conduit. 2. Damp, Wet, or Corrosive Locations: Use liquidtight flexible metal conduit. 3. Maximum Length: 6 feet unless otherwise indicated. P. Fished in Existing Walls, Where Necessary: Use flexible metal conduit. 2.02 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS A. Existing Work: Where existing conduits are indicated to be reused, they may be reused only where they comply with specified requirements, are free from corrosion, and integrity is verified by pulling a mandrel through them. B. Electrical Service Conduits: Also comply with Section 26 2100. C. Communications Systems Conduits: Also comply with Section 27 1000. D. Fittings for Grounding and Bonding: Also comply with Section 26 0526. E. Provide all conduit, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway system. F. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. G. Minimum Conduit Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated: Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0533.13 - Page 3 of 8 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation 1. Branch Circuits: 3/4 inch (21 mm) trade size. 2. Branch Circuit Homeruns: 3/4 inch (21 mm) trade size. 3. Control Circuits: 3/4 inch (21 mm) trade size. 4. Flexible Connections to Luminaires: 1/2 inch (16 mm) trade size. 5. Underground, Interior: 1 inch (27 mm) trade size. 6. Underground, Exterior: 1 inch (27 mm) trade size. H. Where conduit size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable _. minimum size requirements specified. 2.03 GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC) A. Manufacturers: 1. Allied Tube & Conduit: www.alliedeg.com/#sle. 2. Republic Conduit: www.republic-conduit.com/#sle. 3. Wheatland Tube, a Division of Zekelman Industries: www.wheatland.com/#sle. B. Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC galvanized steel rigid metal conduit complying with ANSI C80.1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 6. C. Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: a. Bridgeport Fittings Inc: www.bptfittings.com/#sle. b. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Electric Co: www.emerson.com/#sle. c. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com/#sle. 2. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B. 3. Material: Use steel or malleable iron. 4. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only. Threadless set screw and compression (gland) type fittings are not permitted. 2.04 ALUMINUM RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC) A. Manufacturers: 1. Allied Tube & Conduit: www.alliedeg.com/#sle. 2. Republic Conduit: www.republic-conduit.com/#sle. 3. Wheatland Tube, a Division of Zekelman Industries: www.wheatland.com/#sle. B. Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC aluminum rigid metal conduit complying with ANSI C80.5 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 6A. C. Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: a. Bridgeport Fittings Inc: www.bptfittings.com/#sle. b. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Electric Co: www.emerson.com/#sle. --- c. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com/#sle. 2. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B. 3. Material: Use aluminum. 4. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only. Threadless set screw and compression (gland) type fittings are not permitted. 2.05 INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT (IMC) A. Manufacturers: 1. Allied Tube & Conduit: www.alliedeg.com/#sle. 2. Republic Conduit: www.republic-conduit.com/#sle. 3. Wheatland Tube, a Division of Zekelman Industries: www.wheatland.com/#sle. B. Description: NFPA 70, Type IMC galvanized steel intermediate metal conduit complying with ANSI C80.6 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 1242. C. Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: a. Bridgeport Fittings Inc: www.bptfittings.com/#sle. b. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Electric Co: www.emerson.com/#sle. Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0533.13 - Page 4 of 8 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation c. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com/#sle. 2. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B. 3. Material: Use steel or malleable iron. 4. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only. Threadless set screw and compression (gland) type fittings are not permitted. 2.06 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (FMC) A. Manufacturers: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc: www.afcweb.com/#sle. 2. Electri-Flex Company: www.electriflex.com/#sle. 3. International Metal Hose: www.metalhose.com/#sle. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Description: NFPA 70, Type FMC standard wall steel flexible metal conduit listed and labeled as complying with UL 1, and listed for use in classified firestop systems to be used. C. Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: a. Bridgeport Fittings Inc: www.bptfittings.com/#sle. b. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Electric Co: www.emerson.com/#sle. c. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com/#sle. 2. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B. 3. Material: Use steel or malleable iron. 2.07 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (LFMC) A. Manufacturers: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc: www.afcweb.com/#sle. 2. Electri-Flex Company: www.electriflex.com/#sle. 3. International Metal Hose: www.metalhose.com/#sle. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Description: NFPA 70, Type LFMC polyvinyl chloride (PVC)jacketed steel flexible metal conduit listed and labeled as complying with UL 360. C. Fittings: 1. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B. 2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron. - 2.08 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) A. Manufacturers: 1. Allied Tube & Conduit: www.alliedeg.com/#sle. 2. Wheatland Tube, a Division of Zekelman Industries: www.wheatland.com/#sle. B. Description: NFPA 70, Type EMT steel electrical metallic tubing complying with ANSI C80.3 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 797. C. Fittings: 1. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B. 2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron. 3. Connectors and Couplings: Use compression (gland) or set-screw type. a. Do not use indenter type connectors and couplings. 2.09 RIGID POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) CONDUIT A. Description: NFPA 70, Type PVC rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit complying with NEMA TC 2 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 651; Schedule 40 unless otherwise indicated. Schedule 80 where subject to physical damage; rated for use with conductors rated 90 degrees C. B. Fittings: r 1. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of conduit to be connected. Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0533.13 - Page 5 of 8 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation 2. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA TC 3 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 651; material to match conduit. 2.10 ACCESSORIES A. Corrosion Protection Tape: PVC-based, minimum thickness of 20 mil.B. Conduit Joint Compound: Corrosion-resistant, electrically conductive; suitable for use with the conduit to be installed. C. Solvent Cement for PVC Conduit and Fittings: As recommended by manufacturer of conduit and fittings to be installed. D. Pull Strings: Use nylon cord with average breaking strength of not less than 200 pound-force. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. _ B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive conduits. C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship). C. Install galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) in accordance with NECA 101. D. Install aluminum rigid metal conduit (RMC) in accordance with NECA 102. E. Install intermediate metal conduit (IMC) in accordance with NECA 101. F. Install PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) using only tools approved by the manufacturer. G. ►nstall rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit in accordance with NECA 111.H. Conduit Routing: 1. Unless dimensioned, conduit routing indicated is diagrammatic. 2. When conduit destination is indicated without specific routing, determine exact routing — required. 3. Conceal all conduits unless specifically indicated to be exposed. 4. Conduits in the following areas may be exposed, unless otherwise indicated: a. Electrical rooms. b. Mechanical equipment rooms. c. Within joists in areas with no ceiling. 5. Unless otherwise approved, do not route conduits exposed: a. Across floors. b. Across roofs. c. Across top of parapet walls. d. Across building exterior surfaces. 6. Conduits installed underground or embedded in concrete may be routed in the shortest possible manner unless otherwise indicated. Route all other conduits parallel or perpendicular to building structure and surfaces, following surface contours where — practical. 7. Arrange conduit to maintain adequate headroom, clearances, and access. 8. Arrange conduit to provide no more than the equivalent of four 90 degree bends between pull points. 9. Route conduits above water and drain piping where possible. 10. Arrange conduit to prevent moisture traps. Provide drain fittings at low points and at sealing fittings where moisture may collect. 11. Maintain minimum clearance of 6 inches between conduits and piping for other systems. 12. Maintain minimum clearance of 12 inches between conduits and hot surfaces. This includes, but is not limited to: a. Heaters. b. Hot water piping. Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0533.13 - Page 6 of 8 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation c. Flues. 13. Group parallel conduits in the same area together on a common rack. I. Conduit Support: 1. Secure and support conduits in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 26 0529 using suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction. 2. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or other systems. 3. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling support system. Do not provide support from ceiling grid or allow conduits to lay on ceiling tiles. 4. Use conduit strap to support single surface-mounted conduit. a. Use clamp back spacer with conduit strap for damp and wet locations to provide space between conduit and mounting surface. 5. Use metal channel (strut) with accessory conduit clamps to support multiple parallel surface-mounted conduits. 6. Use conduit clamp to support single conduit from beam clamp or threaded rod. 7. Use trapeze hangers assembled from threaded rods and metal channel (strut)with accessory conduit clamps to support multiple parallel suspended conduits. 8. Use of wire for support of conduits is not permitted. J. Connections and Terminations: 1. Use approved zinc-rich paint or conduit joint compound on field-cut threads of galvanized steel conduits prior to making connections. 2. Where two threaded conduits must be joined and neither can be rotated, use three-piece couplings or split couplings. Do not use running threads. 3. Use suitable adapters where required to transition from one type of conduit to another. 4. Provide drip loops for liquidtight flexible conduit connections to prevent drainage of liquid into connectors. 5. Terminate threaded conduits in boxes and enclosures using threaded hubs or double lock nuts for dry locations and raintight hubs for wet locations. 6. Provide insulating bushings or insulated throats at all conduit terminations to protect conductors. 7. Secure joints and connections to provide maximum mechanical strength and electrical continuity. K. Penetrations: 1. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members, including footings and grade beams, without approval of Structural Engineer. 2. Make penetrations perpendicular to surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 3. Provide sleeves for penetrations as indicated or as required to facilitate installation. Set sleeves flush with exposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated or required. 4. Conceal bends for conduit risers emerging above ground. 5. Seal interior of conduits entering the building from underground at first accessible point to prevent entry of moisture and gases. 6. Where conduits penetrate waterproof membrane, seal as required to maintain integrity of _ membrane. 7. Make penetrations for roof-mounted equipment within associated equipment openings and curbs where possible to minimize roofing system penetrations. Where penetrations are necessary, seal as indicated or as required to preserve integrity of roofing system and maintain roof warranty. Include proposed locations of penetrations and methods for sealing with submittals. 8. Provide metal escutcheon plates for conduit penetrations exposed to public view. 9. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Section 07 8400. L. Underground Installation: 1. Minimum Cover, Unless Otherwise Indicated or Required: a. Underground, Exterior: 24 inches. b. Under Slab on Grade: 12 inches to bottom of slab. 2. Provide underground warning tape in accordance with Section 26 0553 along entire conduit length for service entrance where not concrete-encased. Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0533.13 - Page 7 of 8 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation M. Telecommunications Conduit: 1. Provide 3/4" empty conduit with proper mud ring or box stubbed up into corridor ceiling space for all voice, data, and television locations. N. Conduit Movement Provisions: Where conduits are subject to movement, provide expansion and expansion/deflection fittings to prevent damage to enclosed conductors or connected equipment. This includes, but is not limited to: 1. Where conduits cross structural joints intended for expansion, contraction, or deflection. 2. Where calculated in accordance with NFPA 70 for rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit installed above ground to compensate for thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Where conduits are subject to earth movement by settlement or frost. O. Condensation Prevention: Where conduits cross barriers between areas of potential substantial temperature differential, provide sealing fitting or approved sealing compound at an accessible point near the penetration to prevent condensation. This includes, but is not limited to: 1. Where conduits pass from outdoors into conditioned interior spaces. .... 2. Where conduits pass from unconditioned interior spaces into conditioned interior spaces. 3. Where conduits penetrate coolers or freezers. P. Provide pull string in all empty conduits and in conduits where conductors and cables are to be installed by others. Leave minimum slack of 12 inches at each end. Q. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements. B. Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized finishes using zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. Replace components that exhibit signs of corrosion. C. Where coating of PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) contains cuts or abrasions, repair in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conduits. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean interior of conduits to remove moisture and foreign matter. _ 3.05 PROTECTION A. Immediately after installation of conduit, use suitable manufactured plugs to provide protection from entry of moisture and foreign material and do not remove until ready for installation of _ conductors. END OF SECTION Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0533.13 - Page 8 of 8 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation SECTION 26 0533.16 BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Outlet and device boxes up to 100 cubic inches, including those used as junction and pull boxes. B. Cabinets and enclosures, including junction and pull boxes larger than 100 cubic inches. C. Boxes and enclosures for integrated power, data, and audio/video. D. Floor boxes. E. Underground boxes/enclosures. F. Accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. B. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping. C. Section 08 3100 -Access Doors and Panels: Panels for maintaining access to concealed boxes. D. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. E. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. F. Section 26 0533.13 -Conduit for Electrical Systems: 1. Conduit bodies and other fittings. 2. Additional requirements for locating boxes to limit conduit length and/or number of bends between pulling points. G. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. H. Section 26 2726 -Wiring Devices: 1. Wall plates. 2. Floor box service fittings. 3. Poke-through assemblies. 4. Access floor boxes. 5. Additional requirements for locating boxes for wiring devices. I. Section 27 1000 - Structured Cabling: Additional requirements for communications systems outlet boxes. J. Section 33 7119 - Electrical Underground Ducts, Ductbanks, and Manholes: Concrete manholes for electrical systems. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015. B. NECA 130 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Wiring Devices; 2010. C. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing, and Cable; 2012. D. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports; 2013. E. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2018. F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. G. SCTE 77 - Specification for Underground Enclosure Integrity; 2013. H. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. I. UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0533.16 - Page 1 of 6 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation J. UL 508A- Industrial Control Panels; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. K. UL 514A- Metallic Outlet Boxes; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork, piping, equipment, or other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and working clearances for electrical equipment required by NFPA 70. 2. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance requirements of the actual equipment to be installed. 3. Coordinate minimum sizes of boxes with the actual installed arrangement of conductors, clamps, support fittings, and devices, calculated according to NFPA 70. 4. Coordinate minimum sizes of pull boxes with the actual installed arrangement of connected conduits, calculated according to NFPA 70. 5. Coordinate the placement of boxes with millwork, furniture, devices, equipment, etc. installed under other sections or by others. 6. Coordinate the work with other trades to preserve insulation integrity. 7. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide walls suitable for installation of flush-mounted boxes where indicated. 8. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70. B. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Products: Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 BOXES A. General Requirements: 1. Do not use boxes and associated accessories for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing. 2. Provide all boxes, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway system and to accommodate devices and equipment to be installed. 3. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. 4. Where box size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum size requirements specified. 5. Provide grounding terminals within boxes where equipment grounding conductors terminate. B. Outlet and Device Boxes Up to 100 cubic inches, Including Those Used as Junction and Pull Boxes: 1. Use sheet-steel boxes for dry locations unless otherwise indicated or required. 2. Use cast iron boxes or cast aluminum boxes for damp or wet locations unless otherwise indicated or required; furnish with compatible weatherproof gasketed covers. 3. Use suitable concrete type boxes where flush-mounted in concrete. 4. Use suitable masonry type boxes where flush-mounted in masonry walls. 5. Use raised covers suitable for the type of wall construction and device configuration where required. 6. Use shallow boxes where required by the type of wall construction. 7. Do not use "through-wall" boxes designed for access from both sides of wall. Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0533.16 - Page 2 of 6 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation 8. Sheet-Steel Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1, and list and label as complying with UL 514A. -- 9. Cast Metal Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, and list and label as complying with UL 514A; furnish with threaded hubs. 10. Boxes for Supporting Luminaires and Ceiling Fans: Listed as suitable for the type and weight of load to be supported; furnished with fixture stud to accommodate mounting of luminaire where required. 11. Boxes for Ganged Devices: Use multigang boxes of single-piece construction. Do not use field-connected gangable boxes unless specifically indicated or permitted. 12. Minimum Box Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated: a. Wiring Devices (Other Than Communications Systems Outlets): 4 inch square by 1-1/2 inch deep (100 by 38 mm) trade size. b. Ceiling Outlets: 4 inch octagonal or square by 1-1/2 inch deep (100 by 38 mm) trade size. 13. Wall Plates: Comply with Section 26 2726. 14. Manufacturers: a. Cooper Crouse-Hinds, a division of Eaton Corporation: www.cooperindustries.com/#sle. b. Hubbell Incorporated; Bell Products: www.hubbell-rtb.com/#sle. c. Hubbell Incorporated; RACO Products: www.hubbell-rtb.com/#sle. d. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com/#sle. C. Cabinets and Enclosures, Including Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches: 1. Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E, or UL 508A. 2. NEMA 250 Environment Type, Unless Otherwise Indicated: a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Type 1, painted steel. b. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R, painted steel. 3. Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches: a. Provide screw-cover or hinged-cover enclosures unless otherwise indicated. 4. Cabinets and Hinged-Cover Enclosures, Other Than Junction and Pull Boxes: a. Provide lockable hinged covers, all locks keyed alike unless otherwise indicated. b. Back Panels: Painted steel, removable. c. Terminal Blocks: Provide voltage/current ratings and terminal quantity suitable for purpose indicated, with 25 percent spare terminal capacity. 5. Finish for Painted Steel Enclosures: Manufacturer's standard grey unless otherwise indicated. D. Boxes and Enclosures for Integrated Power, Data, and Audio/Video: Size and configuration as indicated or as required with partitions to separate services; field-connected gangable boxes may be used. E. Floor Boxes: 1. Description: Floor boxes compatible with floor box service fittings provided in accordance with Section 26 2726; with partitions to separate multiple services; furnished with all components, adapters, and trims required for complete installation. 2, Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of floor box service fittings. F. Underground Boxes/Enclosures: 1. Description: In-ground, open bottom boxes furnished with flush, non-skid covers with legend indicating type of service and stainless steel tamper resistant cover bolts. 2. Size: As indicated on drawings. 3. Depth: As required to extend below frost line to prevent frost upheaval, but not less than 12 inches. 4. Provide logo on cover to indicate type of service. 5. Applications: a. Sidewalks and Landscaped Areas Subject Only to Occasional Nondeliberate Vehicular Traffic: Use polymer concrete enclosures, with minimum SCTE 77, Tier 8 load rating. b. Do not use polymer concrete enclosures in areas subject to deliberate vehicular traffic. Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0533.16 - Page 3 of 6 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation 6. Polymer Concrete Underground Boxes/Enclosures: Comply with SCTE 77. .... a. Manufacturers: 1) Hubbell Incorporated; Quazite Products: www.hubbellpowersystems.com/#sle. 2) Oldcastle Precast, Inc: www.oldcastleprecast.com/#sle. b. Combination fiberglass/polymer concrete boxes/enclosures are acceptable. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive boxes. C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. D. Verify locations of floor boxes and outlets in offices and work areas prior to rough-in. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install boxes in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship) and, where applicable, NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards where mounting heights are not _ indicated. C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NFPA 70. D. Provide separate boxes for emergency power and normal power systems. E. Unless otherwise indicated, provide separate boxes for line voltage and low voltage systems. F. Flush-mount boxes in finished areas unless specifically indicated to be surface-mounted. G. Unless otherwise indicated, boxes may be surface-mounted where exposed conduits are indicated or permitted. H. Box Locations: 1. Locate boxes to be accessible. Provide access panels in accordance with Section 08 3100 as required where approved by the Architect. 2. Unless dimensioned, box locations indicated are approximate. _ 3. Locate boxes as required for devices installed under other sections or by others. a. Switches, Receptacles, and Other Wiring Devices: Comply with Section 26 2726. b. Communications Systems Outlets: Comply with Section 27 1000. 4. Locate boxes so that wall plates do not span different building finishes. 5. Locate boxes so that wall plates do not cross masonry joints. 6. Unless otherwise indicated, where multiple outlet boxes are installed at the same location at different mounting heights, install along a common vertical center line. _ 7. Do not install flush-mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls back-to-back. Provide minimum 6 inches horizontal separation unless otherwise indicated. 8. Acoustic-Rated Walls: Do not install flush-mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls back-to-back; provide minimum 24 inches horizontal separation. 9. Fire Resistance Rated Walls: Install flush-mounted boxes such that the required fire resistance will not be reduced. a. Do not install flush-mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls back-to-back; provide minimum 24 inches separation where wall is constructed with individual noncommunicating stud cavities or protect both boxes with listed putty pads. b. Do not install flush-mounted boxes with area larger than 16 square inches or such that the total aggregate area of openings exceeds 100 square inches for any 100 '— square feet of wall area. I. Box Supports: 1. Secure and support boxes in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 26 0529 using suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction. 2. Provide independent support from building structure except for cast metal boxes (other than boxes used for fixture support) supported by threaded conduit connections in accordance with NFPA 70. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or other systems. Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0533.16 - Page 4 of 6 _ Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation 3. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling grid or ceiling support system. J. Install boxes plumb and level. K. Flush-Mounted Boxes: 1. Install boxes in noncombustible materials such as concrete, tile, gypsum, plaster, etc. so -- that front edge of box or associated raised cover is not set back from finished surface more than 1/4 inch or does not project beyond finished surface. 2. Install boxes in combustible materials such as wood so that front edge of box or associated raised cover is flush with finished surface. 3. Repair rough openings around boxes in noncombustible materials such as concrete, tile, gypsum, plaster, etc. so that there are no gaps or open spaces greater than 1/8 inch at the edge of the box. L. Floor-Mounted Cabinets: Mount on properly sized 4 inch high concrete pad constructed in accordance with Section 03 3000. M. Install boxes as required to preserve insulation integrity. N. Metallic Floor Boxes: Install box level at the proper elevation to be flush with finished floor. O. Underground Boxes/Enclosures: 1. Install enclosure on gravel base, minimum 6 inches deep. 2. Flush-mount enclosures located in concrete or paved areas. 3. Mount enclosures located in landscaped areas with top at 1 inch above finished grade. 4. Provide cast-in-place concrete collar constructed in accordance with Section 03 3000, minimum 10 inches wide by 12 inches deep, around enclosures that are not located in concrete areas. 5. Install additional bracing inside enclosures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to minimize box sidewall deflections during backfilling. Backfill with cover bolted in place. P. Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacent devices exceeds 300 V. _ Q. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Section 07 8400. R. Close unused box openings. S. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no devices or equipment installed or designated for future use. T. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526. U. Identify boxes in accordance with Section 26 0553. V. Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices. 3.03 CLEANING A. Clean interior of boxes to remove dirt, debris, plaster and other foreign material. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Immediately after installation, protect boxes from entry of moisture and foreign material until ready for installation of conductors. END OF SECTION Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0533.16 - Page 5 of 6 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation SECTION 26 0533.23 SURFACE RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface raceway systems. B. Surface metal raceways. C. Wireways. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. B. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. C. Section 26 0533.13 - Conduit for Electrical Systems. D. Section 26 0533.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems. E. Section 26 2726 -Wiring Devices: Receptacles. F. Section 27 1000 - Structured Cabling: Voice and data jacks. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015. B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. C. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2018. D. UL 5 - Surface Metal Raceways and Fittings; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. E. UL 870 -Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters, and Associated Fittings; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate the placement of raceways with millwork, furniture, equipment, etc. installed under other sections or by others. 2. Coordinate rough-in locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 0533.16 and conduit provided under Section 26 0533.13 as required for installation of raceways provided under this section. 3. Verify minimum sizes of raceways with the actual conductors and components to be installed. 4. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work. -- B. Sequencing: 1. Do not install raceways until final surface finishes and painting are complete. 2. Do not begin installation of conductors and cables until installation of raceways is complete between outlet, junction and splicing points. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. -- B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets including dimensions, knockout sizes and locations, materials, fabrication details, finishes, service condition requirements, and accessories. 1. Surface Raceway Systems: Include information on fill capacities for conductors and cables. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Receive; inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0533.23 - Page 1 of 4 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this — Section with minimum three years documented experience. C. Products: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. ._ PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 RACEWAY REQUIREMENTS A. Provide all components, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway system. B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. C. Do not use raceways for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing. 2.02 SURFACE RACEWAY SYSTEMS A. Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell.com/#sle. 2. Wiremold, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us/#sle. B. Surface Metal Raceways: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 5. 2.03 WIREWAYS A. Manufacturers: 1. Cooper B-Line, a division of Cooper Industries: www.cooperindustries.com/#sle. 2. Hoffman, a brand of Pentair Technical Products: www.hoffmanonline.com/#sle. 3. Schneider Electric; Square D Products: www.schneider-electric.us/#sle. B. Description: Lay-in wireways and wiring troughs with removable covers; listed and labeled as complying with UL 870. C. Wireway Type, Unless Otherwise Indicated: 1. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1, painted steel with screw-cover. D. Finish for Painted Steel Wireways: Manufacturer's standard grey unless otherwise indicated. E. Where wireway size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum size requirements specified. — PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. B. Verify that outlet boxes and conduit terminations are installed in proper locations and are properly sized in accordance with NFPA 70 to accommodate raceways. C. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive raceways and that final surface finishes are complete, including painting. D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship). , C. Install raceways plumb and level. D. Arrange wireways and associated raceway connections to comply with NFPA 70, including but not limited to requirements for deflected conductors and wireways used as pullboxes. Increase -- size of wireway where necessary. E. Secure and support raceways in accordance with Section 26 0529 at intervals complying with NFPA 70 and manufacturer's requirements. F. Use suitable insulating bushings and inserts at connections to outlets and corner fittings. G. Close unused raceway openings. H. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526. '! Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0533.23 - Page 2 of 4 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements. B. Inspect raceways for damage and defects. C. Surface Raceway Systems with Integrated Devices: Test each wiring device to verify operation and proper polarity. D. Correct wiring deficiencies and replace damaged or defective raceways. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to match original factory finish. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect installed raceways from subsequent construction operations. B. Ground and bond raceway and wireway under provisions of Section 26 0526. END OF SECTION Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0533.23 - Page 3 of 4 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation SECTION 26 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Electrical identification requirements. B. Identification nameplates and labels. C. Wire and cable markers. D. Underground warning tape. E. Warning signs and labels. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 09 9113 - Exterior Painting. B. Section 09 9123 - Interior Painting. C. Section 26 0519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Color coding for power conductors and cables 600 V and less; vinyl color coding electrical tape. D. Section 26 2726 -Wiring Devices - Lutron: Device and wallplate finishes; factory pre-marked wallplates. E. Section 27 1000 - Structured Cabling: Identification for communications cabling and devices. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI Z535.2 -American National Standard for Environmental and Facility Safety Signs; 2011. B. ANSI Z535.4 -American National Standard for Product Safety Signs and Labels; 2011. C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. D. UL 969 - Marking and Labeling Systems; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 IDENTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS A. Existing Work: Unless specifically excluded, identify existing elements to remain that are not already identified in accordance with specified requirements. B. Identification for Equipment: 1. Use identification nameplate to identify each piece of electrical distribution and control equipment and associated sections, compartments, and components. a. Switchboards: 1) Identify ampere rating. 2) Identify voltage and phase. 3) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location when not within sight of equipment. 4) Use identification nameplate to identify main overcurrent protective device. 5) Use identification nameplate to identify load(s) served for each branch device. Do not identify spares and spaces. b. Panelboards: 1) Identify ampere rating. 2) Identify voltage and phase. 3) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location when not within sight of equipment. 4) Identify main overcurrent protective device. Use identification label for panelboards with a door. For power distribution panelboards without a door, use identification nameplate. 5) Use typewritten circuit directory to identify load(s) served for panelboards with a door. Identify spares and spaces using pencil. Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0553 - Page 1 of 6 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation 6) For power panelboards without a door, use identification nameplate to identify — load(s) served for each branch device. Identify spares and spaces. c. Transformers: 1) Identify kVA rating. 2) Identify voltage and phase for primary and secondary. 3) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location when not within sight of equipment. 4) Identify load(s) served. Include location when not within sight of equipment. d. Enclosed switches, circuit breakers, and motor controllers: 1) Identify voltage power source and circuit number. Include location when not within sight of equipment. 2) Identify load(s) served. Include location. 2. Service Equipment: a. Use identification nameplate to identify each service disconnecting means. b. For buildings or structures supplied by more than one service, or any combination of branch circuits, feeders, and services, use identification nameplate or means of identification acceptable to authority having jurisdiction at each service disconnecting means to identify all other services, feeders, and branch circuits supplying that building or structure. Verify format and descriptions with authority having jurisdiction. 3. Emergency System Equipment: a. Use identification nameplate or voltage marker to identify emergency system equipment in accordance with NFPA 70. b. Use identification nameplate at each piece of service equipment to identify type and location of on-site emergency power sources. 4. Use identification nameplate to identify equipment utilizing series ratings, where permitted, in accordance with NFPA 70. 5. Use identification label or handwritten text using indelible marker on inside of door at each fused switch to identify required NEMA fuse class and size. 6. Use identification label to identify overcurrent protective devices for branch circuits serving — fire alarm circuits. Identify with text"FIRE ALARM CIRCUIT". 7. Available Fault Current Documentation: Use identification label to identify the available fault current and date calculations were performed at locations requiring documentation by NFPA 70, including but not limited to the following. a. Service equipment. b. Industrial control panels. c. Motor control centers. d. Elevator control panels. e. Industrial machinery. 8. Use warning signs to identify electrical hazards for entrances to all rooms and other guarded locations that contain exposed live parts operating at 600 V nominal or less with the word message "DANGER; Electrical hazard; Authorized personnel only" or approved equivalent. C. Identification for Conductors and Cables: 1. Color Coding for Power Conductors 600 V and Less: Comply with Section 26 0519. 2. Use identification nameplate or identification label to identify color code for ungrounded and grounded power conductors inside door or enclosure at each piece of feeder or branch-circuit distribution equipment when premises has feeders or branch circuits served by more than one nominal voltage system. D. Identification for Raceways: 1. Use voltage markers or color-coded bands to identify systems other than normal power system for accessible conduits at maximum intervals of 20 feet. a. Color-Coded Bands: Use field-painting or vinyl color coding electrical tape to mark bands 3 inches wide. 1) Color Code: (a) Emergency Power System: Red. (b) Fire Alarm System: Red. 2) Field-Painting: Comply with Section 09 9123 and 09 9113. Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0553 - Page 2 of 6 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation 3) Vinyl Color Coding Electrical Tape: Comply with Section 26 0519. E. Identification for Boxes: 1. Use voltage markers or color coded boxes to identify systems other than normal power system. a. Color-Coded Boxes: Field-painted in accordance with Section 09 9123 and 09 9113 per the same color code used for raceways. F. Identification for Devices: 1. Identification for Communications Devices: Comply with Section 27 1000. 2. Wiring Device and Wallplate Finishes: Comply with Section 26 2726. 3. Use identification label to identify fire alarm system devices. 4. Use identification label or engraved wallplate to identify serving branch circuit for all receptacles. a. For receptacles in public areas, provide identification on inside surface of wallplate. 5. Use identification label to identify receptacles protected by upstream GFI protection, where permitted. G. Identification for Luminaires: 1. Use permanent red dot on luminaire frame to identify luminaires connected to emergency power system. — 2.02 IDENTIFICATION NAMEPLATES AND LABELS A. Identification Nameplates: 1. Materials: a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Use plastic nameplates. b. Outdoor Locations: Use plastic, stainless steel, or aluminum nameplates suitable for exterior use. 2. Plastic Nameplates: Two-layer or three-layer laminated acrylic or electrically non-conductive phenolic with beveled edges; minimum thickness of 1/16 inch; engraved text. 3. Stainless Steel Nameplates: Minimum thickness of 1/32 inch; engraved or laser-etched text. 4. Aluminum Nameplates: Anodized; minimum thickness of 1/32 inch; engraved or laser-etched text. 5. Mounting Holes for Mechanical Fasteners: Two, centered on sides for sizes up to 1 inch high; Four, located at corners for larger sizes. B. Identification Labels: 1. Materials: Use self-adhesive laminated plastic labels; UV, chemical, water, heat, and abrasion resistant. 2. Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed text. Do not use handwritten text unless otherwise indicated. C. Format for Equipment Identification: 1. Minimum Size: 1 inch by 2.5 inches. 2. Legend: _ a. Equipment designation or other approved description. 3. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated. 4. Minimum Text Height: a. Equipment Designation: 1/2 inch. 5. Color: a. Normal Power System: White text on black background. b. Emergency Power System: White text on red background. c. Fire Alarm System: White text on red background. 2.03 WIRE AND CABLE MARKERS A. Markers for Conductors and Cables: Use wrap-around self-adhesive vinyl cloth, wrap-around self-adhesive vinyl self-laminating, heat-shrink sleeve, plastic sleeve, plastic clip-on, or vinyl split sleeve type markers suitable for the conductor or cable to be identified. B. Markers for Conductor and Cable Bundles: Use plastic marker tags secured by nylon cable ties. Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0553 - Page 3 of 6 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation C. Legend: Power source and circuit number or other designation indicated. -� D. Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed text, all capitalized unless otherwise indicated. E. Minimum Text Height: 1/8 inch. F. Color: Black text on white background unless otherwise indicated. 2.04 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE A. Materials: Use non-detectable type polyethylene tape suitable for direct burial, unless otherwise indicated. B. Non-detectable Type Tape: 6 inches wide, with minimum thickness of 4 mil. C. Legend: Type of service, continuously repeated over full length of tape. D. Color: 1. Tape for Buried Power Lines: Black text on red background. 2.05 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS A. Comply with ANSI Z535.2 or ANSI Z535.4 as applicable. B. Warning Signs: 1. Materials: a. Indoor Dry, Clean Locations: Use factory pre-printed rigid plastic or self-adhesive vinyl signs. 2. Rigid Signs: Provide four mounting holes at corners for mechanical fasteners. 3. Minimum Size: 7 by 10 inches unless otherwise indicated. C. Warning Labels: 1. Materials: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed self-adhesive polyester or self-adhesive vinyl labels; UV, chemical, water, heat, and abrasion resistant; produced using materials recognized to UL 969. 2. Machine-Printed Labels: Use thermal transfer process printing machines and accessories recommended by label manufacturer. 3. Minimum Size: 2 by 4 inches unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces to receive adhesive products according to manufacturer's instructions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install identification products to be plainly visible for examination, adjustment, servicing, and maintenance. Unless otherwise indicated, locate products as follows: 1. Surface-Mounted Equipment: Enclosure front. 2. Flush-Mounted Equipment: Inside of equipment door. 3. Free-Standing Equipment: Enclosure front; also enclosure rear for equipment with rear access. 4. Elevated Equipment: Legible from the floor or working platform. 5. Branch Devices: Adjacent to device. 6. Interior Components: Legible from the point of access. 7. Conduits: Legible from the floor. 8. Boxes: Outside face of cover. 9. Conductors and Cables: Legible from the point of access. 10. Devices: Outside face of cover. C. Install identification products centered, level, and parallel with lines of item being identified. D. Secure nameplates to exterior surfaces of enclosures using stainless steel screws and to interior surfaces using self-adhesive backing or epoxy cement. E. Install self-adhesive labels and markers to achieve maximum adhesion; with no bubbles or wrinkles and edges properly sealed. Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0553 - Page 4 of 6 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation F. Install underground warning tape above buried lines with one tape per trench at 3 inches below finished grade. G. Secure rigid signs using stainless steel screws. H. Mark all handwritten text, where permitted, to be neat and legible. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Replace self-adhesive labels and markers that exhibit bubbles, wrinkles, curling or other signs of improper adhesion. END OF SECTION Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0553 - Page 5 of 6 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation SECTION 26 0583 WIRING CONNECTIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Electrical connections to equipment. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 0519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables. B. Section 26 0533.13 - Conduit for Electrical Systems. C. Section 26 0533.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems. D. Section 26 2726 -Wiring Devices. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NEMA WD 1 - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2015). B. NEMA WD 6 -Wiring Devices - Dimensional Specifications; 2016. C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70. _ B. Products: Listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. C. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Cords and Caps: NEMA WD 6; match receptacle configuration at outlet provided for equipment. 1. Colors: Comply with NEMA WD 1. 2. Cord Construction: NFPA 70, Type SO, multiconductor flexible cord with identified equipment grounding conductor, suitable for use in damp locations. 3. Size: Suitable for connected load of equipment, length of cord, and rating of branch circuit overcurrent protection. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. B. Wiring Devices: As specified in Section 26 2726. C. Flexible Conduit: As specified in Section 26 0533.13. D. Wire and Cable: As specified in Section 26 0519. E. Boxes: As specified in Section 26 0533.16. 2.02 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION -- A. Verify that equipment is ready for electrical connection, wiring, and energization. 3.02 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS A. Make electrical connections in accordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions. B. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquidtight flexible conduit with watertight connectors in damp or wet locations. C. Connect heat producing equipment using wire and cable with insulation suitable for temperatures encountered. D. Provide receptacle outlet to accommodate connection with attachment plug. E. Provide cord and cap where field-supplied attachment plug is required. Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0583 - Page 1 of 2 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation F. Install suitable strain-relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes and equipment connection boxes. G. Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices to complete equipment wiring requirements. H. Install terminal block jumpers to complete equipment wiring requirements. I. Install interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment to complete equipment wiring requirements. J. Coolers and Freezers: Cut and seal conduit openings in freezer and cooler walls, floor, and ceilings. END OF SECTION Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0583 - Page 2 of 2 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation SECTION 26 0923 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Occupancy sensors. B. Outdoor photo controls. C. Daylighting controls. D. Accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. B. Section 26 0533.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems. C. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. D. Section 26 2726 -Wiring Devices: Devices for manual control of lighting, including wall switches and wall dimmers. 1. Includes finish requirements for wall controls specified in this section. 2. Includes accessory receptacles, switches, dimmers and wall plates, to match lighting controls specified in this section. E. Section 26 5100 - Interior Lighting. F. Section 26 5600 - Exterior Lighting. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI C136.10 -American National Standard for Roadway and Area Lighting Equipment- Locking-Type Photocontrol Devices and Mating Receptacles- Physical and Electrical Interchangeability and Testing; 2010. B. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015. C. NECA 130 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Wiring Devices; 2010. D. NEMA 410 - Performance Testing for Lighting Controls and Switching Devices with Electronic -- Drivers and Discharge Ballasts; 2016. E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. F. UL 773A- Nonindustrial Photoelectric Switches for Lighting Control; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. G. UL 1472 - Solid-State Dimming Controls; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate the placement of lighting control devices with millwork, furniture, equipment, etc. installed under other sections or by others. 2. Coordinate the placement of wall switch occupancy sensors with actual installed door swings. 3. Coordinate the placement of occupancy sensors with millwork, furniture, equipment or other potential obstructions to motion detection coverage installed under other sections or by others. 4. Coordinate the placement of photo sensors for daylighting controls with windows, skylights, and luminaires to achieve optimum operation. Coordinate placement with ductwork, piping, equipment, or other potential obstructions to light level measurement installed under other sections or by others. 5. Notify Architect of any conflicts or deviations from Contract Documents to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work. B. Sequencing: 1. Do not install lighting control devices until final surface finishes and painting are complete. Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0923 - Page 1 of 8 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation 1.05 SUBMITTALS ._ A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Include ratings, configurations, standard wiring diagrams, dimensions, colors, service condition requirements, and installed features. 1. Occupancy Sensors: Include detailed motion detection coverage range diagrams. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include detailed information on device programming and setup. E. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations and settings for lighting control devices. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. —' C. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. ._ 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Store products in a clean, dry space in original manufacturer's packaging in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions until ready for installation. -- 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain field conditions within manufacturer's required service conditions during and after installation. —' PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. B. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, wiring, connectors, hardware, components, accessories, etc. as required for a complete operating system. 2.02 OCCUPANCY SENSORS A. All Occupancy Sensors: 1. Description: Factory-assembled commercial specification grade devices for indoor use capable of sensing both major motion, such as walking, and minor motion, such as small desktop level movements, according to published coverage areas, for automatic control of load indicated. 2. Sensor Technology: a. Passive Infrared (PIR) Occupancy Sensors: Designed to detect occupancy by sensing movement of thermal energy between zones. b. Ultrasonic Occupancy Sensors: Designed to detect occupancy by sensing frequency -- shifts in emitted and reflected inaudible sound waves. c. Passive Infrared/Ultrasonic Dual Technology Occupancy Sensors: Designed to detect occupancy using a combination of both passive infrared and ultrasonic _ technologies. 3. Provide LED to visually indicate motion detection with separate color LEDs for each sensor type in dual technology units. 4. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, occupancy sensor to turn load on when occupant presence is detected and to turn load off when no occupant presence is detected during an adjustable turn-off delay time interval. 5. Dual Technology Occupancy Sensors: Field configurable turn-on and hold-on activation _ with settings for activation by either or both sensing technologies. 6. Turn-Off Delay: Field adjustable, with time delay settings up to 30 minutes. Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0923 - Page 2 of 8 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation 7. Sensitivity: Field adjustable. B. Wall Switch Occupancy Sensors: 1. All Wall Switch Occupancy Sensors: a. Description: Occupancy sensors designed for installation in standard wall box at standard wall switch mounting height with a field of view of 180 degrees, integrated manual control capability, and no leakage current to load in off mode. b. Manual-Off Override Control: When used to turn off load while in automatic-on mode, unit to revert back to automatic mode after no occupant presence is detected during the delayed-off time interval. c. Finish: Match finishes specified for wiring devices in Section 26 2726, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Passive Infrared (PIR) Wall Switch Occupancy Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within an area of 900 square feet. 3. Ultrasonic Wall Switch Occupancy Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within an area of 400 square feet. 4. Passive Infrared/Ultrasonic Dual Technology Wall Switch Occupancy Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within an area of 900 square feet. C. Wall Dimmer Occupancy Sensors: 1. General Requirements: a. Description: Occupancy sensors designed for installation in standard wall box at standard wall switch mounting height with a field of view of 180 degrees, integrated dimming control capability , and no leakage current to load in off mode. b. Dimmer: Solid-state with continuous full-range even control following square law dimming curve, integral radio frequency interference filtering, power failure preset memory, air gap switch accessible without removing wall plate, and listed as complying with UL 1472; type and rating suitable for load controlled. c. Finish: Match finishes specified for wiring devices in Section 26 2726, unless otherwise indicated. D. Ceiling Mounted Occupancy Sensors: 1. All Ceiling Mounted Occupancy Sensors: a. Description: Low profile occupancy sensors designed for ceiling installation. b. Unless otherwise indicated or required to control the load indicated on drawings, provide low voltage units, for use with separate compatible accessory power packs. c. Occupancy sensor to be field selectable as either manual-on/automatic-off or automatic on/off. d. Finish: White unless otherwise indicated. 2. Passive Infrared (PIR) Ceiling Mounted Occupancy Sensors: a. Standard Range Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within an area of 450 square feet at a mounting height of 9 feet, with a field of view of 360 degrees. 3. Ultrasonic Ceiling Mounted Occupancy Sensors: a. Standard Range Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within an area of 500 square feet at a mounting height of 9 feet, with a field of view of 360 degrees. b. Medium Range Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within an area of 1,000 square feet at a mounting height of 9 feet, with a field of view of 360 degrees. 4. Passive Infrared/Ultrasonic Dual Technology Ceiling Mounted Occupancy Sensors: a. Standard Range Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within an area of 450 square _ feet at a mounting height of 9 feet, with a field of view of 360 degrees. b. Extended Range Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within an area of 1,200 square feet at a mounting height of 9 feet, with a field of view of 360 degrees. 1) Products: 5. Passive Infrared/Acoustic Dual Technology Ceiling Mounted Occupancy Sensors: a. Standard Range Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within an area of 450 square feet at a mounting height of 9 feet, with a field of view of 360 degrees. b. Extended Range Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within an area of 1,200 square feet at a mounting height of 9 feet. E. Directional Occupancy Sensors: Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0923 - Page 3 of 8 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation 1. All Directional Occupancy Sensors: Designed for wall or ceiling mounting, with integral _ swivel for field adjustment of motion detection coverage. 2. Passive Infrared (PIR) Directional Occupancy Sensors: a. Standard Range Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within a distance of 40 feet at a mounting height of 10 feet. b. Long Range Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within a distance of 80 feet at a mounting height of 10 feet. c. High Bay Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within a distance of 50 feet at a mounting height of 30 feet. 3. Passive Infrared/Ultrasonic Dual Technology Directional Occupancy Sensors: Capable of detecting motion within a distance of 40 feet at a mounting height of 10 feet. F. Luminaire Mounted Occupancy Sensors: Designed for direct luminaire installation and control, suitable for use with specified luminaires. G. Power Packs for Low Voltage Occupancy Sensors: _ 1. Description: Plenum rated, self-contained low voltage class 2 transformer and relay compatible with specified low voltage occupancy sensors for switching of line voltage loads. 2. Provide quantity and configuration of power and slave packs with all associated wiring and -- accessories as required to control the load indicated on drawings. 3. Input Supply Voltage: Dual rated for 120/277 V ac. H. Power Packs for Wireless Occupancy Sensors: _ 1. Description: Plenum rated, self-contained relay compatible with specified wireless occupancy sensors for switching of line voltage loads. 2. Input Supply Voltage: Dual rated for 120/277 V ac. 2.03 OUTDOOR PHOTO CONTROLS A. Stem-Mounted Outdoor Photo Controls: 1. Description: Direct-wired photo control unit with threaded conduit mounting stem and _ field-adjustable swivel base, listed and labeled as complying with UL 773A. 2. Housing: Weatherproof, impact resistant polycarbonate. 3. Photo Sensor: Cadmium sulfide. 4. Provide external sliding shield for field adjustment of light level activation. 5. Light Level Activation: 1 to 5 footcandles turn-on and 3 to 1 turn-off to turn-on ratio with delayed turn-off. 6. Voltage: As required to control the load indicated on the drawings. 7. Failure Mode: Fails to the on position. 8. Load Rating: As required to control the load indicated on the drawings. 2.04 DAYLIGHTING CONTROLS A. System Description: Control system consisting of photo sensors and compatible control modules and power packs, contactors, or relays as required for automatic control of load indicated according to available natural light; capable of integrating with occupancy sensors and manual override controls. B. Daylighting Control Photo Sensors: Low voltage class 2 photo sensor units with output signal proportional to the measured light level and provision for zero or offset based signal. 1. Sensor Type: Filtered silicon photo diode. 2. Sensor Range: a. Indoor Photo Sensors: 5 to 100 footcandles. 3. Finish: White unless otherwise indicated. _. C. Dimming Photo Sensors: Photo sensor units with integral controller compatible with specified dimming ballasts, for direct continuous dimming of up to 50 ballasts. D. Daylighting Control Switching Modules for Low Voltage Sensors: Low voltage class 2 control unit compatible with specified photo sensors, for switching of compatible power packs, contactors, or relays in response to changes in measured light levels according to selected settings. Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0923 - Page 4 of 8 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation 1. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, load to be turned on when light level is below selected low set point and load to be turned off when light level is above selected high set point, with a no switching dead band between set points to prevent unwanted cycling. 2. Input Delay: To prevent unwanted cycling due to intermittent light level fluctuations. 3. Control Capability: E. Power Packs for Low Voltage Daylighting Control Modules: 1. Description: Plenum rated, self-contained low voltage class 2 transformer and relay compatible with specified low voltage daylighting control modules for switching of line voltage loads. Provide quantity and configuration of power and slave packs with all associated wiring and accessories as required to control the load indicated on drawings. 2. Input Supply Voltage: Dual rated for 120/277 V ac. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and are properly sized to accommodate devices and conductors in accordance with NFPA 70. C. Verify that openings for outlet boxes are neatly cut and will be completely covered by devices or wall plates. D. Verify that final surface finishes are complete, including painting. E. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to lighting control devices. F. Verify that the service voltage and ratings of lighting control devices are appropriate for the service voltage and load requirements at the location to be installed. G. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface. B. Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install lighting control devices in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship) and, where applicable, NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards unless otherwise indicated. B. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 0533.16 as required for installation of lighting control devices provided under this section. C. Install lighting control devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Unless otherwise indicated, connect lighting control device grounding terminal or conductor to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper. E. Install lighting control devices plumb and level, and held securely in place. F. Where required and not furnished with lighting control device, provide wall plate in accordance with Section 26 2726. G. Provide required supports in accordance with Section 26 0529. H. Where applicable, install lighting control devices and associated wall plates to fit completely flush to mounting surface with no gaps and rough opening completely covered without strain on wall plate. Repair or reinstall improperly installed outlet boxes or improperly sized rough openings. Do not use oversized wall plates in lieu of meeting this requirement. I. Occupancy Sensor Locations: 1. Locate ultrasonic and dual technology passive infrared/ultrasonic occupancy sensors a minimum of 4 feet from air supply ducts or other sources of heavy air flow and as per manufacturer's recommendations, in order to minimize false triggers. J. Outdoor Photo Control Locations: 1. Where possible, locate outdoor photo controls with photo sensor facing north. If north facing photo sensor is not possible, install with photo sensor facing east, west, or down. Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0923 - Page 5 of 8 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation 2. Locate outdoor photo controls so that photo sensors do not face artificial light sources, including light sources controlled by the photo control itself. K. Install outdoor photo controls so that connections are weatherproof. Do not install photo controls with conduit stem facing up in order to prevent infiltration of water into the photo control. L. Daylighting Control Photo Sensor Locations: 1. Unless otherwise indicated, locate photo sensors for closed loop systems to accurately measure the light level controlled at the designated task location, while minimizing the measured amount of direct light from natural or artificial sources such as windows or pendant luminaires. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, locate photo sensors for open loop systems to accurately measure the level of daylight coming into the space, while minimizing the measured amount of lighting from artificial sources. M. Lamp Burn-In: Operate lamps at full output for minimum of 100 hours or prescribed period per manufacturer's recommendations prior to use with any dimming controls. Replace lamps that fail prematurely due to improper lamp burn-in. N. Unless otherwise indicated, install power packs for lighting control devices above accessible ceiling or above access panel in inaccessible ceiling near the sensor location. O. Unless otherwise indicated, install switches on load side of power packs so that switch does not turn off power pack. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL _ A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements. B. Inspect each lighting control device for damage and defects. C. Test occupancy sensors to verify proper operation, including time delays and ambient light thresholds where applicable. Verify optimal coverage for entire room or area. Record test results in written report to be included with submittals. D. Test outdoor photo controls to verify proper operation, including time delays where applicable. E. Test daylighting controls to verify proper operation, including light level measurements and time delays where applicable. Record test results in written report to be included with submittals. F. Correct wiring deficiencies and replace damaged or defective lighting control devices. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level. B. Adjust occupancy sensor settings to minimize undesired activations while optimizing energy savings, and to achieve desired function as indicated or as directed by Architect. C. Adjust position of directional occupancy sensors and outdoor motion sensors to achieve optimal coverage as required. D. Where indicated or as directed by Architect, install factory masking material or adjust integral blinders on passive infrared (PIR) and dual technology occupancy sensor lenses to block undesired motion detection.E. Adjust external sliding shields on outdoor photo controls under optimum lighting conditions to achieve desired turn-on and turn-off activation as indicated or as directed by Architect. F. Adjust daylighting controls under optimum lighting conditions after all room finishes, furniture, and window treatments have been installed to achieve desired operation as indicated or as directed by Architect. Record settings in written report to be included with submittals. Readjust controls calibrated prior to installation of final room finishes, furniture, and window treatments _ that do not function properly as determined by Architect. 3.06 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to match original factory finish. 3.07 COMMISSIONING A. See Section 01 9113 - General Commissioning Requirements for commissioning requirements. Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0923 - Page 6 of 8 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation 3.08 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of lighting control devices to Architect, and correct deficiencies or make adjustments as directed. B. Training: Train [owner]'s personnel on operation, adjustment, programming, and maintenance of lighting control devices. 1. Use operation and maintenance manual as training reference, supplemented with additional training materials as required. 2. Provide minimum of two hours of training. 3. Instructor: Qualified contractor familiar with the project and with sufficient knowledge of the installed lighting control devices. 4. Location: At project site. -- END OF SECTION Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0923 - Page 7 of 8 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation SECTION 26 0943 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. The Electrical Contractor, as part of the work of this section, shall provide, install and test a complete lighting control system as specified herein for areas indicated on the drawings and circuit schedules. B. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish all conduit, wire, connectors, hardware and other incidental items necessary for the complete and proper operation of the lighting control system. C. The Electrical Contractor shall coordinate all work described in this section with all other applicable plans and specifications, including but not limited to: 1. General Conditions 2. Electrical Section General Provisions 3. Conduit 4. Wire and Cable 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. B. Section 26 2726 -Wiring Devices 1. Finish requirements for wall controls specified in this section. C. Section 26 5100 - Interior Lighting: Luminaires and associated components, for interface with lighting control system. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ISO 9001 - Quality Management Systems-Requirements. B. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction. C. NECA 130 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Wiring Devices; National Electrical Contractors Association. D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate the placement of sensors and wall controls with millwork, furniture, equipment, etc. installed under other sections or by others. 2. Coordinate the placement of wall controls with actual installed door swings. 3. Coordinate the work to provide luminaires and lamps compatible with the lighting controls to be installed. 4. Notify Architect of any conflicts or deviations from the contract documents to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work. B. Sequencing: 1. Do not install sensors and wall controls until final surface finishes and painting are complete. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Include ratings, configurations, standard wiring diagrams, dimensions, colors, service condition requirements, and installed features. 1. Occupancy/Vacancy Sensors: Include detailed basic motion detection coverage range diagrams. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70 B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements. Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0943 - Page 1 of 24 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation C. Manufacturer Qualifications: _ 1. Manufacturer shall be one who has been continuously engaged in the manufacturer of lighting control equipment for a minimum of ten years. All dimmer and cabinet fabrication must take place in a U.S.manufacturing plant. 2. The Theatrical Lighting dimming and control system shall be provided by a qualified Theatrical Lighting Equipment Dealer who shall have at least five (5) years experience in the sales and installation of similar systems and who shall be factory certified to provide warranty service for all of the equipment in this Section. 3. shall meet therequirements for Full Membership in the Entertainment Services and Technology Association (ESTA). 4. The dealer shall be responsible for the integration, operation, and performance of all _ elements of the system described in this Section. 5. The dealer shall provide all warranty work and equipment upgrades as called for in this Section. 6. The Dealer shall be available for onsite product service within (24) hours of a call for — service a. Subject to the above requirements, the equipment specified herein shall be provided by one of the following Theatrical Lighting Equipment Dealers: 1) Wall Entertainment, Las Vegas, NV; (702) 263-3858. 2) Barbizon Lighting, Denver, CO; (303) 394-9875. 3) Gopher Stage Lighting, Minneapolis, MN; (612) 871-0138. 4) Norcostco, Denver, CO; (303) 620-9734. 5) Oasis Stage Werks, Salt Lake City, UT; (801) 363-0364. 6) Stagecraft Industries, Portland, OR; (503) 286-1600. 7. The manufacturer shall have a factory authorized stocking service center with at least one — full time service technician on staff located within 150 miles of the job site. In addition, the manufacturer shall have a toll free 24-hour hotline with a maximum response time of 20 minutes, 24 hours a day and 365 days a year. 8. All equipment, where applicable standards have been established, shall be built to the standards of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., the National Electric Code and the United States Institute for Theater Technology. Permanently installed power distribution equipment such as dimmer racks and distribution shall be UL and C-UL Listed, and/or CE marked (where applicable) and bear the appropriate labels. Portable equipment such as consoles and fixtures shall be UL and C-UL Listed, ETL Listed and/or CE marked (where applicable) and bear the appropriate labels. 9. Registered to ISO 9001 in-house engineering for product design activities. 10. Qualified to supply specified products and to honor claims against product presented in accordance with warranty. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in a clean, dry space in original manufacturer's packaging in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions until ready for installation. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain field conditions within manufacturer's required service conditions during and after installation. 1. System Requirements , Unless Otherwise Indicated: a. Ambient Temperature: 1) Lighting Control System Components, Except Those Listed Below: Between 32 and 104 degrees F. b. Relative Humidity: Less than 90 percent, non-condensing. 1.09 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The system shall be designed for the control of architectural and theatrical lighting and shall — consist of factory pre-wired dimming and processing rack enclosures containing dimmers, relays, power supplies, breakers, terminals and/or control electronics. B. System shall work in conjunction with specified low-voltage control stations. C. 1.03 SUBMITTALS Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0943 - Page 2 of 24 _ Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation 1. Manufacturer shall provide an electronic set of full system submittals. Submittals shall include: a. Full system riser diagram(s) illustrating interconnection of system components, wiring requirements, back box sizes and any special installation considerations. b. Full set of printed technical data sheets. _ c. Detailed set of dimmer schedules d. Detailed set of circuit and control schedules, including a complete list of all deviations from specifications. 2. Manufacturer shall provide any additional information, including equipment demonstrations, as required by the engineer or specifier to verify compliance with specifications. 1.10 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. The equipment herein specified shall be manufactured by 1. Electronic Theatre Controls 2. PO Box 620979 3. Middleton, WI 53562 4. Phone: 608/831-4116 5. Fax: 608/836-1736 B. Alternative manufacturers must submit a full pre-approval package ten days prior to bid date. Package shall consist of items listed in Part 1, Section 1.03A. C. Permission to bid does not imply acceptance of the manufacturer. It is the sole responsibility of the electrical contractor to ensure that any price quotations received and submittals made are for controls systems that meet or exceed the specifications. PART 2. PRODUCT 2.01 ARCHITECTURAL CONTROL PROCESSOR MODULES A. Control Processor Modules 1. The Architectural Control Processor shall be the Unison Paradigm P-ACP Series Control _ Processor as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc., or equal. 2. The Architectural Control Processor(ACP) assembly shall be designed for use in DRd Series Dimming Enclosures and ERn Series Control Enclosures. 3. The processor shall utilize microprocessor based, solid state technology to provide multi-scene lighting and building control. a. ACP shall support functions such as station programming, macro sequencing, electronic lockout, room combine and astronomical time clock events. ACP station processor shall allow configuration of the control system via the menus. See software section for additional system details. b. When used in a dimming enclosure, the ACP shall allow access to dimming control menus including the status screen, dimming configuration screen, backup menu, test menu and configuration menu. 4. One ACP shall be rated to drive 1024 channels of control, 1024 zones, 64 rooms, 512 presets, 63 button or button/fader stations and 6 Touchscreen Stations 5. ACP module electronics shall be convection cooled. 6. The ACP shall provide front-panel RJ45 jack, Secure Digital (SD) card slot. and Universal Serial Bus (USB) Port for configuration and data exchange. 7. Architectural Lighting System configuration and program information shall be stored in flash memory, which does not require battery backup. 8. The ACP shall be contained in a plug-in assembly and require no discrete wiring connections; all wiring shall be terminated into Dimming or Control Enclosure. a. The ACP shall support the following communications: b. Echelon LinkPower c. 10/100BaseTX, auto MDI/MDIX, 802.3af compliant Ethernet networking with TCP/IP, ESTA BSR E1.17 Advanced Control Networks (ACN) and ESTA BSR E1.31 (sACN) Protocols d. EIA-232 serial protocol e. ESTA DMX512A, configurable as input or output ports f. Dry contact closure inputs Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0943 - Page 3 of 24 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation g. Dry contact closure outputs, rated at 1A©30VDC 2.02 ARCHITECTURAL CONTROL PROCESSOR MODULES A. Station processor Modules 1. The Station Power Module shall be the Unison Paradigm P-SPM-E Series Station Power — Module as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc., or equal. a. The Station Power Module (SPM) assembly shall be designed for use in DRd Series or ERn Rack Enclosures. 2. The SPM shall convert input power into low-voltage (Class II) power with data line and a secondary auxiliary low-voltage line to energize button, button/fader, touchscreen, and interface devices for multi-scene lighting and building control. 3. The SPM, in conjunction with a matching Architectural Control Processor (ACP), shall — support Echelon LinkPower communications with remote devices, including button, button/fader, touchscreen and interface stations, and shall interoperate with LonMARK-approved third-party devices. _ a. The LinkPower network shall utilize polarity-independent, low-voltage Class II twisted pair wiring, type Belden 8471 (unshielded) or Belden 8719 (shielded) or equivalent. One# 14 AWG drain wire will be required for system not using grounded metal conduit. — b. The LinkPower network shall be topology free. Network wiring may be bus, loop, home run, star or any combination of these. c. Link power wiring shall permit a total wire run of 1640 ft. (500m) — 1) Repeaters allow an additional wire run of 1640 ft. (500m) 2) Dual-repeaters allow two additional wire runs of 1640 ft. (500m) d. Link power wiring between stations shall not exceed 1313 ft. (400m). e. The SPM shall support auxiliary power for certain remote devices, including —' touchscreen and interface stations, as required by the device. 1) The auxiliary power network shall utilize polarity-dependent, low-voltage Class II wiring, consisting of two# 16 AWG wires.2) Auxiliary wiring shall permit a total wire run of 1640 ft. (500m) (a) Repeaters allow an additional wire run of 1640 ft. (500m) (b) Dual-repeaters allow two additional wire runs of 1640 ft. (500m) 3) The SPM shall supply 1.25 amps at 24v DC continuously. 4. ACP module electronics shall be convection cooled. 5. Each SPM shall a. Supply power for up to 63 button and button/fader stations. _ b. Supply auxiliary power for a similar number of interface stations. c. Shall supply auxiliary power for up to four Touchscreen stations, when a like number of other stations are deducted from the total. 1) Repeaters and dual-repeaters allow two additional Touchscreens (six total) when a like number of other stations are deducted from the total 2.03 TOUCHSCREEN CONTROL STATIONS A. The Touchscreen Control Stations shall be the Unison Paradigm Touchscreen P-TS7 Series Control Stations as manufactured by ETC, Inc., or equal. B. General 1. Touchscreen stations shall support default and fully graphical control pages. 2. The Touchscreen station shall operate using graphic buttons, faders and other images on at least 30 separate programmable control pages. 3. Touchscreen stations shall also allow programming of page pass-code, lock out and -- visibility levels. C. Mechanical 1. Touchscreen stations shall consist of a seven inch, backlit liquid crystal display (LCD)with — a minimum resolution of 800 by 400 pixels and 24-bit color depth with a capacitive touch interface. 2. Touchscreen bezels shall be constructed of cast aluminum finished in a fine texture powder coat. a. Touchscreen shall be available in five standard colors Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0943 - Page 4 of 24 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation 1) Cream (RAL 9001) 2) Ivory (RAL 1015) 3) Gray (RAL 7001) 4) Black (RAL 9004) 5) Signal White (RAL 9003) b. The bezel shall have no visible means of attachment. c. The bezel shall allow the touchscreen to be installed and removed without the use of tools d. The bezel shall provide two working positions for the Touchscreen: service and normal operation. 3. Touchscreen shall offer optional hinged locking covers a. Locking covers shall be made from cast aluminum and be painted to match standard touchscreen color options b. Locking covers shall allow for viewing of system status on the touchscreen though a smoked Lexan window 4. The manufacturer shall provide back boxes for all LCD stations. a. Flush back box for Touchscreens with or without locking covers shall be 7.94"wide x 5.33" high x 3.25" deep b. Surface back box dimensions shall be 8.3"wide x 5.6" high x 2.75" deep c. Surface back box for Touchscreens with locking cover dimensions shall be 10.0"wide x 6.7" high x 2.75" deep D. Electrical 1. Touchscreens shall be powered entirely by the System network. 2. Touchscreens shall connect to the System using an Ethernet network with Power over Ethernet (PoE) or the Unison control station Echelon® Link power network. a. Ethernet Network 1) Ethernet network shall be 10/100BaseTX, auto MDI/MDIX, 802.3af(PoE) compliant. 2) Network shall utilize Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) Category 5, or better wiring. 3) PoE power consumption shall be PoE class 2, consuming no more than 6 watts. b. Echelon® Link power network. 1) Link power shall utilize low-voltage Class II unshielded twisted pair, type Belden 8471 or equivalent, and one#14 ESD drain wire (when not installed in grounded metal conduit). 2) Touchscreen stations shall also require (2)#16 AWG stranded wires for 24Vdc operating power. 24Vdc wiring shall be topology free. — 3) Network wiring may be bus, loop, home run, star or any combination of these. 4) Network insulation displacement connectors shall be provided with all stations. E. Functional 1. System a. The Touchscreen shall support configuration firmware upload from a Paradigm Processor as proxy b. The Touchscreen shall support configuration or firmware upload from local removable media 2. Setup Mode a. There shall be a setup display that is separate from any user-defined configuration b. It shall be possible to view and modify connectivity settings c. It shall be possible to view status information d. It shall be possible to view and modify LCD screen settings _ e. It shall be possible to perform Touchscreen calibration f. It shall be possible to view and modify audio settings g. The appearance of the setup display shall be standard and not editable h. The setup display may be invoked from within the user-defined configuration and/or physical button on the Touchscreen i. There shall be a default protected method to invoke the setup display 3. Configurations a. It shall be possible to have multiple configurations stored within an LCD Station Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0943 - Page 5 of 24 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation b. Where multiple configurations are stored there shall be a boot menu to allow selection _ of a configuration 4. Operation a. The Unison Paradigm Control System shall be designed to allow control of lighting and associated systems via Touchscreen controls. System shall allow the control of —' presets, sequences, macros and time clock events. 1) System presets shall be programmable via Button, Button/Fader, Touchscreen, or LightDesigner software. — (a) Presets shall have a discrete fade time, programmable from zero to 84,600 seconds with a resolution of one hundred milliseconds. (b) Presets shall be selectable via Touchscreen stations. 2) System macros and sequences shall be programmable via LightDesigner system software. (a) Macro and sequence steps shall provide user selectable steps, and allow the application of conditional logic. — (b) Macro and sequences shall be activated by button, time clock event or LightDesigner software. 3) System time clock events shall be programmable via the Touchscreen, LightDesigner system software, the processor user interface, or the internal web server. (a) Time clock events shall be assigned to system day types. Standard day types include: anyway, weekday, weekend, Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, — Wednesday, Thursday, Friday and Saturday. System shall support programming of additional custom or special day types. (b) Time clock events shall be activated based on sunrise, sunset, time of day or periodic event. System shall automatically compensate for regions using a fully configurable daylight saving time. 4) A Color picker, supporting Hue, Saturation and Brightness (HSB) color selection shall be available for color selection of color changing fixtures and provide visual — feedback of the current color produced by the associated fixture. (a) The color picker shall be provided with a default layout that requires no user configuration (b) The Color Picker shall provide RGB faders in addition to the default HSB color wheel for color selection (c) Color picker values shall allow for numerical value input in addition to color wheel and fader control — (d) The color picker shall be compatible with color mixing systems that use up to seven discrete color control channels b. Touchscreen stations shall be designed to operate standard default or custom system — functions. Components shall operate default functions unless re-assigned via LightDesigner, the Windows-based configuration program. 1) Optional button functions include: preset selection, manual mode activation, record mode activation, station lockout, raise, lower, macro activation, and cue — light, or room join/separate. 2) Optional fader functions include master control, individual channel control, fade rate control or preset master control. c. Touchscreen stations shall allow programming of station and component electronic lockout levels via LightDesigner. d. It shall be possible to adjust LCD contrast and brightness. e. It shall be possible to program the station to dim during periods of inactivity. — 2.04 PORTABLE TOUCHSCREEN CONTROL STATIONS A. The Portable Touchscreen Control Stations shall be the Unison Paradigm Portable Touchscreen P-TS7-P/PE Series Control Stations as manufactured by ETC Inc., or equal. B. General 1. Portable Touchscreen stations shall support default and fully graphical control pages. 2. Portable Touchscreen stations shall operate using graphic buttons, faders and other images on at least 30 separate programmable control pages. Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0943 - Page 6 of 24 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation 3. Portable Touchscreen stations shall also allow programming of page pass-code, lock out and visibility levels. 4. Portable Touchscreen station shall support connection to the System using an Ethernet network with Power over Ethernet (PoE) or the Unison control station Echelon® Link power network. 5. Portable Touchscreen stations connected to the Unison control station Echelon® Link shall support location awareness to automatically load the configuration required dependent on the connection point to the system C. Mechanical 1. Portable Touchscreen stations shall consist of a seven inch, backlit liquid crystal display (LCD) with a minimum resolution of 800 by 400 pixels and 24-bit color depth with a capacitive touch interface. 2. The Portable Touchscreen enclosure and cover shall be constructed of aluminum and finished in a black fine-texture powder coat paint 3. The enclosure shall provide a hinged cover with two positions for the Touchscreen: closed and normal operation 4. The Portable Touchscreen shall have a protective cover for removable media ports 5. The Echelon® Link Touchscreen shall include an attached cable with 6-pin Amphenol connector and strain relief to interface with Portable Connector Stations a. Attached Cable shall be 15' in length constructed of ultra-flexible material b. Extension cables up to 100' in length shall be available to extend the cable length to a maximum of 115' total length _ 6. The Ethernet Network Touchscreen shall include a Neutrik Ethercon Port on the rear of the touchscreen for connection to an Ethernet Network. a. Unit will ship with a 10' Ethercon to RJ-45 cable b. Cables with extended lengths shall be available up to 300' in length. D. Electrical 1. Portable Touchscreens shall be powered entirely by the System network. 2. Portable Touchscreens shall connect to the System using an Ethernet network with Power over Ethernet(PoE) or the Unison control station Echelon® Link power network. a. Ethernet Network 1) Ethernet network shall be 10/100BaseTX, auto MDI/MDIX, 802.3af(PoE) compliant. 2) Network shall utilize Unshielded Twisted Pair(UTP) Category 5, or better wiring. 3) PoE power consumption shall be PoE Class 2, consuming no more than 6 watts. b. Echelon® Link power network. 1) Link power shall utilize low-voltage Class II unshielded twisted pair, type Belden 8471 or equivalent, and one#14 ESD drain wire (when not installed in grounded metal conduit). 2) Touchscreen stations shall also require (2) #16 AWG stranded wires for 24Vdc operating power. 24Vdc wiring shall be topology free. 3) Network wiring may be bus, loop, home run, star or any combination of these. E. Functional 1. System a. The Portable Touchscreen shall support configuration upload from a Paradigm Processor as proxy b. The Touchscreen shall support configuration or firmware upload from local removable media c. It shall be possible to connect multiple Portable Touchscreen station to the system at _ one time 2. Setup Mode a. There shall be a setup display that is separate from any user-defined configuration b. It shall be possible to view and modify connectivity settings c. It shall be possible to view status information d. It shall be possible to view and modify LCD screen settings e. It shall be possible to perform Touchscreen calibration f. It shall be possible to view and modify audio settings Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0943 - Page 7 of 24 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation g. The appearance of the setup display shall be standard and not editable — h. The setup display may be invoked from within the user-defined configuration and/or physical button on the Portable Touchscreen i. There shall be a default protected method to invoke the setup display 3. Configurations a. It shall be possible to have multiple configurations stored within an LCD Station b. It shall be possible for Portable Touchscreen Stations connected via the Echelon® Link power network to select a configuration automatically based on the physical — connection point of the touchscreen. c. Where multiple configurations are stored there shall be a setup menu to allow selection of a configuration. 4. Operation a. The Unison Paradigm Control System shall be designed to allow control of lighting and associated systems via Touchscreen controls. System shall allow the control of presets, sequences, macros and time clock events. — 1) System presets shall be programmable via Button, Button/Fader or Touchscreen stations, or LightDesigner software. (a) Presets shall have a discrete fade time, programmable from zero to 84,600 seconds with a resolution of one hundred milliseconds. (b) Presets shall be selectable via Touchscreen stations. 2) System macros and sequences shall be programmable via LightDesigner system software. — (a) Macro and sequence steps shall provide user selectable steps, and allow the application of conditional logic. (b) Macro and sequences shall be activated by button, time clock event or — LightDesigner software. 3) System time clock events shall be programmable via the Touchscreen, LightDesigner system software, the processor user interface, or the internal web server. — (a) Time clock events shall be assigned to system day types. Standard day types include: anyway, weekday, weekend, Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday and Saturday. System shall support — programming of additional custom or special day types. (b) Time clock events shall be activated based on sunrise, sunset, time of day or periodic event. System shall automatically compensate for regions using a fully configurable daylight saving time. 4) A Color picker, supporting Hue, Saturation and Brightness (HSB) color selection shall be available for color selection of color changing fixtures and provide visual feedback of the current color produced by the associated fixture. (a) The color picker shall be provided with a default layout that requires no user configuration (b) The Color Picker shall provide RGB faders in addition to the default HSB color wheel for color selection — (c) Color picker values shall allow for numerical value input in addition to color wheel and fader control (d) The color picker shall be compatible with color mixing systems that use up to seven discrete color control channels b. Portable Touchscreen stations shall be designed to operate standard default or custom system functions. Components shall operate default functions unless re-assigned via LightDesigner, the Windows-based configuration program. — 1) Optional button functions include: preset selection, manual mode activation, record mode activation, station lockout, raise, lower, macro activation, and cue light, or room join/separate. 2) Optional fader functions include master control, individual channel control, fade rate control or preset master control. c. Portable Touchscreen stations shall allow programming of station and component electronic lockout levels via LightDesigner. — d. It shall be possible to adjust LCD contrast and brightness. Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0943 - Page 8 of 24 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation e. It shall be possible to program the station to dim during periods of inactivity. 2.05 BUTTON AND FADER STATIONS A. Stations 1. Button Stations a. The Lighting Control Stations shall be the Unison Heritage UH Series Control Stations as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc., or equal. b. Mechanical 1) Unison Heritage Button stations shall operate using up to ten programmable buttons. 2) All button stations shall be available with white, cream, ivory, gray or black faceplates, and buttons. (a) Manufacturer's standard colors shall conform to the RAL CLASSIC Standard. 3) Stations shall have indicator lights at each button or fader. (a) Indicators shall be comprised of red, green and blue LED's (b) Indicator color and state (steady On, Blink, Off) shall be configured in software, and shall operate relative to the button or fader it is associated with. 4) All faceplates shall be designed for flush or surface mounting. 5) Station faceplates shall be constructed of ABS plastic and shall use no visible means of attachment. 6) Station faceplates shall be indelibly marked for each button or fader function. 7) The manufacturer shall supply back boxes for flush mounted half gang stations and for all surface mounted stations. 8) All Button stations shall be shall be designed to accept the infrared signal from a remote hand held IR transmitter. • (a) The stations shall have a 60° reception angle and shall operate reliably within a 45' distance. 9) IR Transmitters shall be available in five or ten button configurations. (a) IR transmitters shall be mounted in a hand-held black plastic controller. (b) Transmitter dimensions shall be 1.875"wide, 6.625" long and 0.60" deep. c. Electrical 1) Unison control station wiring shall be an Echelon® Link power network. (a) Link power shall utilize low-voltage Class II unshielded twisted pair, type Belden 8471 or equivalent, and one#14 ESD drain wire (when not installed in grounded metal conduit). (b) Network wiring may be bus, loop, home run, star or any combination of these. (c) Wiring termination connectors shall be provided with all stations. 2) Button Stations shall offer the following Regular markings (a) UL and cUL LISTED (b) CE Market (c) RHoS and WEE Compliant d. Functional 1) The Unison Paradigm Control System shall be designed to allow control of lighting and associated systems via Button, Button/Fader, and Interface or Astronomical time clock controls. System shall allow the programming of presets, sequences, macros and time clock events. (a) System presets shall be programmable via Button stations, Touchscreen stations, and LightDesigner software. (1) Presets shall have a discrete fade time, programmable from zero to 1,000 hours with a resolution of one millisecond. (2) Presets shall be selectable via button, fader, IR transmitter, time clock event, macro activation or switch interface stations. (b) System macros and sequences shall be programmable via LightDesigner system software. Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0943 - Page 9 of 24 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation (1) Macro and sequence steps shall provide user selectable steps, and allow the application of conditional logic. (2) Macro and sequences shall be activated by button, time clock event or LightDesigner software. (c) System time clock events shall be programmable via LightDesigner system software, the processor user interface, or the internal web server. (1) Time clock events shall be assigned to system day types. Standard day types include: anyway, weekday, weekend, Sunday, Monday, ,.- Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday and Saturday. System shall support programming of additional custom or special day types. (2) Time clock events shall be activated based on sunrise, sunset, time of day or periodic event. System shall automatically compensate for regions using a fully configurable daylight saving time. 2) Control components shall be designed to operate default or custom system functions. Components shall operate default functions unless re-assigned via LightDesigner, the software-based configuration program. (a) Optional button functions include: preset selection, manual mode activation, record mode activation, station lockout, raise, lower, macro activation, or room join/separate. (b) Optional fader functions include manual master control, individual zone control, fade rate control or preset master control. 3) Stations (Button and Button/Fader) shall allow programming of station and component electronic lockout levels via LightDesigner. 2. Fader Stations a. The Lighting Control Stations shall be the Unison Heritage UH Series Control Stations as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc., or equal. b. Mechanical 1) Unison Heritage Fader Stations shall operate using up to sixteen programmable faders and twelve programmable buttons. _ 2) All fader stations shall be available with white, cream, ivory, gray or black faceplates, fader knobs, and buttons. 3) Manufacturer's standard colors shall conform to the RAL CLASSIC Standard. _ 4) Fader stations shall utilize standard 45-millimeter slide potentiometers. 5) Stations shall have indicators lights at each button or fader. (a) Indicators shall be comprised of red, green and blue LED's (b) Indicator color and state (steady On, Blink, Off) shall be configured in - software, and shall operate relative to the button or fader it is associated with. 6) All faceplates shall be designed for flush or surface mounting. 7) Station faceplates shall be constructed of ABS plastic and shall use no visible means of attachment. 8) Station faceplates shall be indelibly marked for each button or fader function. 9) The manufacturer shall supply back boxes for flush mounted half gang stations and for all surface mounted stations. 10) Fader stations shall be shall be designed to accept the infrared signal from a remote hand held IR transmitter. (a) The stations shall have a 60° reception angle and shall operate reliably within a 45' distance. 11) IR Transmitters shall be available in five or ten button configurations. (a) IR transmitters shall be mounted in a hand-held black plastic controller. —' (b) Transmitter dimensions shall be 1.875" wide, 6.625" long and 0.60" deep. c. Electrical 1) Unison control station wiring shall be an Echelon® Link power network. (a) Link power shall utilize low-voltage Class II unshielded twisted pair, type Belden 8471 or equivalent, and one#14 ESD drain wire (when not installed in grounded metal conduit). Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0943 - Page 10 of 24 _ Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation (b) Touchscreen and Interface stations shall also require (2) #16 AWG stranded wires for 24Vdc operating power. 24Vdc wiring shall be topology free. (c) Network wiring may be bus, loop, home run, star or any combination of these. (d) Wiring termination connectors shall be provided with all stations. 2) Fader Stations shall offer the following Regular markings (a) UL and cUL LISTED (b) CE Market (c) RHoS and WEE Compliant d. Functional 1) The Unison Paradigm Control System shall be designed to allow control of lighting and associated systems via Button, Button/Fader, and Interface, or Astronomical time clock controls. System shall allow the programming of presets, sequences, macros and time clock events. (a) System presets shall be programmable via Button, Button/Fader, Touchscreen, or LightDesigner software. (1) Presets shall have a discrete fade time, programmable from zero to 1,000 hours with a resolution of one millisecond. (2) Presets shall be selectable via button, fader, IR transmitter, time clock event, macro activation or switch interface stations. (b) System macros and sequences shall be programmable via LightDesigner system software. (1) Macro and sequence steps shall provide user selectable steps, and allow the application of conditional logic. (2) Macro and sequences shall be activated by button, time clock event or LightDesigner software. (c) System time clock events shall be programmable via LightDesigner system software, the processor user interface, or the internal web server. (1) Time clock events shall be assigned to system day types. Standard day types include: anyway, weekday, weekend, Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday and Saturday. System shall support programming of additional custom or special day types. (2) Time clock events shall be activated based on sunrise, sunset, time of day or periodic event. System shall automatically compensate for regions using a fully configurable daylight saving time. 2) Control components shall be designed to operate default or custom system — functions. Components shall operate default functions unless re-assigned via LightDesigner, the software-based configuration program. (a) Optional button functions include: preset selection, manual mode activation, record mode activation, station lockout, raise, lower, macro activation, or room join/separate. (b) Optional fader functions include manual master control, individual zone control, fade rate control or preset master control. 3) Stations (Button and Button/Fader) shall allow programming of station and component electronic lockout levels via LightDesigner. 3. Portable Plug-in Stations a. The Lighting Control Stations shall be the Unison Heritage UH Series Control Stations as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc., or equal. b. Mechanical 1) Unison connector stations shall provide an interface to portable Unison stations. 2) All connector stations shall be available with white, cream, ivory, gray or black faceplates. 3) Manufacturer's standard colors shall conform to the RAL CLASSIC Standard. 4) All faceplates shall be designed for flush or surface mounting. 5) Station faceplates shall be constructed of ABS plastic and shall use no visible means of attachment. 6) Station faceplates shall be indelibly marked with station function. Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0943 - Page 11 of 24 •_3 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation 7) The manufacturer shall supply back boxes for all surface mounted stations. c. Electrical 1) Unison control station wiring shall be an Echelon® Link power network. (a) Link power shall utilize low-voltage Class II unshielded twisted pair, type Belden 8471 or equivalent, and one#14 ESD drain wire (when not installed in grounded metal conduit). (b) Portable plug-in stations shall also require (2)#16 AWG stranded wires for 24Vdc operating power. 24Vdc wiring shall be topology free. (c) Network wiring may be bus, loop, home run, star or any combination of these. (d) Wiring termination connectors shall be provided with all stations. 2) Portable Plug-in Stations shall offer the following Regular markings (a) UL and cUL LISTED (b) CE Market (c) RHoS and WEE Compliant d. Functional 1) The Unison Paradigm Control System shall be designed to allow control of lighting and associated systems via Button, Button/Fader, and Interface or Astronomical time clock controls. System shall allow the programming of presets, sequences, macros and time clock events. (a) System presets shall be programmable via Button, Button/Fader, Touchscreen, or LightDesigner software. (1) Presets shall have a discrete fade time, programmable from zero to 1,000 hours with a resolution of one millisecond. (2) Presets shall be selectable via button, fader, IR transmitter, time clock _ event, macro activation or switch interface stations. (b) System macros and sequences shall be programmable via LightDesigner system software. (1) Macro and sequence steps shall provide user selectable steps, and allow the application of conditional logic. (2) Macro and sequences shall be activated by button, time clock event or LightDesigner software. (c) System time clock events shall be programmable via LightDesigner system software, the processor user interface, or the internal web server. (1) Time clock events shall be assigned to system day types. Standard day types include: anyway, weekday, weekend, Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday and Saturday. System shall support programming of additional custom or special day types. (2) Time clock events shall be activated based on sunrise, sunset, time of day or periodic event. System shall automatically compensate for regions using a fully configurable daylight saving time. 2) Control components shall be designed to operate default or custom system functions. Components shall operate default functions unless re-assigned via LightDesigner, the software-based configuration program. (a) Optional button functions include: preset selection, manual mode activation, record mode activation, station lockout, raise, lower, macro activation, or room join/separate. (b) Optional fader functions include manual master control, individual zone control, fade rate control or preset master control. 4. Locking Covers a. The Lighting Control Station Locking Covers shall be the Unison Heritage UH Series as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc., or equal. b. Mechanical 1) Locking covers shall be available in Sliding Locking for flush mount applications and Hinged Locking for flush and surface mount applications 2) Sliding Locking Covers shall (a) Be available with white, cream, ivory, gray or black faceplates. (b) Be constructed of Extruded Aluminum with ABS plastic end caps Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0943 - Page 12 of 24 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation (c) Provide a smoked Plexiglas window to allow for viewing control status and use of IR remote without opening cover 3) Hinged locking covers shall: (a) Be available in standard black powder coat finish (b) Be constructed of 18 gauge steel and finished in standard black powder coat paint, or custom color as specified. (c) Provide a clear Plexiglas window to allow for viewing control status and use of IR remote without opening cover (d) Use internal Hinge that is not accessible when the cover is closed 4) Standard colors shall conform to the RAL CLASSIC Standard. 5) Locking covers of the same type shall be keyed alike 6) The manufacturer shall supply back boxes for all hinged locking covers c. Functional 1) All locking covers shall utilize 90-degree locking mechanisms (a) Keys shall be held captive in locks when covers are unlocked. 2) Locking covers shall allow for easy viewing of system status without opening the cover 3) Locking covers shall support IR remote activation of configured system functions without opening door 2.06 PHOTO SENSORS A. Responsive Controls 1. Photo Sensors a. The Lighting Photo Sensors shall be the Unison Paradigm Responsive Controls Series as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc., or equal. b. Mechanical 1) All sensors shall be constructed of ABS plastic and available in pure white or black (a) Manufacturer's standard colors shall conform to the RAL CLASSIC Standard. 2) Light Sensors shall consist of two parts that may be mounted together or separately. These parts shall be: (a) Light Sensor Controller �.. (b) Light Sensor Head 3) The Light Sensor Controller shall support local and remote mounting of the Light Sensor Head. (a) Local mounting shall allow the Sensor Head to be mounted within the Light Sensor Controller. (b) A color matched filler shall be included for the Controller when the Sensor head is remotely mounted 4) Light Sensor Heads shall support mounting to or 3/" standard conduit knockouts for remote mounting 5) Light Sensor Heads shall support indoor or outdoor mounting when used with an appropriately rated backbox. (a) Light Heads shall be IP65 rated 6) Sensor Controllers shall provide configuration buttons for: (a) Linking of station to lighting control system -- (b) Recording target light level value 7) Sensors shall have no visible means of attachment 8) Sensors Controllers shall include an adjustable mounting base that supports the following mounting options: (a) Mounting to any standard ceiling box (b) Mounting to any standard junction box (c) Mounting to single gang RACO box (d) Mounting to drywall or soft ceiling tiles using an included wire form adapter 9) Sensors controllers shall include all necessary mounting hardware, wiring connectors, and instructions. c. Electrical Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0943 - Page 13 of 24 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation 1) Sensor wiring shall be low-voltage Class 2 wiring 2) Sensor Controllers shall use Unison LinkConnect control wiring (a) Wiring shall be an Echelon® Link power network. (b) Link power shall utilize low-voltage Class II unshielded twisted pair, type Belden 8471 or equivalent, and one#14 ESD drain wire (when not installed in grounded metal conduit). (c) Network wiring may be bus, loop, home run, star or any combination of these.(d) Termination connectors shall be provided with all sensors 3) Sensor Light Heads shall utilize low-voltage Class II unshielded twisted pair, type Belden 8471 or equivalent 4) Sensors shall be designed and tested to withstand discharges without impairment of performance when subjected to discharges of 15,000 volts per IEC 801-2. 5) Sensors shall be UL and cUL LISTED and CE marked d. Functional 1) The control system shall support Lighting Photo Sensors for automated control of electric lighting levels based on measured light levels 2) Photo Sensors shall use a Light Sensor Controller and up to two Light Sensors for readings (a) When using multiple light sensors with a single controller, the controller shall automatically average the light readings 3) The control system shall support Open and Closed Loop daylight harvesting 4) The control system shall support Switched and Dimmed daylight harvesting 5) Sensors shall meet ASHRE 90.1 and CA Title 24 6) Sensor functions shall be programed using LightDesigner configuration software (a) Dimming daylighting systems shall support (1) Configurable time delay, fade time and dead band (2) Configurable Change amount (3) Software configurable minimum level (4) Control of channel/zone, group and space control (5) Overrides — (b) Switched daylighting systems shall support: (1) Dim and Bright thresholds (2) Configurable delay time 7) Sensor controllers support recording target light level readings using an onboard configuration button 2.07 WALL MOUNT RELAY PANEL AND LOAD CENTER A. General 1. The wall mount relay panel shall be the Echo Relay Panel as manufactured by ETC, Inc., or equal 2. Relay Panels shall be UL508, UL67, and UL924 Listed, and shall be so labeled when delivered 3. Relay Panels shall consist of a main enclosure with 30 pole breaker subpanel, relay/dimmer sub panel, integral control electronics, and a low voltage subpanel for data terminations and provision for accessory cards a. Up to two accessory cards shall be supported per relay panel B. Mechanical 1. The panel shall be constructed of 16-gauge steel. All panel components shall be properly treated and finished in fine-textured, scratch resistant paint 2. Relay panels shall be available in 120 and 277 Volt AC configurations a. 120V enclosures shall be 67.5" high by 14.36"wide and 4" deep with a weight not -- more than 80 pounds b. 277V enclosures shall be 67.5" high by 20"wide and 6" deep with a weight not more than 130 pounds 3. The panel shall be capable of being mounted on the surface of a wall or recessed mounted Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0943 - Page 14 of 24 _ Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation a. 120VAC panels shall support mounting between standard wall stud framing (16-inch on center spacing) 4. Choice of panel covers shall be available for surface or recess mount applications. This outer panel shall ship complete with a locking door to limit access to electronics and breakers, breakers a. Optional center-pin reject security screws shall be available for all accessible screws b. Recess mount doors shall extend 1" beyond all panel edges to hide wall cut-out 5. The unit shall provide interior cover over breaker panel to allow access only to class 2 wiring and prevent direct access to class 1 line voltage components 6. The Relay panel shall support up to twenty-four 20-amp single pole circuits made up of relays or 300W dimmers a. Two and three-pole relay circuits shall be supported at decreased density where each pole constitutes one of the available single-pole circuits. Mixing of circuits in any combination shall be supported b. Panels that do not support an integral dimmer module shall not be acceptable 7. Relays shall include integral switches for manual control while power is unavailable to the panel such that critical lighting can be set to an on state, without the need for power to the panel 8. Relay output lugs shall accept 6-14AWG copper wire 9. Breaker subpanel may include up to twenty-nine 20-amp single pole, up to fourteen 20 amp double pole, or nine three pole breakers as required in any combination up to capacity 10. Control wiring for DMX, station bus, and Emergency input terminations shall land on removable headers for contractor installation. C. User Interface 1. The user interface shall contain a graphical display with button pad to include 0-9 number entry, up, down back arrow navigation and enter 2. Test shortcut button shall be available for local activation of preset, sequence and set level overrides 3. The user interface shall have a power status LED indicator(Blue), a DMX status LED indicator(Green), a network status LED indicator (Green) and an LED indicator(red) for errors 4. Interface shall allow the backlight to timeout and shall provide user editable options to shut off backlight completely as well as adjust screen contrast 5. Ethernet interface shall default to automatic IP through link local and DHCP. Upon receiving IP address, the address of the Network Interface Card (NIC) shall display in the about menu. Static address and settings shall also be possible 6. The control interface shall support a USB memory stick interface for uploads of configurations and software updates D. Functional 1. Panel setup shall be user programmable. The control interface shall provide the following relay setup features (per circuit): a. Type (1 pole, 2 pole, or 3 pole) b. Name c. Circuit Number d. DMX address e. sACN address f. Space Number g. Circuit Mode 1) Normal (priority and HTP based activation and dimming 2) Latch-lock 3) Fluorescent 4) DALI h. On threshold level �.. i. Off threshold level j. Include in UL924 emergency activation k. Allow Manual Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0943 - Page 15 of 24 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation 2. Relay panels shall support discrete addressing of each relay. Panels that are restricted to use of start address with sequential addressing and cannot assign each 0-10V output control to any internal relay shall not be acceptable 3. The panel shall be capable of switching all relays on or off at once, or in a user-selectable delay per relay using a period of 0.1 to 60 seconds, in 0.1 second increments 4. An Ethernet connection shall provide advanced control of relays over streaming ACN (sACN) and transmit status, control override, and measured energy usage per branch circuit via an internal Web UI or central monitoring interface a. Control electronics shall report the following information per branch circuit 1) Breaker state (On/Off) 2) Breaker state (Open/Closed) 3) Current draw (In Amps) 4) Voltage 5) Energy usage b. Panels that do not report this information shall not be acceptable 5. Built-in Control shall include: a. Ability to record up to 16 presets in each space from the control panel, connected control stations, or timed events b. Presets shall be programmable by recording current levels (as set by DMX or connected control stations), by entering levels on the control panel directly, manually selecting relay state on each relay or a combination of these methods. From the control panel, stations, or timed events it shall be possible to record values for up to 16 zones per space c. Up to 8 spaces in a single rack for total of up to 16 spaces shall be supported per system or system subne d. Indication of an active preset shall be visible on the control panel display e. One 16-step sequence per space for power up and power down routines f. The panel shall have a UL924-listed contact input for use in Emergency Lighting systems. The panel shall respond to the contact input by setting included relays to "on", while setting non-emergency relays "off'. Each relay can be selected for activation upon contact input g. Upon Data loss the system shall provide options to hold last look infinitely or hold for a configured time period set by the installing technician then fade/switch to the input of the next available priority h. Control electronics shall respond directly to control stations for zone, preset, and sequence control. Systems that require secondary control systems for this functionality are not acceptable i. After power loss, electronics shall be capable of holding the system in its previous state until new level data (DMX, architectural presets, sequences and zones, or local overrides) is received to make each relay change state 6. The control of lighting and associated systems via real time and Astronomical clock controls a. The relay panel shall allow the activation of presets, sequence, and zone programming of up to 50 time clock events via a built in real and astronomical timeclock b. System time events shall be programmable via the control panel. — 1) Time clock events shall be assigned to system day types. Standard day types include: everyday, weekday, weekend, Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday and Saturday 2) Time clock events shall be activated based on sunrise, sunset, time of day or periodic event 3) System shall automatically compensate for regions using a fully configurable daylight saving time — 4) Presets shall be assigned to events at the time clock c. The time clock shall support event override 1) It shall be possible to override the timed event schedule form the face panel of the time clock d. The time clock shall support timed event hold Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0943 - Page 16 of 24 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation 1) It shall be possible to hold a timed event from the face panel of the processor 2) Timed event hold shall meet California Title 24 requirements 7. The panel shall receive ESTA DMX512-A control protocol. Addressing shall be set via the user interface button keypad with any relay being patched to any DMX control address a. 2,500V of optical isolation shall be provided between the DMX512 inputs and the control electronics as well as between control and power components b. The relays shall respond to control changes (DMX or Stations) in less than 25 milliseconds. DMX512 update speed shall be 40Hz c. Setting changes shall be able to be made across all, some, or just one selected relay in a single action from the face panel d. DMX data loss shall allow for levels/relays to be held for ever or for a specified time before switching to a lower priority source e. Initial Panel setup 1) The relay panel shall automatically detect the type of relay or dimmer installed in each location without need for manual configuration of the physical arrangement. — 2) Quick rack setup shall be available to apply address settings across all circuits for rack number, DMX Start Address, sACN universe, and sACN start address. 3) Emergency Setup Menu shall provide optional delays when emergency is activated or deactivated, and option to turn off non-emergency circuits shall be available. Record function shall allow circuits that are turned on to be added to the emergency setting E. Electrical 1. Relay Panels shall be available to support power input from: a. 120/208V three phase 4-wire plus ground b. 120/240V single phase 3-wire plus ground c. 277/480V, 230/400V and 240/415V three phase. 4-wire plus ground 2. Conduit Entry: a. Feeders: 1) Top or top-side (upper 6" of either side) 2) Bottom or bottom-side 6" of either side 3) Feeders shall enter through the top or bottom according to the orientation of the enclosure 4) Feeder entry shall be nearest to the location of the feeder lugs or main breaker b. Load: 1) Load wiring shall enter through the top or bottom of the enclosure 2) Load wiring shall enter through the top/bottom surface nearest to the breaker sub panel 3) Load wiring may also enter through left and/or right side provided a low voltage chase is not required through the same area. If class 2 chase is required, a field installable barrier panel shall be provided upon request. When installed, the left or right side of the panel, where the barrier has been installed, shall not permit load wiring c. Low Voltage: 1) Top or top-side (upper 6" of either side) 2) Bottom or bottom-side (bottom 6" of either side) 3) For low voltage conduit entry at the relay end of the cabinet, conduits shall be located at the outer 3" of the top/bottom panel d. Field installed low voltage channel shall be provided separately for installation on the left or right side of the panel to allow class 2 wiring to traverse the panel from top to bottom or bottom to top �- 3. All relays shall be mechanically latching 4. The relay shall be capable of switching 20A at up to 300V 5. The relay panel shall support a maximum feed size of 200 Amps 6. Relay panels shall support main circuit breaker options: a. Main breaker options shall be optional and available for purchase upon request b. Main breakers shall be field installable _ c. Main breakers shall be available in 100 and 200 Amps for 120V systems and 150 Amps for 277V systems Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0943 - Page 17 of 24 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation d. Series rated SCCR ratings apply as follows with appropriate main breaker: 1) 22,000A at 120/240V 2) 10,000A at 100A; 120/208V 3) 10,000A, 22,000 or 42,000 at 200A; 120/208V 4) 14,000A at 150A and 200A; 277V/480V 5) 65,000A at 200A; 277V/480V e. Main breakers shall allow the following range of wire sizes: 1) 1AWG-300kcmil at 120/240V 2) 3/0 to 300kcmil at 120/208V 3) 6AWG-300kcmil at 277V/480V F. Relay 1. Each relay shall have a manual override switch with on/off status indication 2. Relays shall be rated for use with: a. 16A Electronic Ballast loads © 120, 240 and 277V b. 20A Tungsten loads at 120, 240, and 277V c. 20A 277V Ballast (HID) d. Motor loads with ratings of 20 FLA @ 120V, 17 FLA @ 240V, and 14 FLA @ 277V 100,000A symmetrical SCCR 3. Isolation shall be 4000V RMS 4. Relays shall be latching state 5. Rated Life: a. 1,000,000 mechanical activations b. 100,000 cycles at full resistive load c. 30,000 cycles full motor, inductive, tungsten, and electronic (LED) d. Decreasing loading shall increase the rated life of the relay inversely proportional the square of the load 6. Relays shall support reporting of current usage with an accuracy of five percent of the connected load G. Dimmer Modules 1. Dimmer modules shall be available as either forward-phase or phase-adaptive 2. Dimmer modules shall be fully rated for loads up to 300W 3. By default, phase-adaptive dimmers shall automatically detect the required dimming mode based on connected loads and lock the mode in at power-up 4. The forward-phase dimmer shall support tungsten/incandescent, 2-wire fluorescent, and magnetic transformer loads 5. The phase-adaptive dimmer shall support tungsten/incandescent, line-drive LED, and electronic transformer loads 6. Panels without available dimmers that support magnetic loads shall not be acceptable 7. The panel shall support a maximum phase dimming load of 7,200W if populated fully with (24) 300W dimmer modules. Panels that do not support phase dimmers and relays combined in a single panel shall not be acceptable H. Relay Panel Accessories 1. A low voltage 0-10V dimming option shall provide up to 24 0-10v control outputs that are linked to relay circuits within the panel. Each output shall support up to 400mA of current sink per output 2. A contact input option shall provide 24 dry contact inputs to be linked for direct or group relay control, to activate a preset, or to activate a sequence. Controller software shall allow for normally open maintained, normally closed maintained, or momentary toggle _ 3. A DALI control option shall provide 24 control loops of broadcast DALI control, with each loop controlling up to 64 DALI devices 4. A RideThru option shall provide short-term power backup of control electronics by automatically engaging when power is lost, and recharging when normal power is present 5. A tamperproof hardware kit shall be available that provides center reject Torx head screws to prevent access to panel interior by unqualified individuals I. Main Breaker options shall be available as specified in Section E.6 Thermal Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0943 - Page 18 of 24 _ Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation 1. The panel shall be convection cooled. Panels that require the use of cooling fans shall not be acceptable 2. The panel shall operate safely in an environment having an ambient temperature between 32°F (0°C) and 104°F (40°C), and humidity between 5-95% non-condensing 2.08 DMX ETHERNET GATEWAY- FOUR PORT A. General 1. The lighting control gateway shall be a microprocessor-based unit specifically designed to provide DMX-512 control of lighting systems and transport of RDM configuration and status messages. The gateway shall permit DMX-512 data to be encoded, routed over an Ethernet network and decoded back to DMX-512. The unit shall be a Response Mk2 4-port DMX Gateway as provided by ETC, Inc. 2. Gateways shall communicate over Ethernet directly with at least ETC, Inc.' s entertainment and architectural lighting control products and other Ethernet interfaces. 3. Connections shall be made between gateways, consoles, architectural systems, and PCs over standard Ethernet distribution systems using 10/100BaseT. 4. The gateway shall support multiple protocols including: a. ANSI E1.17 Architecture for Control Networks (ACN) b. ANSI E1.31 Streaming ACN (sACN) c. ANSI E1.11 USITT DMX512-A d. ANSI E1.20 Remote Device Management (RDM) 5. The gateway shall be tested to UL standards and labeled ETL Listed. 6. The gateway shall be RoHS Compliant (lead-free). 7. The gateway shall be CE compliant. 8. The gateway shall have a graphic OLED display and four buttons for identification (soft-labeling), configuration, status reporting and troubleshooting a. Labeling shall be user configurable using ANSI E1.17 Architecture for Control Network (ACN), or a purpose built software configuration tool. b. The OLED display shall show DMX port configuration indication as well as indicate the presence of valid signal. c. Gateways that do not indicate port configuration (input/output) and valid data shall not be acceptable. 9. Each gateway shall have power and data activity LEDs on the front of the gateway B. DMX Ports 1. DMX Ports shall comply with the requirements of ANSI E1.11 USITT DMX512-A standards. 2. Each DMX port shall be software or locally-configurable for either input or output functionality. 3. DMX input shall be optically-isolated from the gateway electronics. 4. DMX Port shall provide at least 500V isolation to ground and the rest of the electronics 5. Each port shall incorporate one DMX512-A Connection a. Gateways shall be available with the following connection options: 5-pin male XLR, 5-pin female XLR, Ethercon RJ-45, or terminal strip for DMX wiring. 6. Network gateways that do not indicate input/output port configuration or presence of valid data shall not be accepted C. Processor 1. Each gateway shall have sufficient processing power to manage up to 63,999 universes (32,767,488 addresses). 2. Maximum delay time from input to output shall not be greater than one packet time (approximately 22 mSec.). 3. A minimum DMX update rate of 40Hz shall be sustained under all conditions unless specifically configured for a slower rate for the sake of compatibility with 3rd party DMX devices. D. Mechanical 1. The Gateway shall be fabricated of 16-gauge steel, finished in fine-texture, scratch-resistant, black powder coat (RAL 9004). 2. The gateway shall support table top use Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0943 - Page 19 of 24 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation 3. The gateway shall support field configuration allowing the Ethernet port to be either on the front or the rear of the unit 4. Optional accessories for rack-mount and pipe applications shall be available from the manufacturer. These accessories shall support installation by an end-user E. Power 1. Power for the gateway shall be provided over the Category 5 (or better) cable, utilizing IEEE 802.3af compliant Power over Ethernet (PoE). Power consumption using shall not be greater than 7 watts. an 2. Ansupply optional of op low-voltage ane operating range of 12-24VDC. The PoC power input shall be available ts isolated Power supplyshall be provided Y capable by the gateway manufacturer. 3. The gateway electronics shall be electrically isolated from the power supplied over the Category 5 (or better) cable. F. Configuration 1. The Gateway must support local or remote configuration. 2. Each gateway on the network shall be individually configurable using freely available software configuration tools. The primary configuration tool shall be Net3 Concert configuration software running on a network connected PC. The PC shall only be required for configuration, and shall not be required for normal operation of the system. 3. Each port of the DMX gateway shall control up to 512 DMX addresses, within the confines of 63,999 universes. 4. The specific DMX data input or output by the gateway shall be freely configurable by the user. 5. Duplicate outputs of DMX lines (DMX splitter) and discrete outputs shall be fully supported. 6. Multiple DMX universes may be configured with any length up to 512 total addresses. Any range of DMX input addresses shall support selection and routing to the specified sACN output. 7. Multiple sACN sources may be combined with a priority may be assigned to each source sending data to the gateway 8. All relevant routing information shall be stored in non-volatile memory at each gateway. The system shall recover from a power outage without requiring the PC to be online. Gateways that do not support non-volatile storage of data routing shall not be accepted. G. Network 1. Communications physical layer shall comply with IEEE 802.3i for 10BASE-T, 802.3u for 100BASE-TX and 802.3af for Power over Ethernet specifications 2. All network cabling shall be Category 5 (or better), conforming to TIA-568A/B, and shall be installed by a qualified network installer. 3. Data transport shall utilize the TCP/IP suite of protocols to transfer the DMX data. 4. ANSI E1.17 Architecture for Control Networks (ACN) and streaming ACN (sACN) shall be supported. Gateways that do not support ANSI E1.17 shall not be acceptable. 5. Each DMX gateway shall control up to 512 DMX addresses, per DMX port within the .-- confines of up to 63,999 universes (32,767,488 addresses) using Streaming ACN (sACN). a. Any range of DMX addresses may be selected for each universe. b. Multiple sources shall be supported by prioritized Highest Takes Precedence (HTP with priority). Each source shall support assignment of priority to allow override of default HTP behavior. c. Each DMX port shall support its own universe and start address. 6. Gateways shall have built in DMX merger capability on a universe or channel-by-channel basis. 7. Gateways shall support have built in priority on a per-universe or channel-by-channel basis. Gateways that do not support prioritized merging of multiple network sources at independent priorities shall not be accepted. H. Environmental 1. The ambient operating temperature shall be 0° to 40°C (32° to 104°F). 2. The storage temperature shall be -40° to 70°C (-40° to 158°F). 3. The operating humidity shall be 5% - 95% non-condensing. I. Accessories Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0943 - Page 20 of 24 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation 1. Hanging bracket kit shall allow unit to be mounted in three orientations a. U-Bolt or C-Clamp mounting hardware shall be available 2. One E.I.A. rack space mounting bracket kit shall support either one or two complete units and allow for up to eight ports of DMX 3. Front Access Panel kit shall allow the connectors on the rear of the gateway to be accessed from the front of an equipment rack. Options for 5-pin XLR style connectors that support DMX input or output shall be available 4. A Universal Power Supply with international plug-set shall be available. Multiple power supplies shall be able to fit in a vertically stacked power strip. 5. ETC Net3 Concert Configuration and monitoring Software J. System Requirements 1. Provide the quantity and type of gateways required, as scheduled. Gateways and software shall be as manufactured by ETC Inc. of Middleton, WI. 2.09 2.09 GENERAL NETWORK _ A. General 1. The Electronic Theatre Controls Net3 network shall provide data distribution over TCP/IP Ethernet networks. Data shall be layer 3 routable. Systems using proprietary formats or formats other than 10/100/100Mbit wired Ethernet or non-layer 3 routable networks shall not be accepted. 2. Connections shall be made between consoles, face panels, architectural processors, dimmers, Net3 Gateways, and computers over standard Ethernet distribution systems using 100BaseT, 100BaseFL, or greater wiring. All installations shall conform to established Ethernet wiring practice, and installation shall be performed by contractors qualified to do this type of work. All wiring shall be tested at Category 5e or higher for full bandwidth operation to the appropriate IEEE standard. 3. The Lighting Control system must be supplied by a single manufacturer and must have seamless integration over Ethernet between the Entertainment and Architectural lighting control. B. Capacities 1. The network shall support DMX routing, patching, and prioritization for up to 63,399 universes (32,767,488 DMX addresses). Each address may be input or output from any port on any DMX gateway in the system. DMX input, routing and output shall be specifically supported on the system from multiple sources and locations up to the maximum number of gateways supported by the Ethernet topology. 2. The network shall support multiple network hosts including consoles, gateways, dimming racks, computers, file servers, printers, and architectural control processors with discrete command lines and control. The lighting network shall support multiple venues within a system and discrete systems on the same network. C. System Configuration and Monitoring 1. Network device configuration shall be via Net3 Gateway Configuration Editor (GCE) software and/or ANSI E1.17 Architecture for Control Networks (ACN). 2. Patch addresses shall support viewing and manipulation via ANSI E1.17 ACN. a. The system shall permit complete user flexibility allowing the system operator to patch each DMX input address to any ANSI E1.31 streaming ACN address, and DMX output to span streaming ACN universes. b. The lighting system shall support assignment of DMX offsets, truncation of DMX universes, and provide choice of DMX port prioritization. c. The lighting system shall support the DD start code extension to ANSI E1.31 which provides priority per address such that multiple control sources can share universes with discrete control per address. d. Lighting systems that do not support the above mentioned address patching capabilities shall not be suitable. 3. The system shall allow assignable labels for all network devices to allow easy identification by system users. 4. Each network device shall have a discrete and unique IP address provided automatically by the software. The user may edit this IP address. Systems that do not support automated IP allocation with IP collision avoidance, and systems that do not allow Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0943 - Page 21 of 24 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation complete reconfiguration of the above mentioned features over ANSI E1.17 ACN shall not be acceptable. 5. All configuration data for each network device shall be held at the device and system operation shall not require continuous on-line operation of the network configuration software. 6. Lighting console operators shall be able to backup the network configurations in the lighting control console. In the event of a network device failure, the operator shall be able to apply the configuration of the failed device to a replacement device of the same type without manually reentering settings. Systems that do not support configuration backup as described above shall not be accepted. 7. Architectural and Entertainment systems connected to the same network shall be capable of arbitrating control over E1.31 Streaming ACN (sACN) level data. The system shall be capable of alternating control of individual address data between architectural and entertainment systems without intervention by the user. The user shall dictate the conditions under which system shall automatically take control. The network shall allow user Systems ich uire rect user intervention to ate control ofdimmers betweenl architectural hand entertainmentgdl lighting system s d ms shall lloc not be accepted. 8. The Net3 network shall allow multiple DMX input sources to be prioritized on the same universe as network native sources using E1.31 Streaming ACN prioritization. Multiple DMX inputs may be assigned to the same streaming ACN address (this provides multi-source control for a particular address). Likewise, the system shall support E1.31 prioritization of multiple simultaneous network sources. Systems that cannot prioritize multiple DMX inputs and multiple native network sources on a network shall not be deemed suitable. 9. The lighting network shall allow each DMX input address to be assigned a priority on the network allowing each DMX control level coming into the system to participate in full arbitration. Addresses with the highest priority shall have control, with lower priority addresses being ignored. Addresses assigned the same numeric priority, between 1 and 200, shall respond in highest level takes precedence (HTP) manor. The network shall require a valid DMX signal present at the input to initiate prioritization. Systems that do not allow for prioritized HTP for DMX inputs to the network shall not be allowed. D. Operational Features 1. Each DMX gateway shall control up to 512 DMX addresses per port, within the confines of up to 63,999 DMX universes (32,747,488 address). The specific DMX data input or output by the gateway shall be configurable by the user. 2. Duplicate outputs of DMX data (DMX splitter) and discrete outputs shall be fully supported. 3. Merging of multiple DMX input sources on a single gateway without gateway with DMX output on the same gateway shall be supported without connection to the network. The gateway shall support assignment of priority to each input source independently 4. File transmission, synchronization and access to software shall be supported. PART 3. EXECUTION 3.01 3.01 INSTALLATION A. It shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor to receive and store the necessary materials and equipment for installation of the dimmer system. It is the intent of these specifications and plans to include everything required for proper and complete installation and operation of the dimming system, even though every item may not be specifically mentioned. The contractor shall deliver on a timely basis to other trades any equipment that must be installed during construction. B. The electrical contractor shall be responsible for field measurements and coordinating physical size of all equipment with the architectural requirements of the spaces into which they are to be installed. C. The electrical contractor shall install all lighting control and dimming equipment in accordance with manufacturers approved shop drawings. D. All branch load circuits shall be live tested before connecting the loads to the dimmer system load terminals. Section 26 0943 - Page 22 of 24 .- Project No. 19-23188 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation 3.02 3.02 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A. Upon completion of the installation, including testing of load circuits, the contractor shall notify the dimming system manufacturer that the system is available for formal checkout. B. Notification shall be provided in writing, two weeks prior to the time that factory-trained personnel are needed on the job site. C. No power is to be applied to the dimming system unless specifically authorized by written instructions from the manufacturer. D. The purchaser shall be liable for any return visits by the factory engineer as a result of incomplete or incorrect wiring. E. Upon completion of the formal check-out, the factory engineer shall demonstrate operation maintenance of the system to the owners representatives. Training shall not exceed four working hours. Additional training shall be available upon request. p and 3.03 3.03 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer shall warrant products under normal use and service to be free from defects inmaterials and workmanship for a period of two years from date of delivery. B. Warranty shall cover repair or replacement of such parts determined defective upon inspection. C. Warranty does not cover any product or part of a product subject to accident, negligence, p alteration, abuse or misuse. Warranty does not cover any accessories or parts not supplied b the manufacturer. without D. Warranty shall not cover any labor expended or materials used to repair any equipment y manufacturers prior written authorization. END OF SECTION Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 0943 - Page 23 of 24 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation SECTION 26 2200 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. General purpose transformers. B. K-factor transformers rated for nonlinear loads. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete equipment pads. B. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. C. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. D. Section 26 0533.13 - Conduit for Electrical Systems: Flexible conduit connections. E. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 10 CFR 431, Subpart K- Energy Efficiency Program for Certain Commercial and Industrial Equipment- Distribution Transformers; Current Edition. B. IEEE C57.94- IEEE Recommended Practice for Installation, Application, Operation, and Maintenance of Dry-Type General Purpose Distribution and Power Transformers; 1982 (R2006). C. IEEE C57.96- Guide for Loading Dry-Type n and Power D. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015 Transformers; 2013. E. NECA 409- Standard for Installing and Maintaining Dry-Type Transformers; 2009. F. NEMA ST 20 - Dry-Type Transformers for General Applications; 2014. G. NEMA 250- Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2018. H. NFPA 70- National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. I. UL 506- Standard for Specialty Transformers; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. J. UL 1561 - Standard for Dry-Type General Purpose and Power Transformers; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork, piping. equipment, or other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and working clearances required by NFPA 70. 2. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance requirements of the actual equipment to be installed. 3. Coordinate the work with placement of supports, anchors, etc. required for mounting. 4. Verify with manufacturer that conductor terminations are suitable for use with the conductors to be installed. 5. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Include voltage, kVA, impedance, tap configurations, insulation system class and rated temperature rise, efficiency, sound level, enclosure ratings, outline and support point dimensions, weight, required clearances, service condition requirements, and installed features. 1. Vibration Isolators: Include attachment method and rated load and deflection. C. Shop Drawings: Provide dimensioned plan and elevation views of transformers and adjacent equipment with all required clearances indicated. Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 2200 - Page 1 of 6 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product. E. Maintenance Data: Include recommendedlocations amsnce oft rocedures rme sand intervals. F. Project Record Documents: Record actual 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70. specified in B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the productsp this section with minimum three years documented experience. ation C. Product Listing Organizationzedgualifications: An Laboratory (NRTL)gandzaccceptable to aut by horities haSHA vs a ing ng Nationally Recognized Testing jurisdiction. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING an additional heavy canvas or A. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic. nstructions. Lift nly with lugs B. ded for the purpose. in ace with manufacturer's avo d damageen toltransformer internal components, enclosure, the Handle carefully and finish. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Ambient Temperature: Do not exceed the following maximum temperatures during and after installation of transformers. 1. Greater than 10 kVA: 104 degrees F maximum. 2. Less than 10 kVA: 77 degrees F maximum. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Furnismernt used for this projeansformers produced ctby the same mnufarer as the and obta ned faom a single supplierother electrical distribution equip 2.02 TRANSFORMERS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Description: Factory-assembled, dry type transformers for 60 Hz operation designed and manufactured in accordance with NEMA ST 20 and listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. B. Unless noted otherwise, transformer ratings indicated are for continuous loading according to IEEE C57.96 under the following service conditions: 1. Altitude: Less than 3,300 feet. 2. Ambient Temperature: a. Greater than 10 kVA: Not exceeding 104 degrees F. b. Less than 10 kVA: Not exceeding 77 degrees F. C. Core: High grade, non-aging silicon e flux densitiesl with g magnetic etaptially bellity ow satdurationypoint,sis even and eddy current losses. Keep magneticat 10 percent primary overvoltage. Tightly clamp core laminations to prevent plate movement and maintain consistent pressure throughout core length. D. Impregnate core and coil assembly with non-hydroscopic thermo-setting varnish to effectively seal out moisture and other contaminants. E. Basic Impulse Level: 10 kV. F. Ground core and coil assembly to enclosure by means of a visible flexible copeer grounding strap. G. Isolate core and coil from enclosure using vibration-absorbing mounts. H. Nameplate: Include transformer connection data, ratings, wiring diagrams, and overload capacity based on rated winding temperature rise. Section 26 2200 - Page 2 of 6 -- Project No. 19-23188 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation _.. 2.03 GENERAL PURPOSE TRANSFORMERS -- A. Description: Self-cooled, two winding transformers listed and labeled as complying with UL 506 or UL 1561; ratings as indicated on the drawings. B. Primary Voltage: 480 volts delta, 3 phase. C. Secondary Voltage: 208Y/120 volts, 3 phase. D. Insulation System and Allowable Average Winding Temperature Rise: 1. Less than 15 kVA: Class 180 degrees C insulation system with 115 degrees C average winding temperature rise. 2. 15 kVA and Larger: Class 220 degrees C insulation system with 150 degrees C average winding temperature rise. E. Coil Conductors: Continuous aluminum windings with terminations brazed or welded. F. Winding Taps: 1. Less than 3 kVA: None. 2. 3 kVA through 15 kVA: Two 5 percent full capacity primary taps below rated voltage. 3. 15 kVA through 300 kVA: Two 2.5 percent full capacity primary taps above and four 2.5 percent full capacity primary taps below rated voltage. 4. 500 kVA and Larger: Two 2.5 percent full capacity primary taps above and two 2.5 percent full capacity primary taps below rated voltage. G. Energy Efficiency: Comply with 10 CFR 431, Subpart K. H. Sound Levels: Standard sound levels complying with NEMA ST 20. I. Mounting Provisions: 1. Less than 15 kVA: Suitable for wall mounting. 2. 15 kVA through 75 kVA: Suitable for wall, floor, or trapeze mounting. 3. Larger than 75 kVA: Suitable for floor mounting. J. Transformer Enclosure: Comply with NEMA ST 20. 1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the following installation locations: a. Indoor clean, dry locations: Type 2. 2. Construction: Steel. a. Less than 15 kVA: Totally enclosed, non-ventilated. b. 15 kVA and Larger: Ventilated. 3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard grey, suitable for outdoor installations. 4. Provide lifting eyes or brackets. K. Accessories: 1. Mounting Brackets: Provide manufacturer's standard brackets. 2. Weathershield Kits: Provide for ventilated transformers installed outdoors to provide a listed NEMA 250, type 3R assembly. 3. Lug Kits: Sized as required for termination of conductors as indicated on the drawings. 2.04 K-FACTOR TRANSFORMERS RATED FOR NONLINEAR LOADS A. Description: Self-cooled, two winding transformers listed and labeled as complying with UL 1561, and designed to supply nonlinear loads to the degree designated by the UL defined K-factor; ratings as indicated on the drawings. B. Primary Voltage: 480 volts delta, 3 phase. C. Secondary Voltage: 208Y/120 volts, 3 phase. D. K-factor Rating: K-4, or higher. E. Insulation System and Allowable Average Winding Temperature Rise: Class 220 degrees C insulation system with 150 degrees C average winding temperature rise. F. Coil Conductors: Continuous aluminum windings with terminations brazed or welded. Individually insulate secondary conductors and arrange to minimize hysteresis and eddy current losses at harmonic frequencies. Size secondary neutral conductor at twice the secondary phase conductor ampacity. Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 2200 - Page 3 of 6 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation G. Winding Taps: Two 2.5 percent full capacity primary taps above and four 2.5 percent full capacity primary taps below rated voltage. H. Neutral Bus: Sized to accommodate twice the rated secondary current. I. Energy Efficiency: Comply with 10 CFR 431, Subpart K. J. Sound Levels: Standard sound levels complying with NEMA ST 20. K. Mounting Provisions: 1. Up to 75 kVA: Suitable for wall, floor, or trapeze mounting. 2. Larger than 75 kVA: Suitable for floor mounting. L. Transformer Enclosure: Comply with NEMA ST 20. 1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the following installation locations: 2. Construction: Steel, ventilated. 3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard grey, suitable for outdoor installations. 4. Provide lifting eyes or brackets. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. B. Verify that suitable support frames and anchors are installed where required and that mounting surfaces are ready to receive transformers. C. Perform pre-installation tests and inspections on transformers per manufacturer's instructions and as specified in NECA 409. Correct deficiencies prior to installation. D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Install transformers in accordance with NECA 409 and IEEE C57.94. D. Use flexible conduit, under the provisions of Section 26 0533.13, 2 feet minimum length, for connections to transformer case. Make conduit connections to side panel of enclosure. E. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances as specified on transformer nameplate and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NFPA 70. F. Install transformers plumb and level. G. Transformer Support: 1. Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 0529, where not furnished by transformer manufacturer. 2. Use integral transformer flanges, accessory brackets furnished by manufacturer, or field-fabricated supports to support wall-mounted transformers. 3. Unless otherwise indicated, mount floor-mounted transformers on properly sized 3 inch high concrete pad constructed in accordance with Section 03 3000. 4. Use trapeze hangers assembled from threaded rods and metal channel (strut) to support suspended transformers. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or other systems. H. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526. I. Remove shipping braces and adjust bolts that attach the core and coil mounting bracket to the enclosure according to manufacturer's recommendations in order to reduce audible noise transmission. J. Where not factory-installed, install lugs sized as required for termination of conductors as indicated. K. Where furnished as a separate accessory, install transformer weathershield per manufacturer's instructions. L. Identify transformers in accordance with Section 26 0553. Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 2200 - Page 4 of 6 ... Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Measure primary and secondary voltages and make appropriate tap adjustments. B. Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommended torque settings. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean dirt and debris from transformer components according to manufacturer's instructions. B. Repair scratched or marred exterior surfaces to match original factory finish. END OF SECTION Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 2200 - Page 5 of 6 �-' Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation SECTION 26 2413 SWITCHBOARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES �- A. Low-voltage (600 V and less) switchboards and associated accessories for service and distribution applications. B. Overcurrent protective devices for switchboards. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. FS W-C-375 - Circuit Breakers, Molded Case; Branch Circuit and Service; Federal Specification; Revision E, 2013. B. IEEE C57.13 - IEEE Standard Requirements for Instrument Transformers; 2008. C. NECA 1 -Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015. D. NECA 400 -Standard for Installing and Maintaining Switchboards; 2007. E. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2018. F. NEMA PB 2 - Deadfront Distribution Switchboards; 2011. G. NEMA PB 2.1 - General Instructions for Proper Handling, Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of Deadfront Distribution Switchboards Rated 600 Volts or Less; 2013. H. NETA ATS -Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems; 2017. I. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. J. UL 489 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and Circuit Breaker Enclosures; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. K. UL 869A- Reference Standard for Service Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. �- L. UL 891 - Switchboards; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. M. UL 1053 - Ground-Fault Sensing and Relaying Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: ` 1. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork, piping, equipment, or other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and working clearances required by NFPA 70. 2. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance requirements of the actual equipment to be installed. 3. Verify with manufacturer that conductor terminations are suitable for use with the conductors to be installed. 4. Coordinate with manufacturer to provide shipping splits suitable for the dimensional constraints of the installation. 5. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents Obtain direction before proceeding with work. --� 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for switchboards, enclosures, overcurrent protective devices, and other installed components and accessories. 1. Include characteristic trip curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device upon request. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, voltage, bus ampacities, overcurrent protective device arrangement and sizes, short circuit current ratings, conduit entry locations, conductor terminal information, and installed features and accessories. Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 2413 - Page 1 of 6 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation 1. Include dimensioned plan and elevation views of switchboards and adjacent equipment with all required clearances indicated. 2. Include wiring diagrams showing all factory and field connections. 3. Clearly indicate whether proposed short circuit current ratings are fully rated or, where acceptable, series rated systems. D. Product Data: Provide electrical characteristics including voltage, frame size and trip ratings, fault current withstand ratings, and time-current curves of all equipment and components. E. Shop Drawings: Indicate front and side views of enclosures with overall dimensions shown; conduit entrance locations and requirements; nameplate legends; size and number of bus bars per phase, neutral, and ground; and switchboard instrument details. F. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations of switchboards and final equipment settings. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. C. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store switchboards in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NECA 400, and NEMA PB 2.1. B. Store in a clean, dry space having a uniform temperature to prevent condensation (including outdoor switchboards, which are not weatherproof until completely and properly installed). Where necessary, provide temporary enclosure space heaters or temporary power for permanent factory-installed space heaters. C. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic. D. Handle carefully to avoid damage to switchboard internal components, enclosure, and finish. E. Deliver in 48 inch maximum width shipping splits, individually wrapped for protection and mounted on shipping skids. ._ F. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Switchboards: 1. Eaton Corporation: www.eaton.com/#sle. 2. Schneider Electric; Square D Products: www.schneider-electric.us/#sle. 3. Siemens Industry, Inc: www.usa.siemens.com/#sle. 4. American Midwest Power-AMP. 2.02 SWITCHBOARDS A. Provide switchboards consisting of all required components, control power transformers, instrumentation and control wiring, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete operating system. B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. C. Description: Dead-front switchboard assemblies complying with NEMA PB 2, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 891; ratings, configurations and features as indicated on the drawings. D. Front-Connected Switchboards: 1. Main Device(s): Individually-mounted. 2. Feeder Devices: Panel/group-mounted. Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 2413 - Page 2 of 6 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation 3. Arrangement: Front accessible only (not rear accessible), rear aligned. 4. Gutter Access: Bolted covers. E. Service Entrance Switchboards: 1. Listed and labeled as suitable for use as service equipment according to UL 869A. 2. For solidly-grounded wye systems, provide factory-installed main bonding jumper between neutral and ground busses, and removable neutral disconnecting link for testing purposes. 3. Comply with Utility Company requirements for electrical service. F. Service Conditions: 1. Provide switchboards and associated components suitable for operation under the following service conditions without derating: a. Altitude: Less than 6,600 feet. b. Ambient Temperature: 1) Switchboards Containing Molded Case or Insulated Case Circuit Breakers: Between 23 degrees F and 104 degrees F. 2. Provide switchboards and associated components suitable for operation at indicated ratings under the service conditions at the installed location. G. Short Circuit Current Rating: 1. Provide switchboards with listed short circuit current rating not less than the available fault current at the installed location as indicated on the drawings. 2. Listed series ratings are not acceptable. H. Main Devices: Configure for top or bottom incoming feed as indicated or as required for the installation. Provide separate pull section and/or top-mounted pullbox as indicated or as required to facilitate installation of incoming feed. I. Bussing: Sized in accordance with UL 891 temperature rise requirements. 1. Through bus (horizontal cross bus) to be fully rated through full length of switchboard (non-tapered). Tapered bus is not permitted. 2. Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus through full length of switchboard, with a suitable lug for each feeder and branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. -- 3. Phase and Neutral Bus Material: Copper. 4. Ground Bus Material: Copper. J. Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed. 1. Line Conductor Terminations: a. Main and Neutral Lug Material: Copper, suitable for terminating copper conductors only. b. Main and Neutral Lug Type: Mechanical. 2. Load Conductor Terminations: a. Lug Material: Copper, suitable for terminating copper conductors only. b. Lug Type: K. Enclosures: 1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the following installation locations: 2. Finish: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated. L. Future Provisions: 1. Prepare designated spaces for future installation of devices including bussing, connectors, mounting hardware and all other required provisions. 2. Equip distribution sections with full height vertical bussing to accommodate maximum utilization of space for devices. M. Surge Protective Devices: Where factory-installed, internally mounted surge protective devices are provided in accordance with Section 26 4300, list switchboards as a complete assembly including surge protective device. N. Ground Fault Protection: Where ground-fault protection is indicated, provide system listed and labeled as complying with UL 1053. 1. Where overcurrent protective devices equipped with integral ground fault protection are used, provide separate neutral current sensor where applicable. Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 2413 - Page 3 of 6 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation O. Arc Flash Energy-Reducing Maintenance Switching: For circuit breakers rated 1200 A or higher, provide a local accessory switch with status indicator light that permits selection of a maintenance mode with alternate electronic trip unit settings for reduced fault clearing time. P. Owner Metering: 1. Provide microprocessor-based digital electrical metering system including all instrument transformers, wiring, and connections necessary for measurements specified. 2. Measured Parameters: a. Voltage (Volts AC): Line-to-line, line-to-neutral for each phase. b. Current(Amps): For each phase and neutral. c. Frequency (Hz). d. Real power (kW): For each phase, 3-phase total. e. Reactive power (kVAR): For each phase, 3-phase total. f. Apparent power (kVA): For each phase, 3-phase total. g. Power factor. 3. Meter Accuracy: Plus/minus 1.0 percent. Q. Instrument Transformers: 1. Comply with IEEE C57.13. 2. Select suitable ratio, burden, and accuracy as required for connected devices. 3. Current Transformers: Connect secondaries to shorting terminal blocks. 4. Potential Transformers: Include primary and secondary fuses with disconnecting means. R. Description: NEMA PB 2 switchboard with electrical ratings and configurations as indicated and specified. S. Ratings: �- 1. Voltage: 277/480 volts. 2. Configuration: Three phase, four wire, grounded. 3. Integrated Equipment Rating: 65,000 rms amperes symmetrical. T. Main Section Devices: Panel mounted. U. Distribution Section Devices: Panel mounted. V. Bus Material: Copper, standard size.W. Bus Connections: Bolted, accessible from front for maintenance. X. Ground Bus: Extend length of switchboard. Y. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: Integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole.Z. Solid-State Molded Case Circuit Breakers: With electronic sensing, timing and tripping circuits for adjustable current settings; UL listed. 1. Ground fault trip, ground fault sensing integral with circuit breaker. 2. Instantaneous trip. 3. Adjustable short time trip. AA. Line and Load Terminations: Accessible from the front only of the switchboard, suitable for the _ conductor materials and sizes indicated. 1. Size: 18 inch wide, depth and height to match switchboard. 2. Arrange as shown on Drawings. AB. Future Provisions: Fully equip spaces for future devices with bussing and bus connections, suitably insulated and braced for short circuit currents. Provide continuous current rating as indicated. AC. Enclosure: Type 1 - General Purpose. 1. Align sections at front and rear. 2.03 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. Circuit Breakers: 1. Interrupting Capacity: a. Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity as required to provide the short circuit current rating indicated, but not less than specified minimum requirements. Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 2413 - Page 4 of 6 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation b. Fully Rated Systems: Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity not less than the short circuit current rating indicated. 2. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: a. Description: Quick-make, quick-break, over center toggle, trip-free, trip-indicating circuit breakers; listed and labeled as complying with UL 489, and complying with FS W-C-375 where applicable; ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on the drawings. b. Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers: For each pole, furnish thermal inverse time tripping element for overload protection and magnetic instantaneous tripping element for short circuit protection. 1) Provide field-adjustable magnetic instantaneous trip setting for circuit breaker frame sizes 225 amperes and larger. c. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Furnish solid state, microprocessor-based, true rms sensing trip units. 1) Provide the following field-adjustable trip response settings: (a) Long time pickup, adjustable by replacing interchangeable trip unit or by setting dial. (b) Long time delay. (c) Short time pickup and delay. (d) Instantaneous pickup. (e) Ground fault pickup and delay where ground fault protection is indicated. 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements. B. Factory test switchboards according to NEMA PB 2, including the following production (routine) tests on each switchboard assembly or component: 1. Dielectric tests. 2. Mechanical operation tests. 3. Grounding of instrument transformer cases test. 4. Electrical operation and control wiring tests, including polarity and sequence tests. 5. Ground-fault sensing equipment test. C. Shop inspect and test switchboard according to NEMA PB 2. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install switchboards in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship), NECA 400, and NEMA PB 2.1. C. Arrange equipment to provide required clearances and maintenance access, including accommodations for any drawout devices. D. Where switchboard is indicated to be mounted with inaccessible side against wall, provide minimum clearance of 1/2 inch between switchboard and wall. E. Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 0529. F. Install switchboards plumb and level. G. Unless otherwise indicated, mount switchboards on properly sized 4 inch high concrete pad constructed in accordance with Section 03 3000. H. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526. I. Install all field-installed devices, components, and accessories. J. Where accessories are not self-powered, provide control power source as indicated or as required to complete installation. K. Set field-adjustable ground fault protection pickup and time delay settings as indicated. '-' L. Provide filler plates to cover unused spaces in switchboards. Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 2413 - Page 5 of 6 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation M. Install switchboard in locations shown on drawings, according to NEMA PB 2.1. N. Install in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 400. O. Tighten accessible bus connections and mechanical fasteners after placing switchboard. _ 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements. B. Disconnect surge protective devices (SPDs) prior to performing any high potential testing. — Replace SPDs damaged by performing high potential testing with SPDs connected. C. Before energizing switchboard, perform insulation resistance testing in accordance with NECA 400 and NEMA PB 2.1. D. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS; Section 7.1. E. Molded Case and Insulated Case Circuit Breakers: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.6.1.1 for all main circuit breakers and circuit breakers larger than amperes. Tests listed as optional are not required. F. Ground Fault Protection Systems: Test in accordance with manufacturer's instructions as required by NFPA 70. 1. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.14. The insulation-resistance test on control wiring listed as optional is not required. G. Meters: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.11.2. H. Instrument Transformers: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.10. The dielectric withstand tests on primary windings with secondary windings connected to ground listed as optional are not required. — I. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective switchboards or associated components. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommended torque settings. B. Adjust alignment of switchboard covers and doors. — C. Adjust all operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement. D. Tighten bolted bus connections in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E. Adjust circuit breaker trip and time delay settings to values indicated. F. Adjust circuit breaker trip and time delay settings to values as instructed by Architect. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean dirt and debris from switchboard enclosures and components according to manufacturer's instructions. B. Repair scratched or marred surfaces to match original factory finish. _ END OF SECTION Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 2413 - Page 6 of 6 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation SECTION 26 2416 PANELBOARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Lighting and appliance panelboards. B. Overcurrent protective devices for panelboards. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. B. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. C. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015. B. NECA 407 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Panelboards; 2009. C. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2018 D. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards; 2011. E. NEMA PB 1.1 - General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less; 2013. F. NETA ATS -Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems; 2017. G. NFPA 70- National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. H. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. I. UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. J. UL 67 - Panelboards; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. K. UL 869A- Reference Standard for Service Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork, piping, equipment, or other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and working clearances for electrical equipment required by NFPA 70. 2. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance requirements of the actual equipment to be installed. 3. Verify with manufacturer that conductor terminations are suitable for use with the conductors to be installed. 4. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for panelboards, enclosures, overcurrent protective devices, and other installed components and accessories. 1. Include characteristic trip curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device upon request. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity, overcurrent protective device arrangement and sizes, short circuit current ratings, conduit entry locations, conductor terminal information, and installed features and accessories. Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 2416 - Page 1 of 4 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation 1. Include dimensioned plan and elevation views of panelboards and adjacent equipment with all required clearances indicated. 2. Include wiring diagrams showing all factory and field connections. D. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations of panelboards and actual installed circuiting arrangements. E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Panelboard Keys: Two of each different key. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. C. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Receive; inspect, handle, and store panelboards in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NECA 407. B. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic. C. Handle carefully in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to avoid damage to panelboard internal components, enclosure, and finish. ._ PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Eaton Corporation: www.eaton.com/#sle. B. Schneider Electric; Square D Products: www.schneider-electric.us/#sle. C. Siemens Industry, Inc: www.usa.siemens.com. D. Source Limitations: Furnish panelboards and associated components produced by the same manufacturer as the other electrical distribution equipment used for this project and obtained from a single supplier. 2.02 PANELBOARDS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. B. Unless otherwise indicated, provide products suitable for continuous operation under the following service conditions: 1. Altitude: Less than 6,600 feet. 2. Ambient Temperature: _ C. Short Circuit Current Rating: 1. Provide panelboards with listed short circuit current rating not less than the available fault current at the installed location as indicated on the drawings. 2. Listed series ratings are not acceptable. D. Panelboards Used for Service Entrance: Listed and labeled as suitable for use as service equipment according to UL 869A. E. Mains: Configure for top or bottom incoming feed as indicated or as required for the installation. F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Replaceable without disturbing adjacent devices. G. Bussing: Sized in accordance with UL 67 temperature rise requirements. ,^ 1. Provide fully rated neutral bus unless otherwise indicated, with a suitable lug for each feeder or branch circuit requiring a neutral connection. 2. Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus in each panelboard, with a suitable lug for each feeder and branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. H. Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed. Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 2416 - Page 2 of 4 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation I. Enclosures: Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E. 1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the following installation locations: a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Type 1. b. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R. 2. Boxes: Galvanized steel unless otherwise indicated. a. Provide wiring gutters sized to accommodate the conductors to be installed. 3. Fronts: 4. Lockable Doors: All locks keyed alike unless otherwise indicated. J. Future Provisions: Prepare all unused spaces for future installation of devices including bussing, connectors, mounting hardware and all other required provisions. K. Load centers are not acceptable. 2.03 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory test panelboards according to NEMA PB 1. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. B. Verify that the ratings and configurations of the panelboards and associated components are consistent with the indicated requirements. C. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive panelboards. D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship). B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Install panelboards in accordance with NECA 407 and NEMA PB 1.1. D. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NFPA 70. E. Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 0529. F. Install panelboards plumb. G. Mount panelboards such that the highest position of any operating handle for circuit breakers or switches does not exceed 79 inches above the floor or working platform. H. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526. -'� I. Install all field-installed branch devices, components, and accessories. J. Provide filler plates to cover unused spaces in panelboards. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements. B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4. C. Test GFCI circuit breakers to verify proper operation. D. Test AFC] circuit breakers to verify proper operation. E. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective panelboards or associated components. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommended torque settings. B. Adjust alignment of panelboard fronts. Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 2416 - Page 3 of 4 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation C. Load Balancing: For each panelboard, rearrange circuits such that the difference between each measured steady state phase load does not exceed 20 percent and adjust circuit directories accordingly. Maintain proper phasing for multi-wire branch circuits. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean dirt and debris from panelboard enclosures and components according to manufacturer's instructions. B. Repair scratched or marred exterior surfaces to match original factory finish. END OF SECTION Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 2416 - Page 4 of 4 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation SECTION 26 2716 CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Hinged cover enclosures. B. Cabinets. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS — A. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015. B. NEMA 250- Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2018. C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard data for enclosures and cabinets. C. Cabinet Keys: Deliver to Owner in accordance with Section 01 6000 for maintenance materials. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ENCLOSURE MANUFACTURERS A. Cooper B-Line, a division of Cooper Industries: www.cooperindustries.com. B. Qube Corporation: www.qubeinc.com. C. Robroy Industries: www.robroy.com. D. American Midwest Power-AMP 2.02 HINGED COVER ENCLOSURES A. Construction: NEMA 250, Type 1 steel enclosure. B. Covers: Continuous hinge, held closed by flush latch operable by key. C. Provide interior plywood panel for mounting terminal blocks and electrical components; finish with white enamel. D. Enclosure Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel. E. Keys: Provide two of each different key. 2.03 CABINETS A. Boxes: Galvanized steel. B. Backboard: Provide 3/4 inch thick plywood backboard for mounting terminal blocks. Paint matte white. C. Fronts: Steel, flush type with concealed trim clamps, door with concealed hinge, and flush lock keyed to match branch circuit panelboard. Finish with gray baked enamel. D. Provide metal barriers to form separate compartments wiring of different systems and voltages. E. Keys: Provide two of each different key. —` PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1. Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 2716 - Page 1 of 2 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation B. Install enclosures and boxes plumb. Anchor securely to wall and structural supports at each corner under the provisions of Section 26 0529. C. Install cabinet fronts plumb. 3.02 CLEANING A. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and harmful materials. B. Remove dirt and debris from enclosure. C. Clean finishes and touch up damage. END OF SECTION Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 2716 - Page 2 of 2 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation SECTION 26 2726 WIRING DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wall switches. B. Wall dimmers. C. Receptacles. D. Wall plates. E. Floor box service fittings. F. Poke-through assemblies. G. Access floor boxes. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS " A. Section 26 0533.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. FS W-C-596 - Connector, Electrical, Power, General Specification for; 2017h. B. FS W-S-896 - Switches, Toggle (Toggle and Lock), Flush-mounted (General Specification); 2017g. C. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015. D. NECA 130 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Wiring Devices; 2010. E. NEMA WD 1 - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2015). F. NEMA WD 6 -Wiring Devices - Dimensional Specifications; 2016. G. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. — H. UL 20 - General-Use Snap Switches; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. I. UL 498 -Attachment Plugs and Receptacles; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. J. UL 514D - Cover Plates for Flush-Mounted Wiring Devices; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. K. UL 943 - Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. L. UL 1310 - Class 2 Power Units; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. M. UL 1472 - Solid-State Dimming Controls; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate the placement of outlet boxes with millwork, furniture, equipment, etc. installed under other sections or by others. 2. Coordinate wiring device ratings and configurations with the electrical requirements of actual equipment to be installed. 3. Coordinate the placement of outlet boxes for wall switches with actual installed door swings. 4. Coordinate the installation and preparation of uneven surfaces, such as split face block, to provide suitable surface for installation of wiring devices. 5. Coordinate the core drilling of holes for poke-through assemblies with the work covered under other sections. 6. Notify Architect of any conflicts or deviations from Contract Documents to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work. B. Sequencing: 1. Do not install wiring devices until final surface finishes and painting are complete. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 2726 - Page 1 of 6 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors; and configurations. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Wall Dimmers: Include information on operation and setting of presets. 2. GFCI Receptacles: Include information on status indicators. E. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations of wiring devices. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. C. Products: Listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. D. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Store in a clean, dry space in original manufacturer's packaging until ready for installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WIRING DEVICE APPLICATIONS A. Provide wiring devices suitable for intended use and with ratings adequate for load served. B. For single receptacles installed on an individual branch circuit, provide receptacle with ampere rating not less than that of the branch circuit. C. Provide weather resistant GFCI receptacles with specified weatherproof covers for receptacles installed outdoors or in damp or wet locations. D. Provide GFCI protection for receptacles installed within 6 feet of sinks. E. Provide GFCI protection for receptacles installed in kitchens. F. Provide GFCI protection for receptacles serving electric drinking fountains. G. Unless noted otherwise, do not use combination switch/receptacle devices. H. For flush floor service fittings, use carpet flanges for installations in carpeted floors. 2.02 WIRING DEVICE FINISHES A. Provide wiring device finishes as described below unless otherwise indicated. B. Wiring Devices, Unless Otherwise Indicated: White with White nylon wall plate. C. Wiring Devices Installed in Unfinished Spaces: White with stainless steel wall plate. D. Wiring Devices Installed in Wet or Damp Locations: White with specified weatherproof cover. E. Isolated Ground Convenience Receptacles: Orange. F. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power: Red with red nylon wall plate. 2.03 WALL SWITCHES A. Manufacturers: 1. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com/#sle. 2. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us/#sle. B. Wall Switches - General Requirements: AC only, quiet operating, general-use snap switches with silver alloy contacts, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 20 and where applicable, FS W-S-896; types as indicated on the drawings. 1. Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring and screw actuated binding clamp for back wiring with separate ground terminal screw. Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 2726 - Page 2 of 6 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation C. Standard Wall Switches: Industrial specification grade, 20 A, 120/277 V with standard toggle type switch actuator and maintained contacts; single pole single throw, double pole single throw, "— three way, or four way as indicated on the drawings. D. Pilot Light Wall Switches: Industrial specification grade, 20 A, 120/277 V with red illuminated standard toggle type switch actuator and maintained contacts; illuminated with load on; single -- pole single throw, double pole single throw, three way, or four way as indicated on the drawings. 2.04 WALL DIMMERS A. Wall Dimmers - General Requirements: Solid-state with continuous full-range even control following square law dimming curve, integral radio frequency interference filtering, power failure preset memory, air gap switch accessible without removing wall plate, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 1472; types and ratings suitable for load controlled as indicated on the drawings. 2.05 RECEPTACLES A. Manufacturers: 1. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com/#sle. 2. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us/#sle. B. Receptacles- General Requirements: Self-grounding, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 498, and where applicable, FS W-C-596; types as indicated on the drawings. 1. Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring or screw actuated binding clamp for back wiring with separate ground terminal screw. 2. NEMA configurations specified are according to NEMA WD 6. C. Convenience Receptacles: 1. Standard Convenience Receptacles: Commercial specification grade, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R; single or duplex as indicated on the drawings. 2. Tamper Resistant and Weather Resistant Convenience Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, listed and labeled as tamper resistant type and as weather resistant type complying with UL 498 Supplement SE suitable for installation in damp or wet locations; single or duplex as indicated on the drawings. D. GFCI Receptacles: 1. GFCI Receptacles - General Requirements: Self-testing, with feed-through protection and light to indicate ground fault tripped condition and loss of protection; listed as complying with UL 943, class A. a. Provide test and reset buttons of same color as device. 2. Standard GFCI Receptacles: Commercial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, rectangular decorator style. 3. Weather Resistant GFCI Receptacles: Commercial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, rectangular decorator style, listed and labeled as weather resistant type complying with UL 498 Supplement SE suitable for installation in damp or wet locations. 4. Tamper Resistant GFCI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V, — NEMA 5-20R, rectangular decorator style, listed and labeled as tamper resistant type. 5. Tamper Resistant and Weather Resistant GFCI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, rectangular decorator style, listed and labeled as tamper resistant type and as weather resistant type complying with UL 498 Supplement SE suitable for installation in damp or wet locations. E. USB Charging Devices: 1. USB Charging Devices - General Requirements: Listed as complying with UL 1310. a. Charging Capacity-Two-Port Devices: 2.1 A, minimum. b. Charging Capacity- Four-Port Devices: 4.2 A, minimum. 2. USB Charging/Tamper Resistant Receptacle Combination Devices: Two-port (Type A) USB charging device and receptacle, commercial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, listed and labeled as tamper resistant type; rectangular decorator style. Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 2726 - Page 3 of 6 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation 2.06 WALL PLATES A. Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell-wiring.com/#sle. 2. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com/#sle. 3. Lutron Electronics Company, Inc: www.lutron.com. 4. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us/#sle. B. Wall Plates: Comply with UL 514D. -- 1. Configuration: One piece cover as required for quantity and types of corresponding wiring devices. 2. Size: Standard. 3. Screws: Metal with slotted heads finished to match wall plate finish. C. Nylon Wall Plates: Smooth finish, high-impact thermoplastic. D. Stainless Steel Wall Plates: Brushed satin finish, Type 302 stainless steel. E. Weatherproof Covers for Damp Locations: Gasketed, cast aluminum, with self-closing hinged cover and corrosion-resistant screws; listed as suitable for use in wet locations with cover closed. F. Weatherproof Covers for Wet Locations: Gasketed, cast aluminum, with hinged lockable cover and corrosion-resistant screws; listed as suitable for use in wet locations while in use with attachment plugs connected and identified as extra-duty type. 2.07 FLOOR BOX SERVICE FITTINGS A. Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell.com/#sle. 2. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com/#sle. 3. Wiremold, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us/#sle. B. Description: Service fittings compatible with floor boxes provided under Section 26 0533.16 with components, adapters, and trims required for complete installation. C. Flush Floor Service Fittings: 1. Dual Service Flush Combination Outlets: a. Cover: Rectangular. b. Configuration: 1) Power: One standard convenience duplex receptacle(s)with duplex flap opening(s). 2) Communications: 2.08 POKE-THROUGH ASSEMBLIES A. Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell.com/#sle. 2. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com/#sle. 3. Wiremold, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us/#sle. B. Description: Assembly comprising floor service fitting, poke-through component, fire stops and smoke barriers, and junction box for conduit termination; fire rating listed to match fire rating of floor and suitable for floor thickness where installed. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and are properly sized to accommodate devices and conductors in accordance with NFPA 70. C. Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates. D. Verify that final surface finishes are complete, including painting. E. Verify that floor boxes are adjusted properly. F. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring devices. Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 2726 - Page 4 of 6 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation G. Verify that core drilled holes for poke-through assemblies are in proper locations. H. Verify that openings in access floor are in proper locations. I. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface. B. Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship) and, where applicable, NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards unless otherwise indicated. B. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 0533.16 as required for installation of wiring devices provided under this section. 1. Mounting Heights: Unless otherwise indicated, as follows: a. Wall Switches: 46 inches above finished floor to center of box. b. Wall Dimmers: 46 inches above finished floor to center of box. c. Fan Speed Controllers: 46 inches above finished floor to center of box. d. Receptacles: 20 inches above finished floor to center of box or 6 inches above counter. 2. Orient outlet boxes for vertical installation of wiring devices unless otherwise indicated. 3. Where multiple receptacles or wall switches are installed at the same location and at the same mounting height, gang devices together under a common wall plate. 4. Locate wall switches on strike side of door with edge of wall plate 3 inches from edge of door frame. Where locations are indicated otherwise, notify Architect to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work. 5. Locate receptacles for electric drinking fountains concealed behind drinking fountain according to manufacturer's instructions. C. Install wiring devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacent devices exceeds 300 V. E. Where required, connect wiring devices using pigtails not less than 6 inches long. Do not connect more than one conductor to wiring device terminals. F. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor clockwise 3/4 turn around screw terminal and tightening to proper torque specified by the manufacturer. Where present, do not use push-in pressure terminals that do not rely on screw-actuated binding. G. Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper. H. Unless otherwise indicated, GFCI receptacles may be connected to provide feed-through protection to downstream devices. Label such devices to indicate they are protected by upstream GFCI protection. I. Install wiring devices plumb and level with mounting yoke held rigidly in place. J. Install wall switches with OFF position down. K. Install wall dimmers to achieve full rating specified and indicated after derating for ganging as instructed by manufacturer. L. Do not share neutral conductor on branch circuits utilizing wall dimmers. M. Install vertically mounted receptacles with grounding pole on bottom and horizontally mounted ._ receptacles with grounding pole on left. N. Install wall plates to fit completely flush to wall with no gaps and rough opening completely covered without strain on wall plate. Repair or reinstall improperly installed outlet boxes or improperly sized rough openings. Do not use oversized wall plates in lieu of meeting this requirement. O. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no wiring devices installed or designated for future use. Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 2726 - Page 5 of 6 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation P. Install poke-through closure plugs in each unused core holes to maintain fire rating of floor. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements. for additional requirements. B. Inspect each wiring device for damage and defects. C. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized to verify proper operation. D. Test each receptacle to verify operation and proper polarity. E. Test each GFCI receptacle for proper tripping operation according to manufacturer's instructions. F. Correct wiring deficiencies and replace damaged or defective wiring devices. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level. 3.06 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to match original factory finish. END OF SECTION Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 2726 - Page 6 of 6 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation SECTION 26 2813 FUSES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fuses. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. B. Section 26 2816.16 - Enclosed Switches: Fusible switches. — 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses; 2012. B. NFPA 70- National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. C. UL 248-1 - Low-Voltage Fuses- Part 1: General Requirements; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. D. UL 248-12 - Low-Voltage Fuses - Part 12: Class R Fuses; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate fuse clips furnished in equipment provided under other sections for compatibility with indicated fuses. 2. Coordinate fuse requirements according to manufacturer's recommendations and nameplate data for actual equipment to be installed. 3. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard data sheets including voltage and current ratings, interrupting ratings, time-current curves, and current limitation curves. C. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Extra Fuses: One set(s) of three for each type and size installed. 3. Fuse Pullers: One set(s) compatible with each type and size installed. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. C. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Bussmann, a division of Eaton Corporation: www.cooperindustries.com/#sle. B. Littelfuse, Inc: www.littelfuse.com/#sle. 2.02 APPLICATIONS A. Individual Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK5, time-delay. 2.03 FUSES A. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 2813 - Page 1 of 2 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation B. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide fuses for all fusible equipment as required for a complete operating system. C. Provide fuses of the same type, rating, and manufacturer within the same switch. D. Comply with UL 248-1. E. Unless otherwise indicated, provide cartridge type fuses complying with NEMA FU 1, Class and ratings as indicated. F. Voltage Rating: Suitable for circuit voltage. G. Class R Fuses: Comply with UL 248-12. H. Selectivity: Where the requirement for selectivity is indicated, furnish products as required to achieve selective coordination. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that fuse ratings are consistent with circuit voltage and manufacturer's recommendations and nameplate data for equipment. B. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Do not install fuses until circuits are ready to be energized. B. Install fuses with label oriented such that manufacturer, type, and size are easily read. END OF SECTION Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 2813 - Page 2 of 2 _ Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation SECTION 26 2816.13 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Enclosed circuit breakers. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. B. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. C. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. FS W-C-375 - Circuit Breakers, Molded Case; Branch Circuit and Service; Federal Specification; Revision E, 2013. B. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015. C. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2018. D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. E. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. F. UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. G. UL 489 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and Circuit Breaker Enclosures; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for circuit breakers, enclosures, and other installed components and accessories. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage and current ratings, short circuit current ratings, conduit entry locations, conductor terminal information, and installed features and accessories, D. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations of enclosed circuit breakers. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. C. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic. B. Handle carefully in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to avoid damage to enclosed circuit breaker internal components, enclosure, and finish. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Eaton Corporation: www.eaton.com/#sle. B. Schneider Electric; Square D Products: www.schneider-electric.us/#sle. C. Siemens Industry, Inc: www.usa.siemens.com. Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 2816.13 - Page 1 of 4 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation D. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2.02 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Description: Units consisting of molded case circuit breakers individually mounted in enclosures. B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. C. Unless otherwise indicated, provide products suitable for continuous operation under the following service conditions: 1. Altitude: Less than 6,600 feet. 2. Ambient Temperature: Between 23 degrees F and 104 degrees F. D. Short Circuit Current Rating: E. Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed. F. Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus in each enclosed circuit breaker, with a suitable lug for terminating each equipment grounding conductor. G. Enclosures: Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E. 1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the following installation locations: H. Provide externally operable handle with means for locking in the OFF position. 2.03 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Description: Quick-make, quick-break, over center toggle, trip-free, trip-indicating circuit breakers listed and labeled as complying with UL 489, and complying with FS W-C-375 where applicable; ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on the drawings. B. Interrupting Capacity: 1. Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity as required to provide the short circuit current rating indicated, but not less than: 2. Fully Rated Systems: Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity not less than the short circuit current rating indicated. C. Conductor Terminations: 1. Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper conductors.D. Multi-Pole Circuit Breakers: Furnish with common trip for all poles. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. B. Verify that the ratings of the enclosed circuit breakers are consistent with the indicated requirements. C. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive enclosed circuit breakers. D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship). C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NFPA 70. D. Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 0529. E. Install enclosed circuit breakers plumb. F. Except where indicated to be mounted adjacent to the equipment they supply, mount enclosed -- circuit breakers such that the highest position of the operating handle does not exceed 79 inches above the floor or working platform. G. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526. Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 2816.13 - Page 2 of 4 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommended torque settings. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean dirt and debris from circuit breaker enclosures and components according to manufacturer's instructions. B. Repair scratched or marred exterior surfaces to match original factory finish. END OF SECTION Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 2816.13 - Page 3 of 4 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation SECTION 26 2816.16 ENCLOSED SWITCHES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Enclosed safety switches. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. B. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. C. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. D. Section 26 2813 - Fuses. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NECA 1 -Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015. B. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2018, C. NEMA KS 1 - Heavy Duty Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches (600 Volts Maximum); 2013. D. NFPA 70- National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. E. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. F. UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. G. UL 98 - Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate the work with other trades. Avoid placement of ductwork, piping, equipment, or other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and within working clearances for electrical equipment required by NFPA 70. 2. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance requirements of the actual equipment to be installed. 3. Verify with manufacturer that conductor terminations are suitable for use with the conductors to be installed. 4. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for enclosed switches and other installed components and accessories. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage and current ratings, short circuit current ratings, conduit entry locations, conductor terminal information, and installed features and accessories. D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of enclosed switches. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70. B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements. C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 2816.16 - Page 1 of 4 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation Product Organiza on Qualifications: An n recognized y SHA s a D. Recognized eogni ed Testing Laboratory (NRTL)gandZacl�eptable to auuthboroes having ng Nationally Re g jurisdiction. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic. B. Handle carefully in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to avoid damage to enclosed switch internal components, enclosure, and finish. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Eaton Corporation: www.eaton.com/#sle. B. Schneider Electric; Square D Products: www.schneider-electric.us/#sle.C. Siemens Industry, Inc: www.usa.siemens.com. D. Source Limitations: Furnish enclosed switches and associated components produced by the same manufacturer as the other electrical distribution equipment used for this project and obtained from a single supplier. 2.02 ENCLOSED SAFETY SWITCHES A. Description: Quick-make, quick-break enclosed safety switches listed and labeled as complying — with UL 98; heavy duty; ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on the drawings. B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. C. Unless otherwise indicated, provide products suitable for continuous operation under the following service conditions: 1. Altitude: Less than 6,600 feet. 2. Ambient Temperature: Between -22 degrees F and 104 degrees F. D. Horsepower Rating: Suitable for connected load. E. Voltage Rating: Suitable for circuit voltage. F. Short Circuit Current Rating: 1. Provide enclosed safety switches, when protected by the fuses or supply side overcurrent protective devices to be installed, with listed short circuit current rating not less than the available fault current at the installed location as indicated on the drawings. G. Provide with switch blade contact position that is visible when the cover is open. H. Fuse Clips for Fusible Switches: As required to accept fuses indicated. 1. Where NEMA Class R fuses are installed, provide rejection feature to prevent installation of fuses other than Class R. I. Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed. J. Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus in each enclosed safety switch, with a suitable lug -- for terminating each equipment grounding conductor. K. Enclosures: Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E. 1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the following installation locations: a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Type 1. b. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R. 2. Finish for Painted Steel Enclosures: Manufacturer's standard, factory applied grey unless otherwise indicated. L. Provide safety interlock to prevent opening the cover with the switch in the ON position with capability of overriding interlock for testing purposes. M. Heavy Duty Switches: 1. Comply with NEMA KS 1. 2. Conductor Terminations: a. Lug Material: Copper, suitable for terminating copper conductors only. Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 2816.16 - Page 2 of 4 _ Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation 3. Provide -- externally operable FART 3EXECUTIONaccepting three padlocks. handle means for EXECUTIO with 3.01 EXAMINATION locking in the OFF position, capable _ MINA TION A. Verifyof that field measure B. Verify that the r merits are as Indic C. Verifyratings of the enclosed indicated. D. that mounting surfaces switches Verify that co are read are consistent 3.02 conditions Y to receive with the indicated requirements.satisfactory INSTALLATION safety A. Install products in prior to starting B. accordance g Work. Performwith manufacturer' work in accordance with NEC s instructions. _ C. Arrange equipment instruction and P provide A 1 (general work A �� minimum clearancesworkmanship). D. Provide re in required accordance with E. Install e support and attachmentmanufacturer's enclosed switches in accordance F. Except where in plumb. with Section 26 switches indicated to 0529. abovesuch that the highest mounted adjacent the floor 9hest position lacent to the equipment the G. Provide or working platform, °f the operating Y suppl ° 9 handle Y, mount H. grounding and does not enclosed Provide fuses complying bonding in accord exceed 79 inches 3 03 equipment manufacturer's an Curer with Section 26 accordance with Section 26 0526. ADJUSTING ufacturer's recommendations. for rnmendations. fusible switches A. as indicated or Adjust tightness of mechanicalas required b torque settings. and by 3.04 CLEANINGelectrical connections to manufacturer's recommended A. Clean dirt and s. debris from switch B. enclosures and components Repair scratched or marred exterior according to manufacturers instruction surfaces to match original factory finish. END OF SECTION Project No. 19-23188 Section 26'816.16 - Page 3 of 4 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Nall Ceiling Renovation SECTION 26 5100 — INTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Interior luminaires. B. Emergency lighting units. C. Exit signs. D. Ballasts and drivers. E. Fluorescent emergency power supply units. F. Lamps. G. Accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 0529 - Han Sectiontio26 0529 - -Hangers and Supports for Electrical S C. Boxes for Electrical S Systems. Section 26 0923 - LightingSystems. consors, outdoor motion sensors Control Devices: e switches,tomatic controls for lighting including se controls. 1.03 REFERENCEoutdoor photo controls, and day►igtoccupancy STANDARDS A. ANSI C82.11 - American National Standard for Lamp Lamp Ballasts - Supplements; 2011. LM-63 B. IES Ballasts - High Frequency Fluorescent - IESNA Standard File Format for Electronic Transfer(Reaffirmed2008). of Photometric Data and n 2002 Standard for Good Workmanshipin _ D. NECA/IESNA 500- Electrical Construction; 2015. E. Standard for Installing NECA/IESNA 502 - Standard for Installing Induostrial Ligor hting Lighting Systems; 2006. F. NEMA LE 4 - Recessed Luminaires 2 Systems;G. NFPA 70- , Ceiling Compatibility; 2006. National Electrical Code; 2012. Jurisdiction,National Most Recent Edition Ado H. Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. NFPA 101 - Life Safetyby Authority Having Including Code, Most Recent Edition Ado pplements. All Applicable Amendments and pied b I. UL 924 - Supplements. by Authority Having Jurisdiction, J. Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment;1598 Current Edition, Including 1.04 , Current Edition, Including ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS All Revisions. All Revisions. A. Coordination: ...... 1. Coordinate the installation of luminaires sections or with mounting required for by others. Coordinate the work with placement of supports, surfaces installed under other c. _ mountingmounting. Coordinate co surfaces at installed locationspatibility of luminaires and asoc ated trims with 2. Coordinate the placement of luminaires with structural members equipment, diffusers, fire suppression s installedquipmunder other sections sup bysystem components, ductwork, 3. Coordinate and other piping others. potential conflicts obstructions theo vplaceimtytof installedx under with i hrf furniture, equipment, 4. obstrNotify Architect i r by others. signa any conflicts or deviations from Contrabt Documents 90 o or other potential — prior to Architect h work. t 1.05 SUBMITTALS obtain direction A. See Section 01 3000 Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. Project No. 19-23188 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Section 26 5100- Page 1 of 6 Hall Ceiling Renovation components for each fixture that is not a standard B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and — product of the manufacturer. a es and data sheets including finishes, mounting s, ratings, installed accessories, and luminaire construction, dimensions, ro osed C. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog all p detailed information onphotometric performance, — requirements, listings, serviced ocoeditions, p �t � include model number nomenclature clearly marked with Laboratory ceiling compatibdi y, a National Voluntary features. independent testing agency in IES LM-63 standard Provide ationronic files (NVLAP) labaio n peified by 1� Program or Accreditation format upon request. application conditions and limitatrotectionSe Include instructions for storage, handling, p D. Manufacturer's product te Installation Instructions:. Include — stipulated by testing 9 examination, preparation, and installation of product. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE in manufacturing the products specified in .... A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70. specializing an sp experience. years documented exp sized by OSHA as a B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Comp organization recognized thiso dectiLn with minimum three to authoritiesS havinga Organizationei Q Qualifications: Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable C. Product Listing Testing Nationally Recognized — jurisdiction. — 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION cording to NECA/IESNA 500 (commercial lighting A. ac A. Receive, handle, and store productsand manufacturer's written instructions. until ready for industrial lighting), and protect from damage NECA/IESNAep 502 ( -- g. Keep products in original manufacturer's packaging installation. and after 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS service conditions during A. Maintain field conditions within manufacturer's required installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS Alternate light n inner for approval prior to bid. No exceptions. 2.01 A. Furs sh TYPES products as indicated in luminai he Engineer included on the drawings. A. Furnish — fixture data sheet shall be submitted to 2.02 LUMINAIRES I with requirements of NFPA 70. where applicable. products that comply I in with UL 1598, A. Provide intended. B. Provide products that are, listed and labeled as suitableu for the purpose e) and all sockets, products listed, class. required to position, energizeoc and C. Provide provide complete lumina�onentslngla p D. Unless otherwise indicated, p housingsses, and other comp ballasts, reflectors,and distribute the light. conduit, boxes, wiring crating protects the lamp provide all requiredfor a completep op E. Unless tors,hardware,i indicated ro be excluded, connect ors, supports, trims, accessories, etc. as necessary system. o withstand normal handling, installation, and service withoutany F. Provide products suitable t discoloring, etc. damage, distortion, corrosion, fading, G. Recessed Luminaires:tability: Comply with NEMA LE 4. 1. Ceiling Comp with d Ceilings: Listed and labeled as IC rated, suitable or — 2. Luminairesc contact Recessed with h ins in s Pe man suitable sloped ceiling adapters. direct Luminaires Recessed h insulation Sloped Ceiling Pr vide s materials. 3. inuired. Project No. 19-23188 Section 26 5100 9 — Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation _H. Fluorescent Luminaires... 1 Provide ballast disconnecting means complying with NFPA 70 where req Page 2 of 6 2. Fluorescent Luminaires Controlled by Occupancy ballasts. by Dual-Level Fluorescent Luminaires Controlled Sensors: Provide programmed start 2.03 EXIT SIGNS Switchin —� A. Description: Internally illuminated exit signs withg Provide with two ballasts. with L 92 101 and all a g LEDs unless otherwise indicated; com I with UA applicable state and local codes and listed and labeled as complyinigg — 1. Number of Faces: g 2. Single or double as indicated or as re Directional Arrows: As indicated or as re B. Self-Powered required for the installed location. Exit Signs: required for the installed location. _ 1. Operation: percent voltageninterruption of normal power source or brownout drop from nominal, solid-state control automatically switches connected lamps to integral batterycondition exceeding 20 illumination, power for minimum of 90 minutes of rated emergency "` 2. Diagnostics: and automatically recharges gnost Provide battery upon restoration of normal power manuallypower statuse indicator light and accessible integral test switch 3. activater emergency operation. source. Provide low-voltage disconnect to prevent battery 2.04 BALLASTS to AND DRIVERS ry damage from deep A. Manufacturers: discharge. 1. General Electric Company/GE 2. OSRAM Sylvania, ompany/GE Lighting: www.gelighting.com/#sle.OSRAM Limitations: 9elius/d /.com/#sle. Inc;� �'ww.osram.us/ds/#sle. produced3 byWhere possible, for each 4. Wherea a single manufacturer. type of luminaire provide ballasts specific manufacturer or model is indicated elsewhere in the luminaire on the drawings, substitutions are not B. Ballasts/Drivers - General Re permitted unless explicitly schedule 1. Provide ballasts containinguirements: indicated. 2. rovideEfficiency/Efficacy:n no polychlorinated biphenyls Minimumate ballast cyefficiency/efficacyEfi : rvide ballasts complyingg CBs) C. Dimmable LED standards. with all current applicable pplicable federal —' 1. Dimming Range: Continuous dimming from 100 output unless dimming capability to lower level is indicated, 2. Control Compatibility: percent to five percent relative light a. Fully compatible with the dimmingwithout flicker. Daylighting Controls: See Section 26 0923 b. Network Lighting controls to be installed. 2.05 LAMPS Controls: See Section_ A. Manufacturers: 1. GE Lighting: www.gelighting.com. 2. Philips Lighting Co of NA:3. Sylvania: www.sylvania.co lightin 4. g.Philips.com. Manufacturer Limitations: Where possible, provide lamps manufacturer. B. Lamps - General Re produced by a single 1. Unless explicitly illicitly excluded, provide new, y compatibility of specified , compatible specified, lampsoperable lamps in each luminaire. 2provide lamps with luminaires to be installed. 3. Minimum per luminaire manufacturer's recommendations. lam Efficiency:a Provide lamps complying rnmendations. lamps are not — lamp efficiencym stay Pro plyn with all current a 4. Color g applicable federal and state Temperature Consistency. Unless otherwise indicated, for each type products which are consistent in perceived color tam products by the consistent nt in inconsistent inR lampso C. Lamp T pared color e lamp furnish Types: As specified for each fixture. perceived temperature. that are Project No. 19-23188 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling RenSection 26 5100- Page 3 of 6 Renovation — 2.06 ACCESSORIES es: Steel tubing, minimum 112" size, factory finished to match A. Stems for Suspended Luminaires: ainted field-Painted as directed. 114" size, field p — luminaire or field p Zinc-plated steel, minimum B. Threaded Rods for Suspended Luminaires: Zinc-p — as directed. plaster ceilings C. Provide accessory plaster frames for luminaires recessed in PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION proper mounting heights and are A. Verify that field outlet boxese re installed n are as 'proper locations anndN t pN PA 70 g. propy thated tboxes are properly sized to accommodate conductors s a ecinostalled where required. d for connection to support frames installation is completed, tested, and rea C. Verify that suitable D. Verify that branch circuit wiring work. luminaires. for installation prior to starting E. Verify that conditions are satisfactory 3.02 PREPARATION rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface. B.A. Clean dirt,ex debris,ebion laster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes. Clean p for 3.03 INSTALLATION providedt boxes under Section 26 0533.16 as required A. Coordinate locations of ou�lovided under this section. installation of luminaires p workmanship). B. th NECA 1 C. Install lPerform work in accordanceco nce'with manufacturer's instructions as specified in NECA 500 Install products in accordance NECA 502 (industrial lighting) 26 0529. — . Install luminaires securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, (commercial lighting) andlines and with adjacent luminaires. support and attachment in accordance withSection E. Provide required with building lamb and square and aligned F. Install luminaires p Mounted Luminaires: d 1..G. S Do n not Ceiling use se ceiling tiles to bear weight of luminaires. Do 2. Do not use ceiling support system to bear weight of luminaires unless ceiling suppor _ system is certified as suitable to do so.support channels using listed safety clips at four 3. Secure lay-in luminaires to ceiling ceiling is specified for additional — corners. 4. See appropriate Division 9 section where suspended grid requirements. H. Recessed Luminaires to mounting surface with no visible light leakage 1. Install trims tight Suspended Luminaires: mounting heights are to bottom lengths and laccesslories as I Susp Unless otherwise indicated, specified 1� the suspension method indicated, with support4 feet nominal 2. Install using height. to or exceeding required for minimumufied mounting 9 3. Provide of two supports for each luminaire equal length,with no more than 4 feet betweensupp heights are to center 4. Install canopies tight to mounting specified mounting 9 J. Wall-Mounted Luminaires: Unless otherwise indicated, sp of luminaire. — conductor. K. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire. L. Bond products and metalaccessories to branch circuit equipment grounding e 4 of 6 '— M. Exit Signs: Section 26 5100 Page Project No. 19-23188 Renovation _ Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling 1. Unless otherwise indicated normal lighting in same , connect unit to unswitched — controls. l g room or area. Bypass local switches, cr ontactors,actors orircuit feeding N. Install lamps in each luminaire. other lighting 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements; for additional re and defects. quirements. B. Inspect each product for damage Operate each luminaire after installation and C. Test self-powered exit signs, connection to verify proper operation. D. y proper operation uponlightingal units, and fluorescent emergency E. Correct wiring deficiencies and re loss of normal power supply. replace excessivelypp►y. power supply noisypair or replace damaged or defective 3.05 ADJUSTING ballasts as determined b y Architect. products. Repair or A. Aim and � position adjustable luminaires to achieve desired illumination directed by Architect. Secure locking B. Aim and position adjustable e fittings in place. as indicated or as egress path as requiredemergency lighting unit lamps achieve optimumC. Directionalauthority illumination of — designate egress having jurisdiction. 3.06 CLEANING path as directed by Architect or authority havingSet as gjur or as required to properly A. Clean surfaces according Jurisdiction. and manufacturer's tooN oA 500 (commercialc lig hting), NECA other502 (industrial lighting), CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES factory finish. g material and — A. DemonstrationDemonstrate defiencra or: e properp operation of luminaires to adjustments as directed. B. Just prior to Substantial Completion, Architect, and correct 3.08 PROTECTION replace all lamps that have failed. A. Protect installed luminaires from subsequent construction operations. 3.09 SCHEDULE-SEE DRAWINGS END OF SECTION Project No. 19-23188 Five Sullivan Section 26 5100 - Brothers Exhibition Hall CeilingPage 5 of 6 Renovation — SECTION 27 1000 PART 1 GENERAL STRUCTURED CABLING 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Communications system design requirements. B. Communications pathways. C. Copper cable and terminations. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping. ` B. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. C. Section 26 0533.13 - Conduit for Electrical Systems. D. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products. E. Section 26 2726 - Wiring Devices. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NECA/BICSI 568 Standard for Installing Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling; 2006. National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Su C. TIA-568 p by Authority Having (SET) - Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling D. TIA-607- Generic Telecommunications Bonding Premises; 2019d. g Standard Set; 2019. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE RE and Grounding (Earthing) for Customer A. Coordination: REQUIREMENTS ` 1. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of within the spaces dedicated for communications equipment. 2. Coordinate arrangement of communications equipment other utilities or obstructions Coordinaterequirements ofarrangement the actual equipment mefwith 3 q pment the dimensions and clearance Notify Architect of anyq pment to be installed. direction before proceeding with ok. deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain 1.05 SUBMITTALS g with work. A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog product. g pages and data sheets for each C. Test Plan: Complete and detailed plan, with list of test equipment, procedures for inspection and testing, and intended test date; submit at least 60 days priorto in 1.06 tended test date. D. Field Test Reports. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document -- requirements. B. Products: Listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for that prescribes execution C. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: Nationally Recognized the purpose intended.by O An organization recognized by OSHA as a jurisdiction. . Testing Laboratory(NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PATHWAYS A. Conduit: As specified in Section 26 0533.13; provide pull cords in all conduit. B. Firestop Sleeves: Listed; provide as required to preserve fire elements. resistance rating of building — Project No. 19-23188 — Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Section 27 1000 - Page 1 of 2 Renovation 2.02 COPPER CABLE AND TERMINATIONS with TIA 568.2 and listed — A. Copper Horizontal Cable. balanced twisted pair cable complying 1. Description: 100 ohm, 444. ° 6 UTP (unshielded twisted pair), 23 and labeled - complyingice awith 2. Cable Type -Voice and Data TIA-568.2 Category — AWG. 4-pair.3, Cable Capacity: p Type plenum cable. 4. Cable Applications: Type CMP plenum _ a. Plenum Applications: Use listed NFPA 70 C CMP riser cablem or b. Riser Applications: Use listed NFPA 70 Typegeneral purpose cable. Applications: Use listed NFPA 70 Type CM/CMG c. General Purpose riser cable, or Type CMP plenum cable. appropriate _ cable, Type connection (IDC)type using B. Copper Cable Terminations: Insulation displacementnections only where cifically indicated. tool; use screw BONDING COMPONENTS 2.03 GROUNDING AND A. Comply with TIA-607. — B. Comply with Section 26 0526. 2.04 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A. Comply with TIA-606. — B. Comply with Section 26 0553. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION -GENERAL and A. Grounding and Bonding: Perform in accordance with of lA-6and of er elements, using B. Install Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating partitions materials and methods specified in Section 07 8400. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ee Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional r n q irement standards. _ A. S inspection and testing requirements of sp stalla B. Comply with C. Visual Inspection: 1. Inspect cable jackets for certification markings. — 2. Inspect cable terminations forcolor codedr labels a els of proper type. 3. Inspect outlet plates and patch Copper Cabling and Associated Equipment: length, attenuation, NEXT, and D. Testing — 1. Category 5e and Above Links: Perform tests for wire map, propagation delay. installation of telecommunications outlets, E. and Testing: After all work is complete, including tick for dial tone. and telephone dial tone service isEND OF SECTION ive, test each voice Section 27 1000 - Page 2 of 2 i- Project No. 19 23188 Five Sullivan Brothers Exhibition Hall Ceiling Renovation